PART 3 SECTION 5 ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF ADDENDUM(S)

INVITATION FOR BIDS 

IFB #11-C-018 

LOBBY ALTERATIONS 

AT 

STEPHEN CRANE ELDERLY NJ 2-16 

AND 

KRETCHMER ELDERLY NJ 2-17 

PART 1 OF 4 

SCOPE OF SERVICES 

Executive Director 

KEITH D. KINARD 

Chairperson 

MODIA BUTLER 

BOARD OF COMMISSIONERS 

GLORIA CARTWRIGHT 

ANGELLA PALMER 

NANCY PEREZ 

LENIN CRUZ 

RASHARD CASEY 

CONTRACTS DIVISION BID OPENING: 

FRIDAY, MAY 13, 2011 

AT 10 A.M.

IFB #11-C-018 

Section Description Page 

Advertisement 3 

IFB Information at a Glance 4 

1.0 Introduction/Background 5 

2.0 General Information 5 

2.1 NHA Reservation of Rights 5 

2.2 Bidder’s Responsibilities – Contact with NHA 5 

2.3 Non-Curable Items 6 

2.4 Proof of Business Registration 6 

2.5 Causes for Rejecting Bids 6 

2.6 Method of Contract Award 7 

2.7 Protest 7 

3.0 Intent and Scope of Work 8 

3.1 Intent of Invitation for Bids 8 

3.2 Scope of Work 8 

3.3 Summary of Work 9 

3.4 Contract Requirements 11 

3.5 Warranties & Guarantees 13 

3.6 Payment 13 

3.7 Time for Completion 13 

4.0 Submission Format 14 

4.1 Bid 14 

4.2 Non-Curable Documents 14 

4.3 Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications 15 

4.4 References 15 

4.5 Financial Statement 15 

4.6 Other Required Bid Documents 15 

5.0 General Instructions 16 

5.1 Questions 16 

5.2 Interpretation and Addenda 17 

5.3 Discrepancies in Bid 17 

5.4 Bid Pricing, Minimum Contract Awards 17 

5.5 Brand Names, Standards of Quality and Performance 17 

6.0 Evaluation to Determine Responsibility of Bidder 18 

6.1 Equal Bids 18 

7.0 Additional Information 18 

7.1 Insurance Requirement 18 

7.2 Job-Site Responsibilities 19 

7.3 Liquidated Damages 21 

7.4 EEO, Affirmative Action Statement 22 

7.5 Mandatory Affirmative Action Certification 22 

7.6 Section 3 Clause 23 

7.7 Americans with Disabilities 24 

7.8 Truth in Contracting 24 

7.9 Termination of Contract 24 

7.10 Pay-to-Play 25 

7.11 Prompt Payment Act 25 

Newark Housing Authority, Bid Opening FRIDAY MAY 13, 2011 at 10 a.m. 2

IFB #11-C-018 

NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORITY 

INVITATIONS FOR BID 

LOBBY ALTERATIONS AT 

STEPHEN CRANE ELDERLY AND KRETCHMER ELDERLY 

IFB #11-C-018 

The Newark Housing Authority is accepting sealed bids for interior building renovations of the existing lobby, 

management office for one building at Stephen Crane Elderly (2-16) and two buildings at Kretchmer Elderly (2-17). 

The contract term shall be for one year. 

The Authority will receive sealed bids at 500 Broad Street, 5th Floor, Contracts Division, Newark, New Jersey 07102. 

All bid packages shall clearly indicate the specific applicable bid number and title, and submitted in triplicate. The 

opening of all bids will be held in the Contracts Division Conference Room located on the 5 th floor at 10:00 

a.m. on Friday, May 13, 2011 at which time and place all bids will be publicly opened and read aloud. Bids shall be 

submitted to: Newark Housing Authority, ATTN: CONTRACTS DIVISION 500 Broad Street, 5 th Floor, Newark, New 

Jersey 07102. 

A pre-bid conference will be held on Tuesday, April 26, 2011 in the Executive Conference Room located on 

the lower level at 10:00 a.m. 

All bids must be accompanied by a negotiable Bid Guarantee payable to the HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY 

OF NEWARK. The bid guarantee may be a certified check, bank draft or a satisfactory Bid Bond secured by a Surety 

Company acceptable to the U.S. Government and authorized to do business in the State of New Jersey. The 

guarantee shall be in an amount of 5% of the total bid. Consent of Surety must accompany the Bid Guarantee. 

Failure to submit a 5% Bid Guarantee and a Consent of Surety for the full amount of the bid shall result in the 

rejection of the bid. 

The successful bidder will be required to furnish and pay for a satisfactory Performance and Payment Bond(s) in the 

amount of 100% of the contract as awarded. The surety company for all bonds must be a guaranty or surety 

company acceptable to the U.S. Department of Treasury. Individual sureties will not be considered. The surety 

company must be licensed to do business in the State of New Jersey. U.S. Treasury Circular 570, published 

annually in the Federal Register lists companies approved to act as surety on bonds securing government contracts, 

the maximum underwriting limits on each contract bonded, and the state in which each company is licensed to do 

business. 

Bid forms and contract documents, including specifications are on file at the office of the Housing Authority of the City 

of Newark, Contracts Division, 500 Broad Street, Newark, New Jersey 07102. For further information, please contact 

A. KEVIN MEDLIN – (NJ2-17 Kretchmer Elderly) at 973-273-6526 or ANTOINETTE TILLERY – (NJ2-16 Stephen 

Crane Elderly) at 973-273-6528. 

Bidders must submit a copy of their NJ Business Registration Certificate in accordance with P.L. 2004,c.57. Bidders 

are required to comply with the requirements of NJSA 10:5-31 et seq. and NJAC 17:27 (PL 1975 c 127 Affirmative 

Action). All bidders must also comply with 24 CFR 85.36. 

The Housing Authority of the City of Newark reserves the right to reject any or all bids or to waive any informality in 

the bidding. The Authority also reserves the right to award all or a portion of the award to one or more responsible 

responsive bidders. No bid shall be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days subsequent to the opening of the bids 

without the consent of the Housing Authority of the City of Newark. 


IFB #11-C-018 



EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR 

IFB INFORMATION AT A GLANCE 

NHA CONTACT PERSON A. KEVIN MEDLIN 

Telephone: 973-273-6526 

Email: kmedlin@newarkha.org 

ANTOINETTE TILLERY 

Telephone: 973-273-6528 

Email: atillery@newarkha.org 

PRE-BID CONFERENCE TUESDAY, APRIL 26, 2011 

At 10 A.M. 

Executive Conference Room Lower Level 

500 Broad Street, Newark, NJ 07102 

HOW TO FULLY RESPOND TO THIS 

IFB BY SUBMITTING A BID 

QUESTIONS RELATED TO BID 

SPECIFICATIONS OPPORTUNITIES 

DUE, IN WRITING, TO NHA 

RELEASE OF ANY REQUIRED 

ADDENDUM 

1. As instructed within Section 5.0 of the IFB 

document, submit bid in triplicate; 

2. As instructed within Section 2.3, any 

submissions not including the Non-Curable 

Items will be rejected. 

Friday, April 29, 2011 

10:00 A.M. 

Newark Housing Authority 

Attn: Contracts Division referencing the specific 

applicable site name and number. 

500 Broad Street, 5 th Floor 

Newark, NJ 07102 

Wednesday, May 4, 2011 

Answers to written questions distributed by 

NHA. 

BID OPENING FRIDAY, MAY 13, 2011 

10 A.M. 


Contracts Division 

500 Broad Street, 5 th Floor 

Newark, NJ 07102 

The bid must be received in-hand and timestamped 

by the NHA by no later than 10 A.M. on 

this date. 


IFB #11-C-018 

SECTION 1.0 INTRODUCTION / BACKGROUND 

The Housing Authority of the City of Newark is a governmental entity established under State 

Law in 1938, and formed under the United States Housing Act of 1937. Charged with providing 

affordable, decent, safe and sanitary housing for low-income persons, the NHA is the largest 

provider of affordable housing in the State of New Jersey. 

SECTION 2.0 GENERAL INFORMATION 

2.1 NHA’S RESERVATION OF RIGHTS 

• The NHA reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any informality in the IFB 

process, or to terminate the IFB process at any time, if deemed by the NHA to be in its 

best interests. 

• The NHA reserves the right to award a single delivery order contract or to award multiple 

delivery order contracts for the same or similar supplies or services to two or more 

sources under this solicitation. 

• The NHA reserves the right not to award a contract pursuant to this IFB. 

• The NHA reserves the right to terminate a contract awarded pursuant to this IFB, at any 

time for its convenience upon 10 days written notice to the successful Bidder(s). 

• The NHA reserves the right to determine the days, hours and locations that the 

successful Bidder(s) shall provide the services called for in this IFB. 

• The NHA reserves the right to retain all bids submitted and not permit withdrawal for a 

period of 60 days subsequent to the deadline for receiving bids without the written 

consent of the NHA Director of Procurement & Contracts. 

• The NHA reserves the right to reject and not consider any bid that does not meet the 

requirements of this IFB, including but not necessarily limited to incomplete bids and/or 

bids offering alternate or non-requested services. 

• The NHA shall have no obligation to compensate any Bidder for any costs incurred in 

responding to this IFB. 

• The NHA shall reserve the right to at any time during the IFB or contract process to 

prohibit any further participation by a Bidder or reject any bid submitted that does not 

conform to any of the requirements detailed herein. 

2.2 BIDDER’S RESPONSIBILITIES – CONTACT WITH THE NHA 

It is the responsibility of the Bidder to address all communication and correspondence pertaining 

to this IFB process to the designated Contract Coordinator, A. Kevin Medlin (Kretchmer 

Elderly) or Antoinette Tillery (Stephen Crane Elderly) or the Director of Procurement & 

Contracts, Shari Hamilton. Bidders must not make inquiry or communicate with any other NHA 


IFB #11-C-018 

staff member or official (including members of the Board of Commissioners) pertaining to this 

IFB. Failure to abide by this requirement may be cause for the NHA to not consider a bid 

received from any Bidder who has not abided by this directive. 

2.3 NON-CURABLE ITEMS 

The following requirements shall be considered mandatory items to be submitted at the time 

specified by the contracting unit for receipt of the bid; the failure to submit any one of the 

mandatory items shall be deemed a fatal defect that shall render the bid submission 

unresponsive and that cannot be cured by the governing body. 

1. A guarantee to accompany the bid pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-21; 

2. A certification from a surety company pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-22; 

3. A statement of corporate ownership pursuant to NJSA 52:25-24.2 

4. A listing of sub-contractors along with sub-contractor certification as required by 

NJSA 40A:11-16 

5. A document for the Bidder to acknowledge receipt of any notice or revisions or 

addenda to the advertisement or bid documents, or if applicable, the Bidder 

acknowledges same pursuant to NJSA 40A:11-23.2e 

2.4 PROOF OF BUSINESS REGISTRATION 

N.J.S.A. 52:32-44 requires that each Bidder submit proof of business registration. Proof 

of registration may be a copy of the Bidder’s Business Registration Certificate (BRC). A BRC is 

obtained from the New Jersey Division of Revenue. Information on obtaining a BRC is available 

on the internet at www.nj.gov/njbgs or by phone at (609) 292-1730. Be advised, all soleproprietors 

may not submit their application online and must leave time to process the 

application by postal service. A sample of the acceptable forms of proof of NJ Business 

Registration is contained in Part III of this IFB. 

N.J.S.A. 52:32-44 imposes the following requirements on Bidders and all subcontractors 

that knowingly provide goods or perform services for a Bidder fulfilling this contract: 

The Bidder shall provide written notice to its sub-contractors and suppliers to submit proof of 

business registration to the Bidder. If the bid includes the use of named sub-contractors, the 

Business Registration Certificates for those sub-contractors must be submitted. If the selected 

Bidder uses sub-contractors not part of the submission, prior to receipt of final payment from a 

contracting agency, the awardee must submit to the Newark Housing Authority an accurate list 

of all sub-contractors or attest that none was used. During the term of this contract, the Bidder 

and its affiliates shall collect and remit, and shall notify all sub-contractors and their affiliates that 

they must collect and remit to the Director, New Jersey Division of Taxation, the use tax due 

pursuant to the Sales and Use Tax Act, (N.J.S.A. 54:32B-1 et seq.) on all sales of tangible 

personal property delivered into this State. 

A Bidder, sub-contractors or supplier who provides false business registration 

information or post award, fails to provide proof of business registration for added subcontractors 

shall be liable to a penalty of $25 for each day of violation, not to exceed $50,000 for 

each business registration not properly provided or maintained under a contract with a 

contracting agency. Information on the law and its requirements is available by calling (609) 

292-1730. 

2.5 CAUSES FOR REJECTING BIDS 


IFB #11-C-018 

Bids may be rejected for any of the following reasons: 

1. Any non-curable defects pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A: 11-23.2 

2. All bids pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A: 11-13.2; 

3. If more than one bid is received from an individual, firm or partnership, 

corporation or association under the same name; 

4. Multiple bids from an agent representing competing Bidders; 

5. The bid is inappropriately unbalanced; 

6. The Bidder is determined to possess, pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A: 11-4b, Prior 

Negative Experience; or 

7. If the successful Bidder fails to enter into a contract within 21 days, Sundays and 

holidays excepted, or unless otherwise agreed upon by the parties to the contract 

to extend that time. In this case of failure, the NHA may accept the bid of the 

next lowest responsible Bidder. (N.J.S.A. 40A: 11-24b) 

A rejected bid shall be DEEMED a NO BID, and shall be returned to the Bidder. 

2.6 METHOD OF CONTRACT AWARD 

1. The length of the contract shall be stated in the public notice and specifications. 

Pursuant to requirements of N.J.A.C. 5:30-5.1 et seq., any contract resulting from 

this IFB shall be subject to the availability and appropriation of sufficient funds 

annually. 

2. The form of contract shall be submitted by the NHA to the successful Bidder. Terms 

of the specifications/bid package prevail. Bidder exceptions must be formally 

accepted by the NHA. 

2.7 PROTESTS 

Any actual or prospective bidder may challenge a bid specification or protest the award of a 

contract. In the case of a challenge to the bid specification, such challenge must be in writing 

and submitted to the Contracting Officer or the designee no less than three business days 

prior to the opening of bids. The Contracting Officer or designees shall review the matter of 

the challenge and issue a written decision on the matter. Challenges filed after that time period 

shall be considered void and thereupon having no effect on the NHA from awarding a contract. 

In the case of protest to the award of a contract, the protest must be in writing and received by 

the Contracting Officer or the designee within five business days after the notice of the 

contract award, or the protest will not be considered. 

The Bidder shall provide the following: 

1. Name, address and telephone number, email is optional of the person filing the bid 

protest. 

2. Indicate/specify the IFB number and the description of the solicitation. 


IFB #11-C-018 

3. Provide a detailed statement specifying the nature of the complaint. 

4. Specify the form of relief being sought. 

The Contracting Officer or designee shall conduct a review of the protest matter and shall issue 

a written decision on the matter. The Contracting Officer may, after concurrence of the General 

Counsel and with approval by the Executive Director suspend the procurement pending 

resolution of the protest, if it is warranted by the facts and findings discovered by the 

Contracting Officer or designee in the review of the protest matter. 

SECTION 3.0 INTENT AND SCOPE OF WORK 

3.1 INTENT OF THE INVITATION FOR BIDS 

The NHA intends to engage contractors to assist in conducting the Scope of Services 

described in this Invitation for Bid (IFB). The alterations are intended to modify and improve the 

existing floor space to accommodate open lobby and other office spaces. The modifications of 

these floors are here-in-after known as: LOBBY ALTERATIONS AT STEPHEN CRANE 

ELDERLY (NJ2-16) and KRETCHMER ELDERLY (NJ2-17). 

3.2 SCOPE OF WORK 

The work covered by these specifications shall include but not be limited to furnishing all labor, 

equipment and materials necessary for the completion of all work covered in this bid package, in 

strict accordance with the specifications and drawings, all applicable Federal, State and Local 

building codes, as well as HUD’s procurement Policies and minimum property standards. The 

Bidders shall thoroughly examine and be familiar with the requirements of this Bid Document, 

detailed specifications and construction Drawings. 

Each bidder is required to visit the site of the proposed work to become fully acquainted with the 

conditions as they exist so that they may understand any difficulties and restrictions that may 

accompany the execution of the work under this contract. By submitting this Bid, the bidder 

stipulates that they have reviewed all documents of the bid and the physical, regulatory, 

environmental, and social conditions of the site and the Scope of Work to be performed, and 

that the Bid Price and the completion times are based on the Bidder's knowledge of and 

unconditional acceptance of the conditions. 

The bidder must contact the Contract Coordinator to arrange any site visit(s) prior to the bid 

submission. 

Prior to staging and construction, the contactor shall submit a detailed work schedule and 

sequence of procedures to NHA for approval. The work schedule shall include the phasing of 

the project, site access, storage of materials and equipment and an analysis of progress 

through completion. 

The overall work shall commence and be completed at the time stipulated in this IFB and/or the 

Notice To Proceed to the contractor and shall be completed according to the approved work 

schedule. The stipulated contract time includes submission and approval of shop drawings, 

submittals and necessary City of Newark permits. 

The successful contractor and/or subcontractors shall be experienced with renovations of 

buildings, with demonstrated capacity to perform a full spectrum of interior and exterior building 


IFB #11-C-018 

renovation work including: general construction, painting, carpentry, mechanical and electrical 

trade work. 

U. S. Dept of Labor Prevailing Labor Wage Rate (Davis-Bacon Decision) for Essex County, New 

Jersey shall apply for all work performed under this contract. The Contractor is solely 

responsible to verify and apply the appropriate current rates for each category of trade Labor. 

The current rates can be obtained from contacting the Department of Labor either by mail, in 

person or on the web (http://www.gpo.gov/davisbacon/nj.html). 

The Contractor is required to submit corresponding certified payroll and daily field activity 

reports covering each period of payment requisition to the NHA in order to process any 

corresponding monthly application(s) for payment. All periodic payments are subject to 10% 

retainage (withholding) until acceptance of the project by the Authority and all required contract 

closeout documents are filed with the Authority. 

SUMMARY OF WORK 

Without contradicting the requirements of the foregoing, the following items of work are included 

in the work of this IFB. The notes are for guidance only and general in nature. The contractor 

shall be responsible for all elements of work and perform all work in a safe and conscientious 

manner. 

A. GENERAL 

• Owner: Newark Housing Authority (NHA), 500 Broad Street, Newark, NJ, 07102 

• The Project consists of interior building renovations and alterations at NJ 2-16 

STEPHEN CRANE ELDERLY and NJ2-17, KRETCHMER ELDERLY, 

• The Work consists of interior and exterior building renovations of existing 

buildings. The proposed work area includes sections that are both currently 

vacant and occupied. 

• The Work includes but is not limited to demolition & removals of partitions & 

finishes, repairs to existing work, gypsum board partitions, doors, frames, door 

hardware, door vision panels, glass and metal framed vision panels, acoustic 

ceiling tile, ceiling tile suspension systems, carpet tile, resilient flooring, wood 

flooring, vinyl base, paint, millwork, acoustic wall covering, sound insulation, firestopping, 

window blinds, roller shades, access control system, fire alarm system 

modifications, lighting & electrical, telephone and data communications 

pathways, and modifications to the existing HVAC distribution system. 

B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, supervision, services, insurance, and 

equipment necessary for the supply, delivery, repair, and replacement, installation and 

connection of all equipment associated with the work of this project. The Contractor is 

responsible for providing and maintaining uninterrupted services, noise and dust controls 

during the contract period. 

C. The Contractor shall perform all demolition and complete removal of materials and 

equipment, repair and replacement of all related appurtenances, in strict accordance 

with the Specifications and or as directed by the NHA or its representatives. The 

Contractor shall be responsible for all general construction work as required. The 

Contractor shall restore all damaged adjacent surfaces and finishes affected by the new 

work to its original condition. 


IFB #11-C-018 

D. The Contractor shall furnish and install new equipment and systems as outlined in the 

specifications for this project. 

E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain all required permits and to 

coordinate all required inspections. 

F. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a Certificate of Continued Occupancy for 

the completed work. 

G. This project is exempt from New Jersey sales taxes. 

H. If any hazardous materials encountered at the site the contractor should cease all work 

immediately and notify NHA. NHA reserve the right to arrange for third party to 

encapsulate, abate or remove and dispose of any hazardous materials in accordance 

with State, Federal, and local regulations. 

I. The contractor shall inspect the project site to determine any existing conditions that 

would become hazardous to the contractor's work force and building occupants during 

the construction phase. The contractor shall take all necessary steps to protect the 

building occupants and his workforce during the performance of this contract. 

J. The Contractor shall inspect all existing building assemblies, components, and systems 

related to the work, but indicated to remain. Existing assemblies, components, and 

systems uncovered during the work that are found to be defective shall be repaired or 

replaced at NHA’s option per a mutually agreed contract change, or by a third party to be 

assigned by NHA and with whom the Contractor shall coordinate, if needed. 

K. Use of the Site: Limit use of premises to areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of the 

site beyond the areas indicated. 

L. Allow for continuous Owner-occupancy and use by the public. 

M. Keep entrances and corridors clear. Do not use unauthorized areas for parking or 

material storage. Schedule deliveries to minimize on-site storage of materials and 

equipment. 

N. Use of the Existing Building: Limit access to building as directed by the Owner. Repair 

damage caused by construction. Protect the building and its occupants during 

construction, minimizing the impact of construction activities on residents wherever 

possible. 

O. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during 

construction. Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner 

usage. Do not interfere with the Owner's operations. 

P. The contractor is responsible for maintaining cleanliness throughout any construction 

work area. 


IFB #11-C-018 

Q. Work required to be performed under this Contract that is deemed by the Owner to be 

an interruption of the normal business operations of the occupants in the building shall 

be performed after normal business hours (8:00 am to 5:00 pm Monday through Friday) 

and/or on weekends. Work of this nature includes but is not limited to the following: 

1. Interruption of building services and systems: Plumbing, Electrical, HVAC, 

Communications, Security, Fire/Life Safety. 

2. Generation of excessive noise and vibration (generally not required to shift after 

regular business hours unless affiliated with another planned interruption.) 

3. Interruption of elevator service. 

4. Interruption of access to common areas within the building. 

5. Blocking and/or closure of any means of egress. 

R. The Contractor is responsible for protecting both existing and new work from damage. 

The Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of his operations. 

S. The contractor’s has the option to bid the entire scope of work, which are BID 

“A” (Stephen Crane Elderly) & Bid “B” (Kretchmer Elderly) or either “BID”A” 

or “BID B”. The AUTHORITY reserves the right to combine both bids or consider 

them independently and award the contract/s to the lowest responsive 

responsible Bidder/s. 

3.3 CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 

3.3.1 Performance Bond: Bidder shall simultaneously with the delivery of the executed 

contract, submit an executed bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the 

acceptable bid as security for the faithful performance of this contract. 

Failure to submit this with the executed contract shall be cause for declaring the contract null 

and void pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-22. A sample of this bond is included in Part 2 of this IFB 

#11-C-018 

3.3.2 Labor and Material (Payment) Bond: Bidder shall with the delivery of the performance 

bond submit an executed payment bond to guarantee payment to laborers and suppliers for the 

labor and material used in the work performed under the contract. 

Failure to submit a labor and material bond with the performance bond shall be cause for 

declaring the contract null and void. 

3.3.3 Maintenance Bond: Upon acceptance of the Task Order work by the NHA, the 

contractor shall submit a maintenance bond (N.J.S.A. 40A:11-16.3) in an amount not to exceed 

15% of the project costs guaranteeing against defective quality of work or materials for the 

period of 2 years 

The performance bond provided shall not be released until final acceptance of the whole work 

and then only if any liens or claims have been satisfied. The surety on such bond or bonds 

shall be a duly authorized surety company authorized to do business in the State of New Jersey 

pursuant to N.J.S.A. 17:31-5. 


IFB #11-C-018 

3.3.4 N.J. Worker and Community Right to Know Act: The manufacturer or supplier of 

chemical substances or mixtures shall label them in accordance with the N.J. Worker and 

Community Right to Know Law (N.J.S.A. 34:51 et seq., and N.J.A.C 5:89-5 et seq.,). 

Containers that the law and rules require to be labeled shall show the Chemical Abstracts 

Service number of all the components and the chemical name. Further, all applicable Material 

Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) - hazardous substance fact sheet - must be furnished. 

3.3.5 Prevailing Wage Act: Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 34:11-56.25 et seq., contractors on projects 

for public work shall adhere to all requirements of the New Jersey Prevailing Wage Act. The 

contractor shall be required to submit a certified payroll record to the owner within ten (10) days 

of the payment of the wages. The contractor is also responsible for obtaining and submitting all 

subcontractors' certified payroll records within the aforementioned time period. The contractor 

shall submit said certified payrolls in the form set forth in N.J.A.C. 12:60-6.1(c). It is the 

contractor's responsibility to obtain any additional copies of the certified payroll form to be 

submitted by contacting the New Jersey Department of Labor and Workforce Development, 

Division of Workplace Standards. 

Additional information is available at www.state.nj.us/labor/lsse/lspubcon.html. 

3.3.6 The Public Works Contractor Registration Act: N.J.S.A. 34:11-56.48 et seq. requires 

that a general or prime contractor and any listed subcontractors named in the contractor’s bid 

proposal shall possess a certificate at the time the bid proposal is submitted. After bid 

proposals are received and prior to award of contract, the successful contractor shall submit a 

copy of the contractor’s certification along with those of all listed subcontractors. All non-listed 

subcontractors and lower tier sub-subcontractors shall be registered prior to starting work on the 

project. It is the general contractor’s responsibility that all non-listed sub-contractors at any tier 

have their certificate prior to starting work on the job. 

Under the law a “contractor” is “a person, partnership, association, joint stock company, trust, 

corporation or other legal business entity or successor thereof who enters into a contract” which 

is subject to the provisions of the New Jersey Prevailing Wage Act [N.J.S.A. 34:11-56.25, et 

seq.] It applies to contractors based in New Jersey or in another state. 

The law defines “public works projects” as contracts for "public work" as defined in the 

Prevailing Wage statute [N.J.S.A. 34:11-56.26(5)]. The term means: 

• “Construction, reconstruction, demolition, alteration, or repair work, or 

maintenance work, including painting and decorating, done under contract 

and paid for in whole or in part out of the funds of a public body, except work 

performed under a rehabilitation program. 

• "Public work" shall also mean construction, reconstruction, demolition, 

alteration, or repair work, done on any property or premises, whether or not 

the work is paid for from public funds…” 

• “Maintenance work" means the repair of existing facilities when the size, type 

or extent of such facilities is not thereby changed or increased. While 

“maintenance” includes painting and decorating and is covered under the law, 

it does not include work such as routine landscape maintenance or janitorial 

services. 


IFB #11-C-018 

To register, a contractor must provide the State Department of Labor with a full and 

accurately completed application form. N.J.S.A. 34:11-56.55 specifically prohibits 

accepting applications for registration as a substitute for a certificate of registration. The 

form is available online at www.state.nj.us/labor/lsse/lspubcon.html. 

3.3.7 Warranties and Guarantees: 

The contractor warranties and or guarantees that all materials and equipment incorporated into 

the Work will meet all technical and performance specifications for a minimum period of one 

year from date of this project acceptance by the Authority. The warrantees and or guarantees 

will cover all aspects of the work in place, which includes labor, material and equipment. In 

addition to the one year warranties and or guarantees the contractor shall furnish original 

operating manuals and extended Manufacturer’s warranties/Guarantees for all 

equipment/material furnished and installed. 

3.4 PAYMENT: 

• No payment will be made unless duly authorized by the NHA’s authorized representative 

and accompanied by proper documentation. 

• Payment will be made in accordance with the Owner’s policy and procedures. 

3.5 TIME FOR COMPLETION 

The term of the agreement shall be for a period of one year, subject to availability of annually 

appropriated funding for the contract. Work at Stephen Crane Elderly shall be completed within a 

period of one hundred twenty (120) working days from the Notice to Proceed. Work at 

Kretchmer Elderly shall be completed within a period of ninety (90) working days from the 

Notice to Proceed If directed by NHA, any Task order in effect at the time the Contract expires or 

is terminated shall continue until that work is completed. 

Upon completing of task the Contractor shall: 

1. In addition to all required closeout documents, submit an affidavit of release of liens and 

an affidavit of payment of all debts and claims associated with this project. 

2. Inform in writing to the Engineer and the Authority of substantial completion of this 

project. 

3. Apply for Certificate of Completion from the City of Newark. This project is not deemed 

to be complete until the Certificate of Completion is issued by the proper sub-code 

officials (Building, Fire, Electrical & Plumbing, as applicable.) 


SECTION 4.0 SUBMISSION FORMAT 

IFB #11-C-018 

4.1 BID 

All prices and amounts must be written in ink or preferably machine-printed. Bids containing 

any conditions, omissions, unexplained erasures or alterations, items not called for in the bid 

proposal form, attachment of additive information not required by the specifications, or 

irregularities of any kind, may be rejected by the owner. Any changes, whiteouts, strikeouts, 

etc. in the bid must be initialed in ink by the person signing the bid. 

Each bid proposal form must give the full business address, business phone, fax, e-mail 

if available, the contact person of the bidder, and be signed by an authorized representative as 

follows: 

• Bids by partnerships must furnish the full name of all partners and must be signed in the 

partnership name by one of the members of the partnership or by an authorized 

representative, followed by the signature and designation of the person signing. 

• Bids by corporations must be signed in the legal name of the corporation, followed by the 

name of the State in which incorporated and must contain the signature and designation of 

the president, secretary or other person authorized to bind the corporation in the matter. 

• Bids by sole-proprietorship shall be signed by the proprietor. 

• When requested, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the officer signing shall be 

furnished. 

4.2 NON-CURABLE DOCUMENTS: 

4.2.1 Bid Guarantee: Bidder shall submit with the bid a certified check, cashier's check or bid 

bond in the amount of 5% percent of the total price bid price unconditionally to the owner as 

allowed by HUD Handbook 7460.8 REV2 6.11(D)(1). When submitting a Bid Bond, it shall 

contain Power of Attorney for full amount of Bid Bond from a surety company authorized to do 

business in the State of New Jersey and acceptable to the owner. The check or bond of the 

unsuccessful bidder(s) shall be returned pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-24(a). The check or bond 

of the bidder to whom the contract is awarded shall be retained until a contract is executed and 

the required performance bond or other security is submitted. The check or bond of the 

successful bidder shall be forfeited if the bidder fails to enter into a contract pursuant to N.J.S.A. 

40A:11-21. 

4.2.2 Consent of Surety: Bidder shall submit with the bid a Certificate (Consent of Surety) with 

Power of Attorney for full amount of bid price from a Surety Company authorized to do 

business in the State of New Jersey and acceptable to the owner stating that it will provide said 

bidder with a Performance Bond in the full amount of the bid. This certificate shall be obtained 

in order to confirm that the bidder to whom the contract is awarded will furnish Performance and 

Payment Bonds from an acceptable surety company on behalf of said bidder, any or all 

subcontractors or by each respective subcontractor or by any combination thereof which results 

in performance security equal to the total amount of the contract, pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11- 

22. 

4.2.3 Stockholders Disclosure Certification: N.J.S.A. 52:25-24.2 provides that no corporation or 

partnership shall be awarded any contract for the performance of any work or the furnishing of 

any goods and services, unless, prior to the receipt of the bid or accompanying the bid of said 

corporation or partnership, the bidders shall submit a statement setting forth the names and 

addresses of all stockholders in the corporation or partnership who own ten percent or more of 


IFB #11-C-018 

its stock of any class, or of all individual partners in the partnership who own a ten percent or 

greater interest therein. 

4.2.4 Listing of Sub-contractors and Sub-Contractor Certification form: A signed listing of all 

sub-contractors to be used and completion of certification form. (NJSA 40A:11-16) 

4.2.5 Acknowledgement of Receipt of Addenda/Clarifications: A document provided by the 

contracting agent in the bid plans, specifications or bid proposal documents for the bidder to 

acknowledge the bidder’s receipt of any notice, revisions, addenda or clarifications to the 

advertisement or bid documents. (NJSA 40A:11-23.2e) 

4.3 STATEMENT OF BIDDER’S QUALIFICATIONS: 

Bidder shall complete form provided in Part 3 of this IFB 11-C-018. 

4.4 REFERENCES 

Bidder shall complete reference form provided in Part 3 of the IFB 11-C-018 and provide current 

references from at least three (3) organizations or clients that can address your specific capabilities 

as they relate to the requirements of the IFB. Include the following for references: 

1. List of municipal or government organization currently represents and for what type(s) of 

service (provide contact names and telephone numbers); and 

2. Contact names and telephone numbers of clients in the State of New Jersey with whom 

organization has had a working relationship 

4.5 FINANCIAL STATEMENT 

Bidder shall demonstrate its financial stability by the submission of audited financial statements or 

annual reports from the previous two (2) years, or the two (2) most recently available, or such other 

information as is reasonably acceptable to the NHA. 

4.6 OTHER REQUIRED BID DOCUMENTS: 

Each Bidder is required to submit, in addition to those listed in items 4.1-4.5, the documents 

included in the Submission Documents package. These include: 

• Checklist 

• Affirmative Action Compliance Notice 

• Affidavit of Non-Collusion 

• Affidavit of Non-Default 

• Drug Free Work Place Certification 


IFB #11-C-018 

• Debarment Statement – submit notarized statement, on the firm’s letterhead, that the 

Bidder or partner are not debarred, suspended or otherwise prohibited from professional 

practice by any Federal, State or Local agency. 

• Liens, suits or judgments – submit notarized statement on the firm’s letterhead, 

indicating a description of any disputes, suites, judgments and liens during the past two 

years. 

• HUD Form 5369-A: Representations, Certifications and other Statements of Bidders 

• HUD Form 2530: Previous Participation Certification 

• HUD Section 3 

• Business Registration Certificate: N.J.S.A. 52:32-44 requires that each Bidder submit 

proof of business registration. Proof of registration shall be a copy of the Bidder’s 

Business Registration Certificate (BRC). Where the bid includes the use of named subcontractors, 

the Business Registration Certificates for those sub-contractors must be 

submitted. 

SECTION 5.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

Bid Submission deadline is by FRIDAY, MAY 13, 20-11 10 a.m. It is the Bidder's responsibility 

that bids are presented to the NHA at the time and at the place designated. Sealed bids may be 

hand delivered or mailed; however, the NHA disclaims any responsibility for bids forwarded by 

regular or overnight mail. If the bid is sent by express mail service, the designation above must 

also appear on the outside of the express mail envelope. Bids received after the designated 

time and date will be returned unopened. 

Bidders are asked to submit a bid in triplicate addressed to NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORITY - 

CONTRACTS DIVISION; bearing the name and address of the Bidder written on the face of the 

package, and clearly marked "BID" with the IFB title and #11-C-018 

5.1 QUESTIONS 

All questions and requests for information must be addressed in writing to Director of 

Procurement & Contracts, Shari Hamilton. The deadline for receipt of questions pertaining to 

this IFB shall be by 10:00 a.m. on FRIDAY, APRIL 29, 2011. All communications pertaining to 

this IFB shall be addressed to Contracts Division, 500 Broad Street, 5th Floor, Newark, N.J. 

07102 or by facsimile 973-273-6549. 

The Director of Procurement & Contracts will respond to all such inquiries in writing by 

addendum to all prospective bidders (i.e. firms or individuals that have obtained the IFB 

Documents). During the IFB solicitation process, the NHA will NOT conduct any ex parte (a 

substantive conversation—“substantive” meaning, when decisions pertaining to the IFB are 

made—between the NHA and a prospective Bidder when other prospective Bidders are not 

present) conversations that may give one prospective Bidder an advantage over other 

prospective Bidders. 


5.2 INTERPRETATION AND ADDENDA: 

IFB #11-C-018 

The Bidder should rely only on representations, statements or explanations, contained in this 

IFB, any documents that the Authority has provided the Bidder, which are referred to in this IFB, 

and in such formal written addenda as are issued by the Authority prior to the Bid opening. 

5.3 DESCREPANCIES IN BIDS 

If the amount shown in words and its equivalent in figures do not agree, the written words shall 

be binding. Ditto marks are not considered writing or printing and shall not be used. 

In the event that there is a discrepancy between the individual rates and the extended totals, the 

rate prices shall prevail. In the event there is an error of the summation of the extended totals, 

the computation by the owner of the extended totals shall govern. 

5.4 BID PRICING, MINIMUM CONTRACT AWARD 

5.4.1 The owner is exempt from any local, state or federal sales, use or excise tax. 

5.4.2 The owner has attempted to identify the need and estimated amounts of work to cover 

its requirements; however, past experience shows that the amount of work tasked may 

be different than that submitted for bidding. The right is reserved to decrease or 

increase the work as specified in the specifications pursuant to N.J.A.C. 5:30-11.2 and 

11.10. NO MINIMUM PURCHASE OR WORK IS IMPLIED OR GUARANTEED. 

5.4.3 Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any applicable permits or licenses from any 

government entity that has jurisdiction to require the same. All bids submitted shall have 

included this cost. 

5.4.4 Bidders shall insert prices for furnishing goods and services required by these 

specifications. Prices shall be net, including any charges for packing, crating, containers, 

etc. All transportation charges shall be fully prepaid by the contractor, F.O.B. destination 

and placement at locations specified by the owner. As specified, placement may require 

inside deliveries. No additional charges will be allowed for any transportation costs 

resulting from partial shipments made for the contractor's convenience. 

5.5 BRAND NAMES, STANDARDS OF QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE 

5.5.1 Brand names and/or descriptions used in these specifications are to acquaint bidders 

with the types of goods and services desired and will be used as a standard by which 

goods and services offered as equivalent will be evaluated. 

5.5.2 Variations between the goods and services described and the goods and services 

offered are to be fully identified and described by the bidder on a separate sheet and 

submitted with the bid proposal form. Vendor literature WILL NOT suffice in explaining 

exceptions to these specifications. In the absence of any exceptions by the bidder, it will 

be presumed and required that the goods and services as described in the bid 

specification be provided or performed. 

5.5.3 It is the responsibility of the bidder to document and/or demonstrate the equivalency of 

the goods and services offered. The owner reserves the right to evaluate the 

equivalency of the goods and services. 


IFB #11-C-018 

5.5.4 In submitting its bid, the bidder certifies that the goods and services to be furnished will 

not infringe upon any valid patent or trademark and that the successful bidder shall, at its 

own expense, defend any and all actions or suits charging such infringement, and will 

save the owner harmless from any damages resulting from such infringement. 

5.5.5 Wherever available, manufactured and farm products of the United States should be 

used pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-18. 

5.5.6 The contractor shall guarantee any or all goods and services supplied under these 

specifications. Defective or inferior goods shall be replaced at the expense of the 

contractor. The contractor will be responsible for return freight or restocking charges. 

SECTION 6.0 EVALUATION TO DETERMINE RESPONSIBILITY OF BIDDER 

Following the opening of bids, the apparent low bidder may be required to participate in a 

conference and provide additional information as required by the NHA. The objective is to 

answer questions, clarify issues, and provide additional information as necessary to determined 

bidder’s responsibility. However, please note that the NHA reserves the right to make its 

decision based solely on the submitted bids without any requests for additional information. 

6.1 EQUAL BIDS 

In the rare case when two or more low bids are equal in all respects, the award should be 

decided by drawing lots or other random means of selection, in accordance with HUD 7460.8 

Rev 2(6)(12)(C). 

SECTION 7.0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 

7.1 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 

Before commencing of services under this project, the Bidder shall furnish to the Authority 

certificates of insurance showing that the following insurance is in force, stating policy numbers, 

dates of expiration, limits of liability, deductibles, and aggregate amounts payable hereunder. 

Certificates of insurance must contain a 30-day cancellation clause and a brief description of the 

work to be performed. The Authority shall be named additionally insured in the Comprehensive 

General Liability Insurance policy. 

a. Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance according to the laws of the 

state in which the Development Team’s services are to be performed. 

b. Professional Liability Insurance covering claims made at any time prior, during, or 

subsequent to completion of the Bidder’s services with a limit of not less than 

$1,000,000 with a deductible not more than $10,000. 

c. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance (bodily injury and property damage 

coverage) covering claims made at any time prior, during, or subsequent to completion 

of the Bidder’s services with a limit of not less than $2,000,000 with a deductible not 

more than $10,000. 


IFB #11-C-018 

d. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance covering non-owned and hired vehicles, 

as well as for owned vehicles for bodily injury and property damage with a combined 

single limit of no less than $1,000,000.00 (each accident) per occurrence. 

e. Where an amendment to the policies is required as a result of a contract with the 

Authority, the amendment shall be made prior to the signing of said contract. 

The Bidder shall require each of the sub-contractors to furnish them with certificates of 

insurance evidencing current policies in force stating policy numbers, dates of expiration, limits 

of liability, deductibles, and aggregate amounts payable there under. This shall be submitted for 

review and approval prior to commencement of the sub-contractors’s activities. Certificates of 

insurance are to be forwarded to the Authority upon receipt. 

7.2 JOB-SITE RESPONSIBILITIES 

7.2.1 Contractor’s Supervision: The contractor shall give his personal supervision to the work 

or have a competent supervisor, satisfactory to the Authority on the site at all times with full 

authority to act on behalf of the contractor. This employee shall have authority for the 

contractors’ operations and shall be available should N.H.A. officials have questions or 

directives. The contractor shall provide staff adequate to coordinate and expedite the work 

properly and maintain competent supervision of the work to assure compliance of the contract at 

all times. 

7.2.2 Identification: The contractor shall provide an identification badge to each employee. 

Identification badges shall state the name of the contractor, name of the employee and the 

employees I.D. number. The contractor must notify the buildings engineers and security desk of 

their presence on the job site at the beginning of each day. All personnel are required to wear 

an identification badge during their presence on the job site. 

7.2.3 Drugs and Alcohol: The contractor shall be responsible for the conduct of employees 

during the workday. The presence of drugs or alcohol will not be tolerated on the job site by the 

Authority. 

7.2.4 Construction Access: Access to the site shall be through public streets and rights-ofway 

only. The contractor shall obtain whatever additional access deemed necessary at no 

additional cost to the Authority. The contractor is alerted to the fact that work within areas of the 

site may be restrictive for large construction equipment. Access to these areas of the site will 

be the responsibility of the contractor. The contractor should select the proper site equipment 

for the work. 

Access shall be maintained at all times for emergency and service vehicles (garbage, postal, 

etc.). Local traffic shall be provided access upon completion of the normal workday. 

7.2.5 Tenant and Personnel Services: It is the contractor’s responsibility to maintain 

uninterrupted services of storm and sanitary sewers, telephone, heat, hot and cold water, gas, 

electrical power, cable service, etc. associated with this project. If necessary, the contractor will 

provide alternate measures to maintain these services at his expense. 

7.2.6 Site Security: The contractor shall at his own cost covering the entire contract period, for 

the protection and security of its work, personnel, materials, equipment, tenants and the public. 


IFB #11-C-018 

All equipment used during the contract period shall comply with all applicable safety regulations, 

laws, ordinances and codes, as OSHA, etc., the most stringent shall apply. All work shall be 

secured after each work day. 

HUD 5370, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, clause 27, payments 

paragraphs (g) and (h) state: 

(g) The Contracting Officer may authorize material delivered on the site and preparatory work 

done to be taken into consideration when computing progress payments. Material delivered to 

the Contractor at locations other than the site may also be taken into consideration if the 

Contractor furnishes satisfactory evidence that (1) it has acquired such material; (2) the material 

is properly stored in a bonded warehouse, storage yard, or similar suitable place as may be 

approved by the Contracting Officer; (3) the material is insured to cover its full value; and (4) the 

material will be used to perform this contract. Before any progress payment, which includes 

delivered material is made; the Contractor shall furnish such documentation as the Contracting 

Officer may require to assure the protection of the Authority’s interest in such materials. The 

Contractor shall remain responsible for such stored material not with standing the transfer of the 

title to the Authority. 

(h) All material and work covered by progress payments made shall, at the time of payment 

become the sole property of the Authority, but this shall not be construed as (1) relieving the 

Contractor from the sole responsibility for all material and work upon which payments have 

been made or the restoration of any damaged work; or (2) waiving the right of the Authority to 

require the fulfillment of all of the terms of the contract. In the event the work of the Contractor 

has been damaged by other contractors or persons other than employees of the Authority in the 

course of their employment, the Contractor shall restore such damaged work without cost to the 

Authority and seek to redress for its damage only from those who directly caused it. 

In view of the Contractor’s responsibilities to insure and secure material and work in progress as 

stated above, and the fact that Newark Housing Authority developments are located in areas of 

the city that are subject to high crime, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to 

properly protect all material and work prior to final acceptance by the N.H.A. 

Therefore, the Authority shall require the Contractor to have in place, prior to commencing work 

at the site, Installation Floater Insurance to cover losses due to vandalism and theft. 

In addition, it is the Contractor’s sole responsibility to employ all necessary security measures at 

the site to protect material stored, work in progress, and completed work from theft and 

vandalism. THE AUTHORITY WILL NOT, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, BE 

RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE OR THEFT THAT MAY OCCUR AT THE SITE. Sufficient 

security measures must be planned for by the Contractor. 

The costs for Installation Floater Insurance and additional security will be included by the 

Contractor as line items on the Bid Document and will be added to the Contractor's Total bid 

Price. 

7.2.7 Clean-up: The contractor shall be responsible and ensure that all building surfaces and 

areas shall be left clean and free of excess materials, drippings, splatters or otherwise. Such 

removal shall not mar or effect original surfaces. Building grounds shall be left clean and free of 

construction debris. 


IFB #11-C-018 

7.2.8 Work Week: The Authority’s regular workweek is from Monday to Friday. The hours of 

work are from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. The contractor shall conform to this schedule unless 

written permission is granted by the Authority t deviate from this schedule. 

The contractor shall not be permitted to work on weekends, evenings and holidays unless the 

following conditions are met: 

A. Prior approval is granted by the Authority. It is at the sole discretion of the Authority 

whether to allow work to be conducted. 

B. No work is to be covered up. Prior to concealing or otherwise making it impossible to 

view work performed, the contractor shall arrange and pay at no cost to the Authority for 

an inspector/supervisor to be present at the site. Work not so inspected and approved 

shall be cause for the Authority to require the work to be exposed and examined ant the 

sole cost of the contractor. Unacceptable and/or non-complying work shall be removed, 

repaired, restored or replaced as required by the Authority at the contractor’s expense. 

Temporary protection of work which must remain exposed shall be in accordance with 

the specification. In no case shall work be left unprotected which may be a threat to the 

health and safety of the public. Lighting and all other necessary facilities for the proper 

carrying out and inspection of the work shall be provided by the contractor. 

C. Reimbursement of the Authority inspection, engineering and security costs shall be 

borne by the contractor. 

7.3 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 

It is understood that the damages that the Authority may sustain due to delay in completion of 

the project may be difficult to quantify. Therefore, in addition to the other remedies permitted by 

the Contract or provided by law, the Authority shall be entitled to liquidated damages in the 

following amount for delay in completion of the project from the completion dates stated in the 

Contract. This is to be construed as not being a penalty but in lieu of actual damages. The 

NHA shall represent the cost for technical and procedural costs of the project for each day of 

delay including weekends and holidays in completion of any stage of the project. The 

Authority will charge $500.00 per day for delay. 

In addition to liquidated damages, be advised that in the event of late performance of this 

contract, the Authority reserves the right to consider any unjustified delay beyond the contract 

completion date as a bearing on your responsibility to perform future contracts for the Authority. 

The contractor shall not be penalized or charged with liquidated damages because of any 

delays in the completion of the contract due to unforeseeable causes beyond the control and 

without the fault of the Government, fires, floods disputes and unusually severe weather 

conditions. Documentation of any/all delays must be provided by the contractor. 

The contractor shall be responsible for costs of construction inspection/administration services 

necessary due to a delay in completion of the project within the contractual time frame or for 

inspection/administration costs should the contractor work beyond the normal work day, as 

allowed by Section 40A:11-17 of the New Jersey Public Bidding Laws. 


IFB #11-C-018 

7.4 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY, AFFIRMATIVE ACTION STATEMENT 

The goal of the Affirmative Action Program is thirty percent (30%) of the dollar value of the total 

contract awards and purchases during the fiscal year. The Bidder's commitment to Affirmative 

Action and Minority Business Enterprises shall be demonstrated by submittal of evidence 

indicating: 

1. An active Affirmative Action Program, hiring practices, minorities in upper 

management positions and/or minority ownership. 

2. The utilization of minority owned businesses as subcontractors or Joint Venture 

partners. 

7.5 MANDATORY AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CERTIFICATION 

7.5.1 Goods and Services Contracts: no firm may be issued a contract unless it complies with 

the affirmative action provisions of N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq. and N.J.A.C. 17:27-1 et seq. 

Each contractor shall submit to the public agency, after notification of award but prior to 

execution of a goods and services contract, one of the following three documents: 

i. A photocopy of a valid letter that the contractor is operating under an existing 

Federally approved or sanctioned affirmative action program (good for one year from the 

date of the letter); or 

ii. A photocopy of a Certificate of Employee Information Report approval, issued in 

accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-4; or 

iii. A photocopy of an Employee Information Report (Form AA 302) provided by the 

Division and distributed to the public agency to be completed by the contractor in 

accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-4. 

The Bidder’s submission will be rejected as non-responsive if either one of the required 

documents is not submitted in the specified time frame. 

7.5.2 Maintenance/Construction Contracts: after notification of award, but prior to signing the 

contract, the contractor shall submit to the public agency compliance officer and the Division of 

Contract Compliance and Equal Employment Opportunity in Public Contracts (Division) an initial 

project workforce report (Form AA201) provided to the public agency by the Division for 

distribution to and completion by the contractor, in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-7. 

The contractor shall also submit a copy of the Monthly Project Workforce Report once a month 

thereafter for the duration of the contract to the Division and to the public agency compliance 

officer. The contractor shall also cooperate with the public agency in the payment of budgeted 

funds, as is necessary, for on-the-job and/or off-the-job programs for outreach and training of 

minorities and women. 


7.6 SECTION 3 CLAUSE: 

IFB #11-C-018 

All Section 3 covered contracts shall include the following clause (referred to as the Section 3 

clause): 

A. The work to be performed under this contract is subject to the requirements of 

Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 

U.S.C. 1701u (Section 3). The purpose of Section 3 is to ensure that employment 

and other economic opportunities generated by HUD assistance or HUD-assisted 

projects covered by Section 3, shall, to the greatest extent feasible, be directed 

to low- and very low-income persons, particularly persons who are recipients of 

HUD assistance for housing. 

B. The parties to this contract agree to comply with HUD’s regulations in 24 CFR 

Part 135, which implement Section 3. As evidenced by their execution of this 

contract, the parties to this contract certify that they are under no contractual or 

other impediment that would prevent them from complying with the part 135 

regulations. 

C. The contractor agrees to send to each labor organization or representative of 

workers with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other 

understanding, if any, a notice advising the labor organization or workers’ 

representative of the contractor’s commitments under this Section 3 clause, and 

will post copies of the notice in conspicuous places at the work site where both 

employees and applicants for training and employment positions can see the 

notice. The notice shall describe the Section 3 preference, shall set forth 

minimum number and job titles subject to hire, availability of apprenticeship and 

training positions, the qualifications for each; and the name and location of the 

person(s) taking applications for each of the positions; and the anticipated date 

the work shall begin. 

D. The contractor agrees to include this Section 3 clause in every subcontract 

subject to compliance with regulations in 24 CFR part 135, and agrees to take 

appropriate action, as provided in an applicable provision of the subcontract or in 

this Section 3 clause, upon a finding that the subcontractor is in violation of the 

regulations in 24 CFR part 135. The contractor will not subcontract with any 

subcontractor where the contractor has notice or knowledge that the 

subcontractor has been found in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR Part 135. 

E. The contractor will certify that any vacant employment positions, including 

training positions, that are filled (1) after the contractor is selected but before the 

contract is executed, and (2) with persons other than those to whom the 

regulations of 24 CFR part 135 require employment opportunities to be directed, 

were not filled to circumvent the contractor’s obligations under 24 CFR part 135. 

F. Noncompliance with HUD’s regulations in 24 CFR Part 135 may result in 

sanctions, termination of this contract for default, and debarment or suspension 

from future HUD assisted contracts. 

G. With respect to work performed in connection with Section 3 covered Indian 

housing assistance, Section 7(b) of the Indian Self-Determination and Education 


IFB #11-C-018 

Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 450e) also applies to the work to be performed under 

this contract. Section 7(b) requires that to the greatest extent feasible (i) 

preference and opportunities for training and employment shall be given to 

Indians, and (ii) preference in the award of contracts and subcontracts shall be 

given to Indian organizations and Indian-owned Economic Enterprises. Parties to 

this contract that are subject to the provisions of Section 3 and Section 7(b) 

agree to comply with Section 3 to the maximum extent feasible, but not in 

derogation of compliance with Section 7(b). 

7.7 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT OF 1990 

Discrimination on the basis of disability in contracting for the purchase of goods and services is 

prohibited. Bidders are required to read Americans with Disabilities language that is included as 

Appendix A of the sample contract and agree that the provisions of Title II of the Act are made a 

part of the contract. The contractor is obligated to comply with the Act and to hold the owner 

harmless. 

7.8 TRUTH IN CONTRACTING 

Bidders should be aware of the following statutes that represent “Truth in Contracting” laws: 

• N.J.S.A. 2C:21-34, et seq. governs false claims and representations by bidders. It is a 

serious crime for the bidder to knowingly submit a false claim and/or knowingly make 

material misrepresentation. 

• N.J.S.A. 2C:27-10 provides that a person commits a crime if said person offers a benefit 

to a public servant for an official act performed or to be performed by a public servant, 

which is a violation of official duty. 

• N.J.S.A. 2C:27-11 provides that a bidder commits a crime if said person, directly or 

indirectly, confers or agrees to confer any benefit not allowed by law to a public servant. 

Bidders should consult the statutes or legal counsel for further information. 

7.9 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT 

1. If, through any cause, the Bidder shall fail to fulfill in a timely and proper manner obligations 

under the contract or if the Bidder shall violate any of the requirements of the contract, the 

NHA shall there upon have the right to terminate the contract by giving written notice to the 

Bidder of such termination and specifying the effective date of termination. Such termination 

shall relieve the NHA of any obligation for balances to the contractor of any sum or sums set 

forth in the contract. The NHA will pay only for goods and services accepted prior to 

termination. 

2. Notwithstanding the above, the Bidder shall not be relieved of liability to the NHA for 

damages sustained by the owner by virtue of any breach of the contract by the Bidder and 

the NHA may withhold any payments to the Bidder for the purpose of compensation until 

such time as the exact amount of the damage due the NHA from the Bidder is determined. 


IFB #11-C-018 

3. The Bidder agrees to indemnify and hold the owner harmless from any liability to subcontractors/suppliers 

concerning payment for work performed or goods supplied arising out 

of the lawful termination of the contract by the NHA under this provision. 

4. In case of default by the Bidder, the NHA may procure the goods or services from other 

sources and hold the Bidder responsible for any excess cost. 

5. Continuation of the terms of the contract beyond the fiscal year is contingent on availability 

of funds in the following year's budget. In the event of unavailability of such funds, the NHA 

reserves the right to cancel the contract. 

6. ACQUISITION, MERGER, SALE AND/OR TRANSFER OF BUSINESS, ETC.I t is 

understood by all parties that if, during the life of the contract, the Bidder disposes of his/her 

business concern by acquisition, merger, sale and or/transfer or by any means convey 

his/her interest(s) to another party; all obligations are transferred to that new party. In this 

event, the new owner(s) will be required to submit all documentation/legal instruments that 

were required in the original proposal/contract. Any change shall be approved by the NHA. 

The Bidder will not assign any interest in the contract and shall not transfer any interest in 

the same without the prior written consent of the NHA. The NHA may terminate the contract 

for convenience by providing 60 calendar days advanced notice to the Bidder. 

7.10 PAY TO PLAY 

Starting in January, 2007, business entities are advised of their responsibility to file an annual 

disclosure statement of political contributions with the New Jersey Election Law Enforcement 

Commission (ELEC) pursuant to N.J.S.A. 19:44A-20.27 if they receive contracts in excess of 

$50,000 from public entities in a calendar year. 

Business entities are responsible for determining if filing is necessary. Additional information on 

this requirement is available from ELEC at 888-313-3532 or at www.elec.state.nj.us. 

7.11 PROMPT PAYMENT ACT N.J.S.A. 2A:30A-1 et seq. 

The award of this contract is subject to approval of the Newark Housing Authority Board of 

Commissioners and the continuing availability of funds after approval. This also includes any 

payment as a result of litigation of any dispute flowing from the award of this contract. Further, 

any change orders amounting to more than 20% must be approved by action of the Board of 

Commissioners. 



IFB #11-C-018 


AT 


AND 



STANDARD DOCUMENTS 



Chairperson 

MODIA BUTLER 




NANCY PEREZ 

LENIN CRUZ 

RASHARD CASEY 



AT 10 A.M.

IFB #11-C-018 



11-C-018 

PART II 

STANDARD DOCUMENTS 

INDEX 

SECTION 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (HUD 5369) 

SECTION 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 

(HUD 5370) 

SECTION 3 24 CFR 86.36 (CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS) 

SECTION 4 SAMPLE CONTRACT 

SECTION 5 DAVIS BACON WAGE RATES 

NJ20100036 12/17/10 NJ36 

Newark Housing Authority, Bid Opening April 28, 2011 at 10:00 a.m.

IFB #11-C-018 


SECTION 1 

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

(HUD 5369) 


U.S. Department of Housing and 

Urban Development 

Office of Public and Indian Housing 

Instructions to Bidders for Contracts 

Public and Indian Housing Programs 

Previous edition is obsolete form HUD-5369 (10/2002)

Instructions to Bidders for Contracts 


Table of Contents 

Clause Page 

1. Bid Preparation and Submission 1 

2. Explanations and Interpretations to Prospective Bidders 1 

3. Amendments to Invitations for Bids 1 

4. Responsibility of Prospective Contractor 1 

5. Late Submissions, Modifications, and Withdrawal of Bids 1 

6. Bid Opening 2 

7. Service of Protest 2 

8. Contract Award 2 

9. Bid Guarantee 3 

10. Assurance of Completion 3 

11. Preconstruction Conference 3 

12. Indian Preference Requirements 3 

1. Bid Preparation and Submission 

(a) Bidders are expected to examine the specifications, drawings, 

all instructions, and, if applicable, the construction site (see also the 

contract clause entitled Site Investigation and Conditions Affecting 

the Work of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction). 

Failure to do so will be at the bidders’ risk. 

(b) All bids must be submitted on the forms provided by the Public 

Housing Agency/Indian Housing Authority (PHA/IHA). Bidders shall 

furnish all the information required by the solicitation. Bids must be 

signed and the bidder’s name typed or printed on the bid sheet and 

each continuation sheet which requires the entry of information by 

the bidder. Erasures or other changes must be initialed by the person 

signing the bid. Bids signed by an agent shall be accompanied by 

evidence of that agent’s authority. (Bidders should retain a copy of 

their bid for their records.) 

(c) Bidders must submit as part of their bid a completed form HUD- 

5369-A, “Representations, Certifications, and Other Statements of 

Bidders.” 

(d) All bid documents shall be sealed in an envelope which shall be 

clearly marked with the words “Bid Documents,” the Invitation for 

Bids (IFB) number, any project or other identifying number, the 

bidder’s name, and the date and time for receipt of bids. 

(e) If this solicitation requires bidding on all items, failure to do so will 

disqualify the bid. If bidding on all items is not required, bidders 

should insert the words “No Bid” in the space provided for any item 

on which no price is submitted. 

(f) Unless expressly authorized elsewhere in this solicitation, alternate 

bids will not be considered. 

(g) Unless expressly authorized elsewhere in this solicitation, bids 

submitted by telegraph or facsimile (fax) machines will not be 

considered. 

(h) If the proposed contract is for a Mutual Help project (as described 

in 24 CFR Part 905, Subpart E) that involves Mutual Help 

contributions of work, material, or equipment, supplemental information 

regarding the bid advertisement is provided as an attachment to 

this solicitation. 

2. Explanations and Interpretations to Prospective 

Bidders 

(a) Any prospective bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation 

of the solicitation, specifications, drawings, etc., must request it at 

least 7 days before the scheduled time for bid opening. Requests 

may be oral or written. Oral requests must be confirmed in writing. 

The only oral clarifications that will be provided will be those clearly 

related to solicitation procedures, i.e., not substantive technical 

information. No other oral explanation or interpretation will be 

provided. Any information given a prospective bidder concerning 

this solicitation will be furnished promptly to all other prospective 

bidders as a written amendment to the solicitation, if that information 

is necessary in submitting bids, or if the lack of it would be prejudicial 

to other prospective bidders. 

(b) Any information obtained by, or provided to, a bidder other than 

by formal amendment to the solicitation shall not constitute a change 

to the solicitation. 

3. Amendments to Invitations for Bids 

(a) If this solicitation is amended, then all terms and conditions 

which are not modified remain unchanged. 

(b) Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of any amendment to this 

solicitation (1) by signing and returning the amendment, (2) by 

identifying the amendment number and date on the bid form, or (3) 

by letter, telegram, or facsimile, if those methods are authorized in 

the solicitation. The PHA/IHA must receive acknowledgement by the 

time and at the place specified for receipt of bids. Bids which fail to 

acknowledge the bidder’s receipt of any amendment will result in the 

rejection of the bid if the amendment(s) contained information which 

substantively changed the PHA’s/IHA’s requirements. 

(c) Amendments will be on file in the offices of the PHA/IHA and the 

Architect at least 7 days before bid opening. 

4. Responsibility of Prospective Contractor 

(a) The PHA/IHA will award contracts only to responsible prospective 

contractors who have the ability to perform successfully under 

the terms and conditions of the proposed contract. In determining 

the responsibility of a bidder, the PHA/IHA will consider such matters 

as the bidder’s: 

(1) Integrity; 

(2) Compliance with public policy; 

(3) Record of past performance; and 

(4) Financial and technical resources (including construction 

and technical equipment). 

(b) Before a bid is considered for award, the bidder may be requested 

by the PHA/IHA to submit a statement or other documentation 

regarding any of the items in paragraph (a) above. Failure by the 

bidder to provide such additional information shall render the bidder 

nonresponsible and ineligible for award. 

Previous edition is obsolete Page 1 of 4 

form HUD-5369 (10/2002)

5. Late Submissions, Modifications, and Withdrawal of Bids 

(a) Any bid received at the place designated in the solicitation after 

the exact time specified for receipt will not be considered unless it is 

received before award is made and it: 

(1) Was sent by registered or certified mail not later than the 

fifth calendar day before the date specified for receipt of offers (e.g., 

an offer submitted in response to a solicitation requiring receipt of 

offers by the 20th of the month must have been mailed by the 15th); 

(2) Was sent by mail, or if authorized by the solicitation, was 

sent by telegram or via facsimile, and it is determined by the PHA/IHA 

that the late receipt was due solely to mishandling by the PHA/IHA 

after receipt at the PHA/IHA; or 

(3) Was sent by U.S. Postal Service Express Mail Next Day 

Service - Post Office to Addressee, not later than 5:00 p.m. at the 

place of mailing two working days prior to the date specified for 

receipt of proposals. The term “working days” excludes weekends 

and observed holidays. 

(b) Any modification or withdrawal of a bid is subject to the same 

conditions as in paragraph (a) of this provision. 

(c) The only acceptable evidence to establish the date of mailing of 

a late bid, modification, or withdrawal sent either by registered or 

certified mail is the U.S. or Canadian Postal Service postmark both 

on the envelope or wrapper and on the original receipt from the U.S. 

or Canadian Postal Service. Both postmarks must show a legible 

date or the bid, modification, or withdrawal shall be processed as if 

mailed late. “Postmark” means a printed, stamped, or otherwise 

placed impression (exclusive of a postage meter machine impression) 

that is readily identifiable without further action as having been 

supplied and affixed by employees of the U.S. or Canadian Postal 

Service on the date of mailing. Therefore, bidders should request the 

postal clerk to place a hand cancellation bull’s-eye postmark on both 

the receipt and the envelope or wrapper. 

(d) The only acceptable evidence to establish the time of receipt at the 

PHA/IHA is the time/date stamp of PHA/IHA on the proposal wrapper or 

other documentary evidence of receipt maintained by the PHA/IHA. 

(e) The only acceptable evidence to establish the date of mailing of 

a late bid, modification, or withdrawal sent by Express Mail Next Day 

Service-Post Office to Addressee is the date entered by the post 

office receiving clerk on the “Express Mail Next Day Service-Post 

Office to Addressee” label and the postmark on both the envelope or 

wrapper and on the original receipt from the U.S. Postal Service. 

“Postmark” has the same meaning as defined in paragraph (c) of this 

provision, excluding postmarks of the Canadian Postal Service. 

Therefore, bidders should request the postal clerk to place a legible 

hand cancellation bull’s eye postmark on both the receipt and Failure 

by a bidder to acknowledge receipt of the envelope or wrapper. 

(f) Notwithstanding paragraph (a) of this provision, a late modification 

of an otherwise successful bid that makes its terms more 

favorable to the PHA/IHA will be considered at any time it is received 

and may be accepted. 

(g) Bids may be withdrawn by written notice, or if authorized by this 

solicitation, by telegram (including mailgram) or facsimile machine 

transmission received at any time before the exact time set for 

opening of bids; provided that written confirmation of telegraphic or 

facsimile withdrawals over the signature of the bidder is mailed and 

postmarked prior to the specified bid opening time. A bid may be 

withdrawn in person by a bidder or its authorized representative if, 

before the exact time set for opening of bids, the identity of the person 

requesting withdrawal is established and the person signs a receipt 

for the bid. 

6. Bid Opening 

All bids received by the date and time of receipt specified in the 

solicitation will be publicly opened and read. The time and place of 

opening will be as specified in the solicitation. Bidders and other 

interested persons may be present. 

7. Service of Protest 

(a) Definitions. As used in this provision: 

“Interested party” means an actual or prospective bidder whose 

direct economic interest would be affected by the award of the 

contract. 

“Protest” means a written objection by an interested party to this 

solicitation or to a proposed or actual award of a contract pursuant 

to this solicitation. 

(b) Protests shall be served on the Contracting Officer by obtaining 

written and dated acknowledgement from — 

[Contracting Officer designate the official or location where a protest 

may be served on the Contracting Officer] 

(c) All protests shall be resolved in accordance with the PHA’s/ 

IHA’s protest policy and procedures, copies of which are maintained 

at the PHA/IHA. 

8. Contract Award 

(a) The PHA/IHA will evaluate bids in response to this solicitation 

without discussions and will award a contract to the responsible 

bidder whose bid, conforming to the solicitation, will be most advantageous 

to the PHA/IHA considering only price and any price-related 

factors specified in the solicitation. 

(b) If the apparent low bid received in response to this solicitation 

exceeds the PHA’s/IHA’s available funding for the proposed contract 

work, the PHA/IHA may either accept separately priced items (see 

8(e) below) or use the following procedure to determine contract 

award. The PHA/IHA shall apply in turn to each bid (proceeding in 

order from the apparent low bid to the high bid) each of the separately 

priced bid deductible items, if any, in their priority order set forth in 

this solicitation. If upon the application of the first deductible item to 

all initial bids, a new low bid is within the PHA’s/IHA’s available 

funding, then award shall be made to that bidder. If no bid is within 

the available funding amount, then the PHA/IHA shall apply the 

second deductible item. The PHA/IHA shall continue this process 

until an evaluated low bid, if any, is within the PHA’s/IHA’s available 

funding. If upon the application of all deductibles, no bid is within the 

PHA’s/IHA’s available funding, or if the solicitation does not request 

separately priced deductibles, the PHA/IHA shall follow its written 

policy and procedures in making any award under this solicitation. 

(c) In the case of tie low bids, award shall be made in accordance 

with the PHA’s/IHA’s written policy and procedures. 

(d) The PHA/IHA may reject any and all bids, accept other than the 

lowest bid (e.g., the apparent low bid is unreasonably low), and waive 

informalities or minor irregularities in bids received, in accordance 

with the PHA’s/IHA’s written policy and procedures. 


form HUD-5369 (10/2002)

(e) Unless precluded elsewhere in the solicitation, the PHA/IHA 

may accept any item or combination of items bid. 

(f) The PHA/IHA may reject any bid as nonresponsive if it is 

materially unbalanced as to the prices for the various items of work 

to be performed. A bid is materially unbalanced when it is based on 

prices significantly less than cost for some work and prices which are 

significantly overstated for other work. 

(g) A written award shall be furnished to the successful bidder within 

the period for acceptance specified in the bid and shall result in a 

binding contract without further action by either party. 

9. Bid Guarantee (applicable to construction and equipment 

contracts exceeding $25,000) 

All bids must be accompanied by a negotiable bid guarantee which 

shall not be less than five percent (5%) of the amount of the bid. The 

bid guarantee may be a certified check, bank draft, U.S. Government 

Bonds at par value, or a bid bond secured by a surety company 

acceptable to the U.S. Government and authorized to do business in 

the state where the work is to be performed. In the case where the 

work under the contract will be performed on an Indian reservation 

area, the bid guarantee may also be an irrevocable Letter of Credit 

(see provision 10, Assurance of Completion, below). Certified 

checks and bank drafts must be made payable to the order of the 

PHA/IHA. The bid guarantee shall insure the execution of the 

contract and the furnishing of a method of assurance of completion 

by the successful bidder as required by the solicitation. Failure to 

submit a bid guarantee with the bid shall result in the rejection of the 

bid. Bid guarantees submitted by unsuccessful bidders will be 

returned as soon as practicable after bid opening. 

10. Assurance of Completion 

(a) Unless otherwise provided in State law, the successful bidder 

shall furnish an assurance of completion prior to the execution of any 

contract under this solicitation. This assurance may be [Contracting 

Officer check applicable items] — 

[ ] (1) a performance and payment bond in a penal sum of 100 

percent of the contract price; or, as may be required or permitted by 

State law; 

[ ] (2) separate performance and payment bonds, each for 50 

percent or more of the contract price; 

[ ] (3) a 20 percent cash escrow; 

[ ] (4) a 25 percent irrevocable letter of credit; or, 

[ ] (5) an irrevocable letter of credit for 10 percent of the total 

contract price with a monitoring and disbursements agreement with 

the IHA (applicable only to contracts awarded by an IHA under the 

Indian Housing Program). 

(b) Bonds must be obtained from guarantee or surety companies 

acceptable to the U.S. Government and authorized to do business in 

the state where the work is to be performed. Individual sureties will 

not be considered. U.S. Treasury Circular Number 570, published 

annually in the Federal Register, lists companies approved to act as 

sureties on bonds securing Government contracts, the maximum 

underwriting limits on each contract bonded, and the States in which 

the company is licensed to do business. Use of companies listed in 

this circular is mandatory. Copies of the circular may be downloaded 

on the U.S. Department of Treasury website http:// 

www.fms.treas.gov/c570/index.html, or ordered for a minimum fee 

by contacting the Government Printing Office at (202) 512-2168. 

(c) Each bond shall clearly state the rate of premium and the total 

amount of premium charged. The current power of attorney for the 

person who signs for the surety company must be attached to the 

bond. The effective date of the power of attorney shall not precede 

the date of the bond. The effective date of the bond shall be on or after 

the execution date of the contract. 

(d) Failure by the successful bidder to obtain the required assurance 

of completion within the time specified, or within such extended 

period as the PHA/IHA may grant based upon reasons determined 

adequate by the PHA/IHA, shall render the bidder ineligible for 

award. The PHA/IHA may then either award the contract to the next 

lowest responsible bidder or solicit new bids. The PHA/IHA may 

retain the ineligible bidder’s bid guarantee. 

11. Preconstruction Conference (applicable to construction 

contracts) 

After award of a contract under this solicitation and prior to the start 

of work, the successful bidder will be required to attend a 

preconstruction conference with representatives of the PHA/IHA and 

its architect/engineer, and other interested parties convened by the 

PHA/IHA. The conference will serve to acquaint the participants with 

the general plan of the construction operation and all other requirements 

of the contract (e.g., Equal Employment Opportunity, Labor 

Standards). The PHA/IHA will provide the successful bidder with the 

date, time, and place of the conference. 

12. Indian Preference Requirements (applicable only if 

this solicitation is for a contract to be performed on a 

project for an Indian Housing Authority) 

(a) HUD has determined that the contract awarded under this 

solicitation is subject to the requirements of section 7(b) of the Indian 

Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 450e(b)). 

Section 7(b) requires that any contract or subcontract entered into for 

the benefit of Indians shall require that, to the greatest extent feasible 

(1) Preferences and opportunities for training and employment 

(other than core crew positions; see paragraph (h) below) in connection 

with the administration of such contracts or subcontracts be 

given to qualified “Indians.” The Act defines “Indians” to mean 

persons who are members of an Indian tribe and defines “Indian 

tribe” to mean any Indian tribe, band, nation, or other organized 

group or community, including any Alaska Native village or regional 

or village corporation as defined in or established pursuant to the 

Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act, which is recognized as eligible 

for the special programs and services provided by the United States 

to Indians because of their status as Indians; and, 

(2) Preference in the award of contracts or subcontracts in 

connection with the administration of contracts be given to Indian 

organizations and to Indian-owned economic enterprises, as defined 

in section 3 of the Indian Financing Act of 1974 (25 U.S.C. 

1452). That Act defines “economic enterprise” to mean any Indianowned 

commercial, industrial, or business activity established or 

organized for the purpose of profit, except that the Indian ownership 

must constitute not less than 51 percent of the enterprise; “Indian 

organization” to mean the governing body of any Indian tribe or entity 

established or recognized by such governing body; “Indian” to mean 

any person who is a member of any tribe, band, group, pueblo, or 

community which is recognized by the Federal Government as 

eligible for services from the Bureau of Indian Affairs and any 

“Native” as defined in the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act; and 

Indian “tribe” to mean any Indian tribe, band, group, pueblo, or 

community including Native villages and Native groups (including 


form HUD-5369 (10/2002)

corporations organized by Kenai, Juneau, Sitka, and Kodiak) as 

defined in the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act, which is recognized 

by the Federal Government as eligible for services from the 

Bureau of Indian Affairs. 

(b) (1) The successful Contractor under this solicitation shall comply 

with the requirements of this provision in awarding all subcontracts 

under the contract and in providing training and employment 

opportunities. 

(2) A finding by the IHA that the contractor, either (i) awarded 

a subcontract without using the procedure required by the IHA, (ii) 

falsely represented that subcontracts would be awarded to Indian 

enterprises or organizations; or, (iii) failed to comply with the 

contractor’s employment and training preference bid statement shall 

be grounds for termination of the contract or for the assessment of 

penalties or other remedies. 

(c) If specified elsewhere in this solicitation, the IHA may restrict the 

solicitation to qualified Indian-owned enterprises and Indian organizations. 

If two or more (or a greater number as specified elsewhere 

in the solicitation) qualified Indian-owned enterprises or organizations 

submit responsive bids, award shall be made to the qualified 

enterprise or organization with the lowest responsive bid. If fewer 

than the minimum required number of qualified Indian-owned enterprises 

or organizations submit responsive bids, the IHA shall reject 

all bids and readvertise the solicitation in accordance with paragraph 

(d) below. 

(d) If the IHA prefers not to restrict the solicitation as described in 

paragraph (c) above, or if after having restricted a solicitation an 

insufficient number of qualified Indian enterprises or organizations 

submit bids, the IHA may advertise for bids from non-Indian as well 

as Indian-owned enterprises and Indian organizations. Award shall 

be made to the qualified Indian enterprise or organization with the 

lowest responsive bid if that bid is - 

(1) Within the maximum HUD-approved budget amount established 

for the specific project or activity for which bids are being 

solicited; and 

(2) No more than the percentage specified in 24 CFR 905.175(c) 

higher than the total bid price of the lowest responsive bid from any 

qualified bidder. If no responsive bid by a qualified Indian-owned 

economic enterprise or organization is within the stated range of the 

total bid price of the lowest responsive bid from any qualified 

enterprise, award shall be made to the bidder with the lowest bid. 

(e) Bidders seeking to qualify for preference in contracting or 

subcontracting shall submit proof of Indian ownership with their bids. 

Proof of Indian ownership shall include but not be limited to: 

(1) Certification by a tribe or other evidence that the bidder is 

an Indian. The IHA shall accept the certification of a tribe that an 

individual is a member. 

(2) Evidence such as stock ownership, structure, management, 

control, financing and salary or profit sharing arrangements of 

the enterprise. 

(f) (1) All bidders must submit with their bids a statement describing 

how they will provide Indian preference in the award of subcontracts. 

The specific requirements of that statement and the factors 

to used by the IHA in determining the statement’s adequacy are 

included as an attachment to this solicitation. Any bid that fails to 

include the required statement shall be rejected as nonresponsive. 

The IHA may require that comparable statements be provided by 

subcontractors to the successful Contractor, and may require the 

Contractor to reject any bid or proposal by a subcontractor that fails 

to include the statement. 

(2) Bidders and prospective subcontractors shall submit a 

certification (supported by credible evidence) to the IHA in any 

instance where the bidder or subcontractor believes it is infeasible to 

provide Indian preference in subcontracting. The acceptance or 

rejection by the IHA of the certification shall be final. Rejection shall 

disqualify the bid from further consideration. 

(g) All bidders must submit with their bids a statement detailing their 

employment and training opportunities and their plans to provide 

preference to Indians in implementing the contract; and the number 

or percentage of Indians anticipated to be employed and trained. 

Comparable statements from all proposed subcontractors must be 

submitted. The criteria to be used by the IHA in determining the 

statement(s)’s adequacy are included as an attachment to this 

solicitation. Any bid that fails to include the required statement(s), or 

that includes a statement that does not meet minimum standards 

required by the IHA shall be rejected as nonresponsive. 

(h) Core crew employees. A core crew employee is an individual 

who is a bona fide employee of the contractor at the time the bid is 

submitted; or an individual who was not employed by the bidder at the 

time the bid was submitted, but who is regularly employed by the 

bidder in a supervisory or other key skilled position when work is 

available. Bidders shall submit with their bids a list of all core crew 

employees. 

(i) Preference in contracting, subcontracting, employment, and 

training shall apply not only on-site, on the reservation, or within the 

IHA’s jurisdiction, but also to contracts with firms that operate outside 

these areas (e.g., employment in modular or manufactured housing 

construction facilities). 

(j) Bidders should contact the IHA to determine if any additional 

local preference requirements are applicable to this solicitation. 

(k) The IHA [ ] does [ ] does not [Contracting Officer check 

applicable box] maintain lists of Indian-owned economic enterprises 

and Indian organizations by specialty (e.g., plumbing, electrical, 

foundations), which are available to bidders to assist them in meeting 

their responsibility to provide preference in connection with the 

administration of contracts and subcontracts. 


form HUD-5369 (10/2002)

IFB #11-C-018 



GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR 

CONSTRUCTION 

(HUD 5370) 


General Conditions for Construction 

Contracts - Public Housing Programs 

Applicability. This form is applicable to any 

construction/development contract greater than $100,000. 

U.S. Department of Housing and Urban 

Development 


OMB Approval No. 2577-0157 (exp. 12/31/2011) 

This form includes those clauses required by OMB's common rule on grantee procurement, implemented at HUD in 24 CFR 85.36, and 

those requirements set forth in Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968 and its amendment by the Housing and 

Community Development Act of 1992, implemented by HUD at 24 CFR Part 135. The form is required for construction contracts 

awarded by Public Housing Agencies (PHAs). 

The form is used by Housing Authorities in solicitations to provide necessary contract clauses. If the form were not used, HAs would be 

unable to enforce their contracts. 

Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 1.0 hours per response, including the time for reviewing 

instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection 

of information. Responses to the collection of information are required to obtain a benefit or to retain a benefit. 

The information requested does not lend itself to confidentiality. 

HUD may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to a collection of information unless it displays a currently 

valid OMB number. 

Clause 


Page 

Clause 

1. Definitions 2 Administrative Requirements 

2. Contractor’s Responsibility for Work 2 25. Contract Period 9 

3. Architect’s Duties, Responsibilities and Authority 2 26. Order of Precedence 9 

4. Other Contracts 3 27. Payments 9 

Construction Requirements 28. Contract Modifications 10 

5. Preconstruction Conference and Notice to Proceed 3 29. Changes 10 

6. Construction Progress Schedule 3 30. Suspension of Work 11 

7. Site Investigation and Conditions Affecting the Work 3 31. Disputes 11 

8. Differing Site Conditions 4 32. Default 11 

9. Specifications and Drawings for Construction 4 33. Liquidated Damages 12 

10. As-Built Drawings 5 34. Termination of Convenience 12 

11. Material and Workmanship 5 35. Assignment of Contract 12 

12. Permits and Codes 5 36. Insurance 12 

13. Health, Safety, and Accident Prevention 6 37. Subcontracts 13 

14. Temporary Buildings and Transportation Materials 6 38. Subcontracting with Small and Minority Firms, Women’s 

Business Enterprise, and Labor Surplus Area Firms 

13 

15. Availability and Use of Utility Services 6 39. Equal Employment Opportunity 13 

16. Protection of Existing Vegetation, Structures, Equipment, 

40. Employment, Training, and Contracting Opportunities for 14 

Utilities, and Improvements 

6 

Low-Income Persons, Section 3 of the Housing and 

Urban Development Act of 1968 

17. Temporary Buildings and Transportation Materials 7 41. Interest of Members of Congress 15 

18. Clean Air and Water 7 42. Interest of Members, Officers, or Employees and Former 

Members, Officers, or Employees 

15 

19. Energy Efficiency 7 43. Limitations on Payments Made to Influence 15 

20. Inspection and Acceptance of Construction 7 44. Royalties and Patents 15 

21. Use and Possession Prior to Completion 8 45. Examination and Retention of Contractor’s Records 15 

22. Warranty of Title 8 46. Labor Standards-Davis-Bacon and Related Acts 15 

23. Warranty of Construction 8 47. Non-Federal Prevailing Wage Rates 19 

24. Prohibition Against Liens 9 48. Procurement of Recovered Materials 19 

Previous editions are obsolete Page 1 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) 

Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks 7417.1 & 7485.3G 

Page

1. Definitions 

(a) “Architect” means the person or other entity engaged by 

the PHA to perform architectural, engineering, design, 

and other services related to the work as provided for in 

the contract. When a PHA uses an engineer to act in this 

capacity, the terms “architect” and “engineer” shall be 

synonymous. The Architect shall serve as a technical 

representative of the Contracting Officer. The Architect’s 

authority is as set forth elsewhere in this contract. 

(b) “Contract” means the contract entered into between the 

PHA and the Contractor. It includes the forms of Bid, the 

Bid Bond, the Performance and Payment Bond or Bonds 

or other assurance of completion, the Certifications, 

Representations, and Other Statements of Bidders (form 

HUD-5370), these General Conditions of the Contract for 

Construction (form HUD-5370), the applicable wage rate 

determinations from the U.S. Department of Labor, any 

special conditions included elsewhere in the contract, the 

specifications, and drawings. It includes all formal 

changes to any of those documents by addendum, 

change order, or other modification. 

(c) “Contracting Officer” means the person delegated the authority 

by the PHA to enter into, administer, and/or 

terminate this contract and designated as such in writing 

to the Contractor. The term includes any successor 

Contracting Officer and any duly authorized 

representative of the Contracting Officer also designated 

in writing. The Contracting Officer shall be deemed the 

authorized agent of the PHA in all dealings with the 

Contractor. 

(d) “Contractor” means the person or other entity entering 

into the contract with the PHA to perform all of the work 

required under the contract. 

(e) “Drawings” means the drawings enumerated in the 

schedule of drawings contained in the Specifications and 

as described in the contract clause entitled Specifications 

and Drawings for Construction herein. 

(f) “HUD” means the United States of America acting through 

the Department of Housing and Urban Development 

including the Secretary, or any other person designated 

to act on its behalf. HUD has agreed, subject to the 

provisions of an Annual Contributions Contract (ACC), to 

provide financial assistance to the PHA, which includes 

assistance in financing the work to be performed under 

this contract. As defined elsewhere in these General 

Conditions or the contract documents, the determination 

of HUD may be required to authorize changes in the work 

or for release of funds to the PHA for payment to the 

Contractor. Notwithstanding HUD’s role, nothing in this 

contract shall be construed to create any contractual 

relationship between the Contractor and HUD. 

(g) “Project” means the entire project, whether construction 

or rehabilitation, the work for which is provided for in 

whole or in part under this contract. 

(h) “PHA” means the Public Housing Agency organized 

under applicable state laws which is a party to this 

contract. 

(j) “Specifications” means the written description of the 

technical requirements for construction and includes the 

criteria and tests for determining whether the 

requirements are met. 

(l) “Work” means materials, workmanship, and manufacture 

and fabrication of components. 

2. Contractor’s Responsibility for Work 

(a) The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, 

materials, tools, equipment, and transportation necessary 

for performance of the work. The Contractor shall also 

furnish all necessary water, heat, light, and power not 

made available to the Contractor by the PHA pursuant to 

the clause entitled Availability and Use of Utility Services 

herein. 

(b) The Contractor shall perform on the site, and with its own 

organization, work equivalent to at least [ ] (12 percent 

unless otherwise indicated) of the total amount of work to 

be performed under the order. This percentage may be 

reduced by a supplemental agreement to this order if, 

during performing the work, the Contractor requests a 

reduction and the Contracting Officer determines that the 

reduction would be to the advantage of the PHA. 

(c) At all times during performance of this contract and until 

the work is completed and accepted, the Contractor shall 

directly superintend the work or assign and have on the 

work site a competent superintendent who is satisfactory 

to the Contracting Officer and has authority to act for the 

Contractor. 

(d) The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to 

persons or property that occur as a result of the 

Contractor’s fault or negligence, and shall take proper 

safety and health precautions to protect the work, the 

workers, the public, and the property of others. The 

Contractor shall hold and save the PHA, its officers and 

agents, free and harmless from liability of any nature 

occasioned by the Contractor’s performance. The 

Contractor shall also be responsible for all materials 

delivered and work performed until completion and 

acceptance of the entire work, except for any completed 

unit of work which may have been accepted under the 

contract. 

(e) The Contractor shall lay out the work from base lines and 

bench marks indicated on the drawings and be 

responsible for all lines, levels, and measurements of all 

work executed under the contract. The Contractor shall 

verify the figures before laying out the work and will be 

held responsible for any error resulting from its failure to 

do so. 

(f) The Contractor shall confine all operations (including 

storage of materials) on PHA premises to areas 

authorized or approved by the Contracting Officer. 

(g) The Contractor shall at all times keep the work area, 

including storage areas, free from accumulations of 

waste materials. After completing the work and before 

final inspection, the Contractor shall (1) remove from the 

premises all scaffolding, equipment, tools, and materials 

(including rejected materials) that are not the property of 

the PHA and all rubbish caused by its work; (2) leave the 

work area in a clean, neat, and orderly condition 

satisfactory to the Contracting Officer; (3) perform all 

specified tests; and, (4) deliver the installation in 

complete and operating condition. 

(h) The Contractor’s responsibility will terminate when all 

work has been completed, the final inspection made, and 

the work accepted by the Contracting Officer. The 

Contractor will then be released from further obligation 

except as required by the warranties specified elsewhere 

in the contract. 

3. Architect’s Duties, Responsibilities, and Authority 

(a) The Architect for this contract, and any successor, shall 

be designated in writing by the Contracting Officer. 


Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks 7417.1 & 7485.3G

(b) The Architect shall serve as the Contracting Officer’s 

technical representative with respect to architectural, 

engineering, and design matters related to the work 

performed under the contract. The Architect may provide 

direction on contract performance. Such direction shall be 

within the scope of the contract and may not be of a 

nature which: (1) institutes additional work outside the 

scope of the contract; (2) constitutes a change as defined 

in the Changes clause herein; (3) causes an increase or 

decrease in the cost of the contract; (4) alters the 

Construction Progress Schedule; or (5) changes any of 

the other express terms or conditions of the contract. 

(c) The Architect’s duties and responsibilities may include but 

shall not be limited to: 

(1) Making periodic visits to the work site, and on the 

basis of his/her on-site inspections, issuing written 

reports to the PHA which shall include all observed 

deficiencies. The Architect shall file a copy of the 

report with the Contractor’s designated representative 

at the site; 

(2) Making modifications in drawings and technical 

specifications and assisting the Contracting Officer in 

the preparation of change orders and other contract 

modifications for issuance by the Contracting Officer; 

(3) Reviewing and making recommendations with respect 

to - (i) the Contractor’s construction progress 

schedules; (ii) the Contractor’s shop and detailed 

drawings; (iii) the machinery, mechanical and other 

equipment and materials or other articles proposed 

for use by the Contractor; and, (iv) the Contractor’s 

price breakdown and progress payment estimates; 

and, 

(4) Assisting in inspections, signing Certificates of 

Completion, and making recommendations with 

respect to acceptance of work completed under the 

contract. 

4. Other Contracts 

The PHA may undertake or award other contracts for 

additional work at or near the site of the work under this 

contract. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the 

other contractors and with PHA employees and shall 

carefully adapt scheduling and performing the work under 

this contract to accommodate the additional work, heeding 

any direction that may be provided by the Contracting 

Officer. The Contractor shall not commit or permit any act 

that will interfere with the performance of work by any 

other contractor or by PHA employees 

Construction Requirements 

5. Pre-construction Conference and Notice to Proceed 

(a) Within ten calendar days of contract execution, and prior 

to the commencement of work, the Contractor shall 

attend a preconstruction conference with representatives 

of the PHA, its Architect, and other interested parties 

convened by the PHA. The conference will serve to 

acquaint the participants with the general plan of the 

construction operation and all other requirements of the 

contract. The PHA will provide the Contractor with the 

date, time, and place of the conference. 

(b) The contractor shall begin work upon receipt of a written 

Notice to Proceed from the Contracting Officer or 

designee. The Contractor shall not begin work prior to 

receiving such notice. 

6. Construction Progress Schedule 

(a) The Contractor shall, within five days after the work 

commences on the contract or another period of time 

determined by the Contracting Officer, prepare and 

submit to the Contracting Officer for approval three 

copies of a practicable schedule showing the order in 

which the Contractor proposes to perform the work, and 

the dates on which the Contractor contemplates starting 

and completing the several salient features of the work 

(including acquiring labor, materials, and equipment). The 

schedule shall be in the form of a progress chart of 

suitable scale to indicate appropriately the percentage of 

work scheduled for completion by any given date during 

the period. If the Contractor fails to submit a schedule 

within the time prescribed, the Contracting Officer may 

withhold approval of progress payments or take other 

remedies under the contract until the Contractor submits 

the required schedule. 

(b) The Contractor shall enter the actual progress on the 

chart as required by the Contracting Officer, and 

immediately deliver three copies of the annotated 

schedule to the Contracting Officer. If the Contracting 

Officer determines, upon the basis of inspection 

conducted pursuant to the clause entitled Inspection and 

Acceptance of Construction, herein that the Contractor is 

not meeting the approved schedule, the Contractor shall 

take steps necessary to improve its progress, including 

those that may be required by the Contracting Officer, 

without additional cost to the PHA. In this circumstance, 

the Contracting Officer may require the Contractor to 

increase the number of shifts, overtime operations, days 

of work, and/or the amount of construction plant, and to 

submit for approval any supplementary schedule or 

schedules in chart form as the Contracting Officer deems 

necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of 

progress will be regained. 

(c) Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements 

of the Contracting Officer under this clause shall be 

grounds for a determination by the Contracting Officer 

that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with 

sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time 

specified in the Contract. Upon making this 

determination, the Contracting Officer may terminate the 

Contractor’s right to proceed with the work, or any 

separable part of it, in accordance with the Default clause 

of this contract. 

7. Site Investigation and Conditions Affecting the Work 

(a) The Contractor acknowledges that it has taken steps 

reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and 

location of the work, and that it has investigated and 

satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions 

which can affect the work or its cost, including but not 

limited to, (1) conditions bearing upon transportation, 

disposal, handling, and storage of materials; (2) the 

availability of labor, water, electric power, and roads;(3) 

uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar 

physical conditions at the site; (4) the conformation and 

conditions of the ground; and (5) the character of 

equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during 

work performance. The Contractor also acknowledges 

that it has satisfied itself as to the character, quality, and 

quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles 

to be encountered insofar as this information is 



easonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, 

including all exploratory work done by the PHA, as well 

as from the drawings and specifications made a part of 

this contract. Any failure of the Contractor to take the 

actions described and acknowledged in this paragraph 

will not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for 

estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully 

performing the work, or for proceeding to successfully 

perform the work without additional expense to the PHA. 

(b) The PHA assumes no responsibility for any conclusions 

or interpretations made by the Contractor based on the 

information made available by the PHA. Nor does the 

PHA assume responsibility for any understanding 

reached or representation made concerning conditions 

which can affect the work by any of its officers or agents 

before the execution of this contract, unless that 

understanding or representation is expressly stated in 

this contract. 

8. Differing Site Conditions 

(a) The Contractor shall promptly, and before the conditions 

are disturbed, give a written notice to the Contracting 

Officer of (1) subsurface or latent physical conditions at 

the site which differ materially from those indicated in this 

contract, or (2) unknown physical conditions at the site(s), 

of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those 

ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as 

inhering in work of the character provided for in the 

contract. 

(b) The Contracting Officer shall investigate the site 

conditions promptly after receiving the notice. Work shall 

not proceed at the affected site, except at the 

Contractor’s risk, until the Contracting Officer has 

provided written instructions to the Contractor. If the 

conditions do materially so differ and cause an increase 

or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or the time 

required for, performing any part of the work under this 

contract, whether or not changed as a result of the 

conditions, the Contractor shall file a claim in writing to 

the PHA within ten days after receipt of such instructions 

and, in any event, before proceeding with the work. An 

equitable adjustment in the contract price, the delivery 

schedule, or both shall be made under this clause and 

the contract modified in writing accordingly. 

(c) No request by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment 

to the contract under this clause shall be allowed, unless 

the Contractor has given the written notice required; 

provided, that the time prescribed in (a) above for giving 

written notice may be extended by the Contracting 

Officer. 

(d) No request by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment 

to the contract for differing site conditions shall be 

allowed if made after final payment under this contract. 

9. Specifications and Drawings for Construction 

(a) The Contractor shall keep on the work site a copy of the 

drawings and specifications and shall at all times give the 

Contracting Officer access thereto. Anything mentioned 

in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, or 

shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the 

specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or 

mentioned in both. In case of difference between 

drawings and specifications, the specifications shall 

govern. In case of discrepancy in the figures, in the 

drawings, or in the specifications, the matter shall be 

promptly submitted to the Contracting Officer, who shall 

promptly make a determination in writing. Any adjustment 

by the Contractor without such a determination shall be at 

its own risk and expense. The Contracting Officer shall 

furnish from time to time such detailed drawings and 

other information as considered necessary, unless 

otherwise provided. 

(b) Wherever in the specifications or upon the drawings the 

words “directed”, “required”, “ordered”, “designated”, 

“prescribed”, or words of like import are used, it shall be 

understood that the “direction”, “requirement”, “order”, 

“designation”, or “prescription”, of the Contracting Officer 

is intended and similarly the words “approved”, 

“acceptable”, “satisfactory”, or words of like import shall 

mean “approved by”, or “acceptable to”, or “satisfactory 

to” the Contracting Officer, unless otherwise expressly 

stated. 

(c) Where “as shown”, “as indicated”, “as detailed”, or words 

of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the 

reference is made to the drawings accompanying this 

contract unless stated otherwise. The word “provided” as 

used herein shall be understood to mean “provide 

complete in place” that is “furnished and installed”. 

(d) “Shop drawings” means drawings, submitted to the PHA 

by the Contractor, subcontractor, or any lower tier 

subcontractor, showing in detail (1) the proposed 

fabrication and assembly of structural elements and (2) 

the installation (i.e., form, fit, and attachment details) of 

materials of equipment. It includes drawings, diagrams, 

layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, 

schedules, performance and test data, and similar 

materials furnished by the Contractor to explain in detail 

specific portions of the work required by the contract. The 

PHA may duplicate, use, and disclose in any manner and 

for any purpose shop drawings delivered under this 

contract. 

(e) If this contract requires shop drawings, the Contractor 

shall coordinate all such drawings, and review them for 

accuracy, completeness, and compliance with other 

contract requirements and shall indicate its approval 

thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. 

Shop drawings submitted to the Contracting Officer 

without evidence of the Contractor’s approval may be 

returned for resubmission. The Contracting Officer will 

indicate an approval or disapproval of the shop drawings 

and if not approved as submitted shall indicate the PHA’s 

reasons therefore. Any work done before such approval 

shall be at the Contractor’s risk. Approval by the 

Contracting Officer shall not relieve the Contractor from 

responsibility for any errors or omissions in such 

drawings, nor from responsibility for complying with the 

requirements of this contract, except with respect to 

variations described and approved in accordance with (f) 

below. 

(f) If shop drawings show variations from the contract 

requirements, the Contractor shall describe such 

variations in writing, separate from the drawings, at the 

time of submission. If the Architect approves any such 

variation and the Contracting Officer concurs, the 

Contracting Officer shall issue an appropriate 

modification to the contract, except that, if the variation is 

minor or does not involve a change in price or in time of 

performance, a modification need not be issued. 

(g) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make 

timely requests of the PHA for such large scale and full 

size drawings, color schemes, and other additional 

information, not already in his possession, which shall be 



equired in the planning and production of the work. Such 

requests may be submitted as the need arises, but each 

such request shall be filed in ample time to permit 

appropriate action to be taken by all parties involved so 

as to avoid delay. 

(h) The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer for 

approval four copies (unless otherwise indicated) of all 

shop drawings as called for under the various headings 

of these specifications. Three sets (unless otherwise 

indicated) of all shop drawings, will be retained by the 

PHA and one set will be returned to the Contractor. As 

required by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor, upon 

completing the work under this contract, shall furnish a 

complete set of all shop drawings as finally approved. 

These drawings shall show all changes and revisions 

made up to the time the work is completed and accepted. 

(i) This clause shall be included in all subcontracts at any 

tier. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to 

ensure that all shop drawings prepared by subcontractors 

are submitted to the Contracting Officer. 

10. As-Built Drawings 

(a) “As-built drawings,” as used in this clause, means 

drawings submitted by the Contractor or subcontractor at 

any tier to show the construction of a particular structure 

or work as actually completed under the contract. “Asbuilt 

drawings” shall be synonymous with “Record 

drawings.” 

(b) As required by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor 

shall provide the Contracting Officer accurate information 

to be used in the preparation of permanent as-built 

drawings. For this purpose, the Contractor shall record on 

one set of contract drawings all changes from the 

installations originally indicated, and record final locations 

of underground lines by depth from finish grade and by 

accurate horizontal offset distances to permanent surface 

improvements such as buildings, curbs, or edges of 

walks. 

(c) This clause shall be included in all subcontracts at any 

tier. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to 

ensure that all as-built drawings prepared by 

subcontractors are submitted to the Contracting Officer. 

11. Material and Workmanship 

(a) All equipment, material, and articles furnished under this 

contract shall be new and of the most suitable grade for 

the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically 

provided in this contract. References in the contract to 

equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by 

trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded 

as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be 

construed as limiting competition. The Contractor may, at 

its option, use any equipment, material, article, or 

process that, in the judgment of, and as approved by the 

Contracting Officer, is equal to that named in the 

specifications, unless otherwise specifically provided in 


(b) Approval of equipment and materials. 

(1) The Contractor shall obtain the Contracting Officer’s 

approval of the machinery and mechanical and other 

equipment to be incorporated into the work. When 

requesting approval, the Contractor shall furnish to 

the Contracting Officer the name of the manufacturer, 

the model number, and other information concerning 

the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the 

machinery and mechanical and other equipment. 

When required by this contract or by the Contracting 

Officer, the Contractor shall also obtain the 

Contracting Officer’s approval of the material or 

articles which the Contractor contemplates 

incorporating into the work. When requesting 

approval, the Contractor shall provide full information 

concerning the material or articles. Machinery, 

equipment, material, and articles that do not have the 

required approval shall be installed or used at the risk 

of subsequent rejection. 

(2) When required by the specifications or the 

Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall submit 

appropriately marked samples (and certificates 

related to them) for approval at the Contractor’s 

expense, with all shipping charges prepaid. The 

Contractor shall label, or otherwise properly mark on 

the container, the material or product represented, its 

place of origin, the name of the producer, the 

Contractor’s name, and the identification of the 

construction project for which the material or product 

is intended to be used. 

(3) Certificates shall be submitted in triplicate, describing 

each sample submitted for approval and certifying 

that the material, equipment or accessory complies 

with contract requirements. The certificates shall 

include the name and brand of the product, name of 

manufacturer, and the location where produced. 

(4) Approval of a sample shall not constitute a waiver of 

the PHA right to demand full compliance with contract 

requirements. Materials, equipment and accessories 

may be rejected for cause even though samples have 

been approved. 

(5) Wherever materials are required to comply with 

recognized standards or specifications, such 

specifications shall be accepted as establishing the 

technical qualities and testing methods, but shall not 

govern the number of tests required to be made nor 

modify other contract requirements. The Contracting 

Officer may require laboratory test reports on items 

submitted for approval or may approve materials on 

the basis of data submitted in certificates with 

samples. Check tests will be made on materials 

delivered for use only as frequently as the Contracting 

Officer determines necessary to insure compliance of 

materials with the specifications. The Contractor will 

assume all costs of retesting materials which fail to 

meet contract requirements and/or testing materials 

offered in substitution for those found deficient. 

(6) After approval, samples will be kept in the Project 

office until completion of work. They may be built into 

the work after a substantial quantity of the materials 

they represent has been built in and accepted. 

(c) Requirements concerning lead-based paint. The 

Contractor shall comply with the requirements concerning 

lead-based paint contained in the Lead-Based Paint 

Poisoning Prevention Act (42 U.S.C. 4821-4846) as 

implemented by 24 CFR Part 35. 

12. Permits and Codes 

(a) The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all 

applicable laws, ordinances, codes, rules and 

regulations. Notwithstanding the requirement of the 

Contractor to comply with the drawings and specifications 

in the contract, all work installed shall comply with all 

applicable codes and regulations as amended by any 



waivers. Before installing the work, the Contractor shall 

examine the drawings and the specifications for 

compliance with applicable codes and regulations 

bearing on the work and shall immediately report any 

discrepancy it may discover to the Contracting Officer. 

Where the requirements of the drawings and 

specifications fail to comply with the applicable code or 

regulation, the Contracting Officer shall modify the 

contract by change order pursuant to the clause entitled 

Changes herein to conform to the code or regulation. 

(b) The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, fees, 

and licenses necessary for the proper execution and 

completion of the work. Where the PHA can arrange for 

the issuance of all or part of these permits, fees and 

licenses, without cost to the Contractor, the contract 

amount shall be reduced accordingly. 

13. Health, Safety, and Accident Prevention 

(a) In performing this contract, the Contractor shall: 

(1) Ensure that no laborer or mechanic shall be required 

to work in surroundings or under working conditions 

which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to 

his/her health and/or safety as determined under 

construction safety and health standards promulgated 

by the Secretary of Labor by regulation; 

(2) Protect the lives, health, and safety of other persons; 

(3) Prevent damage to property, materials, supplies, and 

equipment; and, 

(4) Avoid work interruptions. 

(b) For these purposes, the Contractor shall: 

(1) Comply with regulations and standards issued by the 

Secretary of Labor at 29 CFR Part 1926. Failure to 

comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant 

to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act 

(Public Law 91-54, 83 Stat. 96), 40 U.S.C. 3701 et 

seq.; and 

(2) Include the terms of this clause in every subcontract 

so that such terms will be binding on each 

subcontractor. 

(c) The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of 

exposure data on all accidents incident to work 

performed under this contract resulting in death, 

traumatic injury, occupational disease, or damage to 

property, materials, supplies, or equipment, and shall 

report this data in the manner prescribed by 29 CFR Part 

1904. 

(d) The Contracting Officer shall notify the Contractor of any 

noncompliance with these requirements and of the 

corrective action required. This notice, when delivered to 

the Contractor or the Contractor’s representative at the 

site of the work, shall be deemed sufficient notice of the 

noncompliance and corrective action required. After 

receiving the notice, the Contractor shall immediately 

take corrective action. If the Contractor fails or refuses to 

take corrective action promptly, the Contracting Officer 

may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until 

satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The 

Contractor shall not base any claim or request for 

equitable adjustment for additional time or money on any 

stop order issued under these circumstances. 

(e) The Contractor shall be responsible for its subcontractors’ 

compliance with the provisions of this clause. The 

Contractor shall take such action with respect to any 

subcontract as the PHA, the Secretary of Housing and 

Urban Development, or the Secretary of Labor shall 

direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 

14. Temporary Heating 

The Contractor shall provide and pay for temporary 

heating, covering, and enclosures necessary to properly 

protect all work and materials against damage by 

dampness and cold, to dry out the work, and to facilitate 

the completion of the work. Any permanent heating 

equipment used shall be turned over to the PHA in the 

condition and at the time required by the specifications. 

15. Availability and Use of Utility Services 

(a) The PHA shall make all reasonably required amounts of 

utilities available to the Contractor from existing outlets 

and supplies, as specified in the contract. Unless 

otherwise provided in the contract, the amount of each 

utility service consumed shall be charged to or paid for by 

the Contractor at prevailing rates charged to the PHA or, 

where the utility is produced by the PHA, at reasonable 

rates determined by the Contracting Officer. The 

Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities furnished 

without charge. 

(b) The Contractor, at its expense and in a manner 

satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, shall install and 

maintain all necessary temporary connections and 

distribution lines, and all meters required to measure the 

amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining 

charges. Before final acceptance of the work by the PHA, 

the Contractor shall remove all the temporary 

connections, distribution lines, meters, and associated 

paraphernalia. 

16. Protection of Existing Vegetation, Structures, 

Equipment, Utilities, and Improvements 

(a) The Contractor shall preserve and protect all structures, 

equipment, and vegetation (such as trees, shrubs, and 

grass) on or adjacent to the work site, which are not to be 

removed under this contract, and which do not 

unreasonably interfere with the work required under this 

contract. 

(b) The Contractor shall only remove trees when specifically 

authorized to do so, and shall avoid damaging vegetation 

that will remain in place. If any limbs or branches of trees 

are broken during performance of this contract, or by the 

careless operation of equipment, or by workmen, the 

Contractor shall trim those limbs or branches with a clean 

cut and paint the cut with a tree-pruning compound as 

directed by the Contracting Officer. 

(c) The Contractor shall protect from damage all existing 

improvements and utilities (1) at or near the work site and 

(2) on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of 

which are made known to or should be known by the 

Contractor. Prior to disturbing the ground at the 

construction site, the Contractor shall ensure that all 

underground utility lines are clearly marked. 

(d) The Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin, secure, 

and protect as necessary all foundations and other parts 

of existing structures adjacent to, adjoining, and in the 

vicinity of the site, which may be affected by the 

excavations or other operations connected with the 

construction of the project. 

(e) Any equipment temporarily removed as a result of work 

under this contract shall be protected, cleaned, and 

replaced in the same condition as at the time of award of 




(f) New work which connects to existing work shall 

correspond in all respects with that to which it connects 

and/or be similar to existing work unless otherwise 

required by the specifications. 

(g) No structural members shall be altered or in any way 

weakened without the written authorization of the 

Contracting Officer, unless such work is clearly specified 

in the plans or specifications. 

(h) If the removal of the existing work exposes discolored or 

unfinished surfaces, or work out of alignment, such 

surfaces shall be refinished, or the material replaced as 

necessary to make the continuous work uniform and 

harmonious. This, however, shall not be construed to 

require the refinishing or reconstruction of dissimilar 

finishes previously exposed, or finished surfaces in good 

condition, but in different planes or on different levels 

when brought together by the removal of intervening 

work, unless such refinishing or reconstruction is 

specified in the plans or specifications. 

(i) The Contractor shall give all required notices to any 

adjoining or adjacent property owner or other party before 

the commencement of any work. 

(j) The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the 

PHA from any damages on account of settlement or the 

loss of lateral support of adjoining property, any damages 

from changes in topography affecting drainage, and from 

all loss or expense and all damages for which the PHA 

may become liable in consequence of such injury or 

damage to adjoining and adjacent structures and their 

premises. 

(k) The Contractor shall repair any damage to vegetation, 

structures, equipment, utilities, or improvements, 

including those that are the property of a third party, 

resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of 

this contract or failure to exercise reasonable care in 

performing the work. If the Contractor fails or refuses to 

repair the damage promptly, the Contracting Officer may 

have the necessary work performed and charge the cost 

to the Contractor. 

17. Temporary Buildings and Transportation of Materials 

(a) Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices, 

sanitary facilities) and utilities may be erected by the 

Contractor only with the approval of the Contracting 

Officer and shall be built with labor and materials 

furnished by the Contractor without expense to the PHA. 

The temporary buildings and utilities shall remain the 

property of the Contractor and shall be removed by the 

Contractor at its expense upon completion of the work. 

With the written consent of the Contracting Officer, the 

buildings and utilities may be abandoned and need not 

be removed. 

(b) The Contractor shall, as directed by the Contracting 

Officer, use only established roadways, or use temporary 

roadways constructed by the Contractor when and as 

authorized by the Contracting Officer. When materials are 

transported in prosecuting the work, vehicles shall not be 

loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the 

manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by any federal, 

state, or local law or regulation. When it is necessary to 

cross curbs or sidewalks, the Contractor shall protect 

them from damage. The Contractor shall repair or pay for 

the repair of any damaged curbs, sidewalks, or roads. 

18. Clean Air and Water 

The contactor shall comply with the Clean Air Act, as 

amended, 42 USC 7401 et seq., the Federal Water 

Pollution Control Water Act, as amended, 33 U.S.C. 1251 

et seq., and standards issued pursuant thereto in the 

facilities in which this contract is to be performed. 

19. Energy Efficiency 

The Contractor shall comply with mandatory standards 

and policies relating to energy efficiency which are 

contained in the energy conservation plan issued in 

compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act 

(Pub.L. 94-163) for the State in which the work under the 

contract is performed. 

20. Inspection and Acceptance of Construction 

(a) Definitions. As used in this clause - 

(1) “Acceptance” means the act of an authorized 

representative of the PHA by which the PHA approves 

and assumes ownership of the work performed under this 

contract. Acceptance may be partial or complete. 

(2) “Inspection” means examining and testing the work 

performed under the contract (including, when 

appropriate, raw materials, equipment, components, and 

intermediate assemblies) to determine whether it 

conforms to contract requirements. 

(3) “Testing” means that element of inspection that 

determines the properties or elements, including 

functional operation of materials, equipment, or their 

components, by the application of established scientific 

principles and procedures. 

(b) The Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection 

system and perform such inspections as will ensure that 

the work performed under the contract conforms to 

contract requirements. All work is subject to PHA 

inspection and test at all places and at all reasonable 

times before acceptance to ensure strict compliance with 

the terms of the contract. 

(c) PHA inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of the 

PHA and do not: (1) relieve the Contractor of 

responsibility for providing adequate quality control 

measures; (2) relieve the Contractor of responsibility for 

loss or damage of the material before acceptance; (3) 

constitute or imply acceptance; or, (4) affect the 

continuing rights of the PHA after acceptance of the 

completed work under paragraph (j) below. 

(d) The presence or absence of the PHA inspector does not 

relieve the Contractor from any contract requirement, nor 

is the inspector authorized to change any term or 

condition of the specifications without the Contracting 

Officer’s written authorization. All instructions and 

approvals with respect to the work shall be given to the 

Contractor by the Contracting Officer. 

(e) The Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional 

charge, all facilities, labor, and material reasonably 

needed for performing such safe and convenient 

inspections and tests as may be required by the 

Contracting Officer. The PHA may charge to the 

Contractor any additional cost of inspection or test when 

work is not ready at the time specified by the Contractor 

for inspection or test, or when prior rejection makes 

reinspection or retest necessary. The PHA shall perform 

all inspections and tests in a manner that will not 

unnecessarily delay the work. Special, full size, and 

performance tests shall be performed as described in the 

contract. 



(f) The PHA may conduct routine inspections of the 

construction site on a daily basis. 

(g) The Contractor shall, without charge, replace or correct 

work found by the PHA not to conform to contract 

requirements, unless the PHA decides that it is in its 

interest to accept the work with an appropriate 

adjustment in contract price. The Contractor shall 

promptly segregate and remove rejected material from 

the premises. 

(h) If the Contractor does not promptly replace or correct 

rejected work, the PHA may (1) by contract or otherwise, 

replace or correct the work and charge the cost to the 

Contractor, or (2) terminate for default the Contractor’s 

right to proceed. 

(i) If any work requiring inspection is covered up without approval 

of the PHA, it must, if requested by the Contracting 

Officer, be uncovered at the expense of the Contractor. If 

at any time before final acceptance of the entire work, the 

PHA considers it necessary or advisable, to examine 

work already completed by removing or tearing it out, the 

Contractor, shall on request, promptly furnish all 

necessary facilities, labor, and material. If such work is 

found to be defective or nonconforming in any material 

respect due to the fault of the Contractor or its 

subcontractors, the Contractor shall defray all the 

expenses of the examination and of satisfactory 

reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to meet 

the requirements of the contract, the Contracting Officer 

shall make an equitable adjustment to cover the cost of 

the examination and reconstruction, including, if 

completion of the work was thereby delayed, an 

extension of time. 

(j) The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in 

writing, as to the date when in its opinion all or a 

designated portion of the work will be substantially 

completed and ready for inspection. If the Architect 

determines that the state of preparedness is as 

represented, the PHA will promptly arrange for the 

inspection. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the 

PHA shall accept, as soon as practicable after completion 

and inspection, all work required by the contract or that 

portion of the work the Contracting Officer determines 

and designates can be accepted separately. Acceptance 

shall be final and conclusive except for latent defects, 

fraud, gross mistakes amounting to fraud, or the PHA’s 

right under any warranty or guarantee. 

21. Use and Possession Prior to Completion 

(a) The PHA shall have the right to take possession of or use 

any completed or partially completed part of the work. 

Before taking possession of or using any work, the 

Contracting Officer shall furnish the Contractor a list of 

items of work remaining to be performed or corrected on 

those portions of the work that the PHA intends to take 

possession of or use. However, failure of the Contracting 

Officer to list any item of work shall not relieve the 

Contractor of responsibility for complying with the terms 

of the contract. The PHA’s possession or use shall not be 

deemed an acceptance of any work under the contract. 

(b) While the PHA has such possession or use, the 

Contractor shall be relieved of the responsibility for (1) 

the loss of or damage to the work resulting from the 

PHA’s possession or use, notwithstanding the terms of 

the clause entitled Permits and Codes herein; (2) all 

maintenance costs on the areas occupied; and, (3) 

furnishing heat, light, power, and water used in the areas 

occupied without proper remuneration therefore. If prior 

possession or use by the PHA delays the progress of the 

work or causes additional expense to the Contractor, an 

equitable adjustment shall be made in the contract price 

or the time of completion, and the contract shall be 

modified in writing accordingly. 

22. Warranty of Title 

The Contractor warrants good title to all materials, 

supplies, and equipment incorporated in the work and 

agrees to deliver the premises together with all 

improvements thereon free from any claims, liens or 

charges, and agrees further that neither it nor any other 

person, firm or corporation shall have any right to a lien 

upon the premises or anything appurtenant thereto. 

23. Warranty of Construction 

(a) In addition to any other warranties in this contract, the 

Contractor warrants, except as provided in paragraph (j) 

of this clause, that work performed under this contract 

conforms to the contract requirements and is free of any 

defect in equipment, material, or workmanship performed 

by the Contractor or any subcontractor or supplier at any 

tier. This warranty shall continue for a period of ________ 

(one year unless otherwise indicated) from the date of 

final acceptance of the work. If the PHA takes possession 

of any part of the work before final acceptance, this 

warranty shall continue for a period of (one year unless 

otherwise indicated) from the date that the PHA takes 

possession. 

(b) The Contractor shall remedy, at the Contractor’s 

expense, any failure to conform, or any defect. In 

addition, the Contractor shall remedy, at the Contractor’s 

expense, any damage to PHA-owned or controlled real or 

personal property when the damage is the result of— 

(1) The Contractor’s failure to conform to contract requirements; 

or 

(2) Any defects of equipment, material, workmanship or 

design furnished by the Contractor. 

(c) The Contractor shall restore any work damaged in 

fulfilling the terms and conditions of this clause. The 

Contractor’s warranty with respect to work repaired or 

replaced will run for (one year unless otherwise indicated) 

from the date of repair or replacement. 

(d) The Contracting Officer shall notify the Contractor, in 

writing, within a reasonable time after the discovery of 

any failure, defect or damage. 

(e) If the Contractor fails to remedy any failure, defect, or 

damage within a reasonable time after receipt of notice, 

the PHA shall have the right to replace, repair or 

otherwise remedy the failure, defect, or damage at the 

Contractor’s expense. 

(f) With respect to all warranties, express or implied, from 

subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers for work 

performed and materials furnished under this contract, 

the Contractor shall: 

(1) Obtain all warranties that would be given in normal 

commercial practice; 

(2) Require all warranties to be executed in writing, for the 

benefit of the PHA; and, 

(3) Enforce all warranties for the benefit of the PHA. 

(g) In the event the Contractor’s warranty under paragraph 

(a) of this clause has expired, the PHA may bring suit at 

its own expense to enforce a subcontractor’s, 

manufacturer’s or supplier’s warranty. 



(h) Unless a defect is caused by the negligence of the 

Contractor or subcontractor or supplier at any tier, the 

Contractor shall not be liable for the repair of any defect 

of material or design furnished by the PHA nor for the 

repair of any damage that results from any defect in PHA 

furnished material or design. 

(i) Notwithstanding any provisions herein to the contrary, the 

establishment of the time periods in paragraphs (a) and 

(c) above relate only to the specific obligation of the 

Contractor to correct the work, and have no relationship 

to the time within which its obligation to comply with the 

contract may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time 

within which proceedings may be commenced to 

establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to its 

obligation other than specifically to correct the work. 

(j) This warranty shall not limit the PHA’s rights under the 

Inspection and Acceptance of Construction clause of this 

contract with respect to latent defects, gross mistakes or 

fraud. 

24. Prohibition Against Liens 

The Contractor is prohibited from placing a lien on the 

PHA’s property. This prohibition shall apply to all 

subcontractors at any tier and all materials suppliers. 

Administrative Requirements 

25. Contract Period 

The Contractor shall complete all work required under 

this contract within _______ calendar days of the 

effective date of the contract, or within the time schedule 

established in the notice to proceed issued by the 

Contracting Officer. 

26. Order of Provisions 

In the event of a conflict between these General 

Conditions and the Specifications, the General 

Conditions shall prevail. In the event of a conflict between 

the contract and any applicable state or local law or 

regulation, the state or local law or regulation shall 

prevail; provided that such state or local law or regulation 

does not conflict with, or is less restrictive than applicable 

federal law, regulation, or Executive Order. In the event 

of such a conflict, applicable federal law, regulation, and 

Executive Order shall prevail. 

27. Payments 

(a) The PHA shall pay the Contractor the price as provided in 


(b) The PHA shall make progress payments approximately 

every 30 days as the work proceeds, on estimates of 

work accomplished which meets the standards of quality 

established under the contract, as approved by the 

Contracting Officer. The PHA may, subject to written 

determination and approval of the Contracting Officer, 

make more frequent payments to contractors which are 

qualified small businesses. 

(c) Before the first progress payment under this contract, the 

Contractor shall furnish, in such detail as requested by 

the Contracting Officer, a breakdown of the total contract 

price showing the amount included therein for each 

principal category of the work, which shall substantiate 

the payment amount requested in order to provide a 

basis for determining progress payments. The breakdown 

shall be approved by the Contracting Officer and must be 

acceptable to HUD. If the contract covers more than one 

project, the Contractor shall furnish a separate 

breakdown for each. The values and quantities employed 

in making up this breakdown are for determining the 

amount of progress payments and shall not be construed 

as a basis for additions to or deductions from the contract 

price. The Contractor shall prorate its overhead and profit 

over the construction period of the contract. 

(d) The Contractor shall submit, on forms provided by the 

PHA, periodic estimates showing the value of the work 

performed during each period based upon the approved 

breakdown of the contract price. Such estimates shall be 

submitted not later than _________ days in advance of 

the date set for payment and are subject to correction 

and revision as required. The estimates must be 

approved by the Contracting Officer with the concurrence 

of the Architect prior to payment. If the contract covers 

more than one project, the Contractor shall furnish a 

separate progress payment estimate for each. 

(e) Along with each request for progress payments and the 

required estimates, the Contractor shall furnish the 

following certification, or payment shall not be made: 

I hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge and belief, 

that: 

(1) The amounts requested are only for performance in 

accordance with the specifications, terms, and 

conditions of the contract; 

(2) Payments to subcontractors and suppliers have been 

made from previous payments received under the 

contract, and timely payments will be made from the 

proceeds of the payment covered by this certification, 

in accordance with subcontract agreements; and, 

(3) This request for progress payments does not include 

any amounts which the prime contractor intends to 

withhold or retain from a subcontractor or supplier in 

accordance with the terms and conditions of the 

subcontract. 

_________________________________________ 

Name: 

_________________________________________ 

Title: 

_________________________________________ 

Date: 

(f) Except as otherwise provided in State law, the PHA shall 

retain ten (10) percent of the amount of progress 

payments until completion and acceptance of all work 

under the contract; except, that if upon completion of 50 

percent of the work, the Contracting Officer, after 

consulting with the Architect, determines that the 

Contractor’s performance and progress are satisfactory, 

the PHA may make the remaining payments in full for the 

work subsequently completed. If the Contracting Officer 

subsequently determines that the Contractor’s 

performance and progress are unsatisfactory, the PHA 

shall reinstate the ten (10) percent (or other percentage 

as provided in State law) retainage until such time as the 

Contracting Officer determines that performance and 

progress are satisfactory. 

(g) The Contracting Officer may authorize material delivered 

on the site and preparatory work done to be taken into 

consideration when computing progress payments. 



Material delivered to the Contractor at locations other 

than the site may also be taken into consideration if the 

Contractor furnishes satisfactory evidence that (1) it has 

acquired title to such material; (2) the material is properly 

stored in a bonded warehouse, storage yard, or similar 

suitable place as may be approved by the Contracting 

Officer; (3) the material is insured to cover its full value; 

and (4) the material will be used to perform this contract. 

Before any progress payment which includes delivered 

material is made, the Contractor shall furnish such 

documentation as the Contracting Officer may require to 

assure the protection of the PHA’s interest in such 

materials. The Contractor shall remain responsible for 

such stored material notwithstanding the transfer of title 

to the PHA. 

(h) All material and work covered by progress payments 

made shall, at the time of payment become the sole 

property of the PHA, but this shall not be construed as (1) 

relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for all 

material and work upon which payments have been 

made or the restoration of any damaged work; or, (2) 

waiving the right of the PHA to require the fulfillment of all 

of the terms of the contract. In the event the work of the 

Contractor has been damaged by other contractors or 

persons other than employees of the PHA in the course 

of their employment, the Contractor shall restore such 

damaged work without cost to the PHA and to seek 

redress for its damage only from those who directly 

caused it. 

(i) The PHA shall make the final payment due the Contractor 

under this contract after (1) completion and final 

acceptance of all work; and (2) presentation of release of 

all claims against the PHA arising by virtue of this 

contract, other than claims, in stated amounts, that the 

Contractor has specifically excepted from the operation of 

the release. Each such exception shall embrace no more 

than one claim, the basis and scope of which shall be 

clearly defined. The amounts for such excepted claims 

shall not be included in the request for final payment. A 

release may also be required of the assignee if the 

Contractor’s claim to amounts payable under this contract 

has been assigned. 

(j) Prior to making any payment, the Contracting Officer may 

require the Contractor to furnish receipts or other 

evidence of payment from all persons performing work 

and supplying material to the Contractor, if the 

Contracting Officer determines such evidence is 

necessary to substantiate claimed costs. 

(k) The PHA shall not; (1) determine or adjust any claims for 

payment or disputes arising there under between the 

Contractor and its subcontractors or material suppliers; 

or, (2) withhold any moneys for the protection of the 

subcontractors or material suppliers. The failure or 

refusal of the PHA to withhold moneys from the 

Contractor shall in nowise impair the obligations of any 

surety or sureties under any bonds furnished under this 

contract. 

28. Contract Modifications 

(a) Only the Contracting Officer has authority to modify any 

term or condition of this contract. Any contract 

modification shall be authorized in writing. 

(b) The Contracting Officer may modify the contract 

unilaterally (1) pursuant to a specific authorization stated 

in a contract clause (e.g., Changes); or (2) for 

administrative matters which do not change the rights or 

responsibilities of the parties (e.g., change in the PHA 

address). All other contract modifications shall be in the 

form of supplemental agreements signed by the 

Contractor and the Contracting Officer. 

(c) When a proposed modification requires the approval of 

HUD prior to its issuance (e.g., a change order that 

exceeds the PHA’s approved threshold), such 

modification shall not be effective until the required 

approval is received by the PHA. 

29. Changes 

(a) The Contracting Officer may, at any time, without notice 

to the sureties, by written order designated or indicated to 

be a change order, make changes in the work within the 

general scope of the contract including changes: 

(1) In the specifications (including drawings and designs); 

(2) In the method or manner of performance of the work; 

(3) PHA-furnished facilities, equipment, materials, 

services, or site; or, 

(4) Directing the acceleration in the performance of the 

work. 

(b) Any other written order or oral order (which, as used in 

this paragraph (b), includes direction, instruction, 

interpretation, or determination) from the Contracting 

Officer that causes a change shall be treated as a 

change order under this clause; provided, that the 

Contractor gives the Contracting Officer written notice 

stating (1) the date, circumstances and source of the 

order and (2) that the Contractor regards the order as a 

change order. 

(c) Except as provided in this clause, no order, statement or 

conduct of the Contracting Officer shall be treated as a 

change under this clause or entitle the Contractor to an 

equitable adjustment. 

(d) If any change under this clause causes an increase or 

decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or the time required 

for the performance of any part of the work under this 

contract, whether or not changed by any such order, the 

Contracting Officer shall make an equitable adjustment 

and modify the contract in writing. However, except for a 

adjustment based on defective specifications, no 

proposal for any change under paragraph (b) above shall 

be allowed for any costs incurred more than 20 days (5 

days for oral orders) before the Contractor gives written 

notice as required. In the case of defective specifications 

for which the PHA is responsible, the equitable 

adjustment shall include any increased cost reasonably 

incurred by the Contractor in attempting to comply with 

the defective specifications. 

(e) The Contractor must assert its right to an adjustment 

under this clause within 30 days after (1) receipt of a 

written change order under paragraph (a) of this clause, 

or (2) the furnishing of a written notice under paragraph 

(b) of this clause, by submitting a written statement 

describing the general nature and the amount of the 

proposal. If the facts justify it, the Contracting Officer may 

extend the period for submission. The proposal may be 

included in the notice required under paragraph (b) 

above. No proposal by the Contractor for an equitable 

adjustment shall be allowed if asserted after final 

payment under this contract. 

(f) The Contractor’s written proposal for equitable adjustment 

shall be submitted in the form of a lump sum proposal 

supported with an itemized breakdown of all increases 

and decreases in the contract in at least the following 

details: 



(1) Direct Costs. Materials (list individual items, the 

quantity and unit cost of each, and the aggregate 

cost); Transportation and delivery costs associated 

with materials; Labor breakdowns by hours or unit 

costs (identified with specific work to be performed); 

Construction equipment exclusively necessary for the 

change; Costs of preparation and/ or revision to shop 

drawings resulting from the change; Worker’s 

Compensation and Public Liability Insurance; 

Employment taxes under FICA and FUTA; and, Bond 

Costs when size of change warrants revision. 

(2) Indirect Costs. Indirect costs may include overhead, 

general and administrative expenses, and fringe 

benefits not normally treated as direct costs. 

(3) Profit. The amount of profit shall be negotiated and 

may vary according to the nature, extent, and 

complexity of the work required by the change. 

The allowability of the direct and indirect costs shall be 

determined in accordance with the Contract Cost 

Principles and Procedures for Commercial Firms in Part 

31 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (48 CFR 1-31), 

as implemented by HUD Handbook 2210.18, in effect on 

the date of this contract. The Contractor shall not be 

allowed a profit on the profit received by any 

subcontractor. Equitable adjustments for deleted work 

shall include a credit for profit and may include a credit 

for indirect costs. On proposals covering both increases 

and decreases in the amount of the contract, the 

application of indirect costs and profit shall be on the netchange 

in direct costs for the Contractor or subcontractor 

performing the work. 

(g) The Contractor shall include in the proposal its request 

for time extension (if any), and shall include sufficient 

information and dates to demonstrate whether and to 

what extent the change will delay the completion of the 

contract in its entirety. 

(h) The Contracting Officer shall act on proposals within 30 

days after their receipt, or notify the Contractor of the 

date when such action will be taken. 

(i) Failure to reach an agreement on any proposal shall be a 

dispute under the clause entitled Disputes herein. 

Nothing in this clause, however, shall excuse the 

Contractor from proceeding with the contract as changed. 

(j) Except in an emergency endangering life or property, no 

change shall be made by the Contractor without a prior 

order from the Contracting Officer. 

30. Suspension of Work 

(a) The Contracting Officer may order the Contractor in 

writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt all or any part of the 

work of this contract for the period of time that the 

Contracting Officer determines appropriate for the 

convenience of the PHA. 

(b) If the performance of all or any part of the work is, for an 

unreasonable period of time, suspended, delayed, or 

interrupted (1) by an act of the Contracting Officer in the 

administration of this contract, or (2) by the Contracting 

Officer’s failure to act within the time specified (or within a 

reasonable time if not specified) in this contract an 

adjustment shall be made for any increase in the cost of 

performance of the contract (excluding profit) necessarily 

caused by such unreasonable suspension, delay, or 

interruption and the contract modified in writing 

accordingly. However, no adjustment shall be made 

under this clause for any suspension, delay, or 

interruption to the extent that performance would have 

been so suspended, delayed, or interrupted by any other 

cause, including the fault or negligence of the Contractor 

or for which any equitable adjustment is provided for or 

excluded under any other provision of this contract. 

(c) A claim under this clause shall not be allowed (1) for any 

costs incurred more than 20 days before the Contractor 

shall have notified the Contracting Officer in writing of the 

act or failure to act involved (but this requirement shall 

not apply as to a claim resulting from a suspension 

order); and, (2) unless the claim, in an amount stated, is 

asserted in writing as soon as practicable after the 

termination of the suspension, delay, or interruption, but 

not later than the date of final payment under the 

contract. 

31. Disputes 

(a) “Claim,” as used in this clause, means a written demand 

or written assertion by one of the contracting parties 

seeking, as a matter of right, the payment of money in a 

sum certain, the adjustment or interpretation of contract 

terms, or other relief arising under or relating to the 

contract. A claim arising under the contract, unlike a 

claim relating to the contract, is a claim that can be 

resolved under a contract clause that provides for the 

relief sought by the claimant. A voucher, invoice, or other 

routine request for payment that is not in dispute when 

submitted is not a claim. The submission may be 

converted to a claim by complying with the requirements 

of this clause, if it is disputed either as to liability or 

amount or is not acted upon in a reasonable time. 

(b) Except for disputes arising under the clauses entitled 

Labor Standards - Davis Bacon and Related Acts, herein, 

all disputes arising under or relating to this contract, 

including any claims for damages for the alleged breach 

thereof which are not disposed of by agreement, shall be 

resolved under this clause. 

(c) All claims by the Contractor shall be made in writing and 

submitted to the Contracting Officer for a written decision. 

A claim by the PHA against the Contractor shall be 

subject to a written decision by the Contracting Officer. 

(d) The Contracting Officer shall, within 60 (unless otherwise 

indicated) days after receipt of the request, decide the 

claim or notify the Contractor of the date by which the 

decision will be made. 

(e) The Contracting Officer’s decision shall be final unless 

the Contractor (1) appeals in writing to a higher level in 

the PHA in accordance with the PHA’s policy and 

procedures, (2) refers the appeal to an independent 

mediator or arbitrator, or (3) files suit in a court of 

competent jurisdiction. Such appeal must be made within 

(30 unless otherwise indicated) days after receipt of the 

Contracting Officer’s decision. 

(f) The Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance 

of this contract, pending final resolution of any request for 

relief, claim, appeal, or action arising under or relating to 

the contract, and comply with any decision of the 


32. Default 

(a) If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work, or 

any separable part thereof, with the diligence that will 

insure its completion within the time specified in this 

contract, or any extension thereof, or fails to complete 

said work within this time, the Contracting Officer may, by 

written notice to the Contractor, terminate the right to 



proceed with the work (or separable part of the work) that 

has been delayed. In this event, the PHA may take over 

the work and complete it, by contract or otherwise, and 

may take possession of and use any materials, 

equipment, and plant on the work site necessary for 

completing the work. The Contractor and its sureties shall 

be liable for any damage to the PHA resulting from the 

Contractor’s refusal or failure to complete the work within 

the specified time, whether or not the Contractor’s right to 

proceed with the work is terminated. This liability includes 

any increased costs incurred by the PHA in completing 

the work. 

(b) The Contractor’s right to proceed shall not be terminated 

or the Contractor charged with damages under this 

clause if— 

(1) The delay in completing the work arises from 

unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without 

the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Examples of 

such causes include (i) acts of God, or of the public 

enemy, (ii) acts of the PHA or other governmental 

entity in either its sovereign or contractual capacity, 

(iii) acts of another contractor in the performance of a 

contract with the PHA, (iv) fires, (v) floods, (vi) 

epidemics, (vii) quarantine restrictions, (viii) strikes, 

(ix) freight embargoes, (x) unusually severe weather, 

or (xi) delays of subcontractors or suppliers at any tier 

arising from unforeseeable causes beyond the control 

and without the fault or negligence of both the 

Contractor and the subcontractors or suppliers; and 

(2) The Contractor, within days (10 days unless otherwise 

indicated) from the beginning of such delay (unless 

extended by the Contracting Officer) notifies the 

Contracting Officer in writing of the causes of delay. 

The Contracting Officer shall ascertain the facts and 

the extent of the delay. If, in the judgment of the 

Contracting Officer, the findings of fact warrant such 

action, time for completing the work shall be extended 

by written modification to the contract. The findings of 

the Contracting Officer shall be reduced to a written 

decision which shall be subject to the provisions of 

the Disputes clause of this contract. 

(c) If, after termination of the Contractor’s right to proceed, it 

is determined that the Contractor was not in default, or 

that the delay was excusable, the rights and obligations 

of the parties will be the same as if the termination had 

been for convenience of the PHA. 

33. Liquidated Damages 

(a) If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the time 

specified in the contract, or any extension, as specified in 

the clause entitled Default of this contract, the Contractor 

shall pay to the PHA as liquidated damages, the sum of 

$___________ Contracting Officer insert amount] for 

each day of delay. If different completion dates are 

specified in the contract for separate parts or stages of 

the work, the amount of liquidated damages shall be 

assessed on those parts or stages which are delayed. To 

the extent that the Contractor’s delay or nonperformance 

is excused under another clause in this contract, 

liquidated damages shall not be due the PHA. The 

Contractor remains liable for damages caused other than 

by delay. 

(b) If the PHA terminates the Contractor’s right to proceed, 

the resulting damage will consist of liquidated damages 

until such reasonable time as may be required for final 

completion of the work together with any increased costs 

occasioned the PHA in completing the work. 

(c) If the PHA does not terminate the Contractor’s right to 

proceed, the resulting damage will consist of liquidated 

damages until the work is completed or accepted. 

34. Termination for Convenience 

(a) The Contracting Officer may terminate this contract in 

whole, or in part, whenever the Contracting Officer 

determines that such termination is in the best interest of 

the PHA. Any such termination shall be effected by 

delivery to the Contractor of a Notice of Termination 

specifying the extent to which the performance of the 

work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon 

which such termination becomes effective. 

(b) If the performance of the work is terminated, either in 

whole or in part, the PHA shall be liable to the Contractor 

for reasonable and proper costs resulting from such 

termination upon the receipt by the PHA of a properly 

presented claim setting out in detail: (1) the total cost of 

the work performed to date of termination less the total 

amount of contract payments made to the Contractor; (2) 

the cost (including reasonable profit) of settling and 

paying claims under subcontracts and material orders for 

work performed and materials and supplies delivered to 

the site, payment for which has not been made by the 

PHA to the Contractor or by the Contractor to the 

subcontractor or supplier; (3) the cost of preserving and 

protecting the work already performed until the PHA or 

assignee takes possession thereof or assumes 

responsibility therefore; (4) the actual or estimated cost of 

legal and accounting services reasonably necessary to 

prepare and present the termination claim to the PHA; 

and (5) an amount constituting a reasonable profit on the 

value of the work performed by the Contractor. 

(c) The Contracting Officer will act on the Contractor’s claim 

within days (60 days unless otherwise indicated) of 

receipt of the Contractor’s claim. 

(d) Any disputes with regard to this clause are expressly 

made subject to the provisions of the Disputes clause of 


35. Assignment of Contract 

The Contractor shall not assign or transfer any interest in 

this contract; except that claims for monies due or to 

become due from the PHA under the contract may be 

assigned to a bank, trust company, or other financial 

institution. Such assignments of claims shall only be 

made with the written concurrence of the Contracting 

Officer. If the Contractor is a partnership, this contract 

shall inure to the benefit of the surviving or remaining 

member(s) of such partnership as approved by the 


36. Insurance 

(a) Before commencing work, the Contractor and each 

subcontractor shall furnish the PHA with certificates of 

insurance showing the following insurance is in force and 

will insure all operations under the Contract: 

(1) Workers’ Compensation, in accordance with state or 

Territorial Workers’ Compensation laws. 

(2) Commercial General Liability with a combined single 

limit for bodily injury and property damage of not less 

than $________ [Contracting Officer insert amount] 



per occurrence to protect the Contractor and each 

subcontractor against claims for bodily injury or death 

and damage to the property of others. This shall 

cover the use of all equipment, hoists, and vehicles 

on the site(s) not covered by Automobile Liability 

under (3) below. If the Contractor has a “claimsmade” 

policy, then the following additional 

requirements apply: the policy must provide a 

“retroactive date” which must be on or before the 

execution date of the Contract; and the extended 

reporting period may not be less than five years 

following the completion date of the Contract. 

(3) Automobile Liability on owned and non -owned motor 

vehicles used on the site(s) or in connection therewith 

for a combined single limit for bodily injury and 

property damage of not less than $______ 

[Contracting Officer insert amount] per occurrence. 

(b) Before commencing work, the Contractor shall furnish the 

PHA with a certificate of insurance evidencing that 

Builder’s Risk (fire and extended coverage) Insurance on 

all work in place and/or materials stored at the building 

site(s), including foundations and building equipment, is 

in force. The Builder’s Risk Insurance shall be for the 

benefit of the Contractor and the PHA as their interests 

may appear and each shall be named in the policy or 

policies as an insured. The Contractor in installing 

equipment supplied by the PHA shall carry insurance on 

such equipment from the time the Contractor takes 

possession thereof until the Contract work is accepted by 

the PHA. The Builder’s Risk Insurance need not be 

carried on excavations, piers, footings, or foundations 

until such time as work on the superstructure is started. It 

need not be carried on landscape work. Policies shall 

furnish coverage at all times for the full cash value of all 

completed construction, as well as materials in place 

and/or stored at the site(s), whether or not partial 

payment has been made by the PHA. The Contractor 

may terminate this insurance on buildings as of the date 

taken over for occupancy by the PHA. The Contractor is 

not required to carry Builder’s Risk Insurance for 

modernization work which does not involve structural 

alterations or additions and where the PHA’s existing fire 

and extended coverage policy can be endorsed to 

include such work. 

(c) All insurance shall be carried with companies which are 

financially responsible and admitted to do business in the 

State in which the project is located. If any such 

insurance is due to expire during the construction period, 

the Contractor (including subcontractors, as applicable) 

shall not permit the coverage to lapse and shall furnish 

evidence of coverage to the Contracting Officer. All 

certificates of insurance, as evidence of coverage, shall 

provide that no coverage may be canceled or nonrenewed 

by the insurance company until at least 30 days 

prior written notice has been given to the Contracting 

Officer. 

37. Subcontracts 

(a) Definitions. As used in this contract - 

(1) “Subcontract” means any contract, purchase order, or 

other purchase agreement, including modifications 

and change orders to the foregoing, entered into by a 

subcontractor to furnish supplies, materials, 

equipment, and services for the performance of the 

prime contract or a subcontract. 

(2) “Subcontractor” means any supplier, vendor, or firm 

that furnishes supplies, materials, equipment, or 

services to or for the Contractor or another 

subcontractor. 

(b) The Contractor shall not enter into any subcontract with 

any subcontractor who has been temporarily denied 

participation in a HUD program or who has been 

suspended or debarred from participating in contracting 

programs by any agency of the United States 

Government or of the state in which the work under this 

contract is to be performed. 

(c) The Contractor shall be as fully responsible for the acts or 

omissions of its subcontractors, and of persons either 

directly or indirectly employed by them as for the acts or 

omissions of persons directly employed by the 

Contractor. 

(d) The Contractor shall insert appropriate clauses in all 

subcontracts to bind subcontractors to the terms and 

conditions of this contract insofar as they are applicable 

to the work of subcontractors. 

(e) Nothing contained in this contract shall create any 

contractual relationship between any subcontractor and 

the PHA or between the subcontractor and HUD. 

38. Subcontracting with Small and Minority Firms, 

Women’s Business Enterprise, and Labor Surplus 

Area Firms 

The Contractor shall take the following steps to ensure 

that, whenever possible, subcontracts are awarded to 

small business firms, minority firms, women’s business 

enterprises, and labor surplus area firms: 

(a) Placing qualified small and minority businesses and 

women’s business enterprises on solicitation lists; 

(b) Ensuring that small and minority businesses and 

women’s business enterprises are solicited whenever 

they are potential sources; 

(c) Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, 

into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum 

participation by small and minority businesses and 

women’s business enterprises; 

(d) Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirements 

of the contract permit, which encourage participation by 

small and minority businesses and women’s business 

enterprises; and 

(e) Using the services and assistance of the U.S. Small 

Business Administration, the Minority Business 

Development Agency of the U.S. Department of 

Commerce, and State and local governmental small 

business agencies. 

39. Equal Employment Opportunity 

During the performance of this contract, the Contractor 

agrees as follows: 

(a) The Contractor shall not discriminate against any 

employee or applicant for employment because of race, 

color, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap. 

(b) The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that 

applicants are employed, and that employees are treated 

during employment without regard to their race, color, 

religion, sex, national origin, or handicap. Such action 

shall include, but not be limited to, (1) employment, (2) 

upgrading, (3) demotion, (4) transfer, (5) recruitment or 

recruitment advertising, (6) layoff or termination, (7) rates 

of pay or other forms of compensation, and (8) selection 

for training, including apprenticeship. 



(c) The Contractor shall post in conspicuous places available 

to employees and applicants for employment the notices 

to be provided by the Contracting Officer that explain this 

clause. 

(d) The Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements 

for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, 

state that all qualified applicants will receive 

consideration for employment without regard to race, 

color, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap. 

(e) The Contractor shall send, to each labor union or 

representative of workers with which it has a collective 

bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, 

the notice to be provided by the Contracting Officer 

advising the labor union or workers’ representative of the 

Contractor’s commitments under this clause, and post 

copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to 

employees and applicants for employment. 

(f) The Contractor shall comply with Executive Order 11246, 

as amended, and the rules, regulations, and orders of the 

Secretary of Labor. 

(g) The Contractor shall furnish all information and reports 

required by Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 

503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and 

by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of 

Labor, or pursuant thereto. The Contractor shall permit 

access to its books, records, and accounts by the 

Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to 

ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and 

orders. 

(h) In the event of a determination that the Contractor is not 

in compliance with this clause or any rule, regulation, or 

order of the Secretary of Labor, this contract may be 

canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part, 

and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further 

Government contracts, or Federally assisted construction 

contracts under the procedures authorized in Executive 

Order 11246, as amended. In addition, sanctions may be 

imposed and remedies invoked against the Contractor as 

provided in Executive Order 11246, as amended, the 

rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, 

or as otherwise provided by law. 

(i) The Contractor shall include the terms and conditions of 

this clause in every subcontract or purchase order unless 

exempted by the rules, regulations, or orders of the 

Secretary of Labor issued under Executive Order 11246, 

as amended, so that these terms and conditions will be 

binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The 

Contractor shall take such action with respect to any 

subcontract or purchase order as the Secretary of 

Housing and Urban Development or the Secretary of 

Labor may direct as a means of enforcing such 

provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance; 

provided that if the Contractor becomes involved in, or is 

threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor 

as a result of such direction, the Contractor may request 

the United States to enter into the litigation to protect the 

interests of the United States. 

(j) Compliance with the requirements of this clause shall be 

to the maximum extent consistent with, but not in 

derogation of, compliance with section 7(b) of the Indian 

Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act and the 

Indian Preference clause of this contract. 

40. Employment, Training, and Contracting 

Opportunities for Low-Income Persons, Section 3 of 

the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968. 

(a) The work to be performed under this contract is subject to 

the requirements of section 3 of the Housing and Urban 

Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u 

(section 3). The purpose of section 3 is to ensure that 

employment and other economic opportunities generated 

by HUD assistance or HUD-assisted projects covered by 

section 3, shall, to the greatest extent feasible, be 

directed to low- and very low-income persons, particularly 

persons who are recipients of HUD assistance for 

housing. 

(b) The parties to this contract agree to comply with HUD's 

regulations in 24 CFR Part 135, which implement section 

3. As evidenced by their execution of this contract, the 

parties to this contract certify that they are under no 

contractual or other impediment that would prevent them 

from complying with the Part 135 regulations. 

(c) The contractor agrees to send to each labor organization 

or representative of workers with which the contractor 

has a collective bargaining agreement or other 

understanding, if any, a notice advising the labor 

organization or workers' representative of the contractor's 

commitments under this section 3 clause, and will post 

copies of the notice in conspicuous places at the work 

site where both employees and applicants for training 

and employment positions can see the notice. The notice 

shall describe the section 3 preference, shall set forth 

minimum number and job titles subject to hire, availability 

of apprenticeship and training positions, the qualifications 

for each; and the name and location of the person(s) 

taking applications for each of the positions; and the 

anticipated date the work shall begin. 

(d) The contractor agrees to include this section 3 clause in 

every subcontract subject to compliance with regulations 

in 24 CFR Part 135, and agrees to take appropriate 

action, as provided in an applicable provision of the 

subcontract or in this section 3 clause, upon a finding that 

the subcontractor is in violation of the regulations in 24 

CFR Part 135. The contractor will not subcontract with 

any subcontractor where the contractor has notice or 

knowledge that the subcontractor has been found in 

violation of the regulations in 24 CFR Part 135. 

(e) The contractor will certify that any vacant employment 

positions, including training positions, that are filled (1) 

after the contractor is selected but before the contract is 

executed, and (2) with persons other than those to whom 

the regulations of 24 CFR Part 135 require employment 

opportunities to be directed, were not filled to circumvent 

the contractor's obligations under 24 CFR Part 135. 

(f) Noncompliance with HUD's regulations in 24 CFR Part 

135 may result in sanctions, termination of this contract 

for default, and debarment or suspension from future 

HUD assisted contracts. 

(g) With respect to work performed in connection with section 

3 covered Indian housing assistance, section 7(b) of the 

Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act 

(25 U.S.C. 450e) also applies to the work to be 

performed under this contract. Section 7(b) requires that 

to the greatest extent feasible (i) preference and 

opportunities for training and employment shall be given 

to Indians, and (ii) preference in the award of contracts 

and subcontracts shall be given to Indian organizations 

and Indian-owned Economic Enterprises. Parties to this 

contract that are subject to the provisions of section 3 

and section 7(b)agree to comply with section 3 to the 

maximum extent feasible, but not in derogation of 

compliance with section 7(b). 



41. Interest of Members of Congress 

No member of or delegate to the Congress of the United 

States of America shall be admitted to any share or part 

of this contract or to any benefit that may arise therefrom. 

42. Interest of Members, Officers, or Employees and 

Former Members, Officers, or Employees 

No member, officer, or employee of the PHA, no member 

of the governing body of the locality in which the project 

is situated, no member of the governing body of the 

locality in which the PHA was activated, and no other 

public official of such locality or localities who exercises 

any functions or responsibilities with respect to the 

project, shall, during his or her tenure, or for one year 

thereafter, have any interest, direct or indirect, in this 

contract or the proceeds thereof. 

43. Limitations on Payments made to Influence Certain 

Federal Financial Transactions 

(a) The Contractor agrees to comply with Section 1352 of 

Title 31, United States Code which prohibits the use of 

Federal appropriated funds to pay any person for 

influencing or attempting to influence an officer or 

employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, and 

officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a 

Member of Congress in connection with any of the 

following covered Federal actions: the awarding of any 

Federal contract; the making of any Federal grant; the 

making of any Federal loan; the entering into of any 

cooperative agreement; or the modification of any 

Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. 

(b) The Contractor further agrees to comply with the 

requirement of the Act to furnish a disclosure (OMB 

Standard Form LLL, Disclosure of Lobbying Activities) if 

any funds other than Federal appropriated funds 

(including profit or fee received under a covered Federal 

transaction) have been paid, or will be paid, to any 

person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer 

or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an 

officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a 

Member of Congress in connection with a Federal 

contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. 

44. Royalties and Patents 

The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. It 

shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any 

patent rights and shall save the PHA harmless from loss 

on account thereof; except that the PHA shall be 

responsible for all such loss when a particular design, 

process or the product of a particular manufacturer or 

manufacturers is specified and the Contractor has no 

reason to believe that the specified design, process, or 

product is an infringement. If, however, the Contractor 

has reason to believe that any design, process or product 

specified is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor 

shall promptly notify the Contracting Officer. Failure to 

give such notice shall make the Contractor responsible 

for resultant loss. 

45. Examination and Retention of Contractor’s Records 

(a) The PHA, HUD, or Comptroller General of the United 

States, or any of their duly authorized representatives 

shall, until 3 years after final payment under this contract, 

have access to and the right to examine any of the 

Contractor’s directly pertinent books, documents, papers, 

or other records involving transactions related to this 

contract for the purpose of making audit, examination, 

excerpts, and transcriptions. 

(b) The Contractor agrees to include in first-tier subcontracts 

under this contract a clause substantially the same as 

paragraph (a) above. “Subcontract,” as used in this 

clause, excludes purchase orders not exceeding 

$10,000. 

(c) The periods of access and examination in paragraphs (a) 

and (b) above for records relating to (1) appeals under 

the Disputes clause of this contract, (2) litigation or 

settlement of claims arising from the performance of this 

contract, or (3) costs and expenses of this contract to 

which the PHA, HUD, or Comptroller General or any of 

their duly authorized representatives has taken exception 

shall continue until disposition of such appeals, litigation, 

claims, or exceptions. 

46. Labor Standards - Davis-Bacon and Related Acts 

If the total amount of this contract exceeds $2,000, the 

Federal labor standards set forth in the clause below 

shall apply to the development or construction work to be 

performed under the contract. 

(a) Minimum Wages. 

(1) All laborers and mechanics employed under this 

contract in the development or construction of the 

project(s) involved will be paid unconditionally and not 

less often than once a week, and without subsequent 

deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll 

deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the 

Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 

3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits 

(or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment 

computed at rates not less than those contained in the 

wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is 

attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of 

any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist 

between the Contractor and such laborers and 

mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably 

anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section 

1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or 

mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers 

or mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR 

5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs 

incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often 

than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which 

cover the regular weekly period, are deemed to be 

constructively made or incurred during such weekly 

period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the 

appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits in the wage 

determination for the classification of work actually 

performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 

29 CFR 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing 

work in more than one classification may be 

compensated at the rate specified for each classification 

for the time actually worked therein; provided, that the 

employer’s payroll records accurately set forth the time 

spent in each classification in which work is performed. 

The wage determination (including any additional 

classification and wage rates conformed under 29 CFR 

5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall 



e posted at all times by the Contractor and its 

subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and 

accessible place where it can be easily seen by the 

workers. 

(2) (i) Any class of laborers or mechanics, including 

helpers, which is not listed in the wage 

determination and which is to be employed under 

the contract shall be classified in conformance 

with the wage determination. HUD shall approve 

an additional classification and wage rate and 

fringe benefits therefor only when all the following 

criteria have been met: (A) The work to be 

performed by the classification requested is not 

performed by a classification in the wage 

determination; and (B) The classification is utilized 

in the area by the construction industry; and (C) 

The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide 

fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to 

the wage rates contained in the wage 

determination. 

(ii) If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics 

to be employed in the classification (if known), or 

their representatives, and HUD or its designee 

agree on the classification and wage rate 

(including the amount designated for fringe 

benefits where appropriate), a report of the action 

taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee to the 

Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, 

Employee Standards Administration, U.S. 

Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. 

The Administrator, or an authorized 

representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove 

every additional classification action within 30 

days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee 

or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day 

period that additional time is necessary. 

(iii) In the event the Contractor, the laborers or 

mechanics to be employed in the classification or 

their representatives, and HUD or its designee do 

not agree on the proposed classification and wage 

rate (including the amount designated for fringe 

benefits, where appropriate), HUD or its designee 

shall refer the questions, including the views of all 

interested parties and the recommendation of 

HUD or its designee, to the Administrator of the 

Wage and Hour Division for determination. The 

Administrator, or an authorized representative, will 

issue a determination within 30 days of receipt 

and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify 

HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that 

additional time is necessary. 

(iv) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where 

appropriate) determined pursuant to 

subparagraphs (a)(2)(ii) or (iii) of this clause shall 

be paid to all workers performing work in the 

classification under this contract from the first day 

on which work is performed in classification. 

(3) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the 

contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes 

a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly 

rate, the Contractor shall either pay the benefit as 

stated in the wage determination or shall pay another 

bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent 

thereof. 

(4) If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee 

or other third person, the Contractor may consider as 

part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the 

amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in 

providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or 

program; provided, that the Secretary of Labor has 

found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that 

the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have 

been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the 

Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets 

for the meeting of obligations under the plan or 

program. 

(b) Withholding of funds. HUD or its designee shall, upon its 

own action or upon written request of an authorized 

representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or 

cause to be withheld from the Contractor under this 

contract or any other Federal contract with the same 

prime Contractor, or any other Federally-assisted 

contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage 

requirements, which is held by the same prime 

Contractor, so much of the accrued payments or 

advances as may be considered necessary to pay 

laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, 

and helpers, employed by the Contractor or any 

subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the 

contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or 

mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, 

employed or working in the construction or development 

of the project, all or part of the wages required by the 

contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to 

the Contractor, take such action as may be necessary to 

cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, 

or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. 

HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the 

Contractor, disburse such amounts withheld for and on 

account of the Contractor or subcontractor to the 

respective employees to whom they are due. 

(c) Payrolls and basic records. 

(1) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be 

maintained by the Contractor during the course of the 

work and preserved for a period of three years 

thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working in 

the construction or development of the project. Such 

records shall contain the name, address, and social 

security number of each such worker, his or her 

correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid 

(including rates of contributions or costs anticipated 

for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents 

thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of 

the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of 

hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages 

paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found, 

under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv), that the wages of any 

laborer or mechanic include the amount of costs 

reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a 

plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the 

Davis-Bacon Act, the Contractor shall maintain 

records which show that the commitment to provide 

such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program 

is financially responsible, and that the plan or 

program has been communicated in writing to the 

laborers or mechanics affected, and records which 

show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred 

in providing such benefits. Contractors employing 

apprentices or trainees under approved programs 

shall maintain written evidence of the registration of 

apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee 

programs, the registration of the apprentices and 

trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in 

the applicable programs. 



(2) (i) The Contractor shall submit weekly for each week 

in which any contract work is performed a copy of 

all payrolls to the Contracting Officer for 

transmission to HUD or its designee. The payrolls 

submitted shall set out accurately and completely 

all of the information required to be maintained 

under subparagraph (c)(1) of this clause. This 

information may be submitted in any form desired. 

Optional Form WH-347 (Federal Stock Number 

029-005-00014-1) is available for this purpose 

and may be purchased from the Superintendent of 

Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, 

Washington, D.C. 20402. The Contractor is 

responsible for the submission of copies of 

payrolls by all subcontractors. (Approved by the 

Office of Management and Budget under OMB 

Control Number 1214-0149.) 

(ii) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a 

“Statement of Compliance,” signed by the 

Contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent 

who pays or supervises the payment of the 

persons employed under the contract and shall 

certify the following: 

(A) That the payroll for the payroll period contains 

the information required to be maintained 

under paragraph (c) (1) of this clause and that 

such information is correct and complete; 

(B) That each laborer or mechanic (including each 

helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on 

the contract during the payroll period has been 

paid the full weekly wages earned, without 

rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no 

deductions have been made either directly or 

indirectly from the full wages earned, other 

than permissible deductions as set forth in 29 

CFR Part 3; and 

(C) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid 

not less than the applicable wage rates and 

fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the 

classification of work performed, as specified 

in the applicable wage determination 

incorporated into the contract. 

(iii) The weekly submission of a properly executed 

certification set forth on the reverse side of 

Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the 

requirements for submission of the “Statement of 

Compliance” required by subparagraph (c)(2)(ii) of 

this clause. 

(iv) The falsification of any of the above certifications 

may subject the Contractor or subcontractor to 

civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of 

Title 18 and Section 3729 of Title 31 of the United 

States Code. 

(3) The Contractor or subcontractor shall make the 

records required under subparagraph (c)(1) available 

for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized 

representatives of HUD or its designee, the 

Contracting Officer, or the Department of Labor and 

shall permit such representatives to interview 

employees during working hours on the job. If the 

Contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the 

required records or to make them available, HUD or 

its designee may, after written notice to the 

Contractor, take such action as may be necessary to 

cause the suspension of any further payment, 

advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure 

to submit the required records upon request or to 

make such records available may be grounds for 

debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. 

(d) (1) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at 

less than the predetermined rate for the work they 

performed when they are employed pursuant to and 

individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship 

program registered with the U.S. Department of 

Labor, Employment and Training Administration, 

Office of Apprenticeship and Training, Employer and 

Labor Services (OATELS), or with a State 

Apprenticeship Agency recognized by OATELS, or if 

a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of 

probationary employment as an apprentice in such an 

apprenticeship program, who is not individually 

registered in the program, but who has been certified 

by OATELS or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where 

appropriate) to be eligible for probationary 

employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of 

apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft 

classification shall not be greater than the ratio 

permitted to the Contractor as to the entire work force 

under the registered program. Any worker listed on a 

payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not 

registered or otherwise employed as stated in this 

paragraph, shall be paid not less than the applicable 

wage rate on the wage determination for the 

classification of work actually performed. In addition, 

any apprentice performing work on the job site in 

excess of the ratio permitted under the registered 

program shall be paid not less than the applicable 

wage rate on the wage determination for the work 

actually performed. Where a contractor is performing 

construction on a project in a locality other than that in 

which its program is registered, the ratios and wage 

rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman’s 

hourly rate) specified in the Contractor’s or 

subcontractor’s registered program shall be observed. 

Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the 

rate specified in the registered program for the 

apprentice’s level of progress, expressed as a 

percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in 

the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall 

be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the 

provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the 

apprenticeship program does not specify fringe 

benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of 

fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for 

the applicable classification. If the Administrator of the 

Wage and Hour Division determines that a different 

practice prevails for the applicable apprentice 

classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with 

that determination. In the event OATELS, or a State 

Apprenticeship Agency recognized by OATELS, 

withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the 

Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize 

apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined 

rate for the work performed until an acceptable 

program is approved. 

(2) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, 

trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the 

predetermined rate for the work performed unless 

they are employed pursuant to and individually 

registered in a program which has received prior 

approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. 

Department of Labor, Employment and Training 

Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on 

the job site shall not be greater than permitted under 



the plan approved by the Employment and Training 

Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less 

than the rate specified in the approved program for 

the trainee’s level of progress, expressed as a 

percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in 

the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be 

paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions 

of the trainee program. If the trainee program does 

not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the 

full amount of fringe benefits listed in the wage 

determination unless the Administrator of the Wage 

and Hour Division determines that there is an 

apprenticeship program associated with the 

corresponding journeyman wage rate in the wage 

determination which provides for less than full fringe 

benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the 

payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and 

participating in a training plan approved by the 

Employment and Training Administration shall be paid 

not less than the applicable wage rate in the wage 

determination for the classification of work actually 

performed. In addition, any trainee performing work 

on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under 

the registered program shall be paid not less than the 

applicable wage rate in the wage determination for 

the work actually performed. In the event the 

Employment and Training Administration withdraws 

approval of a training program, the Contractor will no 

longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the 

applicable predetermined rate for the work performed 

until an acceptable program is approved. 

(3) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of 

apprentices, trainees, and journeymen under this 

clause shall be in conformity with the equal 

employment opportunity requirements of Executive 

Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. 

(e) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The 

Contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 

Part 3, which are hereby incorporated by reference in this 

contract. 

(f) Contract termination; debarment. A breach of this contract 

clause may be grounds for termination of the contract 

and for debarment as a Contractor and a subcontractor 

as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. 

(g) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and related Act 

requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis- 

Bacon and related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, 

and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this 

contract. 

(h) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out 

of the labor standards provisions of this clause shall not 

be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. 

Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the 

procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 

CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of 

this clause include disputes between the Contractor (or 

any of its subcontractors) and the PHA, HUD, the U.S. 

Department of Labor, or the employees or their 

representatives. 

(i) Certification of eligibility. 

(1) By entering into this contract, the Contractor certifies 

that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm 

who has an interest in the Contractor’s firm is a 

person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by 

the United States Government by virtue of section 

3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). 

(2) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any 

person or firm ineligible for award of a United States 

Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the 

Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). 

(3) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed 

in the U. S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. 

(j) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. As used 

in this paragraph, the terms “laborers” and “mechanics” 

include watchmen and guards. 

(1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or 

subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract 

work which may require or involve the employment of 

laborers or mechanics, including watchmen and 

guards, shall require or permit any such laborer or 

mechanic in any workweek in which the individual is 

employed on such work to work in excess of 40 hours 

in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic 

receives compensation at a rate not less than one 

and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours 

worked in excess of 40 hours in such workweek. 

(2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated 

damages. In the event of any violation of the 

provisions set forth in subparagraph (j)(1) of this 

clause, the Contractor and any subcontractor 

responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid 

wages. In addition, such Contractor and 

subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in 

the case of work done under contract for the District 

of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such 

territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated 

damages shall be computed with respect to each 

individual laborer or mechanic (including watchmen 

and guards) employed in violation of the provisions 

set forth in subparagraph (j)(1) of this clause, in the 

sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such 

individual was required or permitted to work in excess 

of the standard workweek of 40 hours without 

payment of the overtime wages required by 

provisions set forth in subparagraph (j)(1) of this 

clause. 

(3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated 

damages. HUD or its designee shall upon its own 

action or upon written request of an authorized 

representative of the Department of Labor withhold or 

cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on 

account of work performed by the Contractor or 

subcontractor under any such contract or any Federal 

contract with the same prime Contractor, or any other 

Federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract 

Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held 

by the same prime Contractor, such sums as may be 

determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of 

such Contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages 

and liquidated damages as provided in the provisions 

set forth in subparagraph (j)(2) of this clause. 

(k) Subcontracts. The Contractor or subcontractor shall insert 

in any subcontracts all the provisions contained in this 

clause, and such other clauses as HUD or its designee 

may by appropriate instructions require, and also a 

clause requiring the subcontractors to include these 

provisions in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime 

Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any 

subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all these 

provisions. 



47. Non-Federal Prevailing Wage Rates 

(a) Any prevailing wage rate (including basic hourly rate and 

any fringe benefits), determined under State or tribal law 

to be prevailing, with respect to any employee in any 

trade or position employed under the contract, is 

inapplicable to the contract and shall not be enforced 

against the Contractor or any subcontractor, with respect 

to employees engaged under the contract whenever 

such non-Federal prevailing wage rate exceeds: 

(1) The applicable wage rate determined by the Secretary 

of Labor pursuant to the Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 

3141 et seq.) to be prevailing in the locality with 

respect to such trade; 

(b) An applicable apprentice wage rate based thereon 

specified in an apprenticeship program registered with 

the U.S. Department of Labor (DOL) or a DOLrecognized 

State Apprenticeship Agency; or 

(c) An applicable trainee wage rate based thereon specified 

in a DOL-certified trainee program. 

48. Procurement of Recovered Materials. 

(a) In accordance with Section 6002 of the Solid Waste 

Disposal Act, as amended by the Resource Conservation 

and Recovery Act, the Contractor shall procure items 

designated in guidelines of the Environmental Protection 

Agency (EPA) at 40 CFR Part 247 that contain the 

highest percentage of recovered materials practicable, 

consistent with maintaining a satisfactory level of 

competition. The Contractor shall procure items 

designated in the EPA guidelines that contain the highest 

percentage of recovered materials practicable unless the 

Contractor determines that such items: (1) are not 

reasonably available in a reasonable period of time; (2) 

fail to meet reasonable performance standards, which 

shall be determined on the basis of the guidelines of the 

National Institute of Standards and Technology, if 

applicable to the item; or (3) are only available at an 

unreasonable price. 

(b) Paragraph (a) of this clause shall apply to items 

purchased under this contract where: (1) the 

Contractor purchases in excess of $10,000 of the item 

under this contract; or (2) during the preceding 

Federal fiscal year, the Contractor: (i) purchased any 

amount of the items for use under a contract that was 

funded with Federal appropriations and was with a 

Federal agency or a State agency or agency of a 

political subdivision of a State; and (ii) purchased a 

total of in excess of $10,000 of the item both under 

and outside that contract. 



IFB #11-C-018 



24 CFR 85.36 

(Code of Federal Regulations) 


IFB #11-C-018 

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS 

[Title 24, Volume 1] 

[Revised as of April 1, 2010] 

From the U.S. Government Printing Office via GPO Access 

[CITE: 24CFR85.36] 

[Page 504-510] 

TITLE 24--HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT 

PART 85_ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS FOR GRANTS AND COOPERATIVE 

AGREEMENTS TO STATE, LOCAL AND FEDERALLY RECOGNIZED INDIAN TRIBAL 

Subpart C_Post-Award Requirements 

Sec. 85.36 Procurement. 

(a) States. When procuring property and services under a grant, a State will follow the 

same policies and procedures it uses for procurements from its non-Federal funds. The 

State will ensure that every purchase order or other contract includes any clauses 

required by Federal statutes and executive orders and their implementing regulations. 

Other grantees and subgrantees will follow paragraphs (b) through (i) in this section. 

(b) Procurement standards. (1) Grantees and subgrantees will use their own 

procurement procedures which reflect applicable State and local laws and regulations, 

provided that the procurements conform to applicable Federal law and the standards 

identified in this section. 

(2) Grantees and subgrantees will maintain a contract administration 

system which ensures that contractors perform in accordance with the terms, conditions, 

and specifications of their contracts or purchase orders. 

(3) Grantees and subgrantees will maintain a written code of standards of conduct 

governing the performance of their employees engaged in the award and administration 

of contracts. No employee, officer or agent of the grantee or subgrantee shall participate 

in selection, or in the award or administration of a contract supported by Federal funds if 

a conflict of interest, real or apparent, would be involved. Such a conflict would arise 

when: 

(i) The employee, officer or agent, 

(ii) Any member of his immediate family, 

(iii) His or her partner, or 

(iv) An organization which employs, or is about to employ, any of the above, has a 

financial or other interest in the firm selected for award. The grantee's or subgrantee's 

officers, employees or agents will neither solicit nor accept gratuities, favors or anything 

of monetary value from contractors, potential contractors, or parties to subagreements. 

Grantee and subgrantees may set minimum rules where the financial interest is not 

substantial or the gift is an unsolicited item of nominal intrinsic value. To the extent 

permitted by State or local law or regulations, such standards or conduct will provide for 

penalties, sanctions, or other disciplinary actions for violations of such standards by the 

grantee's and subgrantee's officers, employees, or agents, or by contractors or their 

agents. The awarding agency may in regulation provide additional prohibitions relative to 

real, apparent, 

or potential conflicts of interest. 

(4) Grantee and subgrantee procedures will provide for a review of proposed 

procurements to avoid purchase of unnecessary or duplicative items. Consideration 


IFB #11-C-018 

should be given to consolidating or breaking out procurements to obtain a more 

economical purchase. Where appropriate, an analysis will be made of lease versus 

purchase alternatives, and any other appropriate analysis to determine the most 

economical approach. 

(5) To foster greater economy and efficiency, grantees and subgrantees are 

encouraged to enter into State and local intergovernmental agreements for procurement 

or use of common goods and services. 

(6) Grantees and subgrantees are encouraged to use Federal excess and surplus 

property in lieu of purchasing new equipment and property whenever such use is 

feasible and reduces project costs. 

(7) Grantees and subgrantees are encouraged to use value engineering clauses in 

contracts for construction projects of sufficient size to offer reasonable opportunities for 

cost reductions. Value engineering is a systematic and creative analysis of each contract 

item or task to ensure that its essential function is provided at the overall lower cost. 

(8) Grantees and subgrantees will make awards only to responsible contractors 

possessing the ability to perform successfully under the terms and conditions of a 

proposed procurement. Consideration will be given to such matters as contractor 

integrity, compliance with public policy, record of past performance, and financial and 

technical resources. 

(9) Grantees and subgrantees will maintain records sufficient to detail the significant 

history of a procurement. These records will include, but are not necessarily limited to 

the following: rationale for the method of procurement, selection of contract type, 

contractor selection or rejection, and the basis for the contract price. 

(10) Grantees and subgrantees will use time and material type contracts only-- 

(i) After a determination that no other contract is suitable, and 

(ii) If the contract includes a ceiling price that the contractor exceeds at its own risk. 

(11) Grantees and subgrantees alone will be responsible, in accordance with good 

administrative practice and sound business judgment, for the settlement of all 

contractual and administrative issues arising out of procurements. These issues include, 

but are not limited to source evaluation, protests, disputes, and claims. These standards 

do not relieve the grantee or subgrantee of any contractual responsibilities under its 

contracts. Federal agencies will not substitute their judgment for that of the grantee or 

subgrantee unless the matter is primarily a Federal concern. Violations of law will be 

referred to the local, State, or Federal authority having proper 

jurisdiction. 

(12) Grantees and subgrantees will have protest procedures to handle and resolve 

disputes relating to their procurements and shall in all instances disclose information 

regarding the protest to the awarding agency. A protestor must exhaust all administrative 

remedies with the grantee and subgrantee before pursuing a protest with the Federal 

agency. Reviews of protests by the Federal agency will be limited to: 

(i) Violations of Federal law or regulations and the standards of this section (violations 

of State or local law will be under the jurisdiction of State or local authorities) and 

(ii) Violations of the grantee's or subgrantee's protest procedures for failure to review 

a complaint or protest. Protests received by the Federal agency other than those 

specified above will be referred to the grantee or subgrantee. 

(c) Competition. (1) All procurement transactions will be conducted in a manner 

providing full and open competition consistent with the standards of Sec. 85.36. Some of 

the situations considered to be restrictive of competition include but are not limited to: 

(i) Placing unreasonable requirements on firms in order for them to qualify to do 

business, 

(ii) Requiring unnecessary experience and excessive bonding, 


IFB #11-C-018 

(iii) Noncompetitive pricing practices between firms or between affiliated companies, 

(iv) Noncompetitive awards to consultants that are on retainer contracts, 

(v) Organizational conflicts of interest, 

(vi) Specifying only a brand name product instead of allowing an equal product to be 

offered and describing the performance of other relevant requirements of the 

procurement, and 

(vii) Any arbitrary action in the procurement process. 

(2) Grantees and subgrantees will conduct procurements in a manner that prohibits 

the use of statutorily or administratively imposed in-State or local geographical 

preferences in the evaluation of bids or proposals, except 

in those cases where applicable Federal statutes expressly mandate or encourage 

geographic preference. Nothing in this section preempts State licensing laws. When 

contracting for architectural and engineering (A/E) services, geographic location may be 

a selection criteria provided its application leaves an appropriate number of qualified 

firms, given the nature and size of the project, to compete for the contract. 

(3) Grantees will have written selection procedures for procurement transactions. 

These procedures will ensure that all solicitations: 

(i) Incorporate a clear and accurate description of the technical requirements for the 

material, product, or service to be procured. Such description shall not, in competitive 

procurements, contain features which unduly restrict competition. The description may 

include a statement of the qualitative nature of the material, product or service to be 

procured, and when necessary, shall set forth those minimum essential characteristics 

and standards to which it must conform if it is to satisfy its intended use. Detailed 

product specifications should be avoided if at all possible. When it is impractical or 

uneconomical to make a clear and accurate description of the technical requirements, a 

brand name or equal description may be used as a means to define the performance or 

other salient requirements of a procurement. The specific features of the named brand 

which must be met by offerors shall be clearly stated; and 

(ii) Identify all requirements which the offerors must fulfill and all other factors to be 

used in evaluating bids or proposals. 

(4) Grantees and subgrantees will ensure that all prequalified lists of persons, firms, or 

products which are used in acquiring goods and services are current and include enough 

qualified sources to ensure maximum open and free competition. Also, grantees and 

subgrantees will not preclude potential bidders from qualifying during the solicitation 

period. 

(d) Methods of procurement to be followed. (1) Procurement by small purchase 

procedures. Small purchase procedures are those relatively simple and informal 

procurement methods for securing services, supplies, or other property that do not cost 

more than the simplified acquisition threshold fixed at 41 U.S.C. 403(11) (currently set at 

$100,000). If small purchase procedures are used, price or rate quotations shall be 

obtained from an adequate number of qualified sources. 

(2) Procurement by sealed bids (formal advertising). Bids are publicly solicited and a 

firm-fixed-price contract (lump sum or unit price) is awarded to the responsible bidder 

whose bid, conforming with all the material terms and conditions of the invitation for bids, 

is the lowest in price. The sealed bid method is the preferred method for procuring 

construction, if the conditions in Sec. 85.36(d)(2)(i) apply. 

(i) In order for sealed bidding to be feasible, the following conditions should be 

present: 

(A) A complete, adequate, and realistic specification or purchase description is 

available; 


IFB #11-C-018 

(B) Two or more responsible bidders are willing and able to compete effectively and 

for the business; and 

(C) The procurement lends itself to a firm fixed price contract and the selection of the 

successful bidder can be made principally on the basis of price. 

(ii) If sealed bids are used, the following requirements apply: 

(A) The invitation for bids will be publicly advertised and bids shall be solicited from an 

adequate number of known suppliers, providing them sufficient time prior to the date set 

for opening the bids; 

(B) The invitation for bids, which will include any specifications and pertinent 

attachments, shall define the items or services in order for the bidder to properly 

respond; 

(C) All bids will be publicly opened at the time and place prescribed in the invitation for 

bids; 

(D) A firm fixed-price contract award will be made in writing to the lowest responsive 

and responsible bidder. Where specified in bidding documents, factors such as 

discounts, transportation cost, and life cycle costs shall be considered in determining 

which bid is lowest. 

Payment discounts will only be used to determine the low bid when prior experience 

indicates that such discounts are usually taken advantage of; and 

(E) Any or all bids may be rejected if there is a sound documented reason. 

(3) Procurement by competitive proposals. The technique of competitive proposals is 

normally conducted with more than one source submitting an offer, and either a fixedprice 

or cost-reimbursement type contract is awarded. It is generally used when 

conditions are not appropriate for the use of sealed bids. If this method is used, the 

following requirements apply: 

(i) Requests for proposals will be publicized and identify all evaluation factors and 

their relative importance. Any response to publicized requests for proposals shall be 

honored to the maximum extent practical; 

(ii) Proposals will be solicited from an adequate number of qualified sources; 

(iii) Grantees and subgrantees will have a method for conducting technical evaluations 

of the proposals received and for selecting awardees; 

(iv) Awards will be made to the responsible firm whose proposal is most 

advantageous to the program, with price and other factors considered; and 

(v) Grantees and subgrantees may use competitive proposal procedures for 

qualifications-based procurement of architectural/engineering (A/E) professional services 

whereby competitors' qualifications are evaluated and the most qualified competitor is 

selected, subject to negotiation of fair and reasonable compensation. The method, 

where price is not used as a selection factor, can only be used in procurement of A/E 

professional services. It cannot be used to purchase other types of services though A/E 

firms are a potential source to perform the proposed effort. 

(4) Procurement by noncompetitive proposals is procurement through solicitation of a 

proposal from only one source, or after solicitation of a number of sources, competition 

is determined inadequate. 

(i) Procurement by noncompetitive proposals may be used only when the award of a 

contract is infeasible under small purchase procedures, sealed bids or competitive 

proposals and one of the following circumstances applies: 

(A) The item is available only from a single source; 

(B) The public exigency or emergency for the requirement will not permit a delay 

resulting from competitive solicitation; 

(C) The awarding agency authorizes noncompetitive proposals; or 

(D) After solicitation of a number of sources, competition is determined inadequate. 


IFB #11-C-018 

(ii) Cost analysis, i.e., verifying the proposed cost data, the projections of the data, 

and the evaluation of the specific elements of costs and profits, is required. 

(iii) Grantees and subgrantees may be required to submit the proposed procurement 

to the awarding agency for pre-award review in accordance with paragraph (g) of this 

section. 

(e) Contracting with small and minority firms, women's business enterprise and labor 

surplus area firms. (1) The grantee and subgrantee will take all necessary affirmative 

steps to assure that minority firms, women's business enterprises, and labor surplus 

area firms are used when possible. 

(2) Affirmative steps shall include: 

(i) Placing qualified small and minority businesses and women's business enterprises 

on solicitation lists; 

(ii) Assuring that small and minority businesses, and women's business enterprises 

are solicited whenever they are potential sources; 

(iii) Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or 

quantities to permit maximum participation by small and minority business, and women's 

business enterprises; 

(iv) Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirement permits, which encourage 

participation by small and minority business, and women's business enterprises; 

(v) Using the services and assistance of the Small Business Administration, and the 

Minority Business Development Agency of the Department of Commerce; and 

(vi) Requiring the prime contractor, if subcontracts are to be let, to take the affirmative 

steps listed in paragraphs (e)(2) (i) through (v) of this section. 

(f) Contract cost and price. (1) Grantees and subgrantees must perform a cost or price 

analysis in connection with every procurement action including contract modifications. 

The method and degree of analysis is dependent on the facts surrounding the particular 

procurement situation, but as a starting point, grantees must make independent 

estimates before receiving bids or proposals. A cost analysis must be performed when 

the offeror is required to submit the elements of his estimated cost, e.g., under 

professional, consulting, and architectural engineering services contracts. A cost 

analysis will be necessary when adequate price competition is lacking, and for sole 

source procurements, including contract modifications or change orders, unless price 

reasonableness can be established on the basis of a catalog or market price of a 

commercial product sold in substantial quantities to the general public or based on 

prices set by law or regulation. A price analysis will be used in all other instances to 

determine the reasonableness of the proposed contract price. 

(2) Grantees and subgrantees will negotiate profit as a separate element of the price 

for each contract in which there is no price competition and in all cases where cost 

analysis is performed. To establish a fair and reasonable profit, consideration will be 

given to the complexity of the work to be performed, the risk borne by the contractor, the 

contractor's investment, the amount of subcontracting, the quality of its record of past 

performance, and industry profit rates in the surrounding geographical area for similar 

work. 

(3) Costs or prices based on estimated costs for contracts under grants will be 

allowable only to the extent that costs incurred or cost estimates included in negotiated 

prices are consistent with Federal cost principles (see Sec. 85.22). Grantees may 

reference their own cost principles that comply with the applicable Federal cost 

principles. 

(4) The cost plus a percentage of cost and percentage of construction cost methods of 

contracting shall not be used. 


IFB #11-C-018 

(g) Awarding agency review. (1) Grantees and subgrantees must make available, 

upon request of the awarding agency, technical specifications on proposed 

procurements where the awarding agency believes such review is needed to ensure that 

the item and/or service specified is the one being proposed for purchase. This review 

generally will take place prior to the time the specification is incorporated into a 

solicitation document. However, if the grantee or subgrantee desires to have the review 

accomplished after a solicitation has been developed, the awarding agency may still 

review the specifications, with such review usually limited to the technical aspects of the 

proposed purchase. 

(2) Grantees and subgrantees must on request make available for awarding agency 

pre-award review procurement documents, such as requests for proposals or invitations 

for bids, independent cost estimates, etc. when: 

(i) A grantee's or subgrantee's procurement procedures or operation fails to comply 

with the procurement standards in this section; or 

(ii) The procurement is expected to exceed the simplified acquisition threshold and is 

to be awarded without competition or only one bid or offer is received in response to a 

solicitation; or 

(iii) The procurement, which is expected to exceed the simplified acquisition threshold, 

specifies a ``brand name'' product; or 

(iv) The proposed award is more than the simplified acquisition threshold and is to be 

awarded to other than the apparent low bidder under a sealed bid procurement; or 

(v) A proposed contract modification changes the scope of a contract or increases the 

contract amount by more than the simplified acquisition threshold. 

(3) A grantee or subgrantee will be exempt from the pre-award review in paragraph 

(g)(2) of this section if the awarding agency determines that its procurement systems 

comply with the standards of this section. 

(i) A grantee or subgrantee may request that its procurement system be reviewed by 

the awarding agency to determine whether its system meets these standards in order for 

its system to be certified. Generally, these reviews shall occur where there is a 

continuous high-dollar funding, and third-party contracts are awarded on a regular basis. 

(ii) A grantee or subgrantee may self-certify its procurement system. Such selfcertification 

shall not limit the awarding agency's right to survey the system. Under a selfcertification 

procedure, awarding agencies may wish to rely on written assurances from 

the grantee or subgrantee that it is complying with these standards. A grantee or 

subgrantee will cite specific procedures, regulations, standards, etc., as being in 

compliance with these requirements and have its system available for review. 

(h) Bonding requirements. For construction or facility improvement contracts or 

subcontracts exceeding the simplified acquisition threshold, the awarding agency may 

accept the bonding policy and requirements of the grantee or subgrantee provided the 

awarding agency has made a determination that the awarding agency's interest is 

adequately protected. If such a determination has not been made, the minimum 

requirements shall be as follows: 

(1) A bid guarantee from each bidder equivalent to five percent of the bid price. The 

``bid guarantee'' shall consist of a firm commitment such as a bid bond, certified check, 

or other negotiable instrument accompanying a bid as assurance that the bidder will, 

upon acceptance of his bid, execute such contractual documents as may be required 

within the time specified. 

(2) A performance bond on the part of the contractor for 100 percent of the contract 

price. A ``performance bond'' is one executed in connection with a contract to secure 

fulfillment of all the contractor's obligations under such contract. 


IFB #11-C-018 

(3) A payment bond on the part of the contractor for 100 percent of the contract price. 

A ``payment bond'' is one executed in connection with a contract to assure payment as 

required by law of all persons supplying labor and material in the execution of the work 

provided for in the contract. 

(i) Contract provisions. A grantee's and subgrantee's contracts must contain 

provisions in paragraph (i) of this section. Federal agencies are permitted to require 

changes, remedies, changed conditions, access and records retention, suspension of 

work, and other clauses approved by the Office of Federal Procurement Policy. 

(1) Administrative, contractual, or legal remedies in instances where contractors 

violate or breach contract terms, and provide for such sanctions and penalties as may be 

appropriate. (Contracts more than the simplified acquisition threshold) 

(2) Termination for cause and for convenience by the grantee or subgrantee including 

the manner by which it will be effected and the basis for settlement. (All contracts in 

excess of $10,000) 

(3) Compliance with Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, entitled ``Equal 

Employment Opportunity,'' as amended by Executive Order 11375 of October 13, 1967, 

and as supplemented in Department of Labor regulations (41 CFR chapter 60). (All 

construction contracts awarded in excess of $10,000 by grantees and their contractors 

or subgrantees) 

(4) Compliance with the Copeland ``Anti-Kickback'' Act (18 U.S.C. 874) as 

supplemented in Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR part 3). (All contracts and 

subgrants for construction or repair) 

(5) Compliance with the Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a to 276a-7) as 

supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR part 5). (Construction 

contracts in excess of $2000 awarded by grantees and subgrantees when required by 

Federal grant program legislation) 

(6) Compliance with Sections 103 and 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety 

Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 327-330) as supplemented by Department of Labor 

regulations (29 CFR part 5). (Construction contracts awarded by grantees and 

subgrantees in excess of $2000, and in excess of $2500 for other contracts which 

involve the employment of mechanics or laborers) 

(7) Notice of awarding agency requirements and regulations pertaining to reporting. 

(8) Notice of awarding agency requirements and regulations pertaining to patent rights 

with respect to any discovery or invention which arises or is developed in the course of 

or under such contract. 

(9) Awarding agency requirements and regulations pertaining to copyrights and rights 

in data. 

(10) Access by the grantee, the subgrantee, the Federal grantor agency, the 

Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives 

to any books, documents, papers, and records of the contractor which are directly 

pertinent to that specific contract for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts, 

and transcriptions. 

(11) Retention of all required records for three years after grantees or subgrantees 

make final payments and all other pending matters are closed. 

(12) Compliance with all applicable standards, orders, or requirements issued under 

section 306 of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 

1857(h)), section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1368), Executive Order 11738, 

and Environmental Protection Agency regulations (40 CFR part 15). (Contracts, 

subcontracts, and subgrants of amounts in excess of $100,000). 


IFB #11-C-018 

(13) Mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are 

contained in the state energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy 

Policy and Conservation Act (Pub. L. 94-163, 89 Stat. 871). 

[53 FR 8068, 8087, Mar. 11, 1988, as amended at 60 FR 19639, 19642, Apr. 19, 1995] 


IFB #11-C-018 



SAMPLE CONTRACT 


IFB #11-C-018 

AGREEMENT BETWEEN 


and 

_________________________ 

This Contract, entered into as of the day of in the year Two Thousand 

Eleven, by and between the NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORITY, a body corporate and 

politic, organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of New 

Jersey, having its principal place of business at 500 Broad Street, in the City of Newark, 

County of Essex and State of New Jersey, hereinafter called the "AUTHORITY", and 

_________________________ a corporation organized and existing Sunder and by 

virtue of the laws of the State of New Jersey, having its principal place of business at 

_________________ in the City of ___________, County of _________ and the State of 

New Jersey, hereinafter called the "CONTRACTOR". 

The Authority and the Contractor are mutually desirous of entering into a contract 

to complete the Scope of Work for the ______________________________________. 

Article I: SCOPE OF WORK. 

The Scope of Work to be performed under this contract shall be completed in 

strict accordance with the specifications entitled: Boiler Service for Townhouse 

Complexes IFB 10-S-082, hereinafter referred to as "SPECIFICATIONS". All other 

work performed shall be in strict accordance with the Specifications and any and all 

applicable local, state and federal rules, regulations, guidelines, ordinances and codes. 

Article II: TERM OF CONTRACT. 

The term of the contract shall be for two years commencing __________ through 

________________. 

Article III: TIME OF COMPLETION. 

The work is to be completed in its entirety within one year from the date of the 

Notice to Proceed. 

Article III: COMPENSATION. 

The Authority shall pay the Contractor for the performance of the work in 

accordance with the attached fee schedule under this Contract, in current funds, an 

amount not to exceed __________________ dollars ($_______.00). 

Payments of the Contractor’s work shall be made upon presentation of the 

Contractor's itemized invoice. Prior to an invoice submittal, progress schedules and cost 

breakdowns shall be on file with the NHA for the periodical approval. The invoices are to 

be forwarded to Newark Housing Authority, Chief Operations Officer, 500 Broad 

Street, Newark, New Jersey 07102. 

Newark Housing Authority, Bid Opening November 4, 2010 at 10:00 a.m.

IFB #11-C-018 

Article IV: SCHEDULE AND COORDINATION. 

The Contractor shall submit a proposed detailed project schedule in accordance 

with the Specifications. Approval will be made by the Authority. Upon approval the 

schedule shall remain in effect throughout the duration of the contract. No changes to 

the schedule shall be made unless prior approval of the Authority has been obtained. 

The Contractor is required to submit a schedule of job completion each time a 

periodical is submitted. Failure to submit this schedule will result in the periodical being 

returned. The purpose of submitting a schedule of job completion with monthly 

periodicals is to permit the Authority to measure the Contractor's actual performance 

against the schedule submitted prior to commencement of the contract work. The 

Authority's payment as per the periodical submitted shall not constitute an acceptance or 

approval of the schedule of job completion submitted therewith, nor shall such payment 

of a monthly periodical constitute modification or change to the schedule submitted prior 

to the commencement of the contract work. 

Article V: INSURANCE. 

Before commencing work under this contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the 

Authority certificates of insurance showing that the following insurance is in force, stating 

policy numbers, dates of expiration, limits of liability, deductibles and aggregate amounts 

payable there under: 

Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance, in accordance with 

the laws of the state of New Jersey. 

Professional Liability Insurance covering claims made at any time prior, during, or 

subsequent to completion of the Bidder’s services with a limit of not less than 

$1,000,000 with a deductible not more than $10,000. 

Comprehensive General Liability Insurance (bodily injury and property damage 

coverage) covering claims made at any time prior, during, or subsequent to completion 

of the Bidder’s services with a limit of not less than $2,000,000 with a deductible not 

more than $10,000. 

Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance covering non-owned and hired 

vehicles, as well as for owned vehicles for bodily injury and property damage with a 

combined single limit of no less than $1,000,000.00 (each accident) per occurrence. 

The Authority shall be named additional insured in this policy. Certificates of 

insurance must contain thirty-day (30) written cancellation clause. 

Article VI: COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES. 

The Contractor warrants that he has not employed any person to solicit or secure 

this Contract upon any contract for a commission, percentage, brokerage, or contingent 

fee. Breach of this warranty shall give the Authority the right to terminate this Contract, 

at its discretion, for default. 

Article VII: TERMINATION FOR CAUSE 


IFB #11-C-018 

If through any cause, the Contractor shall fail to fulfill in a timely and proper 

manner his obligations under this Contract, or if the Contractor shall violate any of the 

covenants, agreements, or stipulations of this Contract, the Authority shall thereupon 

have the right to terminate this Contract by giving written notice to the Contractor of such 

termination and specifying the effective date thereof, at least five days before the 

effective date of the termination. The Authority shall have the benefit of such work as 

may have been completed up to the time of such termination and the Contractor shall be 

entitled to receive just and equitable compensation for such work. 

Article VIII: TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE. 

The Authority may terminate this contract any time by a notice in writing from the 

Authority to the Contractor. If the Contract is terminated by the Authority as provided 

herein, the Contractor shall be paid an amount which bears the same ratio to the total 

compensation as the services actually performed bear to the total services of the 

Contractor covered by this Contract, less payments previously made. If the Contract is 

terminated due to fault of the Contractor, Article VIII hereof relative to termination shall 

apply. 

Article IX: CHANGES. 

The Contracting Officer may, at any time, without notice to the sureties, by written order 

designated or indicated to be a change order, make changes in the work within the 

general scope of the contract including changes: (1) In the specifications (including 

drawings and designs); (2) In the method or manner of performance of the work; (3) 

Authority-furnished facilities, equipment, materials, services, or site; or, (4) Directing the 

acceleration in the performance of the work. 

Article X: EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY. 

During the performance of this contract, the Contractor agrees to enforce the 

provisions of Clauses 38, 39 and 40 of the General Conditions of the Contract for 

Construction, HUD 5370, which are incorporated herein. 

Article XI: ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. 

The Contractor shall not assign or transfer any interest in this contract; except that 

claims for monies due or to become due from the Authority under the contract may be 

assigned to a bank, trust company, or other financial institution. Such assignments of 

claims shall only be made with the written concurrence of the Contracting Officer. If the 

Contractor is a partner-ship, this contract shall inure to the benefit of the surviving or 

remaining member(s) of such partnership as approved by the Contracting Officer. 

Article XII: LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. 

As actual damages for any delay in removal of materials are impossible 

determination the Contractor and Sureties shall be liable for and shall pay to the 

Authority the sum of five hundred dollars ($500.00) per day as fixed, agreed and 

liquidated damages for each calendar day of delay until removal of materials called for 

herein. 


IFB #11-C-018 

Article XIII: MODIFICATION. 

Only the Contracting Officer has authority to modify any term or condition of this 

contract. Any contract modification shall be authorized in writing. The Contracting Officer 

may modify the contract unilaterally (1) pursuant to a specific authorization stated in a 

contract clause (e.g., Changes); or (2) for administrative matters which do not change 

the rights or responsibilities of the parties (e.g., change in the Authority’s address). All 

other contract modifications shall be in the form of supplemental agreements signed by 

the Contractor and the Contracting Officer. When a proposed modification requires the 

approval of HUD prior to its issuance (e.g., a change order that exceeds the Authority’s 

approved threshold), such modification shall not be effective until the required approval 

is received by the Authority. 

Article XIV: SUBCONTRACTING. 

Subcontracting under this contract shall be as defined in Clauses 37 and 38 of 

the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, HUD 5370, which are 

incorporated herein. 

Article XV: COMPLIANCE WITH LOCAL LAWS. 

The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, regulations and 

codes of the State and local governments and shall not trespass on any public or private 

property in performing any of the work embraced by this Contract. 

Article XVI: SECTION 3 REQUIREMENT 

All Section 3 covered contracts shall include the following clause (referred to as the 

Section 3 clause): 

A. The work to be performed under this contract is subject to the requirements of 

Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 

U.S.C. 1701u (Section 3). The purpose of Section 3 is to ensure that employment 

and other economic opportunities generated by HUD assistance or HUD-assisted 

projects covered by Section 3, shall, to the greatest extent feasible, be directed to 

low- and very low-income persons, particularly persons who are recipients of 

HUD assistance for housing. 

B. The parties to this contract agree to comply with HUD’s regulations in 24 CFR 

part 135, which implement Section 3. As evidenced by their execution of this 

contract, the parties to this contract certify that they are under no contractual or 

other impediment that would prevent them from complying with the part 135 

regulations. 

C. The contractor agrees to send to each labor organization or representative of 

workers with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other 

understanding, if any, a notice advising the labor organization or workers’ 

representative of the contractor’s commitments under this Section 3 clause, and 

will post copies of the notice in conspicuous places at the work site where both 

employees and applicants for training and employment positions can see the 

notice. The notice shall describe the Section 3 preference, shall set forth 


IFB #11-C-018 

minimum number and job titles subject to hire, availability of apprenticeship and 

training positions, the qualifications for each; and the name and location of the 

person(s) taking applications for each of the positions; and the anticipated date 

the work shall begin. 

D. The contractor agrees to include this Section 3 clause in every subcontract 

subject to compliance with regulations in 24 CFR part 135, and agrees to take 

appropriate action, as provided in an applicable provision of the subcontract or in 

this Section 3 clause, upon a finding that the subcontractor is in violation of the 

regulations in 24 CFR part 135. The contractor will not subcontract with any 

subcontractor where the contractor has notice or knowledge that the 

subcontractor has been found in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR part 135. 

E. The contractor will certify that any vacant employment positions, including 

training positions, that are filled (1) after the contractor is selected but before the 

contract is executed, and (2) with persons other than those to whom the 

regulations of 24 CFR part 135 require employment opportunities to be directed, 

were not filled to circumvent the contractor’s obligations under 24 CFR part 135. 

F. Noncompliance with HUD’s regulations in 24 CFR part 135 may result in 

sanctions, termination of this contract for default, and debarment or suspension 

from future HUD assisted contracts. 

G. With respect to work performed in connection with Section 3 covered Indian 

housing assistance, Section 7(b) of the Indian Self-Determination and Education 

Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 450e) also applies to the work to be performed under 

this contract. Section 7(b) requires that to the greatest extent feasible (i) 

preference and opportunities for training and employment shall be given to 

Indians, and (ii) preference in the award of contracts and subcontracts shall be 

given to Indian organizations and Indian-owned Economic Enterprises. Parties to 

this contract that are subject to the provisions of Section 3 and Section 7(b) 

agree to comply with Section 3 to the maximum extent feasible, but not in 

derogation of compliance with Section 7(b). 

ARTICLE XVII. WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION 

In addition to any other warranties in this contract, the Contractor warrants that 

the work performed under this contract conforms to the contract requirements and is free 

of any defect in equipment, material, or workmanship performed by the Contractor or 

any subcontractor or supplier or any tier. This warranty shall continue for a period of one 

(1) year from the date of final acceptance of the work. If the Authority takes possession 

of any part of the work before final acceptance, this warranty shall continue for a period 

of one (1) year from the date that the Authority takes possession. 


(REVISED 3/05) 

IFB #11-C-018 

ARTICE XVIII: AFFIRMATIVE ACTION 

EXHIBIT B 

MANDATORY EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY LANGUAGE 

N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq. (P.L. 1975, C. 127) 

N.J.A.C. 17:27 

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS 

During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: 

The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, will not discriminate against any 

employee or applicant for employment because of age, race, creed, color, national 

origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation or sex. Except with 

respect to affectional or sexual orientation, the contractor will take affirmative action to 

ensure that such applicants are recruited and employed, and that employees are treated 

during employment, without regard to their age, race, creed, color, national origin, 

ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation or sex. Such action shall 

include, but not be limited to the following: employment, up-grading, demotion, or 

transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or 

other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The 

contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants 

for employment, notices to be provided by the Public Agency Compliance Officer setting 

forth provisions of this nondiscrimination clause; 

The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable will, in all solicitations or 

advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all 

qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to age, 

race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual 

orientation or sex; 

The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, will send to each labor union or 

representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other 

contract or understanding, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer 

advising the labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments 

under this act and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to 

employees and applicants for employment. 

The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, agrees to comply with any 

regulations promulgated by the Treasurer, pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., as 

amended and supplemented from time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act. 

When hiring or scheduling workers in each construction trade, the contractor or 

subcontractor agrees to make good faith efforts to employ minority and women workers 

in each construction trade consistent with the applicable employment goal prescribed by 

N.J.A.C. l7:27-7.3; provided, however, that the Division may, in its discretion, exempt a 

contractor or subcontractor from compliance with the good faith procedures prescribed 

by the following provisions, A, B and C, as long as the Division is satisfied that the 

contractor or subcontractor is employing workers provided by a union which provides 


IFB #11-C-018 

evidence, in accordance with standards prescribed by the Division, that its percentage of 

active "card carrying" members who are minority and women workers is equal to or 

greater than the applicable employment goal established in accordance with N.J.A.C. 

l7:27-7.3. The contractor or subcontractor agrees that a good faith effort shall include 

compliance with the following procedures: 

(A)If the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a 

union for a construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor shall, within three 

business days of the contract award, seek assurances from the union that it will 

cooperate with the contractor or subcontractor as it fulfills its affirmative action 

obligations under this contract and in accordance with the rules promulgated by the 

Treasurer pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et. seq., as supplemented and amended from 

time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act. If the contractor or subcontractor is 

unable to obtain said assurances from the construction trade union at least five business 

days prior to the commencement of construction work, the contractor or subcontractor 

agrees to attempt to hire or schedule minority and women workers directly, consistent 

with the applicable employment goal. If the contractor's or subcontractor's prior 

experience with a construction trade union, regardless of whether the union has 

provided said assurances, indicates a significant possibility that the trade union will not 

refer sufficient minority and women workers consistent with the applicable 

employment goal, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to be prepared to hire or 

schedule minority and women workers directly, consistent with the applicable 

employment goal, by complying with the hiring or scheduling procedures prescribed 

under (B) below; and the contractor or subcontractor further agrees to take said action 

immediately if it determines or is so notified by the Division that the union is not referring 

minority and women workers consistent with the applicable employment goal. 

(B) If the hiring or scheduling of a workforce consistent with the employment 

goal has not or cannot be achieved for each construction trade by adhering to the 

procedures of (A) above, or if the contractor does not have a referral agreement or 

arrangement with a union for a construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor 

agrees to take the following actions consistent with the applicable county employment 

goals: 

(l) To notify the public agency compliance officer, the Division, and minority and women 

referral organizations listed by the Division pursuant to N.J.A.C. 17:27-5.3, of its 

workforce needs, and request referral of minority and women workers; 

(2) To notify any minority and women workers who have been listed with it as awaiting 

available vacancies; 

(3) Prior to commencement of work, to request that the local construction trade union 

refer minority and women workers to fill job openings, provided the contractor or 

subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction 

trade; 

(4) To leave standing requests for additional referral to minority and women workers with 

the local construction trade union, provided the contractor or subcontractor has a referral 

agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction trade, the State Training and 

Employment Service and other approved referral sources in the area until such time as 

the workforce is consistent with the employment goal; 


IFB #11-C-018 

(5) If it is necessary to lay off some of the workers in a given trade on the construction 

site, to assure, consistent with the applicable State and Federal statutes and court 

decisions, that sufficient minority and women employees remain on the site consistent 

with the employment goal; and to employ any minority and women workers laid off by 

the contractor on any other construction site on which its workforce composition is not 

consistent with an employment goal established pursuant to rules implementing N.J.S.A. 

10:5-31 et. seq.; 

(6) To adhere to the following procedure when minority and women workers apply or are 

referred to the contractor or subcontractor: 

(i) If said individuals have never previously received any document or certification 

signifying a level of qualification lower than that required in order to perform the work of 

the construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor shall determine the qualifications 

of such individuals and if the contractor's or subcontractor's workforce in each 

construction trade is not consistent with the applicable employment goal, it shall hire or 

schedule those individuals who satisfy appropriate qualification standards. However, a 

contractor or subcontractor shall determine that the individual at least possesses the 

requisite skills, and experience recognized by a union, apprentice program or a referral 

agency, provided the referral agency is acceptable to the Division. If necessary, the 

contractor or subcontractor shall hire or schedule minority and women workers who 

qualify as trainees pursuant to these rules. All of the requirements, however, are limited 

by the provisions of (C) below. 

(ii) If the contractor's or subcontractor's workforce is consistent with the applicable 

employment goal, the name of any interested women or minority individual shall be 

maintained on a waiting list for the first consideration, in the event the contractor's or 

subcontractor's workforce is no longer consistent with the applicable employment 

goal. 

(iii) If, for any reason, said contractor or subcontractor determines that a minority 

individual or a woman is not qualified or if the individual qualifies as an advanced trainee 

or apprentice, the contractor or subcontractor shall inform the individual in writing of the 

reasons for the determination, maintain a copy of the determination in its files, and send 

a copy to the public agency compliance officer and to the Division. 

(7) To keep a complete and accurate record of all requests made for the referral of 

workers in any trade covered by the contract, on forms made available by the Division 

and submitted promptly to the Division upon request. 

(C) The contractor or subcontractor agrees that nothing contained in (B) 

above shall preclude the contractor or subcontractor from complying with the union 

hiring hall or apprenticeship policies in any applicable collective bargaining agreement or 

union hiring hall arrangement, and, where required by custom or agreement, it shall 

send journeymen and trainees to the union for referral, or to the apprenticeship program 

for admission, pursuant to such agreement or arrangement. However, where the 

practices of a union or apprenticeship program will result in the exclusion of minorities 

and women or the failure to refer minorities and women consistent with the county 

employment goal, the contractor or subcontractor shall consider for employment persons 

referred pursuant to (B) above without regard to such agreement or arrangement; 


IFB #11-C-018 

provided further, however, that the contractor or subcontractor shall not be required to 

employ women and minority advanced trainees and trainees in numbers which result in 

the employment of advanced trainees and trainees as a percentage of the total 

workforce for the construction trade, which percentage significantly exceeds the 

apprentice to journey worker ratio specified in the applicable collective bargaining 

agreement, or in the absence of a collective bargaining agreement, exceeds the ratio 

established by practice in the area for said construction trade. Also, the contractor or 

subcontractor agrees that, in implementing the procedures of (B) above, it shall, where 

applicable, employ minority and women workers residing within the geographical 

jurisdiction of the union. 

After notification of award, but prior to signing a construction contract, the contractor 

shall submit to the public agency compliance officer and the Division an initial project 

workforce report (Form AA 201) provided to the public agency by the Division for 

distribution to and completion by the contractor, in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27:7. 

The contractor also agrees to submit a copy of the Monthly Project Workforce Report 

once a month thereafter for the duration of this contract to the Division and to the public 

agency compliance officer. 

The contractor agrees to cooperate with the public agency in the payment of budgeted 

funds, as is necessary, for on-the-job and/or off-the-job programs for outreach and 

training of minorities and women. 

(D) The contractor and its subcontractors shall furnish such reports or other 

documents to the Division of Contract Compliance & EEO as may be requested by the 

Division from time to time in order to carry out the purposes of these regulations, and 

public agencies shall furnish such information as may be requested by the Division of 

Contract Compliance & EEO for conducting a compliance investigation pursuant to 

Subchapter l0 of the Administrative Code (NJAC 17:27). 

Article XIX: CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 

The executed Contract shall consist of the following component parts: 

1. This Instrument; 

2. Invitation for Bids 10-C-099 entitled: Authority Wide Building Demolition ; 

3. The Bid 10-C-099 received from _______________, dated _______________ 

2010, as accepted by the NHA. 

4. Attachment A, Bid Document submitted by ________________ and dated 

_____________; 

5. Section 3 Opportunity Plan dated ____________; 

6. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction HUD 5370. 

THIS INSTRUMENT, together with the other documents enumerated in this 

Article XIX, which said other documents are as fully a part of the Contract as if 

hereto attached or herein repeated, form the Contract. In the event that any 

provision in any component part of this Contract conflicts with any provision of 

any other component part, the provision of the component part first enumerated 

in this Article XIX, shall govern, except as otherwise specifically stated. The 

various provisions in Addenda shall be construed in the order of preference of 

the component part of the Contract which each modifies. 


IFB #11-C-018 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Authority and the Contractor have executed on this 

Contract, the day and year first above written. 

ATTEST: 

_____________________ _________________________ 

WITNESS/NOTARY PRESIDENT/PRINCIPAL 

APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY 

____________________________ 

ELLEN M. HARRIS, ESQ. 

CHIEF LEGAL OFFICER 


ATTEST: NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORITY 

_______________________ _________________________ 


EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR 

NAME OF ORIGINATING DEPARTMENT: 

DEPARTMENT OF OPERATIONS 


IFB #11-C-018 

INDEMNIFICATION AGREEMENT 

This agreement made this day of , 2011 between the 

Newark Housing Authority and , in the County of and the State of 

New Jersey. 

Whereas, has been contracted by the Newark Housing Authority 

for in accordance with the Contract Documents and all 

applicable laws, and; 

WHEREAS, parties hereto seek to protect the Owner, from any and all real, 

actual or potential claims arising from any negligent or allegedly negligent act and or 

omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed 

by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be or appear to be liable, 

regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. 

NOW, THEREFORE, , hereby agrees to save and INDEMNIFY 

and keep harmless the Newark Housing Authority, against all liability for any and all 

claims, demands, judgments, and damages including personal and property damage 

arising from any act or omission of , or its Subcontractors, agents or 

employees, while in or about the building or premises and further agrees to 

Indemnify the Owner and/or its agents 

Signed and Sealed this day of , 2011. 

BY: ______________________________________ 


STATE OF NEW JERSEY ) 

) S.S. 

COUNTY OF ) 

IFB #11-C-018 

AFFIDAVIT 

BE IT REMEMBERED that on this day , 2011, before me 

the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of New Jersey, personally appeared, 

____________________________________ who, being duly sworn does depose and 

make proof to my satisfaction that he/she is the Secretary of, 

_______________________, the Corporation named in the foregoing Instrument; that, 

__________________________________ is the President/Owner of said corporation, 

that the execution, as well as the making of this Instrument has been duly authorized by 

a proper resolution of the Board of Directors of said corporation, that deponent well 

knows the corporate seal of said corporation and the seal affixed to said Instrument is 

such corporate seal and was thereto affixed and said Instrument signed and delivered by 

said Secretary, as and for his voluntary act and deed of said corporation, in the presence 

of deponent, who thereupon subscribed his name thereto as a witness by like order of 

the Board of said Corporation. 

Sworn and Subscribed to 

before me this day of 

, 2011. 

________________________________ 

_______________________ 

Secretary 

(NOTARY SEAL) 


GENERAL DECISION: NJ20100036 12/17/2010 NJ36 

Date: December 17, 2010 

General Decision Number: NJ20100036 12/17/2010 

Superseded General Decision Number: NJ20080036 

State: New Jersey 

Construction Type: Building 

County: Essex County in New Jersey. 

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family 

homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). 

Modification Number Publication Date 

0 03/12/2010 

1 05/07/2010 

2 06/04/2010 

3 07/09/2010 

4 08/13/2010 

5 08/27/2010 

6 09/24/2010 

7 10/08/2010 

8 12/17/2010 

ASBE0032-008 09/19/2009 

Rates Fringes 

ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST 

INSULATOR (includes the 

application of all insulating 

materials, protective 

coverings, coatings and 

finishings to all types of 

mechanical systems; also, the 

application of firestopping 

material to openings and 

penetrations in walls, 

floors, ceilings and curtain 

walls; also, all lead 

abatement).......................$ 43.70 27.84 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

BRNJ0002-014 11/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

BRICKLAYER (Including 

Caulking, Cleaning and 

Pointing)........................$ 36.70 23.47 

Work on high stacks: 22% per hour additional. 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

BRNJ0002-016 11/01/2009

Rates Fringes 

MASON - STONE....................$ 36.70 23.47 

Work on high stacks: 22% per hour additional. 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

BRNJ0004-001 11/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

BRICKLAYER (Cement Mason)........$ 36.70 23.47 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

* BRNJ0007-022 06/07/2010 

Rates Fringes 

Tile finisher..................$ 38.20 21.56 

Tile setter....................$ 47.10 25.31 

Tile finisher: 

Work grouting all epoxy: $10.00 additional per day. 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

CARP0006-009 05/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

CARPENTER (Scaffold Builder).....$ 39.45 49.75% 

The first sixty feet at the regular rate, 10% per hour 

additional for each additional fifty feet thereafter. 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

CARP0006-010 05/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

CARPENTER 

Including Acoustical 

Ceiling Installation, 

Drywall Hanging, Formwork, 

Batt and Blown Insulation...$ 39.45 49.75% 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

CARP0029-008 05/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

Soft floor layer...............$ 39.45 49.75% 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

CARP0715-007 05/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

Millwright.....................$ 40.27 49.75% 

Work of erection and dismantling of elevators and towers, 

such as concrete conveyors and temporary material 

elevators, scaffolding or other structures to be used as

scaffolding inside or outside of buildings: the first sixty 

feet at the regular rate, 10% per hour additional for each 

additional fifty feet thereafter. 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

ELEC0164-006 06/01/2010 

Rates Fringes 

ELECTRICIAN (Apartments over 

4 units.)........................$ 48.83 53.5% 

ELECTRICIAN (Including Low 

Voltage Wiring) 

Cable splicer...............$ 54.00 54% 

Electrician.................$ 47.37 54% 

Work on line voltage of 440 or 480 volts: 10% per hour 

additional. 

Work from trusses, scaffolds, frames, ladders and poles, 40 

ft. or more above the ground or floor (does not include 

work from a manlift): 20% per hour additional. 

Work on radio towers, transmission towers and smokestacks: 

21% per hour additional. 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

ELEV0001-003 03/17/2008 

Rates Fringes 

Elevator mechanic 

Work on the addition, 

replacement, refurbishing 

or relocation of control, 

drive, generating 

equipment, hoistway or pit 

equipment, including work 

involving a structural 

rise in the elevator 

shafts in an existing 

building and other 

elevator work in the 

machine room, hoistway or 

pit; Also, changes in 

design and appearance of 

basic escalator equipment...$ 38.46 21.565 

All other work..............$ 48.19 21.715 

PAID HOLIDAYS: 

New Year's Day, President's Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, 

Fourth of July, Labor Day, Columbus Day, Veteran's Day, 

Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving Day, and 

Christmas Day. 

PAID VACATION: 

A worker who has worked less than 5 years: 4% of his or her 

hourly rate for all hours worked.

A worker who has worked 5 to 10 years: 6% of his or her 

hourly rate for all hours worked. 

A worker who has worked 15 or more years: 8% of his or her 

hourly rate for all hours worked. 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

ENGI0825-020 07/01/2010 

Rates Fringes 

Power equipment operators: 

GROUP 1.....................$ 41.02 25.75 

GROUP 2.....................$ 39.43 25.75 

GROUP 3.....................$ 37.52 25.75 

GROUP 4.....................$ 35.89 25.75 

GROUP 5.....................$ 34.18 25.75 

Hazardous waste removal work: 

Work on a state or federally designated hazardous waste site, 

where the worker is in direct contact with hazardous 

material, and when personal protective equipment is 

required for respiratory, skin and eye protection: 20% per 

hour additional. 


New Year's Day, Washington's Birthday observed, Memorial Day, 

Independence Day, Labor Day, Presidential Election Day, 

Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day; provided 

1) that the worker works three of the preceding five work 

days before the holiday; or, the work day before the 

holiday and the work day after the holiday; and, 2) that 

the worker works the work day before and the work day after 

the holiday. 

DEFINITION OF GROUPS: 

GROUP 1: 

Backhoe, Including Backhoe Track; Boom; Concrete Paving 

Machine; Crane (all types, including overhead and straddle 

traveling type); Drill (down-the-hole drill, rotary drill, 

self-propelled hydraulic drill, self-powered drill); 

Elevating Grader; Excavator; Front End Loader (5 cu. yd. 

and over); Piledriver (length of boom, including length of 

leads, shall determine premium rate applicable); Trencher 

GROUP 2: 

Backhoe Loader Combo; Concrete Pumper; Grader/Blade (Finish); 

Hoist; Hydraulic Crane, 10 Tons and under; Front End 

Loader (2 cu. yd. but less than 5 cu. yd.); Scraper; Side 

Boom 

GROUP 3: 

Asphalt Spreader; Bulldozer;Compressor(2 or 3) (in Battery) 

(within 100 ft.); Forklift; Front End Loader (1 cu. yd. 

and over but less than 2 cu. yd.); Lull; Mechanic; Paver, 

Asphalt; Roller, Blacktop; Tractor;

GROUP 4: 

Bobcat/Skid Loader; Compressor (Single); Farm Tractor; Front 

End Loader (under 1 cu. yd.); Hydroseeder; Roller, Grade; 

Pump, Hydraulic 

GROUP 5: 

Oiler 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

IRON0011-012 07/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

Ironworkers: 

Reinforcing.................$ 34.34 35.60 

Structural, Ornamental......$ 37.14 35.60 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

LABO0222-006 05/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

LABORER 

MASON TENDER: 

Brick/Cement/Concrete.......$ 28.55 19.42 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

LABO0222-009 05/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

Laborers: 

Asphalt Shoveler, Asphalt 

Spreader, Common or 

General Laborer, Landscape 

Laborer, Pipelayer, Power 

Tool Operator and 

Screedman...................$ 28.05 19.42 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

LABO1030-002 05/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

Asbestos Removal Laborer.........$ 28.05 16.22 

The removal, abatement, enclosure and decontamination of 

personal protective equipment, chemical protective clothing 

and machinery relating to asbestos and/or toxic and 

hazardous waste or materials which shall include but not 

necessarily be limited to: the erection, moving, servicing 

and dismantling of all enclosures, scaffolding and 

barricades; the operation of all tools and equipment 

normally used in the removal or abatement of asbestos and 

toxic or hazardous waste or materials; the labeling, 

bagging, cartoning, crating, or other packaging of 

materials for disposal; the clean-up of the worksite; and 

all other work incidental to the removal, abatement, 

encapsulation, enclosure, and decontamination of asbestos 

and toxic or hazardous waste or materials; and, in

addition, all work tasks involved in the maintenance and 

operation of energy resource recovery plants (co-generation 

plants) 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

PAIN0711-018 05/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

DRYWALL FINISHER/TAPER...........$ 35.58 17.67 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

PAIN0711-019 05/01/2009 

Rates Fringes 

PAINTER (Brush & Roller).........$ 27.72 14.28 

PAINTER (Spray)..................$ 30.50 14.28 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

PAIN0711-021 05/01/2010 

Rates Fringes 

Glazier........................$ 40.60 17.44 

Work welding or using a cutting torch: 

$1.00 per hour additional. 

Work on a swing stage scaffold; on a pipe scaffold providing 

the working height of the platform is 30 ft. or above; and 

on motorized lifts provided that the height of the lift 

platform is above the second floor or above thirty feet: 


---------------------------------------------------------------- 

PLAS0029-003 05/01/2010 

Rates Fringes 

PLASTERER........................$ 40.00 21.75 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

PLUM0024-014 05/01/2010 

Rates Fringes 

PLUMBER (Excluding HVAC Pipe 

Installation)....................$ 45.40 26.90 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

PLUM0475-014 05/01/2010 

Rates Fringes 

PIPEFITTER (Including HVAC 

Pipe Installation)...............$ 48.43 23.77 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

ROOF0004-011 06/01/2009 

ROOFER (Shingles, Shake and 

Rates Fringes

Tile)............................$ 31.57 16.50 

Roofer......................$ 32.82 18.77 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

SFNJ0696-006 07/01/2010 

Rates Fringes 

SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire 

Sprinklers)......................$ 51.00 20.65 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

SHEE0025-005 06/01/2010 

Rates Fringes 

SHEET METAL WORKER (Including 

HVAC Duct Installation)..........$ 43.10 29.13 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

SUNJ2004-007 01/02/2009 

Rates Fringes 

ROOFERS, Excluding Shingle, 

Shake and Tile...................$ 30.21 15.25 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

TEAM0408-002 05/01/2008 

Rates Fringes 

TRUCK DRIVER 

Dump Truck..................$ 33.00 12.16+a 

Off the Road Truck..........$ 32.85 12.16+a 

a. Employer contributes $1304.35 per month per worker for 

health and welfare. 

Hazardous waste removal work, where the worker is in direct 

contact with hazardous material, and when personal 

protective equipment is required for respiratory, skin and 

eye protection: $3.00 per hour additional. 

Hazardous waste removal work, where the worker is working in 

a hazardous waste site, in a zone requiring Level A 

personal protection for any of the workers: $3.00 per hour 

additional. 

Hazardous waste removal work, where the worker is not working 

in a zone requiring Level A, B or C personal protection: 



New Year's Day, President's Day, Decoration Day, 

Independence Day, Labor Day, Presidential Election Day, 

Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day; provided 

that the worker has been assigned to work, or, "shapes", 

one day of the calendar week during which the holiday 

occurs. 

----------------------------------------------------------------

WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing 

operation to which welding is incidental. 

======================================================== 

Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within 

the scope of the 

classifications listed may be added after award only as 

provided in the labor 

standards contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii)). 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

-- 

In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates 

listed under the 

identifier do not reflect collectively bargained wage and 

fringe benefit 

rates. Other designations indicate unions whose rates have 

been determined 

to be prevailing. 

---------------------------------------------------------------- 

-- 

WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 

1.) Has there been an initial decision in he matter? This can 

be: 

* an existing published wage determination 

* a survey underlying a wage determination 

* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on 

a wage 

determination matter 

* a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling 

On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests 

for summaries 

of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office 

for the area in 

which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices 

have 

responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the 

response from this 

initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described 

in 2.) and 

3.) should be followed. 

With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal 

process 

described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of 

Construction 

Wage Determinations. Write to: 

Branch of Construction Wage Determinations 

Wage and Hour Division

U.S. Department of Labor 

200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. 

Washington, DC 20210 

2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an 

interested party 

(those affected by the action) can request review and 

reconsideration from 

the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR 

Part 7). 

Write to: 

Wage and Hour Administrator 




The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the 

interested 

party's position and by any information (wage payment data, 

project 

description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor 

considers 

relevant to the issue. 

3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an 

interested 

party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board 

(formerly the 

Wage Appeals Board). Write to: 

Administrative Review Board 




4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. 

END OF GENERAL DECISION


IFB #11-C-018 


AT 


AND 



BID DOCUMENTS 

Newark Housing Authority, Bid Opening Thursday, April 28, 2011 at 10 a.m. 



Chairperson 

MODIA BUTLER 




NANCY PEREZ 

LENIN CRUZ 

RASHARD CASEY 



AT 10 A.M.

11-C-018 

PART 3 

11-C-018 

BIDDER'S CHECKLIST 

The following is a checklist to aid the bidders in completing the bid documents. Please check 

off the items completed for accuracy and completeness of the bid documents. Please note that 

certain forms must be completed when the bid package is returned. Failure to return 

documents at the time of bid opening may render bid as non-responsive. 

MANDATORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS YES NO 

CHECKLIST (COMPLETED) 

1. Bid Document (provided within) 

A. NON-CURABLE ITEMS 

2. Bid Bond (provided within) 

Consent of Surety (provided within) 

3. Stockholder Disclosure Certification (provided within) 

4. Sub-Contractor Certification (provided within) 

5. Acknowledgement of Addenda/Clarifications (provided within) 

B. OTHER SUBMISSION DOCUMENTS 

6. Business Registration Certificate 

7. Non-Collusive Affidavit (provided within) 

8. Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications (provided within) 

9. Statement of Compliance Wages (provided within) 

10. Affirmative Action Documents (provided within) 

11. HUD 5369A, Representations, Certifications (provided within) 

12. HUD 2530 Previous Participation Certification (provided within) 

13. Reference (provided within) 

14. Section 3 (provided within) 

Newark Housing Authority, Bid Opening Thursday, April 28, 2011 at 10 a.m.

11-C-018 



BID DOCUMENT 


FROM: 

11-C-018 


500 BROAD STREET, NEWARK, NEW JERSEY 07102 

IFB #11-C-018 

LOBBY ALTERATIONS AND RENOVATIONS 

AT 


AND 


__________________________________________________________ 

NAME OF FIRM 

__________________________________________________________ 

STREET ADDRESS 

__________________________________________________________ 

CITY, STATE, ZIP 

______________________________ ______________________________ 

PHONE FAX 

______________________________ 

EMPLOYER I.D. NUMBER 

The undersigned, having familiarized (themselves) with the local conditions affecting the cost of 

the work, with Invitation for Bids (Parts I, II, III & IV) and all attachments, the Scope of Work, the 

specifications, and drawings as prepared by the AUTHORITY and /or it’s Representatives and 

local conditions affecting the cost of the work, hereby submit this Bid to perform all aspects of 

the Scope of Work and furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and related items 

required to complete the entire Scope of Work herby submitting his/her bid for the Bid # 11-C- 

018, LOBBY ALTERATIONS AT STEPHEN CRANE ELDERLY NJ 2-16, AND KRETCHMER 

ELDERLY NJ 2-17. 

The contractor shall achieve project completion within 120 working days from the Notice to 

Proceed for Stephen Crane Elderly and 90 working days from the Notice to Proceed for 

Kretchmer Elderly. 

All prospective Bidders should make an on-site inspection of the site where the work is to be 

performed. By submitting this Bid, the bidder stipulates that he has reviewed all documents of 

the bid and the physical, regulatory, environmental, and social conditions of the site and the 

Scope of Work to be performed, and that the Bid Price and the completion times are based on 

the Bidder's knowledge of and unconditional acceptance of the conditions. 

The bidder takes sole responsibility for the protection and security of the installed and 

completed work, tools, materials, labor, and the safety of the residents, Authority staff and the 

public at large, and hereby holds the Authority harmless from any damages, including third 

parties, based upon the Bidder's failure to protect and secure as above. The N.H.A. will not 

provide or pay additional cost for these items. 


DESCRIPTION 

DEMOLITION 

EXTERIOR WORK 

GYPSUM BOARD 

ASSEMBLIES 

DOORS AND WINDOWS 

INTERIOR FINISHES 

CASEWORK 

PLUMBING 

HVAC 

ELECTRICAL 

SPECIALTIES 

GENERAL CONDITIONS 

(BOND/INSURANCE/MOBILIZATION) 

TOTAL BID 

11-C-018 


500 BROAD STREET, NEWARK, NJ 07102 

IFB # 11-C-018 

BID DOCUMENT 

BID “A” 

STEPHEN CRANE 

ELDERLY 

BID “B” 

KRETCHMER ELDERLY 

BID A: KRETCHMER ELDERLY 2-17: 31 VAN VECHTEN STREET NEWARK, NJ 07114 

LOBBY AND COMMUNITY ROOM ALTERATIONS: 

Price in words for Bid A: 

___________________________________________________________________________ 

BID B: KRETCHMER ELDERLY, 2-17: 35 VAN VECHTEN STREET NEWARK, NJ 07114 

LOBBY AND MANAGEMENT OFFICES ALTERATIONS: 

Price in words for Bid B: 

___________________________________________________________________________ 


DESCRIPTION 

DEMOLITION 

EXTERIOR WORK 

GYPSUM BOARD 

ASSEMBLIES 

DOORS AND WINDOWS 

INTERIOR FINISHES 

CASEWORK 

PLUMBING 

HVAC 

ELECTRICAL 

SPECIALTIES - BID A 

GENERAL CONDITIONS 

(BOND/INSURANCE/MOBILIZATION) 

TOTAL BID FOR A & B 

11-C-018 


500 BROAD STREET, NEWARK, NJ 07102 

IFB # 11-C-018 

BID DOCUMENT 

BIDS A & B 

The contractor’s has the option to bid the entire scope of work (BID “A” & “B”) or 

either “BID”A” or “BID B”. The AUTHORITY Reserve the right to award the 

contracts to the lowest responsive responsible Bidder or Bidders 


Metal Framed / Gyp Bd Partition, Type 6 (SF) 

Metal Framed / Gyp Bd Furring, Type 7 (SF) 



EPDM Membrane Roofing (SF) 

11-C-018 

BID DOCUMENT 

UNIT PRICES FOR NJ2-16 

Refer to the Part 4 Specifications – “Unit Prices” 

HM Door and Hardware in Existing Frame (unit) 

HM Door, Frame and Hardware (unit) 

Double-Hung Aluminum Replacement Window (unit) 

Ceramic Floor Tile CT-2 (SF) 

i Ceramic Wall Tile CT-4 (SF) 

Ceramic Exterior Wall Tile CT-3 (SF) 

GFRC Wall Paneling System VP-1 (SF) 

Solid Surfacing Material SSM-1 (SF) 

Interior Painting (SF) 

Acoustical Tile Ceiling Type ACT-1 (SF) 

Metal Tile Ceiling Type ACT-2 (SF) 


Wood Base Cabinetry with P-Lam Counter (LF) 

Wall Cabinetry (LF) 

Water Supply Piping, 3/4” (LF) 

Gas Piping, 3/8” (LF) 

Sanitary Drainage Piping, 4” (LF) 

Light Fixture L1 (unit) 


Closed Circuit Security Camera (unit) 

Notes: 

DESCRIPTION PRICE 

1. The attention of Bidders is particularly called to the fact that, unless the bid is made in strict 

conformity with the directions given, it will be considered non-responsive and may be rejected. 

2. The maximum allowable mark-up on materials shall be 15%. Indicate the percentage markup 

applied to the material costs indicated above. % 

3. Wage Determination applies. 

4. Any bid may be rejected if the bid price, in part or in total, is determined to be unreasonable, or 

materially unbalanced. 

5. Information contained above for unit pricing is for the purpose of determining price reasonableness. 




11-C-018 

UNIT PRICES FOR NJ2-17 

Refer to the Part 4 Specifications – “Unit Prices” 

Double-Hung Aluminum Replacement Window (unit) 

EPDM Membrane Roofing (SF) 

Ceramic Wall Tile CT-4 (SF) 

Ceramic Exterior Wall Tile CT-3 (SF) 

GFRC Wall Paneling System VP-1 (SF) 

Interior Painting (SF) 


Water Supply Piping, 3/4” (LF) 

Gas Piping, 3/8” (LF) 

Sanitary Drainage Piping, 4” (LF) 



Closed Circuit Security Camera (unit) 

Notes: 

DESCRIPTION PRICE 

1. The attention of Bidders is particularly called to the fact that, unless the bid is made in strict 

conformity with the directions given, it will be considered non-responsive and may be rejected. 

2. The maximum allowable mark-up on materials shall be 15%. Indicate the percentage markup 

applied to the material costs indicated above. % 

3. Wage Determination applies. 

4. Any bid may be rejected if the bid price, in part or in total, is determined to be unreasonable, or 

materially unbalanced. 

5. Information contained above for unit pricing is for the purpose of determining price reasonableness. 

PRINT/TYPE NAME: __________________________________________ 

TITLE: __________________________________________ 

SIGNATURE: __________________________________________ 

DATE: ________________________ 

Subscribed and sworn to 

before me this day ________________________, 2011. 

_________________________ 

Notary Public My commission expires _____________. 


11-C-018 



BID BOND & CONSENT OF SURETY 

Non-Curable Documents 

**Form Must Be Completed** 


11-C-018 

*********NON-CURABLE ITEM********* 

BID BOND 

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we the undersigned, 

____________________________________________________________ 

(Name of Principal) 

as PRINCIPAL, and 

_____________________________________________________________ 

(Name of Surety) 

as SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORITY, 

hereinafter called the "AUTHORITY", IN THE PENAL SUM OF FIVE PERCENT (5%) 

OF THE TOTAL BID _______________________________________________ , 

Lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be 

made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, 

jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. 

THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal has 

submitted the accompanying bid, dated , 20 __ , 

for__________________________________________________________________. 

NOW, THEREFORE, if the principal shall not withdraw said bid within the period 

specified therein after the opening of the same, or, if no period specified, within sixty 

(60) days after the said opening, and shall within the period specified therefore, or, if no 

period specified, within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented to him for 

signature, enter into a written contract with the Contractor in accordance with the bid as 

accepted, and give bond with good and sufficient surety or sureties, as may be required, 

for the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of such contract, or in the event of the 

withdrawal of said bid within the period specified, or the failure to enter into such 

contract and give such bond within the time specified, if the Principal shall pay the 

Authority the difference between the amount specified in said bid bond and the amount 

for which the Authority may procure the required work or supplies or both, if the latter 

amount be in excess of the former, then the above obligation shall be void and of no 

effect, otherwise to remain in full force and virtue. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounded parties have executed this instrument 

under their several seals this day of , 20 __ , the name 

and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly 

signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body. 


ATTEST: 

ATTEST: 

11-C-018 

BID BOND 

___________________________________ 

(Corporate Principal) 

___________________________________ 

(Business Address) 

Affix 

BY: Corporate 

Seal 

___________________________________ 

(Corporate Surety) 

Affix 

BY: Corporate 

Seal 

(Power of 

Attorney for persons signing for Surety Company must be attached to bond). 

CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE SEAL 

I. , certify that I am the of the 

Corporation named as , who signed the said bond on 

behalf of the Principal, was then of said corporation; 

that I know his signature and his signature thereto is genuine, and that said bond was 

duly signed, sealed and attested to, for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of 

its governing body. 


(Corporate Seal)


CONSENT OF SURETY 

A performance bond will be required from the successful contractor on this project, and 

consequently, all bidders shall submit, with their bid, a Consent of Surety in substantially 

the following form: 

To:__________________________________________________ 

(Owner) 

Re:__________________________________________________ 

Contractor) 

_________________________________________________________________________ 

(Project Description) 

This is to certify that _____________________________________________ 

(Surety Company) 

will provide to the _______________________________________ a performance bond in 

(Owner) 

the TOTAL AMOUNT OF THE BID in the event that said contractor is awarded a 

contract for the above project. 

_________________________________________________ 

(Contractor) 

Signed, sealed and dated this day of , 20 . 

_______________________________________ 

(Surety) 

_______________________________________ 

Attorney-in-Fact 

CONSENT OF SURETY MUST BE EXECUTED BY AN AUTHORIZED AGENT OR 

REPRESENTATIVE OF A SURETY COMPANY AND NOT BY THE INDIVIDUAL OR 

COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE SUBMITTING THE BID. 


11-C-018 



STOCKHOLDER DISCLOSURE 

CERTIFICATION 

Non-Curable Document 

**Form must be completed** 


Name of Business 

11-C-018 


STOCKHOLDER DISCLOSURE CERTIFICATION 

This Statement Shall Be Included with Bid Submission 

I certify that the list below contains the names and home addresses of all 

stockholders holding 10% or more of the issued and outstanding stock of the 

undersigned. 

OR 

I certify that no one stockholder owns 10% or more of the issued and outstanding 

stock of the undersigned. 

Check the box that represents the type of business organization: 

Partnership Corporation Sole Proprietorship 

Limited Partnership Limited Liability Corporation 

Limited Liability Partnership Subchapter S Corporation 

Sign and notarize the form below, and, if necessary, complete the stockholder list 

below. Continue on additional page if necessary. 

Stockholders: 

Name: ______________________________ Name: ______________________________ 

Home Address: _______________________ 

____________________________________ 

Home Address: _______________________ 

____________________________________ 

Name: ______________________________ Name: ______________________________ 

Home Address: _______________________ 

____________________________________ 

Subscribed and sworn before me this ___ day 

of 

___________ , 2 __. 

(Notary Public) 

My Commission expires: 

Home Address: _______________________ 

____________________________________ 

_________________________________ 

(Affiant) 

________________________________ 

(Print name & title of affiant) 

(Corporate Seal) 


11-C-018 



SUBCONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION 





11-C-018 

SUB-CONSULTANT LISTING 

Please list the names of all subcontractors to be used on this project. (Add 

additional sheets where necessary). The subcontractor certification form must 

be completed for each firm listed. 

All subcontractors designated by the bidder shall be capable of doing the work and must 

have adequate financial resources and experience to perform the work specified. 

Information regarding the work experience of the designated subcontractor shall also be 

provided with the bid. Specifically, the bidder shall include a listing of all relevant jobs 

performed by the subcontractor within the past two (2) years. 

1. _____________________________________ 

2. _____________________________________ 

3. _____________________________________ 

4. _____________________________________ 

5. _____________________________________ 

6. _____________________________________ 

7. _____________________________________ 

8. _____________________________________ 

The Bidder will not be using any subcontractors. 

THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED AND SUBMITTED BY THE BIDDER. 

________________________________ ________________________________ 

Name of Bidder Signature 

________________________________ ________________________________ 

Name Printed Title 

Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of ,20110. 

(CORPORATE SEAL) 

________________________ 

Notary Public 



11-C-018 

SUBCONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION FORM 

All subcontractors designated by the bidder shall be capable of doing the work and must 

have adequate financial resources and experience to perform the work specified. 

Information regarding the work experience of the designated subcontractor shall also be 

provided with the bid. Specifically, the bidder shall include a listing of all relevant jobs 

performed by the sub-consultant within the past two (2) years. 

Please print the following information legibly. NOTE: Provide this information on 

additional sheets, as required, in accordance with the following format. 

How many years has sub-consultant been engaged in this particular field? ____ years. 

Subcontractor 

Firm Name ____________________________________________ 

Address ____________________________________________ 

____________________________________________ 

Contact Person ____________________________________________ 

Telephone # ___________________________ 

Facsimile # ___________________________ 

Trade ____________________________________________ 

State License # ____________________________________________ 

THIS FORM TO BE SIGNED AND SUBMITTED BY THE SUBCONTRACTOR. 

________________________________ ________________________________ 

Name of Subcontractor Signature 

________________________________ ________________________________ 

Name Printed Title 

Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of ,2010. 

(CORPORATE SEAL) 

________________________ 

Notary Public 


11-C-018 

Provide a list of relevant contracts (company/firm) completed by sub-consultants within 

the last two (2) years. DO NOT INCLUDE WORK WITH THE HOUSING AUTHORITY 

OF THE CITY OF NEWARK. 

(This form may be duplicated.) 

1. _________________ 

Company Name Telephone # Completion Date 

_____________________ ______________________ 

Address Contact Person 

_____________________ ______________________ 

City/State/Zip Contract Amount 

2. _________________ 


_____________________ ______________________ 


_____________________ ______________________ 


3. _________________ 


_____________________ ______________________ 


_____________________ ______________________ 



11-C-018 



ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF 

ADDENDUM(S) AND/OR 

CLARIFICATION(S) 





11-C-018 

ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF RECEIPT OF ADDENDA/CLARIFICATION 

The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda/ 

Clarification: 

Addendum/Clarification Dated Acknowledge Receipt 

Number (initial) 

No Addenda/Clarification(s) were received: 

THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED AND SUBMITTED BY THE BIDDER. 

Acknowledged for: ______________________________________________________ 

(Name of Bidder) 

By: _____________________________________________ 

(Signature of Authorized Representative) 

Name: ___________________________________________ 

Title: ____________________________________________ 

Date: ____________________________________________ 


11-C-018 



BUSINESS REGISTRATION 

CERTIFICATE & 

SUBCONTRACTOR(S) BUSINESS 

REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE(S) 


11-C-018 

SAMPLE 

BUSINESS REGISTRATION CERTIFICATES (only these forms will be accepted!) 


11-C-018 



NON COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT 


STATE OF : 

: SS 

COUNTY OF : 

11-C-018 

AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION 

The undersigned, being duly sworn according to law, deposes and says: 

1. that, as the party making the foregoing Bid, that such Bid is genuine and not 

collusive or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, 

directly or indirectly, with any bidder or person, to put in a sham bid or to refrain from 

bidding, and has not, in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or 

collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price of affiant or 

of any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or of that 

of any other bidder, or to secure any advantages against the Newark Housing Authority, or 

any person interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements in said Bid are true. 

2. The bidder further certifies that he/she has not been convicted or found liable for 

any act prohibited by state or federal law involving conspiracy or collusion with respect to 

proposing or bidding on any public contract within the last three years. Such act or 

conviction does not automatically disqualify a bidder, but may be grounds for 

administrative suspension or grounds for consideration by NHA as to whether NHA should 

decline to award a contract to such a bidder on the basis of a lack of responsibility. If 

bidder has been convicted of any act prohibited by state or federal law involving collusion 

with respect to proposing or bidding on any public contract within the past three years, 

bidder should attach an explanation of the circumstances surrounding that conviction. 

Sworn to and subscribed ___________________________ 

before me this Firm Name 

day of ____________, 2011. 

___________________________ 

Notary Public Name 

________________________ ___________________________ 

Title 

___________________________ 

Signature of Bidder 


11-C-018 



STATEMENT OF BIDDER’S 

QUALIFICATIONS 


11-C-018 

STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS 

NAME OF BIDDER: ________________________________________________ 

BIDDER'S ADDRESS: ________________________________________________ 

I. If a corporation, answer the following: 

________________________________________________ 

a. Date of Incorporation: ___________________________________________ 

b. State of Incorporation: ___________________________________________ 

c. President’s Name: ___________________________________________ 

d. Vice President's Name: ___________________________________________ 

II. If an individual or partnership, answer the following: 

a. Date of Organization: _____________________________________ 

b. Name(s) and address(es) of Individual/Partners: 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

III. State background and experience of principals and key personnel. 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

It is necessary that the bidder present evidence that he is a general contractor and that 

he has been in business for at least five years, satisfactorily completing similar projects. 

In addition, he shall submit evidence that his company has the necessary equipment 

and resources to carry out this scope of work. 

1. How many years has your organization been in business performing the type of 


work required under this contract? 

11-C-018 

________________________________________________________________ 

2. State general character of work performed by your company. 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

3. We normally perform % of the work with our own forces. 

4. Have you ever failed to complete or defaulted on any contract awarded to you? 

If so, state circumstances. 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

5. Has any officer/partner of your organization ever been an officer/partner of any 

organization that failed to complete a service contract? If so, state name of 

individual, organization and reason thereof. 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

6. List any outstanding liens against your company. 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

7. Name of the supervisor proposed for this work. 

________________________________________________________________ 

8. Explain in what manner you have inspected site(s). 


11-C-018 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

9. Name of the supervisor proposed for this work. 

________________________________________________________________ 

10. List recent contracts and amounts recently completed. 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

11. List trade references: 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

12. List bank references: 

________________________________________________________________ 

________________________________________________________________ 

Credit available: Please list amount. $__________________________________ 

Will you, upon request, submit a detailed financial statement and furnish any other 

information required by the Housing Authority of the City of Newark? Yes ( ). No ( ). 

13. Have you entered into contracts or received firm offers for materials required for 

preparing your bid? Yes ( ). No ( ). 


11-C-018 

FINANCIAL STATEMENT 

_____________________________________________ 

NAME OF FIRM 

_________________________________ 

DATE 

CURRENT ASSETS: 

Cash $_________________ 

Joint Venture Account $_________________ 

Accounts Receivable $_________________ 

Notes Receivable $_________________ 

Accrued Interest on Notes $_________________ 

Deposits $_________________ 

Material and Prepaid Expense $_________________ 

Total Current Assets $_________________ 

FIXED ASSETS NET: $_________________ 

OTHER ASSETS: $_________________ 

TOTAL ASSETS : $_________________ 

CURRENT LIABLITIES : 

Accounts Payable $_________________ 

Notes Payable $_________________ 

Accrued Interest on Notes $_________________ 

Provisions for Taxes $_________________ 

Accrued Salaries $_________________ 

Payroll Taxes $_________________ 

Other $_________________ 

Total Current Liabilities $_________________ 

OTHER LIABILITIES $_________________ 

CAPITAL: 

Capital Stock $_________________ 

Authorized and Outstanding 

Shares, Par Value $_________________ 

Earned Surplus $_________________ 

TOTAL LIABILITIES & CAPITAL: $_________________ 


11-C-018 

The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to 

furnish any information requested by the NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORITY in 

verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. 

___________________________________ 

(Company Name) 

___________________________________ 

(Signature) 

___________________________________ 

(Title) 

___________________________________ 

(Date) 

**************************************************************************************************** 

AFFIDAVIT 

State of ) 

) SS: 

County of ) 

(Name), being duly sworn, deposes and says that he is 

(Title) of (Company) and that the answers to the 

foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. 

________________________________ 

Subscribed and sworn to Signature 

before me this day 

___________________ 20____. 

_____________________________ 

My commission expires _____________. 


11-C-018 



STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE - 

WAGES 


11-C-018 

STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE - WAGES 

This is to certify that all persons employed by the undersigned will be paid full weekly 

wages earned, less permissible deductions for income taxes, Social Security, etc., and 

that no rebates have been or will be made either directly or indirectly to the undersigned 

from the full weekly wages earned by any person in its employ, and further that all 

employees will be paid as defined in Regulations, Part 3 (29 CFR) issued by the 

Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act, as amended (43 Stat. 948, 63 Stat. 108, 72 

Stat. 967; U.S.C. 276), and described on said payroll; that said payroll is correct and 

complete; that the wage rates contained in said payroll for laborers and mechanics 

pursuant to the contract under which such work was performed; and that the 

classification set forth for each laborer or mechanic conforms with the work he 

performed. 

______________________________________ 

SIGNATURE 

______________________________________ 

TITLE 


11-C-018 



AFFIRMATIVE ACTION DOCUMENTS 


AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM 

11-C-018 

1. CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATION. To be a responsive bidder, the contractor/bidder 

must submit the statements included herewith that sets forth the minimum Affirmative 

Action requirements of the Newark Housing Authority. 

At a minimum, the contractor (and/or relevant subcontractors) shall submit with his bid the 

following documentation explicated in detail below upon bidding for any particular 

materials, supplies or services: 

A. Certificate of compliance (narrative) 

B. Affidavit of MBE Participation 

C. Good faith in use of Section 3 business concern 

The contractor shall not discriminate against employees and applicants for employment on 

the grounds of union membership, or because of race, color, religion, sex, or national 

origin. 

The contractor/bidder (or relevant subcontractor) must also submit a signed narrative NHA 

"Statement of Compliance" with the Affirmative Action requirements pursuant to this 

document as well as all Federal, State, Municipal and Executive Order mandates. 

2. SUBCONTRACTORS. Each prime contractor is responsible for the performance of 

his subcontractors for the implementation of the Affirmative Action Program during the 

performance of the contract. Whenever the contractor subcontracts a portion of services 

or materials, the subcontract shall bind the subcontractor to the obligations contained 

herein to the same extent as if he were the contractor. 

NOTE: Contractor will not be paid any additional amount for minority participation or 

subcontractors. 


11-C-018 

STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE BY ALL CONTRACTORS 

AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN 

The employment policies and practices of the (YOUR COMPANY'S NAME) are to 

recruit and to hire employees without discrimination because of race, creed, color, or 

national origin, ancestry, marital status, political affiliation, liability for service in the 

armed forces of the United States or physical/mental handicap (except to the extent that 

such disability prevents the applicant from performing the tasks related to his/her 

occupation, profession, office or craft) and to treat them equally with respect to 

compensation and opportunities for advancement, including upgrading, promotion and 

transfer. 

This company submits this plan to assure compliance with Executive Order #11246 and 

subsequent orders and more specifically the Housing Authority of the City of Newark's 

Affirmative Action Plan that may pertain to this program and to reaffirm its continued 

commitment to a program of equal employment opportunity and merit employment 

policies. 

It agrees to assert leadership within the community and to put forth the maximum effort 

to achieve full employment and utilization of the capabilities and productivity to all who 

apply for employment on an equal basis. 

This company further recognizes that the effective application of a policy of merit 

employment involves more than a policy statement and will, therefore, undertake a 

program of affirmative action to make known that equal employment opportunities are 

available on the basis of individual merit and to give notice to all persons seeking 

employment and to strive for advancement on this basis. 

President/Director 

________________________________ ________________________________ 

Your Company's Name Address 

________________________________ ________________________________ 

Job Site City State Zip Code 


11-C-018 

AFFIDAVIT OF 

MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PARTICIPATION 

STATE OF ______________________________ 

COUNTY OF ____________________________ 

being first sworn states: 

That I the respondent 

(am a Partner, Director, or Owner of the bidding firm) submitting the foregoing proposal 

or bid and that said party will comply with the requirements of the Equal Business 

Opportunity Program of the Housing Authority of the City of Newark and in furtherance 

thereof agrees to subcontract at least 30% of the goods or services to be awarded in a 

contract to a certified minority business entrepreneur. The bidder shall acquire the 

stated percentage of goods or services to be supplied hereunder from the following 

minority business enterprise(s): 

Minority Business Enterprise Percent of Bid Product or Service 

(address and phone number) (or dollar value) 

________________________ _________________ _____________________ 

________________________ _________________ _____________________ 

________________________ _________________ _____________________ 

________________________ _________________ _____________________ 

________________________ _________________ _____________________ 

I understand that nothing herein obligates the Housing Authority of the City of Newark to 

approve of said Equal Business Opportunity Program as a supplier or subcontractor for 

the goods and/or services stated and that the Authority may require the 

contractor/bidder to substitute suppliers or subcontractors other than the one(s) 

specified. In addition, it is understood and agreed that nothing herein gives any 

MBE/WBE an enforceable right against the Housing Authority of the City of Newark. 

Sworn and subscribed before 

me this day of 

, 2011. 

__________________________________ 

__________________________________ 

Name 

__________________________________ 

Title 


Your Company 

Street Address 

City State Zip Code 

Attention: All Employees 

11-C-018 

DESIGNATION OF COMPLIANCE OFFICER/ 

EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY 

Mr./Ms. ____________________ has been appointed the Affirmative Action 

Compliance Officer, under the direct supervision of (YOUR COMPANY’S 

DIRECTOR/PRESIDENT) for the (NAME OF YOU COMPANY). He/She will handle all 

complaints which allege discrimination because of race, creed, color or national origin 

ancestry, marital status, political affiliation, liability for service in the armed forces of the 

United States or physical/mental handicap (except to the extent that such disability 

prevents the applicant from performing the tasks related to his/her occupation, 

profession, office or craft). He/She will also handle all compliance situations relative to 

the Housing Authority of the City of Newark’s Affirmative Action Program. 

This company has pledged to abide by the provisions of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 and 

the current Executive Order relating to Equal Employment Opportunity. 

Mr./Ms. J____________________ Doe can be reached by telephone at (PHONE 

NUMBER). His/Her office address is at (STREET ADDRESS, CITY, STATE, ZIP 

CODE). 

__________________________________ 

President/Director 

__________________________________ 

Job Site 

c: Office of Affirmative Action 


11-C-018 

AFFIRMATIVE ACTION COMPLIANCE NOTICE 

N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 and N.J.A.C. 17:27 

GOODS AND SERVICES CONTRACTS 

(INCLUDING PROFESSIONAL SERVICES) 

This form is a summary of the successful bidder’s requirement to comply with the 

requirements of N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 and N.J.A.C. 17:27. 

The successful bidder shall submit to the public agency, after notification of award but 

prior to execution of this contract, one of the following three documents as forms of 

evidence: 

(a) A photocopy of a valid letter that the contractor is operating 

under an existing Federally approved or sanctioned affirmative 

action program (good for one year from the date of the letter); 

OR 

(b) A photocopy of a Certificate of Employee Information Report 

approval, issued in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-4; 

OR 

(c) A photocopy of an Employee Information Report (Form AA302) 

provided by the Division and distributed to the public agency to be 

completed by the contractor in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-4. 

The successful vendor may obtain the Affirmative Action Employee Information Report 

(AA302) from the contracting unit during normal business hours. 

The successful vendor(s) must submit the copies of the AA302 Report to the Division of 

Contract Compliance and Equal Employment Opportunity in Public Contracts (Division). 

The Public Agency copy is submitted to the public agency, and the vendor copy is 

retained by the vendor. 

The undersigned vendor certifies that he/she is aware of the commitment to comply with 

the requirements of N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 and N.J.A.C. 17:27 and agrees to furnish the 

required forms of evidence. 

The undersigned vendor further understands that his/her bid shall be rejected as nonresponsive 

if said contractor fails to comply with the requirements of N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 

and N.J.A.C. 17:27. 

COMPANY: SIGNATURE: 

PRINT NAME: TITLE: 

DATE: 


11-C-018 


11-C-018 



REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS 

& OTHER STATEMENTS OF BIDDERS 

(HUD 5369A) 


Previous edition is obsolete 

U.S. Department of Housing 

and Urban Development 


Representations, Certifications, 

and Other Statements of Bidders 


form HUD-5369-A (11/92)

Representations, Certifications, 

and Other Statements of Bidders 



Clause Page 

1. Certificate of Independent Price Determination 1 

2. Contingent Fee Representation and Agreement 1 

3. Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments 

to Influence Certain Federal Transactions 1 

4. Organizational Conflicts of Interest Certification 2 

5. Bidder's Certification of Eligibility 2 

6. Minimum Bid Acceptance Period 2 

7. Small, Minority, Women-Owned Business Concern 

Representation 2 

8. Indian-Owned Economic Enterprise and Indian 

Organization Representation 2 

9. Certification of Eligibility Under the Davis-Bacon Act 3 

10. Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities 3 

11. Clean Air and Water Certification 3 

12. Previous Participation Certificate 3 

13. Bidder's Signature 3 

1. Certificate of Independent Price Determination 

(a) The bidder certifies that-- 

(1) The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently, 

without, for the purpose of restricting competition, any consultation, 

communication, or agreement with any other bidder or competitor 

relating to (i) those prices, (ii) the intention to submit a bid, or (iii) the 

methods or factors used to calculate the prices offered; 

(2) The prices in this bid have not been and will not be knowingly 

disclosed by the bidder, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or 

competitor before bid opening (in the case of a sealed bid solicitation) 

or contract award (in the case of a competitive proposal solicitation) 

unless otherwise required by law; and 

(3) No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to 

induce any other concern to submit or not to submit a bid for the 

purpose of restricting competition. 

(b) Each signature on the bid is considered to be a certification by the 

signatory that the signatory-- 

(1) Is the person in the bidder's organization responsible for 

determining the prices being offered in this bid or proposal, and that 

the signatory has not participated and will not participate in any action 

contrary to subparagraphs (a)(l) through (a)(3) above; or 

(2) (i) Has been authorized, in writing, to act as agent for the 

following principals in certifying that those principals have not participated, 

and will not participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs 

(a)(l) through (a)(3) above. 

_______________________________________________ [insert 

full name of person(s) in the bidder's organization responsible for 

determining the prices offered in this bid or proposal, and the title of his 

or her position in the bidder's organization]; 

(ii) As an authorized agent, does certify that the principals 

named in subdivision (b)(2)(i) above have not participated, and will not 

participate, in any action contrary to subparagraphs (a)(1) through 

(a)(3) above; and 


Page1 of 3 

(iii) As an agent, has not personally participated, and will not 

participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs (a)(1) through 

(a)(3) above. 

(c) If the bidder deletes or modifies subparagraph (a)2 above, the 

bidder must furnish with its bid a signed statement setting forth in detail 

the circumstances of the disclosure. 

[ ] [Contracting Officer check if following paragraph is applicable] 

(d) Non-collusive affidavit. (applicable to contracts for construction 

and equipment exceeding $50,000) 

(1) Each bidder shall execute, in the form provided by the PHA/ 

IHA, an affidavit to the effect that he/she has not colluded with any other 

person, firm or corporation in regard to any bid submitted in response 

to this solicitation. If the successful bidder did not submit the affidavit 

with his/her bid, he/she must submit it within three (3) working days of 

bid opening. Failure to submit the affidavit by that date may render the 

bid nonresponsive. No contract award will be made without a properly 

executed affidavit. 

(2) A fully executed "Non-collusive Affidavit" [ ] is, [ ] is not 

included with the bid. 

2. Contingent Fee Representation and Agreement 

(a) Definitions. As used in this provision: 

"Bona fide employee" means a person, employed by a bidder and 

subject to the bidder's supervision and control as to time, place, and 

manner of performance, who neither exerts, nor proposes to exert 

improper influence to solicit or obtain contracts nor holds out as being 

able to obtain any contract(s) through improper influence. 

"Improper influence" means any influence that induces or tends 

to induce a PHA/IHA employee or officer to give consideration or to act 

regarding a PHA/IHA contract on any basis other than the merits of the 

matter. 

(b) The bidder represents and certifies as part of its bid that, except 

for full-time bona fide employees working solely for the bidder, the 

bidder: 

(1) [ ] has, [ ] has not employed or retained any person or 

company to solicit or obtain this contract; and 

(2) [ ] has, [ ] has not paid or agreed to pay to any person or 

company employed or retained to solicit or obtain this contract any 

commission, percentage, brokerage, or other fee contingent upon or 

resulting from the award of this contract. 

(c) If the answer to either (a)(1) or (a)(2) above is affirmative, the 

bidder shall make an immediate and full written disclosure to the PHA/ 

IHA Contracting Officer. 

(d) Any misrepresentation by the bidder shall give the PHA/IHA the 

right to (1) terminate the contract; (2) at its discretion, deduct from 

contract payments the amount of any commission, percentage, 

brokerage, or other contingent fee; or (3) take other remedy pursuant 

to the contract. 

3. Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments to 

Influence Certain Federal Transactions (applicable to 


(a) The definitions and prohibitions contained in Section 1352 of title 

31, United States Code, are hereby incorporated by reference in 

paragraph (b) of this certification. 

form HUD-5369-A (11/92)

(b) The bidder, by signing its bid, hereby certifies to the best of his or 

her knowledge and belief as of December 23, 1989 that: 

(1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid 

to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or 

employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or 

employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress on 

his or her behalf in connection with the awarding of a contract resulting 

from this solicitation; 

(2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds (including 

profit or fee received under a covered Federal transaction) have been 

paid, or will be paid, to any person for influencing or attempting to 

influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, 

an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a 

Member of Congress on his or her behalf in connection with this 

solicitation, the bidder shall complete and submit, with its bid, OMB 

standard form LLL, "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities;" and 

(3) He or she will include the language of this certification in all 

subcontracts at any tier and require that all recipients of subcontract 

awards in excess of $100,000 shall certify and disclose accordingly. 

(c) Submission of this certification and disclosure is a prerequisite for 

making or entering into this contract imposed by section 1352, title 31, 

United States Code. Any person who makes an expenditure prohibited 

under this provision or who fails to file or amend the disclosure form 

to be filed or amended by this provision, shall be subject to a civil 

penalty of not less than $10,000, and not more than $100,000, for each 

such failure. 

(d) Indian tribes (except those chartered by States) and Indian 

organizations as defined in section 4 of the Indian Self-Determination 

and Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 450B) are exempt from the 

requirements of this provision. 

4. Organizational Conflicts of Interest Certification 

The bidder certifies that to the best of its knowledge and belief and 

except as otherwise disclosed, he or she does not have any organizational 

conflict of interest which is defined as a situation in which the 

nature of work to be performed under this proposed contract and the 

bidder's organizational, financial, contractual, or other interests may, 

without some restriction on future activities: 

(a) Result in an unfair competitive advantage to the bidder; or, 

(b) Impair the bidder's objectivity in performing the contract work. 

[ ] In the absence of any actual or apparent conflict, I hereby certify 

that to the best of my knowledge and belief, no actual or apparent 

conflict of interest exists with regard to my possible performance of this 

procurement. 

5. Bidder's Certification of Eligibility 

(a) By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that to the best 

of its knowledge and belief, neither it, nor any person or firm which has 

an interest in the bidder's firm, nor any of the bidder's subcontractors, 

is ineligible to: 

(1) Be awarded contracts by any agency of the United States 

Government, HUD, or the State in which this contract is to be 

performed; or, 

(2) Participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24. 

(b) The certification in paragraph (a) above is a material representation 

of fact upon which reliance was placed when making award. If it 

is later determined that the bidder knowingly rendered an erroneous 

certification, the contract may be terminated for default, and the bidder 

may be debarred or suspended from participation in HUD programs 

and other Federal contract programs. 


Page 2 of 3 

6. Minimum Bid Acceptance Period 

(a) "Acceptance period," as used in this provision, means the number 

of calendar days available to the PHA/IHA for awarding a contract from 

the date specified in this solicitation for receipt of bids. 

(b) This provision supersedes any language pertaining to the acceptance 

period that may appear elsewhere in this solicitation. 

(c) The PHA/IHA requires a minimum acceptance period of 

[Contracting Officer insert time period] calendar days. 

(d) In the space provided immediately below, bidders may specify a 

longer acceptance period than the PHA's/IHA's minimum requirement. 

The bidder allows the following acceptance period: calendar days. 

(e) A bid allowing less than the PHA's/IHA's minimum acceptance 

period will be rejected. 

(f) The bidder agrees to execute all that it has undertaken to do, in 

compliance with its bid, if that bid is accepted in writing within (1) the 

acceptance period stated in paragraph (c) above or (2) any longer 

acceptance period stated in paragraph (d) above. 

7. Small, Minority, Women-Owned Business Concern 

Representation 

The bidder represents and certifies as part of its bid/ offer that it -- 

(a) [ ] is, [ ] is not a small business concern. "Small business 

concern," as used in this provision, means a concern, including its 

affiliates, that is independently owned and operated, not dominant in 

the field of operation in which it is bidding, and qualified as a small 

business under the criteria and size standards in 13 CFR 121. 

(b) [ ] is, [ ] is not a women-owned business enterprise. "Womenowned 

business enterprise," as used in this provision, means a 

business that is at least 51 percent owned by a woman or women who 

are U.S. citizens and who also control and operate the business. 

(c) [ ] is, [ ] is not a minority business enterprise. "Minority business 

enterprise," as used in this provision, means a business which is at 

least 51 percent owned or controlled by one or more minority group 

members or, in the case of a publicly owned business, at least 51 

percent of its voting stock is owned by one or more minority group 

members, and whose management and daily operations are controlled 

by one or more such individuals. For the purpose of this 

definition, minority group members are: 

(Check the block applicable to you) 

[ ] Black Americans [ ] Asian Pacific Americans 

[ ] Hispanic Americans [ ] Asian Indian Americans 

[ ] Native Americans [ ] Hasidic Jewish Americans 

8. Indian-Owned Economic Enterprise and Indian 

Organization Representation (applicable only if this 

solicitation is for a contract to be performed on a project for an 

Indian Housing Authority) 

The bidder represents and certifies that it: 

(a) [ ] is, [ ] is not an Indian-owned economic enterprise. "Economic 

enterprise," as used in this provision, means any commercial, industrial, 

or business activity established or organized for the purpose of 

profit, which is at least 51 percent Indian owned. "Indian," as used in 

this provision, means any person who is a member of any tribe, band, 

group, pueblo, or community which is recognized by the Federal 

Government as eligible for services from the Bureau of Indian Affairs 

and any "Native" as defined in the Alaska Native Claims Settlement 

Act. 

(b) [ ] is, [ ] is not an Indian organization. "Indian organization," as 

used in this provision, means the governing body of any Indian tribe or 

entity established or recognized by such governing body. Indian "tribe" 

form HUD-5369-A (11/92)

means any Indian tribe, band, group, pueblo, or community including 

Native villages and Native groups (including corporations organized by 

Kenai, Juneau, Sitka, and Kodiak) as defined in the Alaska Native 

Claims Settlement Act, which is recognized by the Federal Government 

as eligible for services from the Bureau of Indian Affairs. 

9. Certification of Eligibility Under the Davis-Bacon Act 

(applicable to construction contracts exceeding $2,000) 

(a) By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that neither it nor 

any person or firm who has an interest in the bidder's firm is a person 

or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United States 

Government by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 

5.12(a)(1). 

(b) No part of the contract resulting from this solicitation shall be 

subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts 

by the United States Government by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis- 

Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). 

(c) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U. S. 

Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. 

10. Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities (applicable to 


(a) The bidder's attention is called to the clause entitled Equal 

Employment Opportunity of the General Conditions of the Contract 

for Construction. 

(b) "Segregated facilities," as used in this provision, means any 

waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurants 

and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage 

or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or 

entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for 

employees, that are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact 

segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or national origin 

because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. 

(c) By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that it does not 

and will not maintain or provide for its employees any segregated 

facilities at any of its establishments, and that it does not and will not 

permit its employees to perform their services at any location under its 

control where segregated facilities are maintained. The bidder agrees 

that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Employment 

Opportunity clause in the contract. 

(d) The bidder further agrees that (except where it has obtained 

identical certifications from proposed subcontractors for specific time 

periods) prior to entering into subcontracts which exceed $10,000 and 

are not exempt from the requirements of the Equal Employment 

Opportunity clause, it will: 

(1) Obtain identical certifications from the proposed subcontractors; 

(2) Retain the certifications in its files; and 

(3) Forward the following notice to the proposed subcontractors 

(except if the proposed subcontractors have submitted identical 

certifications for specific time periods): 


Page 3 of 3 

Notice to Prospective Subcontractors of Requirement for 

Certifications of Nonsegregated Facilities 

A Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities must be submitted before 

the award of a subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt 

from the provisions of the Equal Employment Opportunity clause of the 

prime contract. The certification may be submitted either for each 

subcontract or for all subcontracts during a period (i.e., quarterly, 

semiannually, or annually). 

Note: The penalty for making false statements in bids is prescribed 

in 18 U.S.C. 1001. 

11. Clean Air and Water Certification (applicable to contracts 

exceeding $100,000) 

The bidder certifies that: 

(a) Any facility to be used in the performance of this contract [ ] is, 

[ ] is not listed on the Environmental Protection Agency List of Violating 

Facilities: 

(b) The bidder will immediately notify the PHA/IHA Contracting 

Officer, before award, of the receipt of any communication from the 

Administrator, or a designee, of the Environmental Protection Agency, 

indicating that any facility that the bidder proposes to use for the 

performance of the contract is under consideration to be listed on the 

EPA List of Violating Facilities; and, 

(c) The bidder will include a certification substantially the same as this 

certification, including this paragraph (c), in every nonexempt subcontract. 

12. Previous Participation Certificate (applicable to 

construction and equipment contracts exceeding $50,000) 

(a) The bidder shall complete and submit with his/her bid the Form 

HUD-2530, "Previous Participation Certificate." If the successful 

bidder does not submit the certificate with his/her bid, he/she must 

submit it within three (3) working days of bid opening. Failure to submit 

the certificate by that date may render the bid nonresponsive. No 

contract award will be made without a properly executed certificate. 

(b) A fully executed "Previous Participation Certificate" 

[ ] is, [ ] is not included with the bid. 

13. Bidder's Signature 

The bidder hereby certifies that the information contained in these 

certifications and representations is accurate, complete, and current. 

___________________________________________________________________ 

(Signature and Date) 

___________________________________________________________________ 

(Typed or Printed Name) 

___________________________________________________________________ 

(Title) 

___________________________________________________________________ 

(Company Name) 

(Company Address) 

form HUD-5369-A (11/92)

11-C-018 



PREVIOUS PARTICIPATION 

CERTIFICATION 

(HUD 2530) 


OMB Approval No. 2502-0118 

(exp11/30/2012) 

U.S. Department of Agriculture 

Farmers Home Administration 

U.S. Department of Housing 

and Urban Development 

Office of Housing/Federal Housing Commissioner 

Previous Participation 

Certification 

Part I To be completed by Principals of Multifamily Projects. See Instructions For HUD HQ/FmHA use only 

Reason for Submitting Certification 

1. Agency Name and City where the application is filed 2. Project Name, Project Number, City and Zip Code contained in the application 

3. Loan or Contract Amount 4. Number of Units or Beds 5. Section of Act 6. Type of Project (check one) 

Existing Rehabilitation Proposed (New) 

List of �ll �roposed Principal Participants and attach organization chart for all organizations. 

7. Names and Addresses of All Known Principals and Affiliates (people, businesses & organizations) 8. Role of Each 9. Expected % Owner 10. Social Security or IRS 

proposing to participate in the project described above. (list names alphabetically; last, first, middle initial) Principal in Project ship Interest in Project Employer Number 

5. I am not a principal participant in an assisted or 

insured project as of this date on which 

construction has stopped for a period in excess 

of�20 days or which has been substantially 

completed for more than 90 days and documents 

for�closing, including final cost certification have 

not been filed with HUD or FmHA 

6. To my knowledge I have not been found by 

HUD or FmHA to be in noncompliance with any 

applicable fair housing and civil rights 

requirements in 24 CFR 5.10�(a). 

7. I am not a Member of Congress or a Resident 

Commissioner nor otherwise prohibited or limited 

by law from contracting with the Government of 

the United States of America. 

8. ��Statements above (if any) to which I cannot 

certify have been deleted by striking through the 

words with a pen. I have initialed each deletion (if 

any) and have attached a true and accurate signed 

statement (if applicable) to explain the facts and 

circumstances which I think helps to qualify me 

as a responsible principal for participation in this 

project. 

complaint or indictment charging a felony. (A 

felony is defined as any offense punishable by 

imprisonment for a term exceeding one year, but 

does not include any offense classified as a 

misdemeanor under the laws of a State and 

punishable by imprisonment of two years or less); 

f. ��have not been suspended, debarred or otherwise 

restricted by any Department or Agency of the 

Federal Government or of a State Government 

from doing business with such Department or 

Agency. 

g. I have not defaulted on an obligation covered by a 

surety or performance bond and have not been the 

subject of a claim under an employee fidelity 

bond. 

3. All the names of the parties, known to me to be 

principals in this project(s) in which I propose to 

participate, are listed above. 

4. I am not a HUD/FmHA employee or a member of a 

HUD/FmHA employee's immediate household as 

defined��in Standards of Ethical Conduct��or 

Employees of the Executive Branch in 5C.F.R. Part 

2635 (57 FR 35006) and HUD's Standard of 

Conduct in 24 C.F.R. Part � and USDA's Standard 

of Conduct in 7 C.F.R. Part � Subpart B. 

insured project of HUD, USDA FmHA and State 

and local government housing finance agencies in 

which I have been or am now a principal. 

2. For the period beginning 10 years prior to the date 

of this certification, and except as shown by me on 

the certification. 

a. No mortgage on a project listed by me has ever 

been in default, assigned to the Government or 

foreclosed, nor has mortgage relief by the 

mortgagee been given; 

b.��I��ave not experienced defaults or 

noncompliances under any Conventional 

Contract or Turnkey Contract of Sale in 

connection with a public housing project; 

c. To the best of my knowledge, there are no 

unresolved findings raised as a result of HUD 

audits, management reviews or other 

Governmental investigations concerning me or 

my projects; 

d. There has not been a suspension or termination 

of payments under any HUD assistance contract 

in which I have had a legal or beneficial 

interest; 

e. I have not been convicted of a felony and am not 

presently, to my knowledge, the subject of a 

Certifications: I (meaning the individual who signs 

as well as the corporations, partnerships or other 

parties listed above who certify) hereby apply to 

HUD or USDA FmHA, as the case maybe, for 

approval to participate as a principal in the role and 

project listed above based upon my following 

previous participation record and this Certification. 

Verify that neither you nor any of your principals or 

affiliates have ever been found to be in 

noncompliance with any applicable fair housing and 

civil rights requirements in 24 CFR 5.105 (a). If you 

or any of your principals or affiliates have been found 

to be in noncompliance with any such requirements, 

attach a signed statement explaining the relevant 

facts, circumstances, and resolution, if any. 

I certify that all the statements made by me are true, 

complete and correct to the best of my knowledge 

and belief and are made in good faith, including the 

data contained in Schedule A and Exhibits signed by 

me and attached to this form. �� HUD will 

prosecute false claims and statements. Conviction 

may result in criminal and/or civil penalties. (18 

U.S.C. 1001, 1010, 1012; 31U.S.C. 3729, 3802) 

I further certify that: 

1. Schedule A contains a listing of every assisted or 

Typed or Printed Name of Principal Signature of Principal Certification Date (mm/dd/yyyy) Area Code and Telephone No. 

This form was prepared by (Please print name) Area Code and Telephone No. 

Previous editions are obsolete 

Page 1 of 2 

ref Handbook 4065.1 form HUD-2530 (7/2009)

Schedule A: List of Previous Projects and Section 8 Contracts. By my name below is the complete list of my previous projects and my participation history as a principal; in Multifamily 

Housing programs of HUD/FmHA, State, and Local Housing Finance Agencies. Note: Read and follow the instruction sheet carefully. Abbreviate where possible. Make full disclosure. 

Add extra sheets if you need more space. Double check for accuracy. If you have no previous projects write, by your name, "No previous participation, First Experience." 

1. List each Principal's Name 2. List Previous Projects 3. List Principals' Role(s) 4. Status of Loan 5. Was Project ever in Default, 6. Last Mgmt. 

(give the I.D. number, project name, city location, (current, defaulted, during your participation? and/or 

(list in alphabetical order, & government agency involved (indicate dates participated, and assigned, or . Physical Inspctn 

last name first) if other than HUD) if fee or identity of interest participant) foreclosed) Yes No If "Yes," explain Rating and Date 

Part II – For HUD Internal Processing Only 

Received and checked by me for accuracy and completeness; recommend approval or transferral to Headquarters as checked below: 

Date (mm/dd/yyyy) Telephone Number and Area Code A. No adverse information; form HUD-2530 C. Disclosure or Certification problem 

approval is recommended. 

Staff Processing and Control B. Name match in system D. Other, our memorandum is attached. 

Supervisor Director of Housing / Director, Multifamily Division Approved Date (mm/dd/yyyy) 

Yes No 

Previous editions are obsolete 

Page 2 of 2 

ref Handbook 4065.1 form HUD-2530 (7/2009)

If you do request reconsideration by the 

Review Committee and the reconsideration 

results in an adverse determination, you may 

then request a hearing before a Hearing Officer. 

The Hearing Officer will issue a report to 

the Review Committee. You will be notified of 

the final ruling by certified mail. 

Specific Line Instructions: 

Reason for submitting this Certificatioin: e.g., 

refinance, management, change in ownership, 

transfer of physical assets, etc. 

Block 1: Fill in the name of the agency to 

which you are applying. For example: HUD 

Office, Farmers Home Administration District 

office, or the name of a State or local housing 

finance agency. Below that, fill in the name of 

the city where the office is located. 

Block 2: Fill in the name of the project, such 

as "Greenwood Apts." If the name has not yet 

been selected, write "Name unknown." Below 

that, enter the HUD contract or project identification 

number, the Farmers Home Administration 

project number, or the State or local 

housing finance agency project or contract 

number. Include all project or contract identification 

numbers that are relevant to the 

project.Also enter the name of the city in which 

the project is located, and the ZIP Code of the 

site location. 

Block 3: Fill in the dollar amount requested in 

the proposed mortgage, or the annual amount 

of rental assistance requested. 

Block 4: Fill in the number of apartment units 

proposed, such as "40 units." For hospital 

projects or nursing homes, fill in the number of 

beds proposed, such as "100 beds." 

Block 5: Fill in the section of the Housing Act 

under which the application is filed. 

Block 7: Definitions of all those who are 

considered principals and affiliates are given 

above in the section titled "Who Must Sign and 

File...." 

Block 8: Beside the name of each principal, 

fill in the role that each will perform. The 

following are possible roles that the principals 

may perform: Sponsor, Owner, Prime Contractor, 

Turnkey Developer, Managing Agent, 

Packager, Consultant, General Partner, Limited 

Partner (include percentage), Executive 

Officer, Director, Trustee, Major Stockholder, 

or Nursing Home Administrator. Beside the 

name of each affiliate, write the name of the 

person or firm of affiliation, such as "Affiliate of 

Smith Construction Co." 

Exemptions – The names of the following 

parties do not need to be listed on form HUD- 

2530: Public Housing Agencies, tenants, owners 

of less than five condominium or cooperative 

units and all others whose interests were 

acquired by inheritance or court order. 

Where and When Form HUD-2530 Must Be 

Filed: The original of this form must be 

submitted to the HUD Office where your project 

application will be processed at the same time 

you file your initial project application. This 

form must be filed with applications for projects, 

or when otherwise required in the situations 

listed below: 

• Projects to be financed with mortgages insured 

under the National Housing Act (FHA). 

• Projects to be financed according to Section 

202 of the Housing Act of 1959 (Elderly and 

Handicapped). 

• Projects in which 20 percent or more of the 

units are to receive a subsidy as described in 

24 C.F.R. 200.213. 

• Purchase of a project subject to a mortgage 

insured or held by the Secretary of HUD. 

• Purchase of a Secretary-owned project. 

• Proposed substitution or addition of a principal, 

or principal participation in a different 

capacity from that previously approved for 

the same project. 

• Proposed acquisition by an existing limited 

partner of an additional interest in a project 

resulting in a total interest of 25 percent or 

more, or proposed acquisition by a corporate 

stockholder of an additional interest in a 

project resulting in a total interest of 10 

percent or more. 

• Projects with U.S.D.A., Farmers Home Administration, 

or with state or local government 

housing finance agencies that include 

rental assistance under Section 8 of the 

Housing Act of 1937. For projects of this 

type, form HUD-2530 should be filed with the 

appropriate applications directly to those 

agencies. 

Review of Adverse Determination: If approval 

of your participation in a HUD project is 

denied, withheld, or conditionally granted on 

the basis of your record of previous participation, 

you will be notified by the HUD Office. 

You may request reconsideration by the HUD 

Review Committee. Alternatively, you may 

request a hearing before a Hearing Officer. 

Either request must be made in writing within 

30 days from your receipt of the notice of 

determination. 

Who Must Sign and File Form HUD-2530: 

Form HUD-2530 must be completed and signed 

by all parties applying to become principal 

participants in HUD multifamily housing 

projects, including those who have no previous 

participation. The form must be signed 

and filed by all principals and their affiliates 

who propose participating in the HUD project. 

Use a separate form for each role in the 

project unless there is an identity of interest. 

Principals include all individuals, joint ventures, 

partnerships, corporations, trusts, nonprofit 

organizations, any other public or private 

entity, that will participate in the proposed 

project as a sponsor, owner, prime contractor, 

turnkey developer, managing agent, nursing 

home administrator or operator, packager, or 

consultant. Architects and attorneys who have 

any interest in the project other than an arms 

length fee arrangement for professional services 

are also considered principals by HUD. 

In the case of partnerships, all general 

partners regardless of their percentage interest 

and limited partners having a 25 percent or 

more interest in the partnership are considered 

principals. In the case of public or private 

corporations or governmental entities, principals 

include the president, vice president, 

secretary, treasurer and all other executive 

officers who are directly responsible to the 

board of directors, or any equivalent governing 

body, as well as all directors and each 

stockholder having a 10 percent or more interest 

in the corporation. 

Affiliates are defined as any person or 

business concern that directly or indirectly 

controls the policy of a principal or has the 

power to do so. A holding or parent corporation 

would be an example of an affiliate if one 

of its subsidiaries is a principal. 

Exception for Corporations – All principals 

and affiliates must personally sign the certificate 

except in the following situation. When a 

corporation is a principal, all of its officers, 

directors, trustees and stockholders with 10 

percent or more of the common (voting) stock 

need not sign personally if they all have the 

same record to report. The officer who is 

authorized to sign for the corporation or agency 

will list the names and title of those who elect 

not to sign. However, any person who has a 

record of participation in HUD projects that is 

separate from that of his or her organization 

must report that activity on this form and sign 

his or her name. The objective is full disclosure. 

Instructions for Completing the Previous 

Participation Certificate, form HUD-2530 

Carefully read these instructions and the applicable 

regulations. A copy of those regulations 

published at 24 C.F.R. 200.210 to 200.245 

can be obtained from the Multifamily Housing 

Representative at any HUD Office. Type or 

print neatly in ink when filling out this form. 

Mark answers in all blocks of the form. If the 

form is not filled completely, it will delay approval 

of your application. 

Attach extra sheets as you need them. Be 

sure to indicate "Continued on Attachments" 

wherever appropriate. Sign each additional 

page that you attach if it refers to you or your 

record. If you have many projects to list (20 or 

more) and expect to be applying frequently for 

participation in HUD projects, you should consider 

filing a Master List. See Master List 

instructions below under "Instructions for Completing 

Schedule A." 

Carefully read the certification before you 

sign it. Any questions regarding the form or 

how to complete it can be answered by your 

HUD Office Multifamily Housing Representative. 

Purpose: This form provides HUD with a 

certified report of all previous participation in 

HUD multifamily housing projects by those 

parties making application. The information 

requested in this form is used by HUD to 

determine if you meet the standards established 

to ensure that all principal participants 

in HUD projects will honor their legal, financial 

and contractual obligations and are acceptable 

risks from the underwriting standpoint of 

an insurer, lender or governmental agency. 

HUD requires that you certify your record of 

previous participation in HUD/USDA-FmHA, 

State and Local Housing Finance Agency 

projects by completing and signing this form, 

before your project application or participation 

can be approved. 

HUD approval of your certification is a 

necessary precondition for your participation 

in the project and in the capacity that you 

propose. If you do not file this certification, do 

not furnish the information requested accurately, 

or do not meet established standards, 

HUD will not approve your certification. 

Note that approval of your certification does 

not obligate HUD to approve your project application, 

and it does not satisfy all other HUD 

program requirements relative to your qualifications. 

ref Handbook 4065.1 form HUD-2530 (7/2009) 

Page 1 of 2 

Previous editions are obsolete

HUD-2530"). Beside each signature, fill in the 

role of each party (the same as shown in block 8). 

In addition, each person who signs the form 

should fill in the date that he or she signs, as 

well as providing a telephone number where 

he or she can be reached during business 

hours. By providing a telephone number where 

you can be reached, you will help to prevent 

any possible delay caused by mailing and 

processing time in the event HUD has any 

questions. 

If you cannot certify and sign the certification 

as it is printed because some statements 

do not correctly describe your record, use a 

pen and strike through those parts that differ 

with your record, then sign and certify to that 

remaining part which does describe you or 

your record. 

Attach a signed letter, note or an explanation 

of the items you have struck out on the 

certification and report the facts of your correct 

record. Item A(2)(e) relates to felony 

convictions within the past 10 years. If you 

have been convicted of a felony within 10 

years, strike out all of A(2)(e) on the certificate 

and attach your statement giving your explanation. 

A felony conviction will not necessarily 

cause your participation to be disapproved 

unless there is a criminal record or other 

evidence that your previous conduct or method 

of doing business has been such that your 

participation in the project would make it an 

unacceptable risk from the underwriting standpoint 

of an insurer, lender or governmental 

agency. 

and provide a telephone number where you 

can be reached during the day. No determinations 

will be made on these certificates. 

File one copy of the Master List with each 

HUD Office where you do business and mail 

one copy to the following address: 

HUD-2530 Master List 

Participation and Compliance 

Division – Housing 

U.S. Department of Housing and 

Urban Development 

451 Seventh Street, S.W. 

Washington, D.C. 20410 

Once you have filed a Master List, you do not 

need to complete Schedule A when you submit 

form HUD-2530. Instead, write the name of 

the participant in column 1 of Schedule A and 

beside that write "See Master List on file." 

Also give the date that appears on the Master 

List that you submitted. Below that, report all 

changes and additions that have occurred 

since that date. Be sure to include any mortgage 

defaults, assignments or foreclosures 

not listed previously. 

If you have withdrawn from a project since 

the date the Master List was filed, be sure to 

name the project. Give the project identification 

number, the month and year your participation 

began and/or ended. 

Certification: 

After you have completed all other parts of 

form HUD-2530, including Schedule A, read 

the Certification carefully. In the box below 

the statement of certification, fill in the name 

of all principals and affiliates (type or print 

neatly). Beside the name of each principal and 

affiliate, each party must sign the form, with 

the exception in some cases of individuals 

associated with a corporation (see "Exception 

for Corporations" in the section of the instructions 

titled "Who Must Sign and File form 

Column 3 List the role(s) of your participation, 

dates participated, and if fee or identity of 

interest with owners. 

Column 4 Indicate the current status of the 

loan. Except for current loans, the date associated 

with the status is required. Loans under 

a workout arrangement are considered assigned. 

An explanation of the circumstances 

surrounding the status is required for all noncurrent 

loans. 

Column 5 Explain any project defaults during 

your participation. 

Column 6 Enter the latest Management and/ 

or Physical Inspection Review rating. If either 

of the ratings are below average, the report 

issued by HUD is required to be submitted 

along with the applicant's explanation of the 

circumstances surrounding the rating. 

No Previous Record: Even if you have never 

participated in a HUD project before, you must 

complete form HUD-2530. If you have no 

record of previous projects to list, fill in your 

name in column 1 of Schedule A, and write 

across the form by your name – "No previous 

participation, first experience." 

Master List System: If you expect to file this 

form frequently and you have a long list of 

previous projects to report on Schedule A, you 

should consider filing a Master List. By doing 

so, you will avoid having to list all your previous 

projects each time you file a new application. 

To make a Master List, use form HUD- 

2530. On page 1, in block 1, enter (in capital 

letters) the words "Master List." In blocks 2 

through 6 enter in "N.A." meaning Not Applicable. 

Complete blocks 7 through 10. 

In the box below the statement of certification, 

fill in the names of all parties who wish to 

file a Master List together (type or print neatly). 

Beside each name, every party must sign the 

form. In the box titled "Proposed Role," fill in 

"N.A." Also, fill in the date you sign the form 

Block 9: Fill in the percentage of ownership in 

the proposed project that each principal is 

expected to have. Also specify if the participant 

is a general or limited partner. Beside the 

name of those parties who will not be owners, 

write "None." 

Block 10: Fill in the Social Security Number 

or IRS employer number of every party listed, 

including affiliates. 

Instructions for Completing Schedule A: 

Be sure that Schedule A is filled-in completely, 

accurately and the certification is properly 

dated and signed, because it will serve as a 

legal record of your previous experience. All 

Multifamily Housing projects involving HUD/ 

FmHA, and State and local Housing Finance 

Agencies in which you have previously participated 

must be listed. Applicants are reminded 

that previous participation pertains to 

the individual principal within an entity as well 

as the entity itself. A newly formed company 

may not have previous participation, but the 

principals within the company may have had 

extensive participation and disclosure of that 

activity is required. To avoid duplication of 

disclosure, list the project and then the entities 

or individuals involved in that project. You 

may use the name or a number code to denote 

the entity or individual that participated. The 

number code can then be used in column 3 to 

denote role. 

Column 2 List the project or contract identification 

of each previous project. All previous 

projects must be included or your certification 

cannot be processed. Include the name 

of all projects, the cities in which they are 

located and the government agency (HUD, 

USDA-FmHA or State or local housing finance 

agency) that was involved. At the end of your 

list of projects, draw a straight line across the 

page to separate your record of projects from 

that of others signing this form who have a 

different record to report. 

The Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) is authorized to collect this information by law (42 U.S.C. 3535(d) and 24 C.F.R. 200.217) and by regulation at 24 CFR 200.210. This information 

is needed so that principals applying to participate in multifamily programs can become HUD-approved participants. The information you provide will enable HUD to evaluate your record with respect 

to established standards of performance, responsibility and eligibility. Without prior approval, a principal may not participate in a proposed or existing multifamily project. HUD uses this information to 

evaluate whether or not principals pose an unsatisfactory underwriting risk. The information is used to evaluate the potential principals and approve only individuals and organizations who will honor 

their legal, financial and contractual obligations. 

Privacy Act Statement: The Housing and Community Development Act of 1987, 42 U.S.C. 3543 requires persons applying for a Federally-insured or guaranteed loan to furnish his/her Social Security Number 

(SSN). HUD must have your SSN for identification of your records. HUD may use your SSN for automated processing of your records and to make requests for information about you and your previous records 

with other public agencies and private sector sources. HUD may disclose certain information to Federal, State and local agencies when relevant to civil, criminal, or regulatory investigations and prosecutions. 

It will not be otherwise disclosed or released outside of HUD, except as required and permitted by law. You must provide all of the information requested in this application, including your SSN. 

Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 1 hour per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and 

maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This agency may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it 

displays a currently valid OMB control number. 

A response is mandatory. Failure to provide any of the information will result in your disapproval for participation in this HUD program. 

ref Handbook 4065.1 form HUD-2530 (7/2009) 

Page 2 of 2 

Previous editions are obsolete

11-C-018 



REFERENCES 


COMPANY NAME: 

CONTACT: 

PHONE NUMBER: 

11-C-018 

REFERENCES 

PLEASE LIST AT LEAST THREE (3) REFERENCES OF CURRENT CUSTOMERS 

WHO CAN VERIFY THE QUALITY OF SERVICES PERFORMED BY YOUR 

COMPANY; INCLUDE COMPANY NAME, ADDRESS, CONTACT PERSON AND 

TELEPHONE NUMBER: 

1. COMPANY NAME: 

ADDRESS: 

CONTACT PERSON: 

PHONE: 


ADDRESS: 


PHONE: 


ADDRESS: 


PHONE: 


11-C-018 



SECTION 3 OPPORTUNITIES PLAN 


11-C-018 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING THE SECTION 3 UTILIZATION PLAN 

(SERVICE & PROFESSIONAL CONTRACTS) 

The purpose of Section 3 is to ensure that jobs and economic opportunities generated by HUD 

financial assistance for housing and community development programs shall be directed to low 

and very low income persons, particularly those who are recipients of government assistance 

for housing and business concerns which provide economic opportunities to low and very low 

income persons. 

The Section 3 Utilization Plan is to be completed for service and professional contracts. There 

are four (4) ways in which Section 3 can be fulfilled. They are listed in order of preference: 

1) Subcontract or joint venture with a resident owned business. The business must be 

51% or more owned by residents of the housing development, or other NHA public 

housing residents, or subcontractor/joint venture with a business that employs full-time, 

30% or more of NHA residents, or low and very low income individuals within the Metro 

Fair Marketing Rent areas of New Jersey (Essex, Morris, Sussex and Union counties), 

or 

2) Direct hiring of NHA public housing residents and/or low and very low-income area 

residents, or 

3) Incur the cost of providing skilled training for residents in an amount commensurate 

with the sliding scale set forth. Such training shall be determined after consultation with 

the Office of Tenant Affairs of the NHA. 

4) Contribute to a NHA resident educational fund in an amount commensurate with the 

contribution to training sliding scale attached. 

If a prime contractor is unable to satisfy the NHA resident hiring requirements per the above, the 

requirements may be satisfied through any subcontractors that may be involved in the project or 

qualified to complete a percentage of the work. 

In paragraph number one (1), if the (sub)contractor has identified a resident owned business or 

a business which employs 30% or more NHA Public Housing or area residents, this paragraph 

is to be completed by indicating the number of resident owned businesses that will be used on 

the contract/spec number shown at the end of the paragraph. 

If the (sub)contractor plans to hire NHA Public Housing or area residents to work for its 

company, paragraph two (2) must be completed with the contract/spec number and the 

percentage of compliance in new hiring of resident(s). For example, if your contract amount is 

$100,000.00, the Section 3 dollar amount that must be expended is 5% of your labor dollars or 

$5,000.00. If the whole dollar amount is to be expended on the resident’s salary, then 100% is 

to be inserted on the percent line. If a percentage amount less than 100% will be expended on 

the resident’s salary, that amount must be inserted on the line and the remaining percentage 

must be expended through subcontracting/joint venturing with a resident owned business or a 

business that employs 30% or more residents, or placed into NHA Section 3 Resident 

Educational Fund. In which case, the corresponding paragraph must be completed. 

If the (sub)contractor has exhausted the first two (2) options, then the full amount of the 

contractor’s Section 3 obligations will be placed into NHA Resident Educational Fund, in which 


11-C-018 

case paragraph three (3) must be completed and paragraphs one (1) and two (2) will contain 

zeroes in the percentage lines. 

SCHEDULE D: The second portion of the Section 3 Utilization Plan begins with the 

specification or request for proposal title and number. 

LABOR SURVEY: The third section is to be completed by listing current staff to be used to 

complete the work bid upon. 

1) indicate each category of employment for all phase of this contract; 

2) the number of positions which will be needed in each category; 

3) how many of those positions are currently filled; 

(a) total number of positions that are filled; 

(b) the number filled by NHA public housing residents; 

(c) the number filled by area residents, excluding NHA residents. 

4) Indicate your goal for the number of positions you intend to fill with: 

(a) Section 3 Residents 

(b) Low and Very low income area residents. 

RESIDENT LIST: The final section is to be completed after the contract has been awarded; 

interviews have taken place and residents have been hired. The completed Section 3 Utilization 

Plan must be submitted to the Section 3 Coordinator and Procurement/Contracts Department. 

The Housing Authority or the City of Newark public housing and neighborhood residents are 

screened and skills assessed by the NHA. Each contractor is required to attend a preconstruction 

conference with the Procurement/Contract Compliance Department where 

contractual obligations will be explained, the contractor’s Section 3 dollar amount will be 

determined, and the contractor’s hiring goals will be discussed. The Section 3 Coordinator will 

refer qualified residents to be interviewed by the contractor. 

The Section 3 Utilization Plan that is submitted with the RFQ/RFP/IFB and the final copy that is 

submitted to the Contracts and Procurement Department must be signed and include the title of 

person executing the plan. 


11-C-018 

SECTION 3 UTILIZATION PLAN 

Business Opportunities and Employment Training of the Housing Authority of the City of 

Newark Public Housing Residents and Low and Very Low Income Area Residents 

I. Utilization Plan 

The Contractor hereby agrees to comply with all the provisions of Section 3 as set forth in 24 

CFR 135.1 et seq. and the NHA Contract Resolutions implementing Section 3 requirements. 

You may comply by choosing one or all options. Remember, your compliance must be equal 

to 100% or any remaining percentages will be deducted from payouts and placed in the NHA 

resident training/educational fund account. 

□ Option 1: Subcontract with Section 3 Business Concern(s) 

The Contractor had identified NHA Section 3 resident owned business(es) or Section 3 

business(es) which employ 30% or more Section 3 residents to comply with ______% of its 

Section 3 requirements covered under this Contract. 

□ Option 2: Hire Section 3 residents/participants 

The Contractor has committed to employ the following in order to comply with ______% of its 

Section 3 requirements. The Contractor hereby submits this document to identify employment 

opportunities for the new hire of NHA public housing residents and low and very low-income 

area residents, during the term of the contract between the Contractor and NHA. The Contractor 

affirms that the jobs identified shall be for meaningful employment that may or may not be 

related to the scope of services covered under this Contract. (See attached Labor Survey) 

□ Option 3: Resident Training by Contractor 

The Contractor has a training program in place and is willing to train ___________ residents to 

comply with ________% of its Section 3 requirements. 

□ Option 4: Contribution 

The Contractor will contribute to the NHA training/educational fund for resident training to 

comply with ________% of its Section 3 requirements. 


11-C-018 

In the event I am awarded the contract, I have the option to submit my check in the compliance 

amount of the start of contract date, or allow NHA to deduct payment from my draw requests. 

(Compliance amount is based upon the labor dollars of the contract award.) 

The failure of the contractor to comply with the above-approved plan shall be a material breach of 

the contract. 

Contractor’s Signature and Title: 

Date: _______________________________ 

Sworn & Subscribed Before Me 

This ___________ day of _________________, ____________. 

Day Month Year 

___________________________________________________ 

Signature of Notary Public 

________________________________ 

Date Commission Expires 


NAME OF PRIME CONTRACTOR: 

11-C-018 

SCHEDULE D 

________________________________________________________ 

TITLE OF RFP OR SPEC:___________________________________________________ 

SPEC. # OR RFP # OR PURCHASE 

ORDER#:________________________________________________ 

CONTRACT #:____________________________________________ 

DEPARTMENT OF PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTS 

WARNING: THIS DOCUMENT IS REQUIRED FOR ALL CONSTRUCTION OR LABOR 

RELATED PROCUREMENTS. 

1. Employment and Training of the Housing Authority or the City of Newark Public Housing 

Residents and Low and Very Low Income Area Residents. 

The Contractor hereby agrees to comply with all the provisions of Section 3 as set forth in 24 

CFR 135.38 implementing Section 3 requirements. The contractor hereby submits this Schedule 

D as its Section 3 Utilization Plan. 

The Contractor shall provide a status report identifying its progress in meeting the Section 3 

goals established in this Section D on a quarterly basis throughout the contract period. The 

quarterly status report shall be submitted no later than 10 days after the end of each calendar 

quarter of the contract (e.g., April 10 for calendar quarter January 1 to March 31). The status 

report shall be in at least the same level of detail as the approved Schedule D. For any goal not 

met, the report shall identify any other economic opportunities, which the contractor has 

provided, or intend to provide to NHA and neighborhood residents. 

The failure of the Contractor to comply with the approved plan shall be a material breach of the 

contract. 

Each Bidder/Proposer for a construction or labor related contract must complete this Schedule 

D and submit all relevant information required herein. A prime contractor, through its’ 

subcontractors may satisfy the NHA Resident Hiring Requirements. Please complete the Labor 

Survey of Section 3 Utilization Plan in the following columns. 

1) indicate each category of employment for all phase of this contract; 

2) the number of positions which will be needed in each category; 

3) how many of those positions are currently filled; 

(a) total number of positions that are filled; 

(b) the number filled by NHA public housing residents; 

(c) the number filled by area residents, excluding NHA residents. 

4) Indicate your goal for the number of positions you intend to fill with: 

(a) Section 3 Residents 

(b) Low and Very low income area residents. 


11-C-018 

NOTE: The minimum of trainees is that which can reasonably be utilized in each occupation, 

and no less than the number established by the U.S. Secretary of Labor for construction and 

non-construction labor related occupations. The contractor shall fill all vacant positions with lowincome 

persons (earning less than 80% of the median income in the City of Newark and these 

positions shall not be filled immediately prior to undertaking work in order to circumvent 

regulations as set forth at 24 C.F.R. Part 135 et seq: as amended. 

2. SECTION 3 BUSINESSES SUBCONTRACTING OPPORTUNITIES 

In a one (1) page letter on your company’s letterhead: 

1) Indicate the goals, expressed in terms of percentage of planning subcontracting 

dollars, for the use of Section 3 business concerns as subcontractors. 

2) A statement of the total dollar amount to be subcontracted, total dollar amount to 

be subcontracted to Section 3 business concerns for building trades, and total dollar 

amount to be subcontracted to Section 3 business concerns for other than building 

trades work (maintenance, repair, modernization and redevelopment). 

3) A description of the method used to develop the goals above and the efforts to be 

undertaken by the Contractor to meet those goals. 

Acknowledged by: 

_____________________________________ 

(President or Authorized Officer) 

Date:_________________________________ 


(1) JOB TITLE 

III. Labor Survey: 

11-C-018 

SPEC OR RFP # SPEC OR RFP TITLE 

(2) NEEDED (3) NUMBER OF POSITIONS 

FILLED 

HIRING GOAL 

(a) (b) (C) (4) To Be (a) (b) 

Total LINHAR LIAR Filled LINHAR LIAR 

LINHAR = Low and Very Low-Income Newark Housing Authority Resident 

LIAR = Low –Income Area Resident 


IV. Resident List 

11-C-018 

Section 3 Resident Employee Information (Jobs to be filled) 

Job Title 

LINHAR or LIAR Name 

Address 

LINHAR = Low and Very Low-Income Newark Housing Authority Resident 

LIAR = Low-Income Area Resident 


Phone Number

11-C-018 

CONTRIBUTION SLIDING SCALE 

SAMPLE VALUES 

Contract Values CONTRIBUTION TO TRAINING FUND 

$21,000 to $99,999 5% $1,050 $5,000 

$100,000 to $199,999 5% $5,000 $10,000 

$200,000 to $299,999 5% $10,000 $15,000 

$300,000 to $399,999 5% $15,000 $20,000 

$400,000 to $499,999 5% $20,000 $25,000 

$500,000 to $999,999 5% + $10,000 $35,000 $60,000 

$1,000,000 to $1,999,999 5% + $10,000 $60,000 $110,000 

$2,000,000 to $2,999,999 5% + $10,000 $110,000 $160,000 

$3,000,000 to $3,999,999 5% + $10,000 $160,000 $210,000 

$4,000,000 to $4,999,999 5% + $10,000 $210,000 $260,000 

Five percent (5%) plus $10,000 will be applied to each contract of $5,000,000.00 dollars or 

more for the purpose of calculating contribution values. 


A Sectioon 

3 Business 

Concernn 

is a busineess 

concern: 

1. That is 

or 

2. 

That prov vides evidence 

of a coommitment 

tto 

subcontraact 

in excesss 

of twentyy-five 

percent 

(25% %) of the ddollar 

awardd 

of all subbcontracts 

tto 

be awardded 

to business 

cooncerns 

that t meet the qualificationss 

set forth in items (1) or (3); or 

3. 

Whose permanent, 

fulll-time 

emplooyees 

includde 

persons, at least thirrty 

percent ( 30%) 

off 

whom are e currently SSection 

3 reesidents, 

orr 

within threee 

years of the date off 

first 

employment 

with w the bussiness 

conceern 

were Secction 

3 residents. 

Note: A business s concern sseeking 

to qualify forr 

Section 3 shall certtify 

and suubmit 

evvidence 

tha at the businness 

meets one of the gguidelines 

sstated 

abovve. 

For purpposes 

of the e Housing AAuthority 

off 

the City off 

Newark, a Section 3 rresident 

is: 

1. 

A public ho ousing resideent; 

11-C-018 

DEEFINITIONS 

WHAT ISS 

A SECTION 

3 BUSINEESS 

CONCEERN? 

fifty-one percent 

(51%) or more owwned 

by Secttion 

3 resideents; 

WHHO 

IS A SECTION 

3 REESIDENT? 

2. 

An individu ual who livess 

in the City of Newark aand 

any otheer 

HUD Metrro 

Fair Markketing 

RRent 

areas of o New Jerssey 

(Essex, , Morris, Suussex 

and UUnion 

Counties) 

and wwhose 

inncome 

falls within w the guuidelines 

for low- or veryy 

low incomee 

(see attachhed 

2009 Inccome 

Limits 

Summary). 

Newark k Housing Autthority, 

Bid Oppening 

Thursday, 

April 28, , 2011 at 10 aa.m.

FY 2009 Income Limits Summary 

FY 

2009 

Incom 

e Limit 

Area 

Newar 

k, NJ 

HUD 

Metro 

FMR 

Area 

Media 

n 

Incom 

e 

$87,60 

0 

FY 2009 

Income 

Limit 

Categor 

y 

Very 

Low 

(50%) 

Income 

Limits 

Extreme 

ly Low 

(30%) 

Income 

Limits 

Low 

(80%) 

Income 

Limits 

Newark, NJ HUD Metro FMR Area 

1 

Perso 

n 

$30,65 

0 

$18,40 

0 

$44,80 

0 

2 

Perso 

n 

$35,05 

0 

$21,05 

0 

$51,20 

0 

3 

Perso 

n 

$39,40 

0 

$23,65 

0 

$57,60 

0 

4 

Perso 

n 

$43,80 

0 

$26,30 

0 

$64,00 

0 

5 

Perso 

n 

$47,30 

0 

$28,40 

0 

$69,10 

0 

6 

Perso 

n 

$50,80 

0 

$30,50 

0 

$74,25 

0 


7 

Perso 

n 

$54,30 

0 

$32,60 

0 

$79,35 

0 

8 

Perso 

n 

$57,80 

0 

$34,70 

0 

$84,50 

0 

The Newark, NJ HUD Metro FMR Area contains the following areas: Essex County, NJ; Morris 

County, NJ; Sussex County, NJ; and Union County, NJ

CONTRACTS DIVISION 




Chairperson 

MODIA BUTLER 



RASHARD CASEY 


NANCY PEREZ 

LENIN CRUZ 

AMENDED LOBBY AND OFFICE ALTERATIONS 

NJ2-16 

STEPHEN CRANE EDLERLY 

60 CEDAR LANE 

AND 

58 EVERGREEN LANE 

NEWARK, NJ 07107 

BID DOCUMENT 

PART IV 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

Prepared By: 

Heritage Architecture, LLC 

352 Evelyn Street, Suite 2 

Paramus, NJ 07652 

April 01, 2011

STEPHEN CRANE ELDERLY HOUSING NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORITY 

AMENDED LOBBY AND OFFICE ALTERATIONS NJ2-16 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

01010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK 

01040 PROJECT COORDINATION 

01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

01100 GENERAL CONDITIONS 

01270 UNIT PRICES 

01300 SUBMITTALS 

01400 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

01546 SAFETY AND HEALTH 

01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 

01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 

06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK * 

07531 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 

07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 

07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 

07920 JOINT SEALANTS 

08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES * 

08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS * 

08460 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 

08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 

08711 DOOR HARDWARE 

09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 

09310 CERAMIC TILE 

09400 EPOXY TERRAZZO TILE * 

09512 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 

09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS * 

09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES * 

09720 WALL COVERINGS * 

09912 PAINTING 

10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES * 

12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES * 

12494 ROLLER SHADES 

15000 BASIC METHODS AND MATERIALS 

15010 HVAC ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING REQUIREMENTS 

15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

15110 VALVES 

15194 FUEL GAS PIPING 

15411 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 

15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 

15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 

15770 AIR-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS * 

15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1



16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 

16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 

16072 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 

16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 

16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 

16140 WIRING DEVICES 

16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING * 

* Sections noted with * cover owner-supplied materials and equipment. Contractor is to provide 

installation of these items. See Description of Work in Section 01010 and Section 01600, “Product 

Requirements” for acceptance of materials. 

DRAWINGS 

T-0 TITLE SHEET, DRAWING LIST, SITE PLAN & LOCATION MAP 

T-1 GENERAL NOTES, LEGEND, ABBREVIATION LIST & ADA REQUIREMENTS 

A-1 EXISTING / DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN, CANOPY ROOF PLAN AND NOTES – 60 CEDAR LANE 

A-1.1 EXISTING / DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN, CANOPY ROOF PLAN AND NOTES – 58 EVERGREEN 

LANE 

A-2 PROPOSED FLOOR AND CANOPY ROOF PLAN AND NOTES – 60 CEDAR LANE 

A-2.1 PROPOSED FLOOR AND CANOPY ROOF PLAN, FINISH SCHEDULE AND NOTES – 58 

EVERGREEN LANE 

A-3 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN & CEILING DETAIL AND SPECIFICATIONS – 60 CEDAR LANE 

A-3.1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN & CEILING DETAIL AND SPECIFICATIONS – 58 EVERGREEN 

LANE 

A-4 ENLARGED PLANS, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS – 60 CEDAR LANE 

A-4.1 ENLARGED PLANS, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS – 58 EVERGREEN LANE 

A-5 ENLARGED PLANS, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS 

A-6 PARTITION TYPES, DOOR TYPES & DOOR SCHEDULE 

A-6.1 EXTERIOR DOOR ELEVATION, DETAILS AND ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE 

A-7 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE & MATERIAL FINISH SCHEDULE 

E-1 EXISTING / DEMOLITION ELECTRICAL POWER & LIGHTING PLAN, DEMO & KEY NOTES & 

LEGEND – 60 CEDAR LANE 

E-1.1 EXISTING / DEMOLITION ELECTRICAL POWER & LIGHTING PLAN, DEMO & KEY NOTES & 

LEGEND – 58 EVERGREEN LANE 

E-2 PROPOSED ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN, LEGEND AND NOTES – 60 CEDAR LANE 

E-2.1 PROPOSED ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN, LEGEND AND NOTES – 58 EVERGREEN LANE 

E-3 PROPOSED LIGHTING PLAN & LIGHTING SCHEDULE, LEGEND AND NOTES – 60 CEDAR 

LANE 

E-3.1 PROPOSED LIGHTING PLAN & LIGHTING SCHEDULE, LEGEND AND NOTES – 58 EVERGREEN 

LANE 

P-1 DEMOLITION PLUMBING PLAN, LEGEND & NOTES – 60 CEDAR LANE 

P-1.1 DEMOLITION PLUMBING PLAN, LEGEND & NOTES – 58 EVERGREEN LANE 

P-2 PROPOSED PLUMBING PLAN, RISER DIAGRAMS, DETAILS AND LEGEND & NOTES – 60 

CEDAR LANE 

P-2.1 PROPOSED PLUMBING PLAN, RISER DIAGRAMS, DETAILS AND LEGEND & NOTES – 58 

EVERGREEN LANE 

H-1 EXISTING / PROPOSED HVAC PLAN, SCHEDULES & NOTES – 60 CEDAR LANE 

H-1.1 EXISTING / PROPOSED HVAC PLAN, SCHEDULES & NOTES – 58 EVERGREEN LANE 




SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF THE WORK 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and conditions of the construction contract, including but not limited to General Conditions, 

and the Special Conditions listed below, apply to work of this section. 

1. Section 01010, Summary of the Work. 

2. Section 01040, Project Coordination. 

3. Section 01045, Cutting and Patching. 

4. Section 01300, Submittals. 

5. Section 01500, Temporary Facilities. 

6. Section 01546, Safety and Health. 

7. Section 01700, Project Closeout. 

1.2 PROJECT/WORK IDENTIFICATION 

A. Project Name and Location: 


NJ2-16 - Stephen Crane Elderly 

Lobby & Office Alterations 

60 Cedar Lane and 58 Evergreen Lane 

Newark, New Jersey 

B. Architect: The term "Architect" refers to the professional services contractor listed below. The 

Architect's status relative to this construction will be fully delineated in writing by the Architect prior to 

the pre-award or pre-construction conference. The Architect may furnish personnel for site supervision 

if required by his contract. 



Paramus, New Jersey 07652 

C. Owner: The Owner is the Newark Housing Authority, 500 Broad Street, Newark, New Jersey 07102. 

The Owner’s Designated Representative is: Massimo Taurisano 

D. Coordination with on-site management staff: Coordinate with on-site management office issues of site 

and building access, material delivery and working hours. 

E. The work is a continuation of work begun under a separate contract by a separate Contractor. The 

Contractor shall provide such material and labor to complete the work and obtain permits from the City 

of Newark. The Contractor shall inspect the existing work and notify the Architect if conditions are not 

per contract documents, or are not per Code. Likewise, the Contractor shall inspect the products 

provided by the NHA and shall notify the Architect if quantities are insufficient to complete the work. 

F. Abbreviated Written Summary: Briefly, and without force and effect upon contract documents, work of 

contract can be summarized as follows: 

1. Generally, the work includes demolitions, new partitions and doors, installation of new ceilings, 

new finishes and fixtures, casework, plumbing fixtures, fire protection, and electrical systems. 

2. Alterations to first floor of 60 Cedar Lane, approximately 1,800 sf including but not limited to the 

following: 

a. New building reception area with security desk and entry doors. 

SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01010 - 1



b. New lobby wall finishes. 

c. Renovations at building laundry room. 

d. Renovations at corridors, including stone wall finishes. 

e. New canopy roofing and exterior finishes at the front entry. 

3. Alterations to first floor of 58 Evergreen Lane, approximately 600 sf including but not limited to 

the following: 

a. New building reception area with security desk and entry doors. 

b. New lobby with mail room. 

c. New handicap accessible bathroom. 

d. Renovations at building laundry room. 

e. Renovations at corridors, including stone wall finishes. 

f. New canopy roofing and exterior finishes at the front entry. 

g. Demolish a free-standing canopy. 

4. The work shall be phased so as to minimize disruption to the use of spaces by the occupants and 

visitors. A phasing schedule and plan are included at the end of this section. 

G. The work will be constructed under a general construction contract. 

1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES 

A. General: The Contractor shall limit his/her use of the premises to the work indicated on drawings as 

“Designated Limit of Construction”, so as to allow for Owner occupancy and use. 

1. Use of the Site: Confine operations at the site to the areas permitted under the Contract. Portions 

of the site beyond areas on which work is indicated are not to be disturbed. Conform to site rules 

and regulations affecting the work while engaged in project construction. See "Project 

Coordination" section. 

2. Contractor Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a safe and weathertight 

condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 

Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction 

period. See "Project Coordination" section. 

a. For use of existing toilets, see "Temporary Facilities" section. 

3. Use of Existing Elevators: See "Temporary Facilities" section. 

1.4 OWNER OCCUPANCY 

A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the existing building during the entire period of 

construction. Cooperate fully with the Owner representative during construction operations to minimize 

conflicts and to facilitate Owner usage. Perform the work so as not to interfere with the Owner 

operations. 

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to place and install equipment as necessary in 

completed areas of the building and to occupy such completed areas prior to substantial completion, 

provided that such occupancy does not substantially interfere with completion of the work. Such placing 

of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the work or any part of the work. 

1.5 WORKING HOURS AND OFF-HOURS WORK 

A. Contractor shall perform all work at the site during normal work hours and after. After hours shall 

hereafter be referred to as “off-hours work.” Off-hours work shall be from 6:00 PM to 7:00 AM, 

Monday through Friday, and 8:00 AM to 4:30 PM on weekends. 

1. The contractor must take all precautions not to disrupt the operation of the buildings during 

construction operations. The contractor shall cooperate fully with the Owner to minimize 

conflicts and to facilitate construction progress. The Contractor shall include in the original cost 

of the work all additional costs for conducting construction operations in construction areas 




during off-hours only without claiming additional cost to the Owner after commencing of the 

Contract. 

2. Construction areas for the project shall be defined as all work within the project “Designated 

Limit of Construction”. Disruptive construction operations include, but are not necessarily limited 

to: 

a. Demolition involving cutting, drilling and hammering. 

b. Other cutting, drilling with power tools and hammering required to perform the work of the 

contract during the construction period. 

c. Use of all other power tools, which in the judgment of the Architect may cause disruption 

to other occupancies of the building. 

3. The Contractor shall provide the Architect with a schedule of operation to perform and complete 

all work and shall not proceed with any work without the approval of the Owner’s Representative. 

B. Contractor shall meet all necessary requirements for all tests. 

1.6 INSPECTION BY REGULATORY AUTHORITIES 

A. This project is subject to inspection by the following regulatory authorities: 

1. City of Newark 

2. State of New Jersey 

B. Notify Architect Representative when inspections take place. Decision as to action to be taken as a 

result of inspections by regulatory authorities will be made by the Architect. 

1.7 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS 

A. Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for performance of certain construction 

operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this 

Contract. This Contract will include the following: 

1. Furniture: A separate contract will be awarded for the provision of furniture and miscellaneous 

wall-hung items. 

B. It shall be part of this contract to install wall-hung items provided as part of the furniture contract. 

1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS 

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16division 

format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the 

intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These 

conventions are as follows: 

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is 

abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not 

stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and 

plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract 

Documents indicates. 

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. 

Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. 

Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to 

describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so 

noted. 

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are 

implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 




1.9 MISCELLANEOUS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS 

A. Items shown or scheduled to be salvaged shall be removed and turned over to the Owner. Items will 

remain the property of the Owner. Store where directed by the Owner’s Representative. 

B. New Work: Unless otherwise noted on drawings or specified, new work in extension of existing 

conditions shall correspond in all respects with that to which it connects, or to similar existing 

conditions, in materials, workmanship, and finish. 

C. Alterations to Existing Work: 

1. Existing work shall be cut, drilled altered, removed, or temporarily removed and replaced as 

necessary for performance of work under the contract. Work that is replaced shall match similar 

existing work. Structural members shall not be cut or altered, except where noted on drawings, 

without authorization of the Architect Representative. Work remaining in place, which is 

damaged or defaced during this contract, shall be restored to the condition existing at time of 

award of contract. 

2. Discolored or unfinished surfaces exposed by removal of existing work and indicated to be the 

final exposed surfaces shall be refinished or the material shall be replaced as necessary to make 

contiguous work uniform and harmonious. Work out of alignment where exposed by removal of 

existing work shall be called to the Architect’s Representative attention. Necessary corrective 

work directed by the Architect Representative will be subject to adjustment of the contract in 

accordance with "Differing Site Conditions" clause of the General Conditions. 

D. Materials and Equipment supplied by NHA. Where noted, materials and/or equipment will be supplied 

by the NHA. The Contractor shall provide all work to install. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 

3.1 PHASING SCHEDULE 

Phase Work Start 

I 60 Cedar Lane 3 weeks from NTP 

- Launderette and Handicapped Bath 

- Lobby/Entry Area 

II 58 Evergreen Lane 9 weeks from NTP 

- Lobby 

- Launderette and Handicapped Bath 

- Entry 

END OF SECTION 01010 


UP 

UP 

60 CEDAR LANE 

UP 

UP 

LLC 

www.heritagearch.com 

Heritage Architecture, 

T 201.262.3800 

F 201.262.3802 

352 Evelyn Street 


58 EVERGREEN LANE 

SA 

Checked By 

Project 

Drawn By 

TMH 

Project No 

NJ2-16 

STEPHEN CRANE ELDERLY 

0902a 

Date 

01/28/11 

Drawing Title 

File 

Phase I Phase II 

f:dwg 

PHASING PLAN 

Scale 

None 

F:\Standards\borders\logo.jpg 

Drawing No 

PH-1 

Seal 

Summer Alhamsh, RA 

NJ LIC # 14512



SECTION 01040 - PROJECT COORDINATION 


1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 

A. This section specifies general administrative procedures and performance required, including but not 

necessarily limited to, the following: 

1. Coordination and meetings. 

2. Administrative/supervisory personnel. 

3. Limitations for use of site. 

4. Special reports. 

5. Trades people and workmanship standards. 

6. Inspections, tests and reports. 

7. General installation provisions. 

8. Cleaning and protection. 

9. Environmental Protection. 

10. Off-hours work and suspension of work. 

1.2 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 

A. General: Prepare and distribute to each entity performing work at project site, a written memorandum of 

instructions on required coordination activities, including required notices, reports and attendance at 

meetings. Prepare similar memorandum for separate contractors where interfacing of work is required. 

B. Coordination drawings: Refer to clause "Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings, and Schedules," of 

"General Conditions," for general requirements. 

1. Work by Separate Entities: Where work by separate entities requires off-site fabrication of 

products and materials which must be accurately interfaced and closely intermeshed to produce 

required results, prepare coordination drawings to indicate how work shown by separate shop 

drawings will be interfaced, intermeshed, and sequenced for installation. Comply with submittal 

requirements of "Submittals" section. 

2. Approval: Before any sleeves or inserts are set or any mechanical or electrical equipment or 

foundations or other work is installed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval by the 

Architect composite coordination drawings for all equipment rooms, spaces and other areas in 

which work of two or more trades or subcontractors is to be installed and in which the probability 

of interference exists, as determined by either the Contractor or the Architect. Drawings shall 

show the work of all trades covered, shall be drawn to a scale not smaller than 1:30, and shall 

show clearly in both plan and elevation that all work can be installed without interference. 

3. Work installed without prior approval: Any work installed prior to approval of coordination 

drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. Subsequent relocations required to avoid interferences 

shall be made without additional expense to the Owner. In case interference develops, the 

Architect will decide which work shall be relocated, regardless of which was installed first. 

C. Coordination of Trades: Coordinate work of different trades so that interference between mechanical, 

electrical, architectural, and structural work, including existing services, will be avoided and within 

limits indicated the maximum practical space for operation, repair, removal, and testing of equipment is 

provided. Keep pipes, ducts, conduit, and the like as close as possible to ceiling slab, walls, and columns 

to take up a minimum amount of space. Locate pipes, ducts, and equipment so that they do not interfere 

with the intended use of eyebolts and other lifting devices. 

D. Monthly Coordination Meeting: In addition to specific pre-installation meetings and coordination 

meetings for each major element of work, and regular project meetings for other purposes (as indicated 

elsewhere in contract documents), hold monthly general project coordination meetings at regularly 

scheduled times which are convenient for everyone involved. Request representation (at each meeting) 

PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 - 1



by every entity currently involved in coordination or planning for work of the entire project. Conduct 

meetings in a manner which will resolve coordination problems. Record results of meetings and 

distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from 

each meeting. 

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE/SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL 

A. General: In addition to a General Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory personnel 

required for performance of the work, provide specific coordinating personnel as specified herein. 

B. Environmental Control Officer: The Contractor shall designate an "Environmental Control Officer" 

whose duties shall include the responsibility for enforcing the environmental protection provisions of 

these specifications including safety and health; the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health 

Act; and other applicable Federal, state and local standards. As outlined in the applicable sections of this 

specification, submit for approval by the Architect the proposed traffic flow plan, security plan, program 

for temporary structures, housecleaning plan, erosion control plan, demolition program, and safety and 

health plan. After approval by the Architect, the implementation and enforcement of these programs 

shall become the responsibility of the Environmental Control Officer. Any changes in the programs 

must be requested by the Contractor through the Environmental Control Officer for written concurrence 

by the Architect. 

C. Project Coordinator: Provide a full-time Project Coordinator, who is experienced in administration and 

supervision of building construction including mechanical and electrical work, and who is hereby 

authorized to act as the general coordinator of interfaces between units of work. For purpose of this 

provision, "interface" is defined to include the scheduling and sequencing of work, sharing of access to 

work spaces, installations, protection of each other's work, cutting and patching, tolerances, cleaning, 

selections for compatibility, preparation of coordination drawings, inspections, tests, and temporary 

facilities and services. 

D. Submittal of Staff Names, Duties: Within 15 days of contract award date, submit a listing of 

Contractor's principal staff assignments and consultants, naming persons and listing their addresses and 

telephone numbers. 

1.4 LIMITATIONS FOR USE OF SITE 

A. General: In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements shown on drawings, and indicated by 

other contract documents, administer allocation of available space equitably among entities needing 

access and space, so as to produce best overall efficiency in performance of total work of project. 

Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and 

equipment on site. 

B. Use of Equipment by Owner: See clause of same title in the General Conditions. 

C. Vacating of Premises: The Owner will vacate the space to be renovated during performance of work 

under the contract. 

D. Occupancy of Premises: All other areas of the premises other than spaces to be renovated under the 

Contract will be occupied by the Owner during performance of the Work. 

E. Refer to Section 01010 - Summary of the Work for special requirements for occupancy of existing 

spaces of the project in the existing building, Owner occupancy and working hours. 

F. Parking Facilities: The General Contractor shall have limited parking space availability and shall 

coordinate with “Owner’s Designated Rep” and the Site Manager as to the availability of parking for use 

by the Contractor and his employees. 




G. Materials on the Site: Unless otherwise noted or specified, materials and equipment that are removed 

and not reused under this contract become the property of the Contractor. 

H. Storage or Sale of Material on Site: Storage or sale of excess salvageable material on the site is not 

permitted. Contractor shall remove from site. 

1.5 SPECIAL REPORTS 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, submit special reports to the Architect within one day of 

occurrence requiring special report, with copy to others affected by occurrence. 

B. Reporting Accidents: Refer to Section, "Safety and Health," 01546. 

C. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of unusual and significant nature occurs at site (examples: 

visit by news media; extraordinary weather phenomenon), prepare and submit a special report listing 

chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or 

effects, and similar pertinent information. When such events are known or predictable in advance, 

advise the Architect in advance at earliest possible date. 

1.6 TRADESPERSONS AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS 

A. General: Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that persons performing work at site are skilled and 

knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship needed to produce required quality-levels for 

workmanship in completed work. Remove and replace work which does not comply with workmanship 

standards as specified and as recognized in the construction industry for applications indicated. Remove 

and replace other work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its replacement. 

B. Availability of Tradespersons: At each progress or coordination meeting, review availability of 

tradespersons and projected needs to accomplish work as scheduled. Require each entity employing 

personnel to report on events which might affect progress of work. Where possible, consider 

alternatives and take actions to avoid disputes and delays. 

1.7 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND REPORTS 

A. General: Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in determination of probable 

compliances of work with requirements, but do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for those 

compliances, or for general fulfillment of requirements of contract documents. Specified inspections and 

tests are not intended to limit Contractor's quality control program. Afford reasonable access to agencies 

performing tests and inspections. 

1. Owner Tests: Where tests or inspections are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will 

engage independent testing agency to perform required services. 

B. Qualification of Testing Agencies: Except as otherwise indicated and except where manufacturer's 

testing facilities are indicated as acceptable, engage independent testing laboratories specializing in 

required services and acceptable to the Architect. 

C. Reports: Refer to Section, "Submittals" 01300. 

1.8 SCHEDULING OF WORK, SUSPENSION OF WORK 




A. Utility Shutdown: Work which requires the shutdown of any utility serving the building shall be 

performed only after scheduling said shutdown at least 72 hours in advance with the Owner’s 

Representative and the Architect. 

B. Building Facilities: Coordinate and schedule all work with the Owner’s Representative to prevent any 

interruption of activities. Schedule any exceptionally loud work (eg. jackhammering) with Owner’s 

Representative before proceeding. 

C. Suspension of Work: In the event that work is directed to be suspended or interrupted by request of the 

Owner’s Representative, and such delays cause a delay in the completion of the contract as a whole, an 

equitable adjustment in contract time will be made. Obtain written verification of such delays from the 

Architect. 


PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS 

A. Pre-Installation Conferences: Where pre-installation conferences are specified in technical sections; well 

in advance of installation meet at project site with installers and representatives of manufacturers and 

fabricators who are involved in or affected by unit of work, and in its coordination or integration with 

other work which has preceded or will follow. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. At 

each meeting review progress of other work and preparations for particular work under consideration, 

including requirements of contract documents, options, related change orders, purchases, deliveries, shop 

drawings, product data; quality control samples, possible conflicts, compatibility problems, time 

schedules, weather limitations, temporary facilities, space and access limitations, structural limitations, 

governing regulations, safety, inspection and testing requirements, required performance results, 

recording requirements, and protection. Record significant discussions of each conference, and record 

agreements and disagreements, along with final plan of action. Distribute record of meeting promptly to 

everyone concerned. 

1. Do not proceed with the work if associated pre- installation conference cannot be concluded 

successfully. Instigate actions to resolve impediments to performance of the work, and reconvene 

conference at earliest date feasible. 

B. Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to 

receive work, and conditions under which work will be performed, and to report (in writing to 

Contractor) unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have 

been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with 

manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to extent these are more 

explicit or more stringent than requirements indicated in contract documents. 

D. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation, and reject damaged and 

defective items. 

E. Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecasted weather, and status of 

project completion which will ensure best possible results for each unit of work, in coordination with 

entire work. Isolate each unit of work from noncompatible work, as required to prevent deterioration. 

F. Coordinate enclosure (closing-in) of work with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize 

necessity of uncovering work for that purpose. 




G. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of work at 

industry-recognized standard mounting heights for applications indicated. Refer questionable mounting 

height choices to the Architect for final decision. 

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. General: During handling and installation of work at project site clean and protect work in progress and 

adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly 

installed work where reasonably required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of 

substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently 

as necessarily through remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to 

ensure operability without damaging effects. 

B. Protect areas within limit of construction, completed during previous construction contract. 

C. Limiting Exposures of Work: To extent possible through reasonable control and protection methods, 

supervise performance of work in a manner and by means which will ensure that none of the work, 

whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise 

deleterious exposures during construction period. Such exposures include (where applicable, but not by 

way of limitation) static loading, dynamic loading, internal pressures, external pressures, high or low 

temperatures, thermal shock, high or low humidity, air contamination or pollution, water, ice, solvents, 

chemicals, light, radiation, puncture, abrasion, heavy traffic, soiling, bacteria, insect infestation, 

combustion, electrical current, high speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear, misuse, 

incompatible interface, destructive testing, misalignment, excessive weathering, unprotected storage, 

improper shipping/ handling, theft and vandalism. 

3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 

A. Solid, Liquid, and Gaseous Contaminants: Contractor shall be responsible for the proper disposal of all 

solid, liquid, and gaseous contaminants in accordance with all local codes and regulations, together with 

the following requirements: 

1. Discharge gaseous contaminants so that they will be sufficiently diluted with fresh air to reduce 

the toxicity to an acceptable level. 

2. Liquid contaminants may, subject to local utility standards, be diluted with water to a level of 

quality acceptable in the local sewer system, or shall be contained in approved vessels for disposal 

at approved sites. 

B. Disposal of Refuse: Remove refuse resulting from construction operations from the site. 

C. Covered Chutes: All chutes for refuse, and the like, shall be covered, or of such a design to fully confine 

the material to prevent the dissemination of dust. 

D. Trucking: 

1. Load all trucks leaving the site with loose materials or debris in a manner that will prevent 

dropping of materials on streets. Fasten suitable tarpaulins over the load before they enter 

surrounding paved streets. 

2. The Contractor and all subcontractors on or delivering to the site shall conform to all local 

regulations regarding load limits. 

E. Construction Site Maintenance: 

1. Store all supplies and equipment on project site so as to preclude mechanical and climatic damage. 

Maintain site in a neat and orderly manner. 




F. Noise Control: 

1. Comply with all applicable state and local laws, ordinances, and regulations relative to noise 

control. 





SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 


1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS 

A. Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the 

installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces 

to their original condition. 

1. Cutting and patching is performed for coordination of the work, to uncover work for access or 

inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed or for other similar 

purposes. 

2. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products, or during the initial 

fabrication, erection or installation processes is not considered to be "cutting and patching" under 

this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also not considered 

to be "cutting and patching". 

3. "Selective Demolition" is recognized as a related-but-separate category of work, which may or 

may not require cutting and patching as defined in this section; refer to section "Selective 

Demolition-01732". 

B. Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and 

limitations applicable to individual units of work. 

1. See section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841” for patching fire-rated construction. 

2. Unless otherwise specified requirements of this section apply to mechanical and electrical work. 

Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 sections for additional requirements and limitations on 

cutting and patching of mechanical and electrical work. 

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner that would result in 

a reduction of load-carrying capacity or of load-deflection ratio. Prior to such work, obtain approval of 

project's structural engineer. 

B. Before cutting and patching the following categories of work, obtain the Architect's approval to proceed. 

1. Concrete structure including but not limited to, columns, beams, lintels, floor/ceiling slabs, and 

stairs. 

2. Miscellaneous structural metals, including lintels, equipment supports, and similar categories of 

work. 

3. Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment. 

4. Control, communication, conveying, and electrical wiring systems. 

C. When cutting openings in floor or altering concrete structural elements/systems, take care in not cutting 

the following structural items: 

1. Steel beams encased in concrete fireproofing. 

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building's exterior or in its occupied 

spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, result in lessening the building's aesthetic 

qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut 

and patch work. Remove and replace work judged by the Architect to be cut and patched in a visually 

unsatisfactory manner. 

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 1



1.3 SUBMITTALS 

A. Procedural Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where prior approval of cutting and patching is required, 

submit proposed procedures for this work well in advance of the time work will be performed and 

request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the submittal: 

1. Describe nature of the work and how it is to be performed, indicating why cutting and patching 

cannot be avoided. Describe anticipated results of the work in terms of changes to existing work, 

including structural, operational and visual changes as well as other significant elements. 

2. List products to be used and firms, including their qualifications that will perform work. 

3. Give dates when work is expected to be performed. 

4. Refer to section “Project Coordination-01040” for utility shutdowns required by this work. 

5. When cutting and patching of structural work involves the addition of reinforcement, submit 

details and engineering calculations to show how that reinforcement is integrated with original 

structure to satisfy requirements. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the Architect, use materials for cutting and 

patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be 

used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to 

visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal-or-better performance 

characteristics. 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Before cutting, examine the surfaces to be cut and patched and the conditions under which the work is to 

be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action 

before proceeding with the work. 

1. Before the start of cutting work, meet at the work site with all parties involved in cutting and 

patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and 

conflict between the various trades. Coordinate layout of the work and resolve potential conflicts 


3.2 PREPARATION 

A. Temporary Support: To prevent failure provide temporary support of work to be cut. 

B. Protection: Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from 

adverse weather conditions of that part of the project that may be exposed during cutting and patching 

operations. 

1. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 

C. Take precaution not to cut existing pipe, conduit or duct serving the building but scheduled to be 

relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 

3.3 PERFORMANCE 




A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching work. Except as otherwise indicated 

or as approved by the Architect, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and 

complete work without delay. 

B. Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining 

work. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with original 

installer's recommendations. 

1. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or 

grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting 

machine such as a carborundum saw or core drill to insure a neat hole. 

2. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid 

marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed 

surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 

3. Comply with requirements of other applicable sections where cutting and patching requires 

excavating and backfilling. 

4. By-pass utility services such as pipe and conduit, before cutting, where such utility services are 

shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut-off conduit and pipe in walls or 

partitions to be removed. After by-pass and cutting, cap, valve or plug and seal tight remaining 

portion of pipe and conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter. 

C. Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified 

tolerances for the work. 

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 

2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration into 

retained adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 

3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another finished area, patch 

and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color 

and appearance. If necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance, remove existing floor and 

wall coverings and replace with new materials. 

a. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken 

surface containing patch, after patched area has received prime and base coat. 

4. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform 

appearance. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where work is performed or used as access to work. Remove 

completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and 

similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its 

original condition. 





SECTION 01100 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 


1.1 INTRODUCTION 

A. The Contractor is referred to the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS", "FORM OF PROPOSAL", 

"GENERAL CONDITIONS", "CONTRACT DRAWINGS and TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS", and 

all Amendments and Addenda thereto, if any, all of which are hereby made a part of this work. 

B. The Contractor Proposes to furnish all labor, material, equipment and services as required to 

satisfactorily complete the Lobby and Office Alterations at Stephen Crane Elderly; 60 Cedar Lane and 58 

Evergreen Lane for Newark Housing Authority, NJ, in accordance with the drawings, and specifications 

as prepared by Heritage Architecture, LLC. Prospective bidders may gain access to the work area, for 

inspection purposes, by contacting the respective development superintendents at the following sites: 

Prospective bidders may gain access to the work area, for inspection purposes, by contacting the 

respective development superintendents. 

C. The work covered by these specifications shall include furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials 

necessary for the completion of all operations in this bid package, all in strict accordance with applicable 

Local, State, and Federal code regulations, specifications, and drawings. 

D. Each bidder is required to visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint them with the condition 

as they exist so that he may understand the facilities, difficulties and restrictions and restrictions 

attendant to the execution of the work under the contract. The bidder shall notify the Asset Development 

and Preservation Department of their intention and purpose before making any site visit. Bidders shall 

thoroughly examine and be familiar with the requirements of the detailed specifications. 

E. All work should meet the following Minimum Property Standards. 

• Local written rehabilitation standards, and Local, state and Federal code requirements. 

• International Building Code (IBC), New Jersey Edition 

• Minimum Property Standards* at 24 CFR 200.925 or 200.926 (FHA) 

• Handicapped accessibility requirements, ADA, ADAAG) 

F. Prior to staging and construction, the contactor shall submit a detailed work schedule and sequence of 

procedures to the NHA for approval. The work schedule shall include the phasing of the project, site 

access, storage of materials and equipment, and an analysis of progress through completion. 

G. The work shall commence at the time stipulated in the Notice To Proceed to the contractor and shall be 

completed within one year or as stated. The time started shall include submission and if applicable 

approval of shop drawings. 

H. NHA intends to engage contractors to assist the NHA in conducting the Scope of Services described 

below and Bid Document Part III, Sec I on a Lump Contract award. 

I. The successful contractor, and/or his subcontractors will be experienced with the type of work included 

and will have the capacity to perform the full spectrum of work at multiple locations within the stipulated 

contract time. 

J. - L. (see SECTION 1 of Part III B – Bid Book 3) 

GENERAL CONDITIONS 01100 - 1



1.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS 

• Include all supplementary and miscellaneous items not shown or specified, but implied or required 

in order to complete the work. 

• Workmanship shall be of good quality and subject to the approval of the authority. 

• It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to formulate a schedule of work indicating all sequence of 

work. The NHA Contract Administrator shall be contacted in order to schedule the sequence of work 

in accordance with the needs of the Authority 

• Contractor shall protect and be responsible for the work areas including all temporary protection as 

required to control moisture penetration into the building during all stages of the construction. 

• Existing construction that is to remain and that has been damaged as a result of the Contract work by 

the Contractor shall be Restored or replaced to the former conditions and to the satisfaction of the 

NHA. 

• Start duly authorized work and continue on a full time work program until completed. 

• Maintain Dust control and keep work area clean at all times. Legally dispose of all unwanted 

materials and debris from the working areas and from exterior areas at the end of each working day. 

• Upon completion of the work, or when directed by the NHA, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean 

all surfaces of all spaces, including all exterior areas, which have become soiled as a result of the 

contract work. 

• The Contractor shall provide and maintain all time such as (but not limited to) sidewalk sheds, tapes, 

cones etc. at the work locations to protect the public from dust and construction debris. 

• The Contractor shall arrange his/her own storage space and store materials at his own risk for the 

duration of the contract work. 

• The Contractor shall keep all spaces assigned to him clean and free from rags, waste or debris. He 

shall protect the floors with suitable coverings and shall not use any on-site utilities for disposal of 

any waste, paints, oil or other materials, used in connection with this project. 

• The Building Manager may allow the Contractor to use elevators or atairs; otherwise, the Contractor 

is responsible for hoisting his material and debris. In case the Contractor is allowed to use the 

elevators and stairs, the Contractor shall properly protect the elevator cab walls while transporting 

materials and clean up at the end of each working day. Under no circumstances shall any items be 

thrown, dropped, or otherwise lowered to the ground outside the building. 

• The Contractor is responsible for any damage or losses to the building and building contents caused 

by his/her actions. 

1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE 

• Contract Time for completion shall be set at 120 Working Days to from the Notice to Proceed. 

• Work (submittals) shall commence within 2 weeks of the date of the Notice to Proceed. 

• All field verification and initial shop drawing submissions must be complete and delivered to 

Architect within 4 weeks from date of the Notice to Proceed. 

• Removal and installation must commence within 3 weeks of the Notice to Proceed date. 




• Substantial Completion must be achieved within 14.3 weeks from the Notice to Proceed. 

• Punch list items must be addressed within 3 weeks of Substantial Completion. Final completion 

must therefore be achieved within 17.3 weeks from the Notice to Proceed. 


• The Newark Housing Authority reserves the right to issue $500.00 per day Liquidated Damages for 

uncompleted work, failure to perform in accordance with the NHA approved project schedule, or 

failure to complete work within the stated Contract Time. 

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING 

• A preconstruction meeting will be held at a time and place designated by the NHA, for the purpose 

of identifying responsibilities of the Owner’s and the Architect’s personnel and explanation of 

administrative procedure. 

The Contractor shall also use this meeting for the following minimum agenda: 

• Construction schedule 

• Use of areas of the site 

• Delivery and storage 

• Safety. 

• Security 

• Cleaning up 

• Subcontractor procedures relating to: 

• Submittals 

• Change orders 

• Applications for payment 

• Record documents 

Attendees shall include: 

• The Owner’s Representative(s) 

• The Architect and any Consultants 

• The Contractor and its Superintendent 

• Major Subcontractors 

1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. Refer to Section 01300 – “Submittals” for requirements regarding submission of Schedules, Show 

Drawings, Samples, Coord. Drawings, Product Data, Test and Inspection Reports, Warranties, and the 

like. 

1.7 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Bidders are hereby informed of the following special aspects of the construction: 

1. A schedule required to minimize impacts on the traveling public, residents and surrounding 

community. 

2. Nighttime work is not allowed. 

3. Involvement with vital public and private utilities. 

4. Maintenance and Protection of facilities. 

5. Demolition in and around buildings. 

In view of the special aspects noted above, each bidder shall be required to meet the following 

qualification criteria, as a minimum, and submit proof thereby with the bid to establish such 




qualification: 

Prior construction experience of similar project with a minimum construction cost of $200,000 each 

substantially completed within the last five (5) years. 

Has a minimum of one full time superintendent employed by the construction firm, who have supervised 

similar reconstruction projects of $200,000 or greater, and one who is available full time for this project. 

The NHA reserves the right to reject the bid of the apparent low bidder should the Contractor fail to meet 

the above-mentioned requirements. 

The work shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, plant, equipment, insurance and incidentals, 

required to satisfactorily complete the project within the prescribed schedule in accordance with the plans 

and specifications, and directions of the Architect. 

It is suggested that the Contractor inspect the site before bidding to assess and familiarize himself with 

the existing conditions and to judge for himself the extent and nature of the work to be done under this 

contract and the equipment and methods he can employ. 

If you have any questions concerning this Project’s Scope and Technical matters, please fax your 

inquiries to the attention of Ms. Antoinette Tillery at Fax: 973-273-6549 (Phone 973-2736528). 





SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. 

B. See Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 

1.2 DEFINITIONS 

A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement 

for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if 

estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 

1.3 PROCEDURES 

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, 

overhead, and profit. 

B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires 

establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those 

Sections. 

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of 

established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor 

acceptable to Contractor. 

D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections 

referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 


3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES 

Unit Price No. 1 Provide cost per square foot to provide complete metal framed gyp. bd partition 

system, type 6. 

Unit Price No. 2 Provide cost per square foot to provide complete metal framed gyp. bd furring system, 

type 7. 


type 8. 


type 9. 

Unit Price No. 5 Provide cost per square foot to provide EPDM membrane roofing. 

UNIT PRICES 01270 - 1



Unit Price No. 6 Provide cost per unit to provide 2’-8”x6’-8” painted hollow metal door and hardware 

in existing frame. 

Unit Price No. 7 Provide cost per unit to provide 3’-0”x6’-8” painted hollow metal door, frame and 

hardware. 

Unit Price No. 8 Provide cost per unit to provide 2’-6”x4’-0” double-hung aluminum replacement 

window. 

Unit Price No. 9 Provide cost per square foot to provide ceramic floor tile, Type CT-2. 

Unit Price No. 10 Provide cost per square foot to provide ceramic wall tile, Type CT-4. 

Unit Price No. 11 Provide cost per square foot to provide exterior ceramic wall tile, Type CT-3. 

Unit Price No. 12 Provide cost per square foot to provide complete gfrc wall paneling system VP-1. 

Unit Price No. 13 Provide cost per square foot to provide complete solid surfacing material SSM-1. 

Unit Price No. 14 Provide cost per square foot to provide interior painting. 

Unit Price No. 15 Provide cost per square foot to provide complete acoustical tile ceiling system, type 

ACT-1. 


ACT-2. 

Unit Price No. 17 Provide cost per square foot to provide complete metal tile ceiling system, type ACT- 

3. 

Unit Price No. 18 Provide cost per linear foot to provide complete wood base cabinetry with p-lam 

counter system. 

Unit Price No. 19 Provide cost per linear foot to provide complete wood wall cabinetry system 

Unit Price No. 20 Provide cost per linear foot to provide water supply piping, 3/4” diameter. 

Unit Price No. 21 Provide cost per linear foot to provide gas piping, 3/8” diameter. 

Unit Price No. 22 Provide cost per linear foot to provide complete 4” sanitary piping system. 

Unit Price No. 23 Provide cost to provide complete light fixture L1. 


Unit Price No. 25 Provide cost to provide dome type closed circuit security camera. 





SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. The types of submittal requirements specified in this section include shop drawings, product data, 

samples, certificates of conformance or compliance, certified test or inspection reports, and 

miscellaneous work-related submittals. Individual submittal requirements are specified in applicable 

sections for each unit of work. 

B. Requirements for record documents, progress and final photographs, and operation and maintenance 

manuals are covered in the "Project Closeout" section. 


A. Work-related submittals of this section are categorized for convenience as follows: 

1. Shop drawings include specially-prepared technical data for this project, including drawings, 

diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, 

instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard printed form for general 

application to a range of similar projects. 

2. Product data include standard printed information on materials, products and systems; not 

specially-prepared for this project, other than the designation of selections from among available 

choices printed therein. 

3. Samples include both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of materials, products and 

units of work; both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of work; either for limited 

visual inspection or (where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis. Mock-ups are a 

special form of samples, which are too large or otherwise inconvenient for handling in specified 

manner for transmittal of sample submittals. 

4. Certificates of conformance or compliance are documents attesting that a product complies with a 

specified standard. 

5. Certified test (or inspection) reports are documents attesting that a product meets a specified level 

of performance or quality when a prototype specimen is tested or inspected in accordance with a 

specified procedure, and consist of a certified statement by the product supplier or Contractor 

accompanied by a complete report of the inspection or test. 

6. Miscellaneous submittals related directly to the work (non-administrative) include warranties, 

maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, project photographs, survey data and reports, 

physical work records, copies of industry standards, record drawings, field measurement data, 

operating and maintenance materials, overrun stock, and similar information, devices and 

materials applicable to the work and not processed as shop drawings, product data samples, 

certificates of conformance or compliance, or certified test reports. 

1.3 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: 

1. All submittals shall be made to the Architect. 

2. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing all shop drawings for compliance with specifications 

and making all necessary corrections prior to submitting to the Architect, including, but not 

limited to the following: 

a. Record relevant information and requests for data on the transmittal form. 

b. Record deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, and bring to the attention 

of the Architect, if any, including minor variations and limitations. 

3. Only the Architect can approve or disapprove submittals. Deviations and variations from the 

contract requirements contained in the submittal can be approved only by the Architect. 

SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1



4. Failure on the part of the Contractor to indicate approval on submittals prior to submission to 

Architect will result in their being returned to the Contractor without being acted upon. 

5. No delays in construction occasioned by the Contractor's failure to submit material for approval in 

accordance with the approved schedule will be excused. 

B. Substitutions: All substations shall be submitted in a timely manner to allow for evaluation and 

compliance with specifications, so as to avoid delay in delivery of materials which would cause a delay 

in the construction schedule. Approval will not be granted to any substitution due to the inability of the 

Contractor to meet the construction schedule. No clam for extension of the construction schedule shall be 

granted due to submission of inadequate or unequal materials. 

C. Scheduling: Develop “Critical Path Method” schedule for submissions requiring approval. 

D. Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of 

the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence different categories of 

submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for 

coordination of the Architect's review with another. 

E. Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, 

Contractor, subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals. 

F. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking and provide space for the Architect's action 

marking. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals which are 

received from sources other than through Contractor's office will be returned without action. 

1.4 SPECIFIC-CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual work sections, comply with requirements specified 

herein for each indicated category of submittal. Provide and process intermediate submittals, where 

required between initial and final, similar to initial submittals. 

B. Shop Drawings: Refer to clause "Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings" of the General 

Conditions. Provide newly-prepared information, on reproducible sheets, with graphic information at 

accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated), with name of preparer indicated (firm name). Show 

dimensions and note which are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in the work 

shown. Indicate compliance with standards, and special coordination requirements. Do not allow shop 

drawing copies without stamp indicating approval by the Architect to be used in connection with the 

work. 

1. Standard Submittal: six (6) prints, plus two (2) additional prints where required for maintenance 

manuals; two (2) will be retained and remainder will be returned, one of which is to be marked-up 

and maintained by Contractor as "Record Document". 

2. Equipment and Systems: Shop drawings for equipment and systems shall show ratings (where 

applicable), and how components are assembled, function together, and how they will be installed. 

Shop drawings, product data, certificate of conformance or compliance, certified test or inspection 

reports, and other submittals for equipment, systems, and their component parts shall be 

coordinated and submitted as a unit. Multiple submissions are not acceptable except where prior 

approval is obtained from the Architect, in which case a list of data to be submitted later shall be 

included with the first submission. 

3. Coordination Drawings: Prior to installation of sleeves and inserts for equipment, and/or the 

performance of work in spaces in which two or more trades are involved and in which the 

probability of interference exists as determined by either the Contractor or the Architect, submit 

composite coordination drawings for the work. Show the work of all involved trades in a scale 

not less than 1:20 (metric) or larger if required by the Architect. Any work installed prior to 

approval of coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk, and subsequent relocations 

required to avoid interference shall be made at no cost to the Government. In case interference 




develops, the Architect will decide which work shall be relocated, regardless of which was 

installed first. 

C. Product Data: Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system; and mark each 

copy to show which choices and options are applicable to project. Include manufacturer's standard 

printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with standards, application of labels and 

seals, notation of field measurements which have been checked, and special coordination requirements. 

Maintain one set of product data (for each submittal) at project site, available for reference. 

1. Submittals: Contractor shall not submit product data, or allow its use on the project, until he has 

confirmed compliance with requirements of contract documents. Submittal is for information and 

record, unless otherwise indicated. Initial submittal is final submittal unless returned by the 

Architect, marked with an action which indicates an observed noncompliance. Submit copies, 

plus two (2) additional copies (which will be returned) where required for maintenance manuals. 

a. Provide a preliminary single-copy submittal where required (or desired by Contractor) for 

selection of options by the Architect. 

b. Installer's Copy: Do not proceed with installation of materials, products or systems until 

final copy of applicable product data is in possession of Installer. 

D. Samples: (Refer to clause "Samples" of General Conditions.) Provide units identical with final condition 

of proposed materials or products for the work. Include "range" samples (not less than 3 units) where 

unavoidable variations must be expected, and describe or identify variations between units of each set. 

Provide full set of optional samples where the Architect's selection is required. Prepare samples to match 

the Government-furnished sample where so indicated. Include information with each sample to show 

generic description, source or product name and manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with 

standards. 

1. Submittal: At Contractor's option, provide preliminary submittal of a single set of samples for 

review and action. Otherwise, initial submittal is final submittal unless returned with action which 

requires resubmittal. Submit 3 sets of samples in final submittal; one set will be returned. 

2. Quality Control Set: Maintain returned final set of samples at project site, in suitable condition 

and available for quality control comparisons. 

E. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Follow same procedure as for product data. Where 

feasible, and/or where required by other sections of specification indicate compliance with the specified 

standard by means of a label on the container, or on an inconspicuous place on the product. 

F. Certified Test and Inspection Reports: Process each as either "shop drawing" or "product data", 

depending upon whether report is uniquely prepared for project or a standard publication of 

workmanship control testing at point of production; process accordingly. 

1. Report shall include a description of the prototype specimen tested or inspected which is 

sufficiently descriptive to ensure positive identification of the product by an inspector when 

delivered and/or installed. 

2. The report shall be accompanied by a notarized statement from the supplier of the product 

certifying that the prototype is identical in all respects to the product proposed for the project. 

3. Where feasible and/or where required by other sections of the specification, indicate compliance 

with the specified performance or quality by means of a label on the container or on an 

inconspicuous place on the product. The label shall refer to the test or inspection report and 

include the date of the report. 

G. Warranties (Guarantees): In addition to copies desired for Contractor's use, furnish six (6) executed 

copies, except furnish additional (conformed) copies where required for maintenance manuals. 

H. Standards/Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where copy submittal is indicated, and except where 

specified integrally with "Product Data" submittal, submit two (2) copies to the Architect. Where 

workmanship at project site and elsewhere is governed by standard, furnish additional copies to 

fabricators, installers and others involved in performance of the work. Installation of the item will not be 




allowed to proceed until the information is received. Failure to furnish the information can be cause for 

rejection of the material. 

I. Closeout Submittals: Refer to individual work sections and to "closeout" section for specific 

requirements on submittal of closeout information, materials, tools and similar items. 

1. Record Document Copies: Furnish six (6) sets. 

2. Maintenance/Operating Manuals: Furnish six (6) copies. 

3. Materials and Tools: Refer to individual work sections for required quantities of spare parts, extra 

and overrun stock, maintenance tools and devices, keys, and similar physical units to be 

submitted. 

J. General Distribution: Provide additional distribution of submittals (not included in foregoing copy 

submittal requirements) to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, and others as necessary for 

proper performance of the work. 

1.5 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS 

A. Architect's Action: Where action and return is required or requested, the Architect and the Architect will 

review each submittal, mark with Action, and where possible return within 2 weeks of receipt. Where 

submittal must be held for coordination, Contractor will be so advised. 

1. Final Unrestricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with contract documents, 

when submittal is returned marked "Approved." 

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with notations and 

corrections on submittal and with contract documents, when submittal is returned marked 

"Approved as Noted." 

3. Returned for Resubmittal: Do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with 

notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action marking. Do not allow 

submittals marked "Disapproved, Resubmit" (or unmarked submittals where a marking is 

required) to be used in connection with performance of the work. 

4. Other Action: Where submittal is returned for other reasons, with the Architect's explanation 

included, it will be marked "Action Not Required." 


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 





SECTION 01400 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 

A. Coordination and project conditions. 

B. Preconstruction meeting. 

C. Site mobilization meeting. 

D. Progress meetings. 

E. Pre-installation meetings. 

F. Special procedures. 

1.2 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient 

and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for 

accommodating items installed later. 

B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building 

utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, 

connecting to, and placing in service, operating equipment. 

C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated 

diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as 

practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility 

for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. 

D. In finished areas [except as otherwise indicated], conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within construction. 

Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. 

E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial 

Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. 

F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work 

not in accordance with Contract Documents to minimize disruption of Owner’s activities. 


A. Owner will schedule meeting after Notice of Award. 

B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer and Contractor. 

C. Agenda: 

1 Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 

2 Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 

3 Distribution of Contract Documents. 

4 Submission of [list of Subcontractors,] list of products, schedule of values, and 

progress schedule. 

5 Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract and Architect/Engineer. 

6 Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, 

applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 

7 Scheduling. 

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to 

Architect/Engineer, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. 

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 1



1.4 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING 

A. Owner will schedule meeting at Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. 

B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, Special Consultants, Contractor, Contractor's 

Superintendent and major Subcontractors. 

C. Agenda: 

1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 

2. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. 

3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 

4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 

5. Security and housekeeping procedures. 

6. Schedules. 

7. Application for payment procedures. 

8. Procedures for testing. 

9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 

10. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 

11. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 


Architect/Engineer, Owner and those affected by decisions made. 

1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS 

A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly bi-monthly 

intervals. 

B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. 

C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, 

Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. 

D. Agenda: 

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 

2. Review of Work progress. 

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 

4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 

5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 

6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 

7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 

8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 

9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 

10. Coordination of projected progress. 

11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 

12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 

13. Other business relating to Work. 

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to 


1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS 

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene pre-installation meetings at Project site prior 

to commencing work of specific section. 




B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section. 

C. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum four days in advance of meeting date. 

D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 

1 Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 

2 Review coordination with related work. 



PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 


3.1 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 

A. Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing with new and salvaged products for patching 

and extending work. 

B. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform alteration work. 

C. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and 

restore at completion. 

D. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, including rotted wood, corroded metals, and 

deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work. 

E. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. 

F. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to permit installation of new work and finishes. 

G. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature 

and humidity. 

H. Remove, cut, and patch Work in manner to minimize damage and to permit restoring products and 

finishes to original or specified condition. Refer to Section 01045 – “Cutting and Patching” for 

additional requirements. 

I. Refinish existing visible surfaces to remain in renovated areas, to specified or renewed condition for each 

material, with neat transition to adjacent finishes. 

J. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, provide smooth and even transition. Patch Work to match 

existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. 

K. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with new Work is not possible, terminate 

existing surface along straight line at natural line of division and submit recommendation to 

Architect/Engineer for review. 

L. Where change of plane of ¼ inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing smooth 

transition; to Architect/Engineer for review and request instructions from Architect/Engineer. 




M. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other 

imperfections. 

N. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections. 





SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. General: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as 

extensions of provisions in other contract documents. These requirements have been included for special 

purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work 

required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication that such temporary 

activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of 

contract documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to, but are not limited to, utility services, 

construction facilities, security/protection provisions, and support facilities. 

1.2 JOB CONDITIONS 

A. General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for proper 

performance of the work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when no 

longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need. 

B. Conditions of Use: Install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a manner and at 

locations which will be safe, non-hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons and property, and free of 

deleterious effects. 



3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES: 

A. The types of services required include, but are not limited to, water, electrical power and telephones. 

Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference with construction operations. 

B. Water and Power: Premises are supplied with water and electrical services which may be used in this 

work, subject to regulations of the government agency in control. Government shall pay for use charges 

for water and power. 

3.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES: 

A. The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but are not limited to, water distribution, 

heat, ventilation, electrical power distribution, lighting, and ladders. Provide facilities reasonably 

required to perform construction operations properly and adequately. 

B. Heating: Refer to "Heat" clause of "General Conditions." Obtain approval of proposed temporary 

heating system from the Architect prior to placing in service. Oil burners, salamanders, or open braziers 

are not permitted. Comply with applicable Federal, State, and local safety regulations. 

1. Building and the areas surrounding the work areas will be heated by the existing heating system. 

In the event existing heating is not sufficient to heat the work areas then provide temporary heat 

by means of auxiliary equipment. 

TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 1



2. Contractor may utilize the existing heating system and the new equipment, as required. Fuel will 

be provided by the Owner. However, prior to final inspection, place the entire system in 

condition satisfactory to the Architect. 

C. Electrical Facilities: Provide all temporary electrical facilities, including lamps, required for construction 

and safety operations. Remove all such equipment when permanent connections have been completed. 

Where it is determined during construction that the temporary facilities, as installed, interfere with 

Government operations or other construction operations and when notified by the Architect, relocate said 

facilities in an approved manner at no cost to the Government. No wire, bus or electrical equipment 

which is part of any of the permanent electrical systems may be used for temporary electrical service for 

construction operations, unless specifically approved by the Architect. Temporary connections shall be 

in accordance with NEC and OSHA requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage 

or injury to equipment, materials, or personnel caused by improperly protected temporary installations. 

All costs for materials and installation for temporary electrical facilities and energy for their operation 

shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The hours of operation, level of illumination and coverage for 

safety of personnel shall meet the minimum requirements of the Architect. 

3.3 SECURITY PROVISIONS: 

A. General: Provide security to achieve protection from theft, vandalism, personal injury and property 

damage. Refer to Section 01546, "Safety and Health." Provisions shall include, but not be limited to the 

following: 

1. Work Area and Lockup: At earliest possible date, secure work area against unauthorized entrance 

at times when personnel are not working. 

2. Provide dustproof enclosures as required for protection where dirty work is performed. 

3.4 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES: 

A. General: The types of temporary support facilities required include, but are not limited to, field offices, 

storage, sanitary facilities, drinking water, private telephones, cleanup facilities, waste disposal service, 

all as may be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of 

personnel at the site. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar 

use of permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized by the Architect and, if not 

otherwise indicated, immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate temporary support 

facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities. 

B. Field Office and Storage Space: The contractor is limited to work area for field office and all storage 

space. No other space will be available, unless designated by the Owner’s Representative. 

C. Sanitary Facilities: Contractor’s personnel shall not use toilet rooms on the premises. The General 

Contractor shall provide portable sanitary facilities, as per state code requirements, and shall be 

responsible for maintenance and supplies throughout the contract period. 

D. Fire Extinguishers: Provide fire extinguishers in number, type and capacity as required by governing 

agencies. 

E. Waste Disposal and Cleanup: Perform cleanup of work areas and dispose of all waste material on a daily 

basis. Dumpsters shall not be permitted on site except during demolition work. Use of the building’s 

dumpsters is not permitted. Refer to Section 01732 “Selective Demolition” for waste disposal 

requirements. 





SECTION 01546 - SAFETY AND HEALTH 


1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS 

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications 

are referred to in the text by basic designation only. 

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 

1. OSHA General Industry Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910), Publication V2206; OSHA 

Construction Industry Standards (29 CFR 1926). One source of these regulations is OSHA 

Publication 2207, which includes a combination of both Parts 1910 and 1926 as they relate to 

construction safety and health. It is for sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. 

Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. 

2. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR, Part 61). 

3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Final Rule (40 CFR Part 761) dated July 17, 1985. 

4. Lead Construction Standard 29 CFR 1926.62 

C. Federal Standard (Fed. Std): 

1. 313A Material Safety Data Sheets, Preparation and the Submission of. 

1.2 WORK COVERED BY THIS SECTION 

A. This section is applicable to all work covered by this contract. 

1.3 DEFINITION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 

A. Refer to hazardous and toxic materials/substances included in Subparts H and Z of 29 CFR 1910; and to 

others as additionally defined in Fed. Std. 313. Those most commonly encountered include asbestos, 

lead-based paints, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB'S), explosives, and radioactive material, but may 

include others. The most likely products to contain asbestos are sprayed-on fireproofing, insulation, 

boiler lagging, pipe covering and likely products to contain PCB's are transformers, capacitors, voltage 

regulators, and oil switches. 


A. Safety Meeting: Representatives of the Contractor shall meet with the Architect and Owner’s 

Representative prior to the start of work under this contract for the purpose of reviewing the Contractor's 

safety and health programs and discussing implementation of all safety and health provisions pertinent to 

the work to be performed under the contract. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss, in detail, the 

measures he/she intends to take in order to control any unsafe or unhealthy conditions associated with 

the work to be performed under the contract. If directed by the Owner’s Representative, this meeting 

may be held in conjunction with other meetings which are scheduled to take place prior to start of work 

under this contract. The level of detail for the safety meeting is dependent upon the nature of the work 

and the potential inherent hazards. The Contractor's principal on-site representative(s), the general 

superintendent and his/her safety representative(s) shall attend this meeting. 

B. Compliance With Regulations: All work, including contact with and handling of hazardous materials, 

the disturbance or dismantling of structures containing hazardous materials and/or the disposal of 

hazardous materials shall comply with the applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1926/1910 and 40 CFR 

761. Work involving the disturbance, dismantling of asbestos or asbestos containing materials; the 

demolition of structures containing asbestos; and/or the disposal and removal of asbestos, shall also 

comply with the requirements of 40 CFR, Part 61, Subparts A and M. AlI work shall comply with 

SAFETY AND HEALTH 01546 - 1



applicable state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between 

applicable regulations, the most stringent shall apply. 

C. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance 

with all applicable regulations pertaining to the health and safety of personnel during the execution of 

work, and shall hold the Government harmless for any action on his/her part or that of his/her employees 

or subcontractors, which results in illness, injury or death. 


A. Accident Reporting: A copy of each accident report, which the Contractor or subcontractors submit to 

their insurance carriers, shall be forwarded to the Owner’s Representative as soon as possible, but in no 

event later than seven (7) calendar days after the day the accident occurred. 

B. Permits: If hazardous materials are disposed of off site, submit copies of permits from applicable, 

Federal, state, or municipal authorities and necessary certificates that the material has been disposed of 

as per regulations. 

C. Compliance Program: The OSHA Lead in Construction Standard requires the contractor to establish and 

implement a written compliance program prior to the commencement of a job. All employees covered 

under this standard must implement engineering and work practice controls to reduce and maintain 

employee exposures to lead at or below the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL). This program must 

include: 

1. Description of activities that produce lead exposures. 

2. Description of the specific means that will be employed to reduce exposure, and where 

engineering controls are used, the plans and studies used to determine the methods selected. 

3. A detailed schedule for implementing the compliance program. 

4. A report of the technology considered in meeting the PEL. 

5. Air monitoring data that documents the source of the lead exposure. 

6. Specific work practice procedures which will be employed on the project. 

7. A schedule of administrative controls if these are to be utilized. 

8. A description of all arrangements made on multi-contractor work sites to inform affected 

subcontractors about the lead project. 

D. Exposure Assessment: The OSHA Lead in Construction Standard requires contractors to implement 

protective measures before exposure assessment has been completed if they are conducting any one of a 

number of “lead related tasks”. These tasks are divided into three different classes. The contractor must 

assume that the worker is exposed to airborne concentrations at least to a certain level of lead (depending 

on the class) until exposure assessment shows otherwise. When the contractor has objective data 

demonstrating that the process, operation or activity does not result in employee exposure to lead at or 

above the action level, the contractor may rely upon such data for the initial exposure assessment. 

Submit a copy of a completed exposure assessment for all operations that disturb lead-containing paint at 

the job site. This exposure assessment will be utilized by the renovation contractor if additional painted 

surfaces must be disturbed to carry out the work. 

E. Other Submittals: If agreed to in writing at the safety meeting, other submittals shall be required. One 

such submittal which may be included is a plan of action for handling hazardous materials, which shall 

contain the following: 

1. Number, type, and experience of employees to be used for the work. 

2. Description of how applicable safety and health regulations and standards are to be met. 

3. Type of protective equipment and work procedures to be used. 

4. Emergency procedures for accidental spills or exposures. 

5. Procedures for disposing of or storing the toxic/hazardous materials. 

6. Identification of possible hazards, problems, and proposed control mechanisms. 

7. Protection of public or others not related to the operation. 




8. Interfacing and control of subcontractors, if any. 

9. Identifications of any required analyses, test demonstrations, and validation requirements. 

10. Method of certification for compliance. 


2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Special facilities, devices, equipment, clothing, and similar items used by the Contractor in the execution 

of work shall comply with the applicable regulations. 


3.1 STOP WORK ORDERS 

A. When the Contractor or his/her subcontractors are notified by the Owner’s Representative of any 

noncompliance with the provisions of the contract and the action(s) to be taken, the Contractor shall 

immediately, if so directed, or within 48 hours after receipt of a notice of violation correct the unsafe or 

unhealthy condition. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly, all or any part of the work being 

performed may be stopped by the Owner’s Representative with a "Stop Work Order." When, in the 

opinion of the Owner’s Representative satisfactory corrective action has been taken to correct the unsafe 

and unhealthy condition, a start order will be given immediately. The Contractor shall not be allowed 

any extension of time or compensation for damages by reason of or in connection with such work 

stoppage. 

3.2 PROTECTION 

A. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to the public, building occupants, or 

damage to property of others. For the purposes of this contract, the public or building occupants shall 

include all persons not employed by the Contractor or a subcontractor working under his/her direction. 

B. Storing, positioning or use of equipment, tools, materials, scraps, and trash in a manner likely to present 

a hazard to the public or building occupants by its accidental shifting, ignition, or other hazardous 

qualities is prohibited. 

C. Obstructions: No corridor, aisle, stairway, door, or exit shall be obstructed or used in such a manner as 

to encroach upon routes of ingress or egress utilized by the public or building occupant, or to present 

unsafe or unhealthy condition to the public or building occupant. 

D. Work shall not be performed in any area occupied by the public or building occupants unless specifically 

permitted by the contract or the Owner’s Representative and unless adequate steps are taken for the 

protection of the public or Federal employees. 

E. Wherever practicable, the work area shall be fenced, barricaded, or otherwise blocked off from the 

public or building occupants to prevent unauthorized entry into the work area. 

F. Alternate Precautions: When the nature of the work prevents isolation of the work area and the public or 

building occupants may be in or pass through, under or over the work area, alternate precautions such as 

the posting of signs, the use of signal persons, the erection of barricades or similar protection around 

particularly hazardous operations shall be used as appropriate. 

G. Public Thoroughfare: When work is to be performed over a public thoroughfare such as a sidewalk, 

lobby, or corridor, the thoroughfare shall be closed, if possible, or other precautions taken such as the 

installation of screens or barricades. When the exposure to heavy falling objects exists, as during the 




erection of building walls or during demolition, special protection of the type detailed in 29 CFR 

1910/1926 shall be provided. 

H. Barricades shall be removed upon completion of the project, in accordance with local ordinance and to 

the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. 

3.3 LIFE-SAFETY PROVISIONS: 

A. General: Provide Life- Safety measures to protect the job site from potential hazard. Naming of specific 

measures listed below does not alleviate the Contractor from complying with other regulations of 

authorities having jurisdiction, in addition to the following: 

1. Install temporary smoke detectors that are connected to the building fire alarm system at locations 

designated by Architect. 

2. Install signs at the project site at locations shown by the Architect that identifies where the existing 

fire alarm pull stations are located. This fire alarm pull station will be tested on a monthly basis by 

Owner. 

3. Install fire extinguishers at work site placed at locations designated by the Architect. 

4. Remove all construction debris from the work site at the end of each day. 

5. Flammable liquids shall not be stored at the work site. 

6. All new and existing floor and ceiling penetrations shall be sealed with a fire stopping system 

having a 2-hour fire rating. 

7. All corridors in construction site that lead to entrance doors will be kept unblocked with materials 

and will remain open to egress traffic. 

8. Obtain a fire permit before any cutting workwith torches is performed. The contractor shall provide 

a fire watch whenever such work is performed. The fire watch shall be maintained for 30 minutes 

after cutting work is completed. 

9. The Contractor shall review Interim Life Safety Measures with all construction personal on a weekly 

basis. 





SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selecting products for use in 

Project; Use of Owner-supplied products; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' 

standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. 

B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout. 

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and 

installations specified to be warranted. 


A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from 

previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," 

and terms of similar intent. 

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model 

number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is 

current as of date of the Contract Documents. 

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility[, 

except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly 

stated otherwise]. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new 

products. 

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or 

where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, 

dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that 

equal or exceed those of specified product. 

4. Owner-supplied Products: Items that have been purchased by Owner under separate contract. 

The Contractor shall inspect items and shall accept responsibility for the items and provide all 

work and incidental materials for the proper installation of the items, including providing 

warranties. 

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those 

required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and 

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to 

establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical 

properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other 

named manufacturers. 

D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a 

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 

E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to 

extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. 

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1




A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of 

products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 

2. Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit [3] copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data 

and for variations from Contract requirements. 

3. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within [15] 

days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable 

product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack 

of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract 

Documents. 

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or 

fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and 

Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Substitution Request Form: Use [CSI Form 13.1A] [form provided by Owner] [form provided 

at end of Section]. 

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as 

applicable: 

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. 

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other 

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that 

will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the 

Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, 

size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and 

installation procedures. 

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. 

f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and 

names and addresses of architects and owners. 

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results 

for compliance with requirements indicated. 

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for 

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution 

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. 

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 

k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the 

Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become 

necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation 

for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify 

Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within [15] days of 

receipt of request, or [7] days of receipt of additional information or 

documentation, whichever is later. 




a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. 

b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed 

substitution within time allocated. 

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 

"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for 

use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously 

selected products were also options. 

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and 

loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of 

construction spaces. 

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are 

flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed 

container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, 

unpacking, protecting, and installing. 

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that 

products are undamaged and properly protected. 

5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 

6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 

7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure 

above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 

8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, 

and weather-protection requirements for storage. 

9. Protect stored products from damage. 

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties 

required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties 

do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready 

for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly 

executed. 

2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document using 

appropriate form properly executed. 

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular 

requirements for submitting special warranties. 

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 





2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS 

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are 

undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a 

complete installation and indicated use and effect. 

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, 

provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar 

situations on other projects. 

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is 

Architect's. 

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish 

"salient characteristics" of products. 

B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following: 

1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product 

and manufacturer, provide the product named. 

a. Substitutions may be considered[, unless otherwise indicated]. 

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or 

"Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from 

the source named that complies with requirements. 


3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of 

names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with 

requirements. 


4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" 

introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that 

complies with requirements. 


5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products" 

introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed or 

another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable 

Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available 

Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the 

manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with 

provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 




7. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-of- 

Design Product" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide 

either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. 

Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are 

based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain 

approval for use of an unnamed product. 

a. Substitutions [may] [will not] be considered[, unless otherwise indicated]. 

8. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, 

select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's 

sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. 

a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with 

other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on 

"substitutions" for selection of a matching product. 

9. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from 

manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) 

that complies with other specified requirements. 

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, 

patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from 

manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. 

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, 

textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from 

manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within [60] days 

after [commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] [the Notice of Award]. Requests received 

after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions 

are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, 

except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or 

other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's 

additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation 

services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 

3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated 

results. 

4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 

5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 

7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 

9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS 




A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other 

required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product: 

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract 

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated 

results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the 

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, 

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names 

and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 

5. Samples, if requested. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 





SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. General: This section includes general requirements near end of Contract Time, in preparation for final 

acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy and similar actions evidencing 

completion of the work. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of 

Division 2 through 16. Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion", and therefore 

may be either a single time period for entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the 

work which have been noted as substantially complete at different dates. 

1.2 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. General: Prior to requesting inspection for certification of substantial completion (for either entire 

work or portions thereof), complete the following and list known exceptions in request: 

1. In progress payment request, coincident with or first following date claimed, show either 100% 

completion for portion of work claimed as "substantially complete", or list incomplete items, 

value of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete. Include supporting documentation for 

completion as indicated in these contract documents. 

2. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instructions to the Owner’s operating/maintenance 

personnel. Discontinue (or change over) and remove from project site temporary facilities and 

services, along with construction tools and facilities, mock- ups not approved to remain in place 

as part of completed work, and similar elements. 

B. Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's request, the Architect will either proceed with 

inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection, the Architect 

will note substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed and repeat 

inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of 

completed inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance. 

1.3 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE 

A. General: Prior to requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as 

required by General Provisions and Conditions, complete the following and list known exceptions (if 

any) in request: 

1. Submit final payment request with AIA Forms G704 – “Certificate of Substantial Completion”, 

G706 – “Contractor’s Affadavit of Payment of Debts and Claims”, G706A – Contractor’s 

Affadavit of Release of Liens”, and G707 – “Consent of Surety to Final Payment” and 

supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. 

2. Submit copy of final punch-list of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each 

item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final 

certifications and similar documents. 

4. Submit record as built drawings, final project photographs, property survey, and similar final 

record information. 

5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Owner. 

6. Make final change-over of locks and transmit keys to the Owner’s Representative and advise 

Owner personnel of change-over in security provisions. 

7. Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting of marred surfaces. 

8. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. 

B. Reinspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been completed, 

including punch-list items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed 

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1



because of acceptable circumstances, the Architect will reinspect the work. Upon completion of 

reinspection, the Architect will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of 

work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, 

procedure will be repeated. 

1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS 

A. General: As work progresses, prepare and maintain record documents as specified herein. Each record 

shall be certified by the Contractor and the Construction Engineer. Do not use record documents for 

construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location accessible 

to the Architect for reference during normal working hours. Upon completion, turn record documents 

over to the Architect. 

B. Record Drawings: Maintain a white-print set (blue-line or black-line) of contract drawings (including 

amendment and change order drawings) and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with markup 

of actual installations which vary from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is 

most capable of showing "field" condition fully and accurately; however, where shop drawings are 

used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at corresponding location on working drawings. Mark with 

red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate 

categories of work. Mark-up new information which is recognized to be of importance, but was for 

some reason not shown on either contract drawings or shop drawings. Give particular attention to 

concealed work, which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Note related change 

order numbers where applicable. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with 

durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on cover of each set. 

C. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of specifications, including amendments, change orders and 

similar modifications issued in printed form during construction, and mark-up variations in actual work 

in comparison with text of specifications and modifications as issued. Give particular attention to 

substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on work where it is concealed or cannot 

otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related record drawing 

information and product data, where applicable. 

D. Record Shop Drawing, Product Data, Certifications and Laboratory Test Reports: Maintain one copy 

of each approved shop drawing and product data submittal, product certification, and laboratory test 

report and mark-up significant variations in actual work in comparison with submitted information. 

Include both variations in product as delivered to site, and variations from manufacturer's instructions 

and recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of 

the work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related 

change orders and mark-up of record drawings and specifications. 

E. Record Sample Submittal: Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, the Architect will 

meet with Contractor at site, and will determine which (if any) of submitted samples maintained by 

Contractor during progress of the work are to be retained by the Owner. Comply with the Architect's 

instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery. 

F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections of these specifications for requirements of 

miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the work. 

Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in 

good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Turn over to 

the Architect prior to final acceptance. 

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 




A. General: Provide operation and maintenance manuals for each mechanical and electrical system 

(except as otherwise specified), for each piece of equipment, and for other systems and components 

specified in the technical sections of the specification. Organize manuals into suitable volumes of 

manageable size, as approved by the Architect. Manuals shall have table of contents, and be assembled 

to conform to table of contents with tab sheets covering each subject. The instructions shall be legible 

and easy to read. Manuals shall be hard bound and sheets consistent in size; where oversize drawings 

are necessary they shall be folded in. The words "Operation and Maintenance Manual," the name and 

location of the building, and contract number shall appear on the cover. 

B. Contents: Manuals shall include, but not be limited to, the following data: 

1. Detailed description of each system and each of its components, including layout showing 

piping, valves, controls and other components, and including diagrams and illustrations where 

applicable. 

2. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each 

component. 

3. Control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shut-down. 

4. Procedure for starting. 

5. Procedure for operating. 

6. Shut-down instructions. 

7. Installation instructions. 

8. Maintenance and overhaul instructions. 

9. Lubricating schedule, including type, grade, temperature range and frequency. 

10. Emergency instructions and safety precautions. 

11. Corrected shop drawings. 

12. Approved product data. 

13. Copies of approved certifications and laboratory test reports (where applicable). 

14. Copies of warranties. 

15. Test procedures. 

16. Performance curves and rating data. 

17. Parts list, including source of supply, recommended spare parts, and service organization 

convenient to building site. 

18. Name, address, and telephone number of each subcontractor who installed equipment and 

systems, and local representative for each type of equipment and each system. 

19. Other pertinent data applicable to the operation and maintenance of particular systems or 

equipment and/or other data specified in technical sections of the specification. 

C. Submittal: Provide Architect with three (3) copies of manual prior to the time that system or equipment 

tests are performed, and five (5) additional copies 90 days before start of operation by the Owner or any 

instruction period specified. 



3.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL 

A. Where instructions to maintenance personnel are specified in other sections furnish, without additional 

expense to the Owner, the services of competent instructors, who will give full instruction in the care, 

adjustment, and operation of the systems and equipment to designated maintenance personnel. 

B. Each instructor shall be familiar with all parts of the system on which he is to give instruction and shall 

be trained in operating theory as well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Employ factory 

trained instructors wherever practical and available. 




C. Unless otherwise required or approved, give instruction during the regular work week after the 

equipment has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. Where significant 

changes or modifications in equipment are made under the terms of the guarantee, provide additional 

instruction as may be necessary to acquaint the operating personnel of the changes or modifications. 

When more than four man-days (32 hours) of instruction are specified, approximately half of the time 

shall be classroom instruction and the other half with the equipment or system. 

D. Utilize the maintenance manual for the system or equipment as a text for instruction. Instruction shall 

include a review of the maintenance manual. 

E. Upon completion, obtain written acknowledgment from the Architect that the required instruction was 

completed. 

3.2 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Post operating instructions approved by the Architect for each system and each principal piece of 

equipment for the use of operation and maintenance personnel. Include wiring and control diagrams 

showing the complete layout of the entire system including equipment, piping, and valves, and control 

sequence, framed under glass or approved laminated plastic and posted where directed by the Architect. 

Printed or engraved operating instructions for each principal piece of equipment including start-up, 

proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, shut-down, safety precautions, procedure in the event of 

equipment failure, and any other necessary items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of 

the unit shall be attached to or posted adjacent to the piece of equipment. Operating instructions 

exposed to the weather shall be made of weather-resisting materials or shall be suitably enclosed to be 

weather protected. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured 

to prevent easy removal or peeling. 

3.3 FINAL CLEANING 

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operation. The following is required in addition 

to special cleaning specified in technical sections. 

1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. 

2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition, 

removing substances which are noticeable as vision obscuring materials. Replace broken glass 

and damaged transparent materials. 

3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes, to a dirt-free condition, free of dust, 

stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid 

disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original 

reflective condition. 

4. Wipe surfaces of equipment clean. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. 

5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, 

trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces. 

6. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces. 

7. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting from 

water exposure. 

8. Clean built-in cabinets and casework to a condition of sanitation ready and acceptable for 

intended service use. 

9. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. 

B. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by the Architect, remove temporary 

protection devices and facilities which were installed during course of the work to protect previously 

completed work during remainder of construction period. 








SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes demolition and removal of the following: 

1. Selected portions of a building or structure. 

2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. 

B. See Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. 

C. See Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 


A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated 

to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. 

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall 

them where indicated. 

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise 

indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 

A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to 

remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed 

from Project site. 


A. Proposed Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, 

proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures 

are later determined to be inadequate. Include measures for the following: 

1. Dust control. 

2. Noise control. 

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and 

removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of 

elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. 

C. Predemolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site 

improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit 

before Work begins. 

D. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to 

accept hazardous wastes. 


SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1



A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in 

material and extent to that indicated for this Project. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning 

selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. 

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct 

selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 48 hours' notice 

to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 

B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 

1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written 

permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far 

as practical. 

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 

2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; 

immediately notify Architect and Owner’s Representative. 

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. 

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage 

during selective demolition operations. 

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during 

selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. 

1. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to patch the exposed Work listed below that is 

damaged during selective demolition. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, 

engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm. 


2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS 

A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that 

visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 

2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. 





3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. 

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective 

demolition required. 

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and 

salvaged. 

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or 

design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a 

written report to Architect. 

E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any 

element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent 

structures during selective demolition operations. 

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES 

A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during 

selective demolition operations. 

B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by 

Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing 

utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Provide at least 48 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. 

C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to 

be selectively demolished. 

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 

2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary utilities 

before proceeding with selective demolition that bypass area of selective demolition and that 

maintain continuity of service to other parts of building. 

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal 

remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 

D. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, 

and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and 

sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 


A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to 

ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used 

facilities. 

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities 

without permission from the Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate 

routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 

2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, 

where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to 

people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 




C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and 

construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and 

similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 

D. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and 

dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 

E. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve 

stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent 

unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 

3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS 

A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust 

and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. 

1. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition 

enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. 

B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and 

areas. 

1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey 

debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 

C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective 

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations 

began. 

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and 

as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations. 

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting 

methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. 

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing 

finished surfaces. 

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, 

such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting 

flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flamecutting 

operations. 

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose 

excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 

B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, 

stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition 

operations. 

C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 

1. Clean salvaged items. 

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 




1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to 

match new equipment. 

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 


4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials 

and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make 

item functional for use indicated. 

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during 

selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected 

storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after 

selective demolition operations are complete. 

3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS 

A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. 

B. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 

C. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new 

materials. 

1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an 

approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written 

recommendations. 

D. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in 

a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 

E. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, 

patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish 

color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new 

materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 

F. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of 

uniform appearance. 

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate 

on-site. 

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 





SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes interior woodwork for the following applications: 

1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 

2. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. 

3. Flush wood paneling and wainscots. 

4. Cementitious glass-fiber reinforced paneling. 

B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips, unless 

concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Cabinet hardware and accessories. 

2. Finishing materials and processes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include location of each item, plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment 

devices, and other components. 

C. Samples 

1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side 

and one edge. 

2. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 

3. Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and surface 

finish. 

4. Solid-surfacing materials. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork. 

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality 

Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 

1. Provide AWI certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork complies 

with requirements of grades specified. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is 

complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels 

planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1



A. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for woodwork is described in Part 2 is based on products 

indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product 

by one of the following: 

1. Solid Surfacing Material: 

a. Avonite, Inc.; Avonite. 

b. DuPont Polymers; Corian. 

c. Formica Corporation; Surell. 

d. Wilsonart International, Div. of Premark International, Inc.; Gibraltar. 

2. Cementitious Glass-Fiber Reinforced Paneling: 

a. Formglas Inc. 

b. Decoform Inc. 

3. Plastic Laminate: 

a. Formica Corporation. 

b. International Paper; Decorative Products Div. 

c. Laminart. 

d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Wood for Transparent Finish: 

1. Species and Cut: Alder, White Birch, or Begen 

B. Wood Products: 

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 

5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. 

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3: P-LAM-1 

1. Basis of Design Product: Wilsonart International; See finish schedule for color and pattern. 

D. Solid-Surfacing Material: SSM-1 

1. Basis of Design Product: DuPont Polymers; Corian; See Finish Schedule for color 

2. Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or 

Type 6 material and performance requirements, without a precoated finish. 

E. Cementitious Glass-Fiber Reinforced Paneling VP-1 

1. Basis of Design Product: Formglas Inc., Quarrycast, See finish schedule for color and pattern. 

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical 

formulations to comply with AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood), Exterior Type or Interior 

Type A. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely 

affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment. 

B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed 

together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index 

of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 

C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from softwood fibers, 

synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flamespread 

index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 




2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials for a complete installation of architectural 

woodwork, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 

B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or 

items referenced to this standard. 

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, self-closing. 

D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inches (8 mm) in diameter. 

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. 

F. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, 

BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads: 

1. Box Drawer Slides: [75 lbf (330 N)] [100 lbf (440 N)]. 

2. File Drawer Slides: [150 lbf (670 N)] [200 lbf (890 N)]. 

3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf (200 N). 

G Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. 

H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. 

I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Complying with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 

3. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 652 for steel base. 

2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fire-retardant treated, 

kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 

1. Concealed in-wall blocking is specified in section “Gypsum Board Assemblies – 09260”. 

2.6 FABRICATION 

A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where 

necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 

1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom complying with the referenced quality standard. 

2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and 

burrs. 

3. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 

4. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 

5. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except 

for members with ends exposed in finished work. 

6. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field 

assembly. 

B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: 

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay 

2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative of grade, color and pattern 

indicated. 

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS. 

b. Postformed Surfaces: HGP. 

c. Vertical Surfaces: HGS 

d. Edges: HGS 




3. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay. 

a. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay. 

b. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay. 

4. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated by manufacturer's designations on finish schedule. 

5. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments 

and drawers, unless located directly under tops. 

C. Solid-Surfacing-Material Countertops: 

1. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: ¾ inch 

2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide or match basis-of-design product. 

3. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. 

Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, 

sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 

D. Flush Wood Paneling and Wainscots: 

1. Lumber Trim and Edges: At fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as solid wood (except 

moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible with grain and color of 

veneered panels. 

2. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 

3. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Running match. 

4. Panel-Matching Method: No matching between panels is required. Select and arrange panels for 

similarity of grain pattern and color between adjacent panels. 

5. Panel-Matching Method: In each separate area, use sequence-matched, uniform-size sets. 

6. Fire-Retardant-Treated Paneling: Provide panels consisting of wood veneer and fire-retardant 

particleboard or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard with a flame-spread index of 25 or less 

and smoke-developed index of 450 or less per ASTM E 84. 

2.7 SHOP FINISHING 

A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing 

until after installation. 

B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of 

woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling. 

C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and 

sheen, with sheen measured on 60-deg ree gloss meter per ASTM D 523: 

1. Grade: Premium. 

2. AWI Finish System: TR-4, coversion vermien. 

3. Staining: Match sample. 

4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from closed-grain 

wood before staining and finishing. 

5. Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 

6. Sheen: Semi-gloss, 55-75 gloss units. 


3.1 INSTALLATION 

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and examine and 

complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before installation. 

B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in 

this Section for type of woodwork involved. 




C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 

mm). Shim as required with concealed shims. 

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at 

cuts. 

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with 

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine 

finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork 

and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 

F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces 

(from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Fill gaps, if any, between top of 

base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 

G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately 

aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered 

operation. 

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 16 inches (400 

mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing 

behind wall finish. 

H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into 

underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 

Section "Joint Sealants." 

I. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use face 

fastening, unless covered by trim. 





SECTION 07531 - EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes: fully adhered EPDM membrane roofing system. 


A. Product Data: For each product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 

C. Samples: For each product included in membrane roofing system. 

D. Research/evaluation reports. 

E. Maintenance data. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system 

manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as 

roofing membrane. 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response 

characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, 

or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A ; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions 

permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty 

requirements. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship 

within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE 

A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type II, fiberglass reinforced uniform, flexible sheet made 

from EPDM, and as follows: 

EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 07531 - 1



1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers 

specified. 

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated, Sure-White 

b. Firestone, Inc., Eco-White 

c. StaFast Building Products 

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 

3. Exposed Face Color: White. 

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and 

compatible with membrane roofing. 

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, as recommended by manufacturer, partially cured or 

cured, according to application. 

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. 

D. Seaming Material: Hot Air weld seaming. 

E. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, metal termination bars, metal 

battens, pourable sealers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 


3.1 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system 

manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. 

B. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions 

required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. 

C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate 

required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of 


D. Adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. 

3.2 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to 

membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to 

partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. 

C. Flash penetrations with cured or uncured sheet flashing. 

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to 

ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing 

terminations. 




E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform 

roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing 

installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections 

indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. 





SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for fastening, joining, 

supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim. 

C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim. 


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 

Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product 

selection: 



specified. 

2.2 SHEET METALS 

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for 

forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 

1. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat. 

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other 

miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 

B. Fasteners: Screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design 

loads. 

1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factoryapplied 

coating. 

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex 

washer head. 

3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. 

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1



C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with 

release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. 

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use 

classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. Use sealant 

compatable with epdm roofing. 

E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound. 

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in 

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other 

characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for 

accurate fit before shop fabrication. 

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true 

to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 

1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal 

with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 

C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to 

comply with SMACNA recommendations. 

D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, 

form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with 

elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. 

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and 

trim, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from 

compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured. 

2.5 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Roof Edge Flashing Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 

10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide joint cover plates. 

B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 

1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 

C. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 



3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with 

provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,, protective coatings, separators, sealants, 

and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 

1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 




B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against 

galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as 

recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 

C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 

D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with 

minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. 

E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify 

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 

1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend 

tabs over fasteners. 

F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement 

joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or 

intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be 

sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 

mm) deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. 

G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 

1. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners. 

H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. 

3.2 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and 

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units 

true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently 

watertight. 

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG 

Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. 

1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 16inch 

(400-mm) centers. 

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert 

counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Secure in a waterproof manner. 

Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 

4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant. 





SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for the following types of fire-resistance-rated 

assemblies: 

1. Floors / ceilings. 

2. Walls and partitions. 

3. Smoke barriers. 

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. F-Ratings: Provide firestop systems with F-ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of 

constructions penetrated as determined per ASTM E 814. 

B. T-Ratings: Provide firestop systems with T-ratings required, as well as F-ratings, determined per 

ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items with potential to contact adjacent materials in 

occupiable floor areas including, but not limited, to the following: 

1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 

2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 

3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. 

4. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch- (100-mm-) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) 

in overall cross-sectional area. 

C. For firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after 

curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant 

firestop systems. 

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and exposed to 

possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved 

either by installing floor plates or by other means. 

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide firestop systems not requiring removal of 

insulation. 

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread indices of 

less than 25 and smoke-developed indices of less than 450, when tested per ASTM E 84. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include details of installation and design designation of testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each 

condition indicated. 

C. Product certificates and test reports. 


THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide rated systems identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 and 

with products bearing the classification marking of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable 

to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate firestop 

systems. 



A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the 

Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 

2. DAP Inc. 

3. Isolatek International. 

4. Specified Technologies Inc. 

5. Tremco. 

2.2 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 

A. Compatibility: Provide firestop systems that are compatible with the substrates forming openings, and 

with the items, if any, penetrating firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as 

demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

B. Accessories: Provide accessories required to install fill materials that comply with requirements of tested 

assemblies, are approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency that performed testing, and are 

specified by manufacturer of tested assemblies. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the 

following: 

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. 

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent 

leakage of fill materials in liquid state. 

c. Fire-rated form board. 

d. Fillers for sealants. 

2. Temporary forming materials. 

3. Substrate primers. 

4. Collars. 

5. Steel sleeves. 



A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" 

Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for 

products and applications indicated. 

B. Clean openings immediately before installing firestop systems. 

1. Remove foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of firestop systems. 

2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 




3. Produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestop systems. 

Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 

C. Priming: Prime substrates when recommended in writing by firestop system manufacturer using that 

manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not spill 

primers or allow them to migrate onto adjoining surfaces. 

D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of firestopping with adjoining 

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning 

methods required to remove firestopping smears. Remove tape immediately after installation without 

disturbing firestopping seal. 

E. Accessories: Install accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in 

the position necessary to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings 

indicated. 

1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories that are 

not permanent components of firestop systems. 

F. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques. 

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items 

as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating 

items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, 

uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 

G. Identification: Identify firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. 

Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system 

installation where labels will be visible. Include the following information on labels: 

1. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify Building 

Management of Any Damage." 

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 

3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

4. Date of installation. 

5. Firestop system manufacturer's name. 

6. Installer's name. 

H. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as installation progresses by methods and with cleaning 

materials that are approved in writing by manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which 

openings occur. 

3.2 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE 

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to the alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in 

UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. 

B. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, C-BJ, F-A, W-J, W-L. 

C. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, C-BJ, C-BK, F-A, F-B, F-C, W-J, W-K, W-L. 

D. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, C-BJ, F-A, F-B, F-C, W-J, W-L. 




E. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables: Comply with the following: 


F. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, C-BJ, F-A, F-B, F-C, W-J, W-K, W-L. 

G. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, C-BJ, F-A, F-C, W-J, W-L. 

H. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, F-A, W-L. 

I. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrations: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, F-C, W-J, W-L. 

J. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrations: Comply with the following: 






SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications: 

1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 

2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint 

seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant 

continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 

B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2inch- 

(13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the 

appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 

C. Preconstruction field test reports. 

D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. 

E. Product certificates and test reports. 


B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion 

to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for the types of 

Project joints. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace 

elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this 

Section within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant 

manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply 

with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 


JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1






Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one 

another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant 

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquidapplied 

chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for 

type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to 

porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not 

stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 

C. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: 

1. Available Products: 

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799. 

b. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000. 

c. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC. 

d. Tremco; Tremsil 600. 

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 

3. Class: 25. 

4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 

5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated. 

D. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: 


a. Pecora Corporation; 898. 

b. Tremco; Tremsil 600 White. 


3. Class: 25. 



2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. 

B. Available Products: 

1. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 

2. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 

3. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 

2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS 




A. Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low-modulus 

silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing silicone sealant 

for bonding extrusions to substrates. 


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. 

b. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span. 

c. Tremco; Spectrem Ez Seal. 

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING 

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint 

substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant 

manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) and of 

size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant 

performance: 

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for 

preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint 

where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to 

joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant 

backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates 

and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to 

joint substrates. 

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent 

to joints. 



A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint 

sealant. 

a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical 

abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of 

developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after 

cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed 

air. 


a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm 

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. 

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, 

based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with 




joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not 

allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces 

that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods 

required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 


A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants 

as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to 

produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow 

optimum sealant movement capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace 

them with dry materials. 

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs 

of joints. 

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are 

installed: 

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum 

sealant movement capability. 

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, 

tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration 

indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor 

sealants or adjacent surfaces. 

3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with 

cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints 

occur. 

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE 

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical and horizontal nontraffic construction joints in cast-in-place 

concrete. 

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant. 

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical and horizontal nontraffic joints between plant-precast 

architectural concrete units. 


C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 





D. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical joints between different materials listed above. 


E. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior 

walls. 


F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. 


G. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and 

counters. 

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant 

H. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete 

walls and columns. 


I. Joint-Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors 

windows and elevator entrances. 

1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 





SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes steel doors and frames for interior applications. 


A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include door designation, type, level and model, material 

description, label compliance, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. 

B. Door Schedule. Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings. 


A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are 

indicated. 

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a 

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings 

indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 



A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that 

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 

1. Curries. 

2. Pioneer Industries Inc. 

3. Door. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, 

or surface defects; pickled and oiled. 

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, 

Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. 

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 

(ZF120) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. 

D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; 

mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness where used 

for face sheets. 

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1



2.3 DOORS 

A. Interior Doors: Complying with ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physicalendurance 

level indicated. 

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A, Model 1 (Full Flush) 

B. Labeled Doors: Insulate as required by Underwriters Laboratories. Build in special hardware and 

provide astragals as indicated. At one hour and at 1-1/2 hour doors at enclosures, maximum transmitted 

temperature end point shall not exceed 450 degrees F above ambient at end of 30 minutes of fire 

exposure per U.L. 

C. Seamless Vertical Edges: Construct doors with smooth flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on 

exposed faces or stile edges. Interior and exterior door edge seams shall be full height wire welded and 

ground smooth. 

2.4 FRAMES 

A. General: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Frame Steel Sheet Thickness: 

1. 14 gauge for interior door frames and glazed opening frames. 

C. Door Silencers: Three silencers on single-door frames and two silencers on double-door frames. 

D. Plaster Guards: 0.016-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off 

interior of openings. 

E. Supports and Anchors: Not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick zinc-coated steel sheet. 

1. Masonry Wall Anchors: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire complying with 

ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet. 

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Zinc-coat items that are to be built into 

exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 

G. Typical Reinforcing: Provide minimum hinge reinforcement 3/16 inch by 1-1/2 inch by 10 inch. Provide 

similar reinforcement for hardware items as required to adequately withstand stresses, minimum 12 

gauge, including channel reinforcement for door closers and closer arms, door holders and similar items. 

Provide reinforcement and clearances for concealed in-head door closers and for mortise locks. 

H. Cover Plates: For hinge and strike plate cutouts, provide fully enclosed pressed steel cover boxes spot 

welded to frames behind mortises. 

I. Hardware: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap for mortise hardware, except drilling and tapping for surface 

door closers, door closer brackets and adjusters shall be done in field. 


A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 free from defects including 

warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. 

B. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush 

units, from cold-rolled steel sheet. 

C. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI 

standards. 




D. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not 

more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. 

E. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. 

F. Door-Edge Profile: Beveled edge 

G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117. 

H. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware 

schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in 

ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 

I. Frame Construction: 

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. 

Provide temporary spreader bars. 

2. Fabricate knock-down frames with mitered or coped corners, for field assembly. 

3. Fabricate knock-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 

4. Provide terminated stops. 

J. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surfaceapplied 

hardware may be done at Project site. 

K. Locate hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. 

2.6 FINISHES 

A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with 

ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. 



A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately 

in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall 

construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and 

undamaged. 

1. Wall Anchors: Provide at least three anchors per jamb. For openings 90 inches (2286 mm) or 

more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. 

2. Gypsum Board Partitions: For in-place partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames. 

3. Fire-Rated Frames: Install according to NFPA 80. 

B. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and 

ANSI/DHI A115.1G. 

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 

2. Smoke Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. 

C. After installation, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames and touch up prime coat with 

compatible air-drying primer. 





SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes solid-core doors as follows: 

1. Doors with wood-veneer faces and factory finishing. 

B. See Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for door frames. 


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications. 

B. Samples: For each face material and finish. 


A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." 

B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable 

to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated. 

1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established 

at 40 inches (1000 mm) or less above the sill. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 

1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 

2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 

3. Lambton Doors 

4. VT Industries Inc. 

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION 

A. Doors for Transparent Finish: 

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces 

2. Species and Cut: White oak, rift cut. 

3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 

4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 

B. Interior Veneer-Faced Solid-Core Doors: 

1. Core: Either FSC certified particleboard, FSC certified stave lumber, or agrifiber (meets LEED 

requirements for rapidly renewable materials and recycled content). 

2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed 

before veneering. 

C. Fire-Rated Doors: 

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1



1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's 

standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated. 

2. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screwholding 

capability and split resistance. 


A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of 

referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 

2.4 FACTORY FINISHING 

A. General: Finish doors at factory. 

B. Grade: Premium. 

C. Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance comparable to AWI System TR-6 catalyzed 

polyurethane. 

E. Staining: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 

F. Sheen: Semigloss. 



A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as 

indicated. 

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 

B. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 

C. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project 

site. 


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2



SECTION 08460 - AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 



A. Automatic sliding doors with operator and motion/presence sensor control device. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Section 16000 - Electrical. 


A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL 60062, Phone: 847-272-8800, Fax: 847- 

272-8129. 

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 11 W. 42 nd Street, 13 th Floor, New York, NY 10036, Phone: 

212-642-4900, Fax: 212-398-0023. 

C. Builders’ Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA), 355 Lexington Ave., New York, NY 10017, 212- 

661- 4261, Fax: 212-370-9047. 

D. ICBO Evaluation Services, 5360 Workman Mill Road, Whittier, CA 90601, 562-699-0543, Fax: 562-695- 

4694. 

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Doors Powered to Open Position: 

1. Doors powered by DC electric motor and mechanical gear assembly transmitted to active leaves by 

fiberglass-reinforced tooth drive belt for silent operation. Doors using roller chain, cable, or hydraulic 

devices shall not be accepted. 

2. Power door to open position by signals received by microprocessor from the actuation controls. 

3. The last portion of the opening cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that 

electronically reduces voltage to motor until door is fully open. Door systems that use microswitches 

shall not be accepted. 

4. To permit safe passage if an obstruction is detected between opening doors and surrounding walls or 

interior fittings, the doors shall immediately stop and after a delay go to the full closed position. Door 

systems that only monitor the door travel while closing shall not be acceptable. 

B. Doors Powered to Closed Position: 

1. The active leafs will only be powered to closed position when all actuating devices are cleared and 

after remaining in the open position for a preset time delay (per ANSI standards). 

2. The last portion of the closing cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that 

electronically reduces voltage to the motor until door is fully closed. 

3. To permit safe passage between closing doors, the doors immediately reverse to open position if an 

obstruction is detected, then resume their interrupted movement at low speed to check whether the 

obstruction has disappeared or not. Door systems that only monitor the door travel while opening shall 

not be acceptable. 

C. Emergency Breakaway: 

1. Full Breakout System: Interior sliding active leaves and sidelites swing out from any position in 

sliding mode. 

2. Breakaway Pressure: Field adjustable to building code requirements and in accordance with 

AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 08460-1



ANSI/BHMA 156.10 maximum of 50 pounds. 

D. Watchdog Monitoring: 

1. Microprocessor Software: Constantly monitor drive train system operations. 

2. Watchdog Control Circuit: Assume command of system and shut down automatic function by holding 

doors open, should door speed, motor function, or drive train operations deviate from design criteria 

ranges. 

3. Secondary Supervisory Circuit: Monitor main Watchdog control circuit every 255 door cycles, ready 

to perform as a backup. 

E Energy Saving Device: 

1. Position Switch: interior, jamb mounted. 

2. Door Opening Settings: Off, exit only, 2-way traffic, partial opening, and hold fully open. 

3. Partial Opening Mode: Switch reduces total door opening to reduce conditioned air loss. 

4. Heavy Weather Pile: Between doors and sidelites and between emergency breakaway hardware and 

door stiles. 


A. General: Provide doors that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified performance 

requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding standard systems. 

B. Compliance: 

1. ANSI/BHMA 156.10. 

2. ANSI/UL 325 listed. 

C. Automatic door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian traffic. 

D. Automatic door equipment accommodates up to following weights for active leaf doors: 

1. Single Slide Doors: 150 pounds (104 kg) per active leaf. 

E. Operating Temperature Range: -35 degrees F to 131 degrees F (-30 degrees C to 55 degrees C). 

F. Motion and Presence Detection System: Uses planar K-band microwave technology to detect motion and 

focused active infrared technology to detect presence, in a single housing. 


A. Comply with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. 

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials, components, 

fabrication, finishes, and installation. 

C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details, indicating 

dimensions, materials, and fabrication of doors, frames, sidelites, operator, motion/presence sensor control 

device, anchors, hardware, finish, options, and accessories. 

D. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of aluminum finishes. 

E. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from UL, CUL, and ICBO indicating doors comply with specified 

performance requirements. 

F. Manufacturer's Project References: Submit list of successfully completed projects including project name and 

location, name of architect, and type and quantity of doors manufactured. 




G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit manufacturer's field reports from AAADM certified technician of 

inspection and approval of doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10 after completion of installation. 

H. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 

1. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. 

2. Include spare parts list. 

I. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty shall be one year from date of installation. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 

1. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified, with a minimum of 

10 years successful experience. 

2. Door, frame, operator, and sensor components from same manufacturer. 

B. Installer's Qualifications: 

1. Minimum of 2 years successful experience in installation of similar doors. 

2. Local certified distributor. 

3. Approved by manufacturer. 

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site protected from damage. 

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. 

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Manufacturer shall provide factory-owned central-dispatch system for maintenance service. 

B. The manufacturer shall maintain a company owned dispatch system that shall be available 24 hours per day, 

365 days per year to insure proper service capability. 

C. A manufacturer's employee, not an answering service, shall obtain malfunction information and dispatch 

appropriate service agency to project location. 

D. Toll free phone number shall be prominently displayed on header of each operator. 

E. Outside contractors or answering services are not acceptable. 


2.1 MANUFACTURER 

A. Basis of Design: Besam Entrance Solutions, 1900 Airport Road, Monroe, North Carolina 28110. Toll Free 

(866) BESAM-US. Phone (704)290-5520. Fax (704)290-5555. Web Site www.besam-usa.com. E-Mail 

marketing@besam-usa.com. 

2.2 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 




A. Model: Unislide Telescopic automatic sliding doors. 

Aluminum doors and frames with sidelite and active door leaves. 

1. Overhead-concealed, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled, sliding door operator. 

2. Operator housing, floor rollers, and door carriers. 

B. Dimensions: 

1. As indicated on the drawings. 

2.3 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 

A. Doors and Frames: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. 

1. Hydraulic dampers provide 90 degree stop and cushion door upon opening and closing during 

emergency breakout conditions. 

B. Glass: 

1. Glazing Material: ANSI Z97.1. 

2. Active Leaves: 5/8-inch (16-mm) glass insulating units 

3. Sidelites: 5/8-inch (16-mm) glass insulating units 

4. Field-glazed or preglazed. 

C. Door Carriers: 

1. Roller Wheels: 2 steel roller wheels, 1-3/4-inch (44-mm) diameter, per active door leaf for operation 

over replaceable Delrin track. Single journal with sealed oil-impregnated bearings. 

2. 2 self-aligning anti-risers per leaf. 

D. Vertical Jambs: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) by 6 inches (152 mm) for overhead concealed. 

E. Header: 

1. Size: 10-1/16 inches (255 mm) wide by 6-7/8 inches (175 mm) high. 

2. Hinge Point: Allows access for adjustments. 

3. Design: Closed header. 

F. Stiles: Narrow – 2-1/8” 

G. Pivots: Top and bottom concealed pivots, extruded aluminum. 

H. Hardware: Breakaway. 

I. Exterior Glazing Stop Extrusion: Nonremovable, security-type glazing bead to prevent unauthorized entry. 

2.4 SLIDING DOOR OPERATOR 

A. Operator: Unislide Telescopic 

1. Overhead-concealed, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled. 

2. Motor: High-efficiency, energy-efficient, DC motor. 

3. Mechanical drive assembly. 

4. Microprocessor System: Sets opening and closing speeds based on factory-adjusted configuration 

settings. 

5. Mechanical Limit Switches: Not acceptable. 

6. Adjustable Hold Open Time Delay: 0 to 60 seconds. 

7. Software: Incorporates self-diagnosing system. 

2.5 MOTION AND PRESENCE SENSOR CONTROL DEVICE 




A. Model: The Besam UltraView 

1. Uses K-band (24.125GHz) microwave technology to detect motion and focused active infrared 

technology to detect presence, in a single recessed housing within each side of the header. The 

microwave portion shall be used for motion detection for the purpose of door activation, and the 

focused active infrared shall be used for the purpose of presence detection in and around the door 

threshold area. The presence technology shall overlap the motion pattern. 

2. The active infrared is comprised of 96 spots of detection made out of four rows of 24 spots of 

detection each (two rows on each side of the door). The focused presence technology never shuts off 

not even during the closing cycle of the door. 

3. The infrared curtains shall have a self-adaptation time of 30 seconds minimum that will enable the 

sensor to learn permanently changed environments. 

4. The microwave portion of the UltraView will be capable of bi directional, uni directional or both 

sensing capabilities. 

5. The UltraView is a self-monitoring sensor that communicates with the Unislide through a monitoring 

connection. The self-monitoring connection allows the door to go into a failsafe mode in the event of a 

sensor or monitoring failure. 

6. Operating temperature range of –30 o F to 131 o F. 

B. Adjustments: 

1. Adjustments by remote control or manually by push button. 

2. LED indications to aid in the positioning of the infrared curtain. Proper LED indication shall signify 

compliance to applicable ANSI standard. 

2.6 ELECTRICAL 

A. High-Efficiency DC Motor: Maximum of 3 A current draw. Allow for 5 operators to run on one 20 A line. 

B. Power: Self-detecting line voltage capable control. 120 V through 240V, 50/60 Hz, 3 A incoming power with 

solid-earth ground connection for each door system. 5 door systems on one 20 A circuit. 

C. Wiring: Separate channel raceway free from moving parts. 

D. Brown out/high voltage capability: System has capability to operate at full performance well beyond brown 

out and high line voltage conditions (85V – 265V) sensing changes and adjusting automatically. 

E. Convenience Battery: Shall be concealed in header and capable of full operation with blackout conditions, 

including sensor capabilities for typically 100 cycles. 

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. Anodized: Clear, AA-C22A31. 



A. Examine and measure areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect 

installation or subsequent utilization of doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions 

are corrected. 


A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance. 




B. Ensure proper support has been provided at operator header. 

C. Ensure floor is level and smooth. 


A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10. 

B. Install doors and beam plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack. 

C. Anchor frames securely in place. 

D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved by Architect. 

E. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position. 

F. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect. 

G. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect. 


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 

1. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of doors. 

2. Before placing doors in operation, AAADM certified technician shall inspect and approve doors for 

compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10. Certified technician shall be approved by manufacturer. 

3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust doors for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10. 

3.6 CLEANING 

A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glass or finish. 


A. Protect installed doors and finish to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors and finish will be without 

damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. 





SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes commercial double-hung aluminum windows. 

B. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements for aluminum windows, including those 

specified to be factory glazed. 


A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, 

based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are of 

minimum test size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the following, including 

wind loads based on passing AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load Structural Test, at basic wind 

speed indicated: 

1. Deflection: Based on passing AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load Deflection Test or on 

glass framing system designed to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of 

glass-edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less, at design pressure based on structural 

computations. 

2. Basic Wind Speed: 95 miles per hour (43 meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade. 

Determine wind loads and resulting design pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE 7, 

"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," Section 6.4.2, "Analytic 

Procedure"; based on mean roof heights above grade as indicated on Drawings. 

C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than 0.15 CFM/ft (2.74 cu m/h per m) of area for an inward test 

pressure of 6.24 LBF/sf (299 P) when tested according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Air Infiltration 

Test. 

D. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/NWWDA referenced test methods at a water 

test pressure equaling 15% of the design pressure when tested according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, 

Water Resistance Test. 

E. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Level 10 requirements when tested according to 

ASTM F 588. 

F. Condensation-Resistance Factor: Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according 

to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45, where windows are indicated to be "thermally improved." 

G. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window U-value maximum 0.69 

BTU/sf at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested 

according to AAMA 1503. 

H. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of, 

determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. 

I. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal 

movements of units resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface 

temperatures without buckling, distortion, opening of joints, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads and 

ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 1



stresses on glazing and connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on 

actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material 

surfaces. 

J. Specific Product Performance Requirements: Comply with Section 2.2 of AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 as 

applicable to types of aluminum windows indicated. 


A. Product Data: For each type of aluminum window indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other Work, and 

operational clearances. 

1. Include structural analysis data indicating structural test pressures and design pressures from basic 

wind speeds indicated and deflection limitations of glass framing systems, signed and sealed by 

the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

C. Samples: For each exposed finish. 

D. Maintenance data. 


A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. 

B. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, "Voluntary Specifications for 

Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of performance, 

materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA's 

"Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace 

aluminum windows that fail in materials and workmanship within three years from date of Substantial 

Completion. 

B. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

C. Warranty Period for Glass: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Basis of Design: 

1. Provia, Model 261. 

2.2 GLAZING 

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide 1” insulated dual glazing, double strength. 





A. General: Fabricate aluminum windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with requirements and that meet 

or exceed AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 performance requirements for the following window type and 

performance class. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. 

1. Double-hung: Commercial. 

B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. 

C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. 

D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. 

E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water penetration. 

F. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors 

for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for 

movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide 

mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. 

G. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions 

indicated but not less than 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and 

weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. 

Provide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window units. 

H. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing 

system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. 

2.4 FINISHES 

A. Aluminum Anodic Finish: Class I, color anodic coating complying with AAMA 611. 

1. Color: To match existing windows. 



A. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, 

anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent 

construction. 

B. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. 

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating 

within windows to the exterior. 

D. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or 

electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in 

"Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 

E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction 

operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry 

surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. 




If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 

F. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and 

finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 

G. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written 

recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. 

H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during 

construction period. 





SECTION 08711 - DOOR HARDWARE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Commercial door hardware. 

2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include details of electrified door hardware and wiring diagrams. 


D. Door Hardware Schedule: Organized into door hardware sets indicating type, style, function, size, label, 

hand, manufacturer, fasteners, location, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description of 

each electrified door hardware function, including sequence of operation. 

E. Keying Schedule: Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks. 

F. Product certificates. 


A. Supplier Qualifications: Person who is or employs a qualified DHI Architectural Hardware Consultant. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door 

hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical modifications, 

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, are acceptable. 

C. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference decisions into 

final keying schedule. 

D. Keys: Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail. 

E. Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory 

prepared for installing door hardware. 

F. Standards: Comply with BHMA A156 series standards, Grade 1. 

G. Certified Products: Provide door hardware that is listed in BHMA directory of certified products. 

1.4 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace 

components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period for Locks: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. 

2. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. 

DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 1



3. Warranty Period for Concealed Floor Closers: Five (5) years from date of Substantial 

Completion. 



A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product named for each door hardware 

item indicated in Door Hardware Sets. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Product named for each door hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets 

establishes the basis of design. Provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the 

manufacturers specified for each type of hardware item. 

2.2 DOOR HARDWARE 

A. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to door hardware sets indicated in door 

and frame schedule. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated. 

2.3 PIVOTS AND HINGES 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. Hinges: 

a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 

b. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI). 

e. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). 

f. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). 

g. Mont-Hard Corporation; Div. of Fanal, SA (MH). 

h. PBB, Inc. (PBB). 

i. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 

j. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 

2. Pivots and Pivot Hinges 

a. DORMA Door Controls Inc.; Member of The DORMA Group (DC). 

c. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). 

d. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 

e. Markar Products, Inc. (MP). 

f. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). 

g. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTD). 

h. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). 

i. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 

j. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 

3. Continuous Geared Hinges: 

a. Markar Products, Inc. (MP). 

b. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). 

c. Select Products Limited (SPL). 

d. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). 

B. General: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, 

provide only template-produced units. 

C. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 

1. Interior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 

2. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 

D. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that prevents removal of pin while door is closed; 

for outswinging corridor doors with locks. 




E. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; screw heads finished to match surface of hinges. 

1. Metal Doors and Frames: Machine screws (drilled and tapped holes). 

2. Wood Doors and Frames: Wood screws. 

3. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Threaded-to-the-head wood screws. 

2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES 


1. Accurate Lock and Hardware Co. (ALH). 

2. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH). 

3. Arrow Architectural Hardware; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (AAH). 

4. Best Lock Corporation (BLC). 

5. Brink, R. R. Locking Systems, Inc. (RRB). 

6. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). 

7. Door Controls International (DCI). 

8. Folger Adam Security Inc. (FAS). 

9. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 

10. Ives, H. B. (IVS). 

11. Lockwood Architectural Hardware; Div. of Lloyd Matheson Inc. (LAH). 

12. Marks USA (MKS). 

13. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). 

14. Medeco High Security Locks, Inc. (MED). 

15. NT Falcon Lock Co.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTF). 

16. PDQ Manufacturing Co. (PDQ). 

17. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

18. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 

19. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). 

20. Security Door Controls (SDC). 

21. Simplex; Div. of UNICAN (SIM). 

22. Southern Steel Co.; Div. of Phelps-Tointon Inc. (SS). 

23. Weiser Lock; Div. of Masco Building Products Corporation (WEI). 

24. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL). 

B. Bored Lockset Design: As scheduled. 

C. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. 

D. Lock Throw: Comply with labeled fire door requirements. 

E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 

2.5 BOLTS 

A. Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with labeled fire door requirements. 

B. Surface Bolts: Flush bolt heads of minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) diameter rods of brass, bronze, or 

stainless steel with minimum 12-inch- (305-mm-) long rod. 

1. Manufacturers: 

a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 

b. Door Controls International (DCI). 

c. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 

d. Ives, H. B. (IVS). 

e. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ). 

f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 




C. Flush Bolts: BHMA Grade 1, designed for mortising into door edge. 


a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 

b. Door Controls International (DCI). 

c. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 

d. Ives, H. B. (IVS). 

e. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ). 

f. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). 

g. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

h. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 

2.6 EXIT DEVICES 


1. American Device Manufacturing Company; Member of The DORMA Group (ADM). 

2. Arrow Architectural Hardware; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (AAH). 

3. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). 

4. Door Controls International (DCI). 

5. DynaLock Corp. (DLC). 

6. Locknetics Security Engineering; a Harrow Company (LSE). 

7. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTD). 

8. NT Monarch Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTM). 

9. Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH). 

10. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 

11. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD). 

12. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL). 

B. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. 

C. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire and panic protection, 

based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252 

1. Outside Trim: Lever; material, finish, and design to match locksets and latchsets, unless 

otherwise indicated. 

2. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors. 

2.7 CLOSERS 

A. Surface-Mounted Closers: 


a. Arrow Architectural Hardware; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (AAH). 

b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). 

c. DORMA Door Controls Inc.; Member of The DORMA Group (DC). 

d. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 

e. Norton Door Controls; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (NDC). 


g. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 

h. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL). 

B. Flush Floor Plates: Finish cover plates for floor closers, unless thresholds are indicated. Match door 

hardware finish. 

C. Recessed Floor Plates: Provide insert of floor finish material for floor closers, unless thresholds are 

indicated. Provide extended closer spindle to accommodate thickness of floor finish. 




D. Size of Units: Factory-sized, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 

2.8 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS 

A. Protective Trim Units: Sized 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch (13 

mm) less than door width on pull side, by height scheduled or indicated. Fasten with exposed machine or 

self-tapping screws. 

1. Material: Metal. 

a. Manufacturers: 

1) American Floor Products Co., Inc. (AFP). 

2) Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. (AAS). 

3) Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 

4) Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 

5) Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). 

6) IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc. (IPC). 

7) Ives, H. B. (IVS). 

8) NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ). 

9) Pawling Corporation (PAW). 

10) Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

11) Wilkinson Company, Inc. (WIL). 

2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS 

A. Stops and Holders: Provide floor stops for doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or 

indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not 

appropriate, provide overhead holders. 


a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH). 

b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 

c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 

d. Door Controls International (DCI). 

e. DORMA Door Controls Inc.; Member of The DORMA Group (DC). 

f. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 

g. Hanchett Entry Systems, Inc. (HES). 

h. Ives, H. B. (IVS). 

i. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). 

j. Norton Door Controls; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (NDC). 

k. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTD). 

l. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ). 

m. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX). 

n. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 

o. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 

p. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL). 

B. Silencers for Door Frames: Neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 

2.10 DOOR GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS 

A. Door Gasketing: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, 

or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for 

exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 


a. Gasketing: 

1) National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). 

2) Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 

3) Sealeze Corporation (SEL). 




4) Ultra Industries; a Macklanburg-Duncan Company (ULT). 

5) Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). 

b. Door Bottoms: 

1) National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). 

2) Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 

3) Sealeze Corporation (SEL). 

4) Ultra Industries; a Macklanburg-Duncan Company (ULT). 

5) Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). 

2. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for 

gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. 

3. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled, 

based on testing according to UL 1784. 

4. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, based 

on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252. 

5. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled, based on testing according to 

ASTM E 1408. 

6. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. 

B. Thresholds: Of type scheduled or indicated. 


b. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). 

c. NT Dor-O-Matic Hardware Div.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTD). 

e. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 


g. Ultra Industries; a Macklanburg-Duncan Company (ULT). 

h. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO). 

2.11 CYLINDERS, KEYING, AND STRIKES 

A. Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 


a. Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. 

b. ABLOY High Security Locks; Div. of ASSA ABLOY, Inc. (ABL). 

c. Arrow Architectural Hardware; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (AAH). 

d. ASSA High Security Locks; Div. of ASSA ABLOY, Inc. (ASA). 

e. Best Lock Corporation (BLC). 

f. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). 

g. Lockwood Architectural Hardware; Div. of Lloyd Matheson Inc. (LAH). 

h. Marks USA (MKS). 

i. Medeco High Security Locks, Inc. (MED). 

j. NT Falcon Lock Co.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTF). 

k. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 

l. Schlage Lock Company; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). 

m. Weiser Lock; a Masco Building Products Corporation (WEI). 

n. Yale Security Inc.; Div. of Williams Holdings (YAL). 

2. Number of Pins: [Five] [Six] [Seven]. 

3. High-Security Grade: BHMA Grade 1A, listed and labeled as complying with UL 437 (Suffix A). 

4. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; [interchangeable] 

[removable] cores. 

5. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction 

keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. 

6. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 

10 construction master keys. 

a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores, as [indicated in keying schedule] 

[directed by Owner]. 




b. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. 

B. Keying System: Factory-registered keying system; [no master] [master] [grand master] [great-grand 

master] key system. 

1. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys permanently inscribed with a visual key control number and 

"DO NOT DUPLICATE" notation. In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide three 

change keys and five [master] [grand master] [great-grand master] keys. 

C. Key Control System: Include key-holding hooks, labels, key tags with self-locking key holders, 

envelopes, and markers. Contain system in [multiple-drawer] [wall-mounted] [portable] type metal 

cabinet with baked-enamel finish. Include cross-index system set up by key control manufacturer, with 

[card index] [computer software]. 


a. Key Control Systems, Inc. (KCS). 

b. Major Metalfab Co. (MM). 

c. Sargent Manufacturing Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (SGT). 

d. Sunroc Corporation (SUN). 

D. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip 

extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set. 


A. Base Metals: Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units 

and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials if different from 

specified standard. 

B. Fasteners: Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless 

otherwise indicated. Provide steel machine or wood screws or steel through bolts for fire-rated 

applications. 

C. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. 

D. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for 

Wood Doors." 

E. Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18. 



A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door 

assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. Examine 

roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before 

electrified door hardware installation. 

B. Steel Door and Frame Preparation: Comply with DHI A115 series. Drill and tap doors and frames for 

surface-applied hardware according to SDI 107. 

C. Wood Door Preparation: Comply with DHI A115-W series. 

D. Mounting Heights: Comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise indicated: 




1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware 

for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 

2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for 

Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 

3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood 

Flush Doors." 

E. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and 

countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors 

according to industry standards. 

1. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with 

requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 

F. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to 

comply with accessibility requirements. 

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that from an open position of 70 deg rees, the door will 

take at least three seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the 

leading edge of the door. 


A. Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform 

inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 





SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 

2. Tile backing panels. 

3. Non-load-bearing steel framing. 



B. Samples: For each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide 

materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by 

an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials 

and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified 

according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply 

for product selection: 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated 

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 

2.2 STEEL FRAMING 

A. Steel Framing, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 

1. Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements. 

a. Protective Coating: 

1) Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc 

coating. 

B. Partition and Soffit Framing: 

1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 

2. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges. 

3. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum 

board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness 

indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 

a. Available Products: 

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 1



1) Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 

2) Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track 

4. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) 

5. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2inch- 

(12.7-mm-) wide flange, and in depth indicated. 

a. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-) thick, 

galvanized steel. 

6. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 


7. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2inch- 

(12.7-mm-) wide flange, and in depth indicated. 

a. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel 

thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 

8. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and 

other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 

2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS 

A. Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each 

area and correspond with support system indicated. 

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 

1. Regular Type: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. 

2. Type X: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. 

C. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regulartype 

gypsum board, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply on ceiling surfaces. 

D. Proprietary Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to produce greater 

resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels, with core type 

and in thickness indicated, and with long edges tapered. 


a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Wallboard. 

b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels. 

E. Tile Backing Panels: 

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M, with core type and in thickness 

indicated. 

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 

2. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 

3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 

4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 




C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with 

other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim 

accessories, and fasteners, use setting-type taping compound. 

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable 

topping compounds. 

2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer. 

3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and 


B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 

0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel 

manufacturer. 


3.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. 


1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and 

wall. 

2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, 

except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over 

frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to 

provide support for gypsum board. 

3. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable 

written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb 

anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to 

jamb studs. 

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof 

structure above. 

4. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless 

otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door 

heads. 

3.2 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION 

A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 




1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications. 

2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c. 

3. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent 

possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 

4. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically, unless otherwise indicated or required by 

fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. 

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. 

5. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 

6. Laminating to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations 

and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 

B. Tile Backing Panels: 

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut 

other construction or penetrations. 

2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut 

other construction or penetrations. 

3. Cementitious Backer Unit Application: ANSI A108.11. 

3.3 FINISHING 

A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with 

same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Finishing Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, 

penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces 

for decoration. 

1. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. 

2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for 

tape. 

3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for 

use as exposed soffit board. 

4. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for 

locations indicated: 

1. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim 

flanges where panels are substrate for tile and in concealed areas. 

2. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, 

fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view. 





SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Glazed wall tile. 

2. Porcelain floor tile 

3. Porcelain wall tile, glazed 

4. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations 

of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints. 

C. Samples: 

1. Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. 

2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. 

3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 

1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with 

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for 

each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named. Subject to 

compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the 

other manufacturers specified. 

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS 

A. Available Manufacturers: 

1. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp. 

2. Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc. 

3. Metropolitan Ceramics. 

4. Seneca Tiles, Inc. 

5. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 

6. United States Ceramic Tile Company. 

B. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, 

"Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 

CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1



C. Glazed Wall Tile CT-1: For Color, see “Material Specification Schedule”. Flat tile as follows: 

1. Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm). 

2. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 

3. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges 

4. Finish: Semi-gloss, opaque glaze. 

5. Mounting: Factory back-mounted. 

6. Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's standard 

silicone rubber. 

7. Basis-of-Design Product: Daltile; semi-gloss wall tile; color Misty Meadow (0712). 

D. Unglazed Paver Tile CT-2: For Color, see “Material Specification Schedule”. Flat tile as follows: 

1. Composition: Porcelain 

2. Facial Dimensions: 7-7/8 by 7-7/8 inches (200 by 200 mm). 

3. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 

4. Face: Plain with square edges 

5. For latex-portland cement-mortared and -grouted paver tile, precoat with temporary protective 

coating. 

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Daltile; Porcealto / Graniti; color Verde Alghero (CD07). 

E. Glazed Porcelain Tile CT-3: For Color, see “Material Specification Schedule”. Flat tile as follows: 


2. Facial Dimensions: 13 by 20 inches, 6 by 20 inches. 

3. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 



coating. 

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Daltile; Concrete Connection; color Boulevard Beige (CN90). 

F. Glazed Wall Tile Trim Units: For Color, see “Material Specification Schedule”. Matching 

characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing where applicable. 

1. Base: Coved, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm). 

2. Wainscot Cap: Surface Bullnose, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm). 

3. External Corners: Surface bullnose. 

4. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners except with coved base and cap angle pieces 

designed to fit with stretcher shapes. 

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Thresholds: Fabricate to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, 

limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. 

1. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C 1353 

or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 

a. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 

2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS 


1. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. 

2. Boiardi Products Corporation. 

3. Bostik. 

4. DAP, Inc. 

5. LATICRETE International Inc. 


B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 




1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. 

C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4 

1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry additive to which only water must be added. 

2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. 


D. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3. 

E. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3. 

F. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I. 

G. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated. 

H. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated. 

I. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated. 

1. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. 

2. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. 


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based 

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials. 

B. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color 

or appearance of grout. 



A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or 

silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. 

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tilesetting 

material manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 

D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before 

installing. 

E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout 

from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary 

protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for 

Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods 

indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 




B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA 

installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering 

without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and 

corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible 

surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical 

outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on 

floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in 

each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless 


F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. 

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting 

materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint 

Sealants." 

H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6. 

I. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written 

instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. 

1. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine 

that it is watertight. 

J. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for 

providing 95 percent mortar coverage. 

1. Tile floors in laundries. 

2. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. 

3. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. 

K. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 

1. Paver Tile: [1/4 inch (6.35 mm). 

L. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as 

abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be 

exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish. 

M. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, 

wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. 

N. Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1. 

O. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 

1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 




P. Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's 

written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer 

that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F113. 

1. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. 

2. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout. 

B. Interior floor installation on wood; chemical-resistant, water-cleanable tile-setting and -grouting epoxy; 

TCA F143. 

3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Exterior and interior wall installation over masonry or concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA W202. 



B. Interior wall installation; thin-set mortar; over gypsum board; TCA W243. 



C. Interior wall installation over glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; thin-set mortar TCA W245. 







SECTION 09400 – EPOXY TERRAZZO TILE 

PART 1 – GENERAL 

1.1 DESCRIPTION 

A. Provide all labor, material and equipment necessary to install epoxy terrazzo floor and base tile. 

1.2 QUALITY CRITERIA 

A. Provide Standard: The material is to comply with the following standards and provide the minimum 

results shown. 

1. Abrasion Resistance ASTM F510-93, resistance to abrasion: 100 gram load at 500 cycles, volume 

loss: .0196 ccm 

2. Compressive Strength ASTM D-695: 2,900 to 5,000 psi 

3. Hardness ASTM-D 1706-61: Fritztile binder resin casting “D” hardness, 78 Marble barcol 

hardness, 55-100, depending on pattern type. 

4. Coefficient of Friction Slip resistance, ASTM-D-2047: 0.70 - 0.74 average. 

5. Thermal Expansion ASTM D696-91, Coefficient of linear thermal expansion between – 

30C and 30C, 1.3x10 (-5) 

6. Flame Resistant Properties ASTM - 648 - Critical Radiant Flux, 0.93 watts/cm - Class 1, ASTM- 

E-662-97, Smoke generated, NBS smoke density (smoldering 231.76, flaming 292.05) average 

DMC, ASTM-E-84-98, 

7. Chemical Resistance ASTM F925-97, resistance to chemicals, no change on surface attack, color 

change or swelling. 

8. Oil and Corrosion Resistance Passes MIL-D-3134F 

B. Application Setting Materials and all accessory items are to be materials recommended by the 

manufacturer of tiles. 


A. Shop Drawings; Submit 4 blue prints of Terrazzo work. Shop Drawings are to be drawn to 1/2" = 1'- 0" 

scale or larger and are to show plans for layout work and details of joints and edge conditions. 

B. Samples: Submit 3 samples of each pattern and color of Terrazzo required, not less than 3" x 3". Samples 

are to be reviewed for color, pattern and texture only. 

C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 3 copies of written instructions for recommended periodic 

maintenance of terrazzo. 

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Material is to be delivered to the job site in manufacture's original unopened containers. 

B. Store materials inside, undercover and protected from moisture and edge damage. 

C. Handle all material to prevent damage to edges and corners. 


A. Interior - Do not begin Terrazzo installation until the building has been held to a minimum temperature 

of 70(F.) for 5 full days and the entire quantity of Terrazzo mortar and adhesive has been stored inside 

EPOXY TERRAZZO TILE 09400 - 1



the building for 3 days. A minimum of 70 F. must be maintained throughout the installation period and 

for 2 days after the installation is complete. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 





2.2 EPOXY TERRAZZO TILE 


1. Crossfield Products Corp., Dex-O-Tex Division 

2. Key Resin Company 

3. Fritz Industries Inc. 

B. Raw Material: terrazzo tile to be manufactured of natural stone and glass with a fiberglass reinforced 

resin binding matrix. 

C. Epoxy Terrazzo Tile TT-1: For Color, see “Material Specification Schedule”. As follows: 

1. Facial Dimensions: 11 15/16 by 11 15/16 inches 

2. Thickness: 1/8 inches 


4. Basis-of-Design Product: Fritz Industries Inc., Fritz Green Tile 800 Series, Silver-Gray, Grn-822 

D. Epoxy Terrazzo Tile Base TT-1B: as follows: For Color, see “Material Specification Schedule”. 

1. Facial Dimensions: 11 15/16 by 6 inches 

2. Thickness: 1/8 inches 


4. Basis-of-Design Product: Fritz Industries Inc., Fritz Green Tile 800 Series, Staley Black, Grn-820 

2.3 ADHESIVE 

A. Adhesive to be as recommended for type of installation, substrate, etc. by tile manufacturer. 


3.1 GENERAL PREPARATION 

A. Building temperature of 70(F to have been maintained for 5 days prior to the start of installation and all 

material is to have been acclimatized in the building for 3 days. 

3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION: 

A. Concrete 

1. The concrete or concrete block substrate will have been placed and finished for a minimum of 28 

days prior to beginning installation and must have a smooth, hard finish. 

2. Where concrete does not have a smooth finish, provide self-leveling cementitious topping per the 

tile manufacturer’s recommendations. 




3. All oils, waxes, curing compounds or other materials on the surface of the concrete that will 

inhibit adhesion are to be removed. Surface to be completely dry prior to installation of Terrazzo. 

a. Entire surface is to be examined for soft spots. No flexing or deflection in the surface. 

Replace soft substrate or add additional bracing to eliminate defection. 

3.3 INSTALLATION: GENERAL 

A. All installation to be in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 

B. All cutting of terrazzo to be accomplished with an abrasive or diamond blade in a rotary saw. 

C. All hole or circles to be cut using carbide tipped drill or diamond hole saw. 

D. Control Joints to be installed when crossing expansion joints in substrate. 

E. All installation to be in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 

3.4 INSTALLATION: ADHESIVE 

A. All installation to be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 

B. Do not allow adhesive grout or mortar get on the front side of the Terrazzo Tile. 

3.5 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION 

A. Remove all excess and scrap materials from the job immediately after installation is complete. 

B. Provide Kraft paper covering over traffic areas until completion of project. 

C. Remove any excess adhesive or grout from the Terrazzo immediately after it appears on the surface 





SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes acoustical tiles, perf. mtl. tiles, and concealed suspension systems. 



B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show 


1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 

4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access 

panels, and special moldings. 

C. Samples: For each acoustical tile, for each concealed suspension system member, for each exposed 

molding and trim, and for each color and texture required. 



A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-accredited 

laboratory. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of 

assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings are indicated by design designations 

from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting 

agency. 

a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A 

materials, when tested per ASTM E 84. 

C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: 

1. ASTM E 580. 

2. CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--Seismic 

Zones 0-2." 

3. UBC Standard 25-2. 




1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed, but not fewer 

than 8 tiles. 

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512 - 1



2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal 

to 2.0 percent of quantity installed, but not fewer than 8 linear feet per type. 

3. Perimeter Trim: Quantity equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed, but not fewer than 6 linear 

feet 






2.2 GENERAL 

A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. 

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. 

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct 

Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Anchors in Concrete: Expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes 

or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a 

load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per 

ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting 

agency. 

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc 

coating, soft temper. 

1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, 

"Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69mm-) 

diameter wire. 

E. Seismic struts and seismic clips. 

F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard 

moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated; 

formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension 

system runners. 

2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES 


1. Armstrong World Industries 

2. Chicago Metallic Corp. 

3. USG Corporation 

B. Panel Characteristics: Type III, Form 2, acoustical panels per ASTM E 1264, with acrylic latex finish, 

complying with pattern and other requirements indicated below: 

1. Color/Light Reflectance Coefficient: White/LR 0.83 / 0.81 

2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.60 / 0.50 

3. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: CSTC 20. 

4. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong; Cirrus 24”x48”x3/4 with beveled tegular edges, in 9/16” 

grid. 




2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM 





B. Suspension System Characteristics: Aluminum, 9/16” wide carrying flanges, 1-1/2” depth, painted white 



A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, 

per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite 

edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders. 

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation 

or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fireresistance-rated 

ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, 

countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within 

ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or 

equivalent devices. 

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete 

slabs. 

D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove 

and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 

E. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place 

splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of 

material. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and 

around penetrations through tile. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel 

spacers between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. 





SECTION 09652 - SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes sheet vinyl floor coverings without backings. 



B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230mm) 

sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required. 

1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches (230 mm) 

long, of each color required. 

C. Qualification Data: For Installer. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in 

heat-welding techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified by floor 

covering manufacturer for heat-welding techniques required. 


A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) 

or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 

1. 48 hours before installation. 

2. During installation. 

3. 48 hours after installation. 

B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not 

less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). 

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. 

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. 

E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 




1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction 

thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering 

installed. 

SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652 - 1








2.2 SHEET VINYL PRODUCTS 



2. Azrock Commercial Flooring 

3. Forbo Industries, Inc. 

4. Tarkett Inc. 

B. Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering SV-1: 

1. Composition: Unlayered, Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 0.080 inch (2.0 

mm) thick. 

2. Wear-Layer Thickness: Grade 1. 

3. Overall Thickness: 0.080 in (2.0 mm) 

4. Wearing Surface: Smooth. 

5. Sheet Width: 6 feet (1.8 m). 

6. Seaming Method: Heat welded. 

7. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics 

a. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per 

ASTM E 648. 

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong World Industries; Medintech; Color, Moss 


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended 

hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for 

applications indicated. 

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering and 

substrate conditions indicated. 

C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer. 

1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range to blend with floor covering. 

D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: 

1. Cove Support Strip: wood or plastic with 1-inch (25-mm) radius, provided or approved by floor 

covering manufacturer. 

2. Cap Strip: vinyl, provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor 

coverings. 

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 




1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 

2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with 

installation only after substrates pass testing. 

3. Moisture Testing: 

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only 

after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. 

(1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. 

b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after 

substrates pass testing. 

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and 

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do 

not use solvents. 

D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. 

E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours 

in advance of installation. 

1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be 

installed. 

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 

After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with 

installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. 

B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings as follows: 

1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches 

(152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 

3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 

4. Avoid cross seams. 

C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and builtin 

furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. 

D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating 

on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. 

F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a 

completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of 

adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 

G. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently 

fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush 

with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 

H. Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 6 inches (152 mm) up vertical surfaces. Support floor 

coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. 




I. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 

2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 

3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. 

a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 

J. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations 

and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection 

methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 





SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Wall base. 



B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 

12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 



or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 






C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 





thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 






2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE: ASTM F 1861 


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 


3. Johnsonite 

4. Roppe Corporation 

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1



B. Wall Base: B-1 

1. Type (Material Requirement): thermoplastic rubber 

2. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid). 

3. Style: Cove (with top-set toe) 

4. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 

5. Height: 6 inches (152 mm) 

6. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. 

7. Outside Corners: Premolded. 

8. Inside Corners: Premolded. 

9. Surface: Smooth. 

10. Basis of Design Product: Johnsonite, color, Pewter (#38) 

C. Wall Base: B-2 

1. Type (Material Requirement): thermoplastic rubber 

2. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid). 

3. Style: Cove (with top-set toe) 

4. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 

5. Height: 4 inches (152 mm) 

6. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. 

7. Outside Corners: Premolded. 

8. Inside Corners: Premolded. 

9. Surface: Smooth. 

10. Basis of Design Product: Johnsonite, color, Pewter (#38) 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient 

products. 

B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain 

soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use 

solvents. 

C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. 

D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 

hours in advance of installation. 

1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to 

be installed. 

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 



3.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION 

A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent 

fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 

B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces 

aligned. 




C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact 

with horizontal and vertical substrates. 

D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. 

E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with 

manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 

F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. 


A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. 

a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations 







SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Synthetic textile wall covering. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Samples: For each type of wall covering and for each color, texture, and pattern required. 

C. Maintenance data. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following fire-testresponse 

characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to 

substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: 

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 

2. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings complying with acceptance criteria of 

UBC Standard 8-2. 

3. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings tested according to NFPA 265 and complying 

with Method A test protocol in IBC 2000, Section 803.5.1. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that 

are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Rolls of Wall-Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type 

installed. 






2.2 WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS 


1. Len-Tex Corporation 


3. Mannington Mills, Inc. 

WALL COVERINGS 09720 - 1




B. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or dye lot. 

C. Textile Wall Covering, WC-1: 

1. Wall-Covering Standard: Provide mildew-resistant wall coverings that comply with FS CCC-W- 

408D and CFFA-W-101 for Type II, Medium-Duty products. 

2. Colorfastness to Wet and Dry Crocking: Passes AATCC 8, Class 3, minimum. 

3. Colorfastness to Light: Passes AATCC 16A or AATCC 16E, Class 4, minimum, at 40 hours. 

4. Total Weight Excluding Coatings: 19.5 oz. 

5. Width: 54” 

6. Repeat: Random. 

7. Applied Backing Material: Type II - non-woven (Cellulose and Polyester). 

8. Stain-Resistance: Passes ASTM F93 

9. Basis of Design Product: Surface IQ by Len-Tex Corporation; Colors, Textures, and Patterns: 

Urbana, Celery, env 1028-ur. 

2.3 ACCESSORIES 

A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and 

substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. 

B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Division 9 Section 

“Painting” and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate. 

C. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. 



A. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound 

coatings, cracks, and defects. 

1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units 

when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 

2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. 

3. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal primer. 

4. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall-covering manufacturer. 

5. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with 

fine sandpaper. 

B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar 

items. 

C. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less 

than 24 hours before installation. 


A. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. 

B. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. 

C. Install reversing every other strip. 




D. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. 

E. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75 mm) 6 

inches (150 mm) from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal 

seams are permitted. 

F. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. 

G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any 

overlay or spacing between strips. 





SECTION 09912 - PAINTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and 

surfaces. 



B. Samples: For each type of finish-coat material indicated. 


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient 

temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign 

materials and residue. 

B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are 

between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). 

C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are 


D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at 

temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 


A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities 

described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing 

contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 

1. Quantity: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and 

color applied. 





B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' 

names are used in other Part 2 articles: 

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 

2. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 

3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 

PAINTING 09912 - 1



2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with 

one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as 


B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types 

specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paintmaterial 

containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 

C. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 

2.3 PREPARATORY COATS 

A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat manufacturer and 

recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 

B. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in 

writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 

1. Ferrous-Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust-inhibitive metal primer. 

2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 

3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, 

use paint specified for finish coat. 

C. Interior Primer: Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in 


1. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive metal primer. 


3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, 

use paint specified for finish coat. 

2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS 

A. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex 

Paint. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series. 

2.5 INTERIOR FINISH COATS 

A. Low-VOC Interior Latex Acrylic Paint: 

1. Benjamin Moore; ECO-SPEC Interior Paint. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; PURE PERFORMANCE Interior Paint. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; GREENSURE Harmony Line Interior Paint. 

B. Interior Flat Latex-Emulsion Size: 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series. 

C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31W200 Series. 

PAINTING 09912 - 2



D. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel No. M28. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-8534 SpeedHide Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss Enamels. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21W201. 

2.6 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES 

A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: 

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; none required. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler. 

B. Interior Waterborne Clear Gloss Varnish: Acrylic-based polyurethane. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes High Gloss No. 428. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-45 Rez Full-Gloss Acrylic Clear Polyurethane. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Gloss, A68 Series. 

C. Paste Wax: As recommended by manufacturer. 


3.1 APPLICATION 

A. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for inspection and acceptance of surfaces to be painted. 

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of 

the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish 

materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 

C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar 

items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size 

or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers 

skilled in the trades involved. 

D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written 

instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 

2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. 

Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, 

use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and 

sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. 

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other 

recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and 

imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, 

undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. 

c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. 

d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall 

construction occurs on back side. 

e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or 

sealer immediately on delivery. 

PAINTING 09912 - 3



4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; 

remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical 

cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. 

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is 

free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal 

fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 

E. Material Preparation: 

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign 


2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during 

application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain 

material before using. 

F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, 

covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as 

required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 

1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. 

Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or 

furniture with prime coat only. 

2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers 

or grilles. 

3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 

4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 

5. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 

G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 

H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise 

prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 

1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 

2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats 

until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 

I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according 

to manufacturer's written instructions. 

J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended 

spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. 

K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed 

in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. 

L. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with 

pores filled. 

M. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to 

material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat 

primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to 

ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 

N. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque 

surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush 

marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 

PAINTING 09912 - 4



O. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. 

Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or 

other surface imperfections. 

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from 

Project site. 

B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct 

damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. 

C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, 

remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 

Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 

3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): 

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 

a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. 

b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. 

B. Concrete Unit Masonry: 

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. 

a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. 


C. Ferrous Metal: 

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. 

a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer (not required on shop-primed items). 

b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals. 

D. Zinc-Coated Metal: 

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. 

a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. 


E. Aluminum: 

1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 

a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes. 


3.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): 


a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer. 

b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 





PAINTING 09912 - 5



C. Gypsum Board: 


a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. 

b. Finish Coats: Interior Low-VOC Latex Acrylic Paint. 

D. Plaster: 


a. Primer: Interior plaster primer. 


E. Wood and Hardboard: 


a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel finishes. 


F. Ferrous Metal: 


a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. 

b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel. 

G. Zinc-Coated Metal: 


a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. 


H. All-Service Jacket over Insulation: 

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. 

a. Finish Coats: Interior flat latex-emulsion size. 

3.5 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE 

A. Natural-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of varnish over a sealer coat. 

1. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. 

2. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. 

3. Finish Coats: waterborne clear gloss varnish. 

B. Wax-Polished Finish: Three finish coats of paste wax over a sealer coat. 

1. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. 

2. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. 

3. Finish Coats: Paste wax. 


PAINTING 09912 - 6



SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Toilet and bath accessories. 

2. Underlavatory guards. 



B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each 

accessory required. Use room and product designations indicated on Drawings. 

1.3 WARRANTY 

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within 15 years from date of Substantial 

Completion. 



A. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for toilet and bath accessories described in Part 2 are based on 

products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a 

comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: 

a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 

b. American Specialties, Inc. 

c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 

d. Bradley Corporation. 

2. Underlavatory Guards: 

a. Truebro, Inc. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal 

thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), or ASTM B 30 castings. 

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M, 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness. 

D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180). 

E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). 

F. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating. 

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1



G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, 

electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411. 

H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 

I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant 

when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. 

J. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide 

minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 

2.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 

A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties Inc.; Model 9030 

2. Type: Double-roll dispenser. 

3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage. 

4. Material: Stainless steel. 

5. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle 

6. Capacity: Designed for two 5-inch- (127-mm-) diameter-core tissue rolls. 

B. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties Inc.; Model 0467-9 

2. Type: Recess Mounted 

3. Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels 

4. Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 6 gal. (22.7 L). 

5. Accessories: tumbler locksets. 

C. Liquid-Soap Dispenser: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties Inc.; Model 0347 

2. Mounting: Surface. 

3. Capacity: 40 Fl. Oz. 

4. Materials: Stainless Steel 

5. Stainless-Steel Soap Valve: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form. 

6. Lockset: Tumbler type. 

7. Refill Indicator: Window type. 

D. Grab Bars: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties Inc.; 3100 Series 

2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. 

3. Mounting: Concealed. 

4. Gripping Surfaces: Slip-resistant texture. 

5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for medium-duty applications. 

E. Mirror Unit: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: American Specialties Inc,:Model 0600 

2. Frame: 18 gauge stainless-steel angle. 

3. Size: 24”x36” 

F. Underlavatory Guard: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Truebro; Lav-Shield 






A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit 

manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 

1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according 

to method in ASTM F 446. 

B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. 

Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. 





SECTION 12484 - FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Roll-up aluminum-tread rail hinged floor mats. 

2. Surface-mount aluminum frame for mats. 




1. Verify recesses and openings in substrates by field measurements before fabrication and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. 

C. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm) square assembled sections of floor mats, frame members, and tread rails 

with selected tread surface showing each type of metal finish and color of exposed floor mats, tread rails, 

frames, and accessories required. 



A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility 

Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)", ICC A117.1 and requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 






2.2 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 


1. AFCO-USA. 

2. Construction Specialties, Inc. 

3. Pawling Corporation. 

4. Reese Enterprises, Inc. 

B. Roll-up Aluminum Rail Hinged Mats: Extruded-aluminum tread rails sitting on continuous vinyl 

cushions. 

1. Aluminum Finish: Clear Anodic; Class I complying with AAMA 611. 

2. Hinge Material: Thermoplastic Rubber. 

3. Tread Rail Modules: 2 inch (50 mm) wide by 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick. 

FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484 - 1



4. Treads: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) high, 28-oz./sq. yd. (950-g/sq. m) weight, level-cut, nylon-pile, fusionbonded 

carpet inserts; Color: Charcoal. 

5. Basis of Design Product: Reese; Perfec Mat; Model 536A; Frame 544 

C. Surface-mounted Aluminum Frames: Extruded aluminum, ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6061- 

T6 or alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52. 

1. Anchored to floor with screws per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

2. Handicap accessible design (no greater than ½” height, with max slope of 6/12. 

3. Clear Anodic Finish: Class I complying with AAMA 611. 


A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to the greatest extent possible. 

1. If not otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed 

manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and 

cleaning. 

2. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. 

3. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units 

without joints. 

B. Surface-mounted Aluminum Frames: Size and style to fit floor mat type specified, for permanent 

recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices. 

1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum 

available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced 

and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins. 

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with 

manufacturer's standard protective coating. 



A. Install mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. For installation in terrazzo flooring areas, provide allowance for grinding and polishing of 

terrazzo without grinding surface of recessed frames. Coordinate with other trades as required. 

2. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure attachment of 

frames. 

B. Protection: After completing frame installation, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in 

recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain until Substantial Completion. 


FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484 - 2



SECTION 12494 - ROLLER SHADES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes window valences. 



B. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required. 

C. Maintenance data. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's 

products. 






2.2 ROLLER SHADES 


1. Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc. 

2. Hunter Douglas Window Fashions 

3. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc., Graber 

4. VIMCO 

B. Finishes: 

1. Shade Band Material: Basis of Design Product: Phifer Sheerweave 

2. Valance: Color as selected from manufacturer's full range. 

3. Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: Color as selected from manufacturer's full 

range. 

C. Shade Band Material: PVC-coated fiberglass and polyester blends. 

1. Material Width: 72 inches (1830 mm). 

2. Material Solar Optical Properties: Shading Coeffient of .45 

3. Material Openness Factor: 10 percent. 

4. Material UV Blockage: 90 percent. 

D. Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall 

thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight and width 

of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets. 

ROLLER SHADES 12494 - 1



1. Shade Material Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade material to 

roller. 

2. Direction of Roll: Reverse, from front of roller. 

E. Mounting Brackets: Fascia end caps, fabricated from steel finished to match fascia or headbox. 

F. Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; continuous 

panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators; 

removable design for access. 

G. Top/Back Cover: L shaped; material and finish to match fascia; combining with fascia and end caps to 

form a six-sided headbox enclosure sized to fit shade roller and operating hardware inside. 

H. Pocket-Style Headbox: U-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or 

rolled; with bottom cover consisting of slot opening of minimum dimension to allow lowering and raising 

of shade and removable or openable, continuous metal access panel concealing shade roller, brackets, 

and operating hardware and operators within. 

I. Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum with plastic or metal capped ends and with concealed weight 

bar as required for smooth, properly balanced shade operation. 

1. Type: Concealed, by pocket of shade material, internal. 

J. Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous loop bead chain lift operator. 

1. Pull: Manufacturer's standard hand grip engaged pull. 

2. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. 

3. Bead Chain: Nickel-plated metal. 

4. Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at any position in ascending or descending travel. 

K. Valance: In style as selected from manufacturer's full range. 

L. Mounting: Inside permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging roller shade or adjacent 

surfaces and finishes. 


A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of roller, a means of supporting roller, flexible sheet or 

band of material carried by roller, a means of attaching material to roller, bottom bar, and operating 

mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade. 

B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 

1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts. 

C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 

deg F (23 deg C): 

1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) from 

face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed. 

2. Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between 

shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations 

between openings. 

D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting fascia, 

roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated. 




E. Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to 

shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and 

supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use. 



A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Allow clearances for window operation hardware. 

1. Location: Shade band positioned not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. 

B. Adjusting: Adjust roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction 

throughout entire operational range. 

C. Cleaning: Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 




LOBBY AND OFFICE ALTERATIONS NJ2-16 

SECTION 15000 – BASIC METHODS AND MATERIALS 



A. The specification section "General Conditions", "Supplemental Conditions” and “Division I” sections form a 

part of this section and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. The work in this Division of the specifications covers all items specified or illustrated on the project drawings 

under the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) or mechanical contract work, and every part 

herein is binding upon this Contractor. 

B. Those responsible for work covered by other sections of the specifications will be indicated by trade, such as, 

"Others", "Electrical Contractor". All items not so indicated shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. 

Gas-piping, oil piping, rough-ins, cutting and patching, concrete work, Structural Work, Control System 

work, Painting, General Construction including but not limited to ceiling, walls, Carpentry, etc. is to be done 

by this contractor or his sub-contractors. 

C. The work shown is intended to include a complete and proper work boiler system for the existing building 

and new controls for boilers, associated equipment, combustion louver dampers, fuel oil system, unit heaters; 

all as shown on plans and as specified herein. All labor, equipment, materials, and accessories for a complete 

and proper installation as hereinafter specified, or as shown on drawings, or as may be required for a proper 

system shall be furnished under this Contract. The drawings indicate diagrammatically the extent general 

character, and location of the work included. Work indicated but having minor details omitted shall be 

provided without extra cost and shall be accomplished within the stipulated time. 


A. Materials and Equipment: All materials and equipment installed by this contractor shall be new, and the best 

of their kind, and shall conform to the grade, quality and standards specified herein. No substitution or 

deviation from the materials and equipment specified herein will be allowed except by written permission of 

the Engineer. All materials and equipment offered under these specifications shall be limited to products 

regularly produced and recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended. This materials and 

equipment shall have capacities and ratings sufficient to amply meet the project requirements. The capacities 

and ratings shall not be in excess of those published by the manufacturer, but must be in accordance with 

engineering data made available by to the public by the manufacturer and in effect at the time of bid opening. 

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products, materials, size and 

capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) 

years. 

C. This Contractor must comply with all laws, ordinances, or regulations of all Authorities having jurisdiction, 

borough, city, county, state or public utility. 

D. Nothing contained in these specifications or shown on the drawings shall be construed to be in conflict with 

any state or local codes, ordinances or regulations governing the installation of the class of work specified 

herein. 

The Minimum Standard of Work under this Contract shall be as required by The State of New Jersey 

Department of Labor and Industry, Boiler Division and the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and 

Air Conditioning Engineers, and the Department of General Services. All laws, ordinances, rules, codes and 

regulations, including those of the Department of Environmental Resources, Department of Public Welfare, 

BASIC METHODS AND MATERIALS 15000 - 1



Department of Education Corrections, Department of Labor and Industry, the National Fire Protection 

Association, ASME, OSHA, SMACNA, ASHRAE, NEC, BOCA, ICC and all public bodies (Federal, State 

and/or local) are hereby incorporated and made a part of these specifications. 

All materials must be installed by skilled mechanics in accordance with best practices of the industry. 

THIS CONTRACTOR MUST CONFER AND COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH THAT OF ALL THE 

OTHER CONTRACTORS SO THAT THE WORK OF ALL THE TRADES WILL BE PERFORMED IN 

AN ORDERLY MANNER AND WITH THE LEAST POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE. IN CASE 

INTERFERENCE WITH THE WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTORS SHOULD OCCUR, THE DECISION 

OF THE PROFESSIONAL AS TO CHANGES TO BE MADE IN THE WORK SHALL BE FINAL. 

CODE AND GUIDELINE REFERENCES 

Contractor shall visit site and verify existing conditions prior to starting work or fabrication. Perform work in 

accordance with latest adopted codes, regulations and ordinances by authorities having jurisdiction. Latest 

editions of any referred standards shall govern. Observe all safety regulations. This contractor is responsible 

for coordinating installation of all equipment indicated and specified, including coordination of the 

installation requirements for any equipment of alternate manufacture. 

Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, tests and inspections required by state, local and Federal agencies 

having jurisdiction. The contractor is also responsible for all construction health and safety. Owner will pay 

charges and fees for gas service installation work provided by the Gas Company. 

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are 

referred to in the text by basic designation only. 

1. AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI) 

2. 

a. ARI 350 Sound Rating of Non-Ducted Indoor Air-Conditioning 

Equipment 

b. ARI 410 (1987) Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating 

Coils 

c. ARI 440 (1989) Room Fan-Coil Air-Conditioners 

d. ARI 445 (1987) Room Air-Induction Units 

e. ARI 880 (1989) Standard for Air Terminals 

f. ARI Guideline D (1987) Application and Installation Central Station Air- 

Handling Units 

3. a. AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION (AMCA) 

a. AMCA 210 (1985) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating 

b. AMCA 300 (1985; Rev 1987) Reverberant Room Methods for Sound 

Testing of Fans 

c. AMCA 500 (1989) Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and 

Shutters 




AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 

a. ANSI S1.32 (1980; R 1986) Precision Methods for the Determination 

of Sound Power Levels of Discrete-Frequency and 

Narrow-Band Noise Sources in Reverberation Rooms 

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 

ASTM A 47 (1984; R 1989) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings 

b. ASTM A 53 (1989a) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated 

Welded and Seamless 

c. ASTM A 123 (1989a) Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and 

Steel Products 

d. ASTM A 167 (1989a) Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel 

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip 

e. ASTM A 181 (1987) Forgings, Carbon Steel, for General-Purpose 

Piping 

f. ASTM A 183 (1983) Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts 

g. ASTM A 193 (1989) Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials 

for High-Temperature Service 

h. ASTM A 234 (1989a) Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and 

Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures 

i. ASTM A 525 (1987) Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the 

Hot-Dip Process 

j. ASTM A 536 (1984) Ductile Iron Castings 

k. ASTM A 733 (1989) Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and 

Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples 

l. ASTM B 62 (1986) Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings 

m. ASTM B 75 (1986) Seamless Copper Tube 

n. ASTM B 88 (1989) Seamless Copper Water Tube 

o. ASTM C 107 (1989) Panel Spalling Testing High-Duty Fireclay Brick 

p. ASTM B 117 (1990) Salt Spray (Fog) Testing 

q. ASTM B 650 (1985) Electrodeposited Engineering Chromium 

Coatings of Ferrous Substrates 

r. ASTM C 1071 (1986) Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fiber, 

Duct Lining Material) 

s. ASTM D 1654 (1979a; R 1984) Evaluation of Painted or Coated 




Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments 

t. ASTM D 3359 (1987) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test 

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 

ENGINEERS(ASHRAE) 

ASHRAE 15 (1992) Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration 

ASHRAE 52 (1976) Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation 

for Removing Particulate Matter 

ASHRAE 62 (1989) Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality 

ASHRAE 68 (1986) Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound 

Power Measurement Procedures for Fans 

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME) 

ASME-16 1989; Addenda 1989, 1990) Boiler and Pressure Vessel 

Code; Section VIII, Pressure Vessels Division 1 - Basic 

Coverage 

ASME-17 (1989; Addenda 1989, 1990) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; 

Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications 

ASME B1.20.1 (1983) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch) 

ASME B16.3 (1985) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300 

ASME B16.5 (1988; Errata) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 

ASME B16.9 (1986) Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings 

ASME B16.11 (1980) Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded 

ASME B16.18 (1984) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 

ASME B16.21 (1978) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges 

ASME B16.22 (1989) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure 

Fittings 

ASME B16.26 (1988) Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes 

ASME B16.39 (1986) Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions (Class 150, 250, 

and 300) 

ASME B31.1 (1989) Power Piping 

ASME B40.1 (1985) Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element 

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) 

AWWA (1987) Grooved and Shouldered Joints 




AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) 

AWS D1. (1990) Structural Welding Code – Steel 

ANTI-FRICTION BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AFBMA) 

AFBMA 9 (1990) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings 

AFBMA 11 (1990) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings 

COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID) 

CID A-A-1419 (Rev A) Filter Element, Air-Conditioning, (Viscous-Impingement 

and Dry Types Replaceable) 

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS 

INDUSTRY (MSS) 

MSS SP-25 (1978; R 1988) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, 

Flanges and Unions 

MSS SP-58 (1988) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and 

Manufacture 

MSS SP-69 (1983) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application 

MSS SP-70 (1990) Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 

MSS SP-71 (1990) Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded 

Ends 

MSS SP-80 (1987) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves 

MSS SP-85 (1985) Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves - Flanged and 

Threaded Ends 

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) 

NEMA MG1 (1987; Rev 1) Motors and Generators 

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 

NFPA 70 (1990) National Electrical Code 

NFPA 90A (1989) Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 

NATIONAL AIR DUCT CLEANERS ASSOCIATION (NADCA) 

NADCA Attachment #2 - Whole specification and requirements on HVAC system cleaning. 

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION 

(SMACNA) 

SMACNA-05 (1986; 3rd Ed) Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation 

Guide for HVAC Systems 




SMACNA-06 (1985; 1st Ed) HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and 

Flexible 

SMACNA-10 (1985; 1st Ed) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual 

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) 

UL-01 (1991) Building Materials Directory 

UL-03 (1990; Supple) Electrical Construction Materials Directory 

UL-05 (1991) Fire Resistance Directory 

UL 94 (Jan 24, 1980; 3rd Ed; Rev thru Mar 19, 1990) Tests for 

Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and 

Appliances 

UL 181 (Apr 6, 1990; 7th Ed; Rev Nov 20, 1990) Factory-Made 

Air Ducts and Connectors 

UL 214 (Apr 30, 1976; 4th Ed; Errata) Tests for Flame- 

Propagation of Fabrics and Films 

UL 555 (Jan 30, 1990; 4th Ed; Rev Jan 31, 1990) Fire Dampers 

UL 586 (Oct 18, 1990; 7th Ed) High-Efficiency, Particulate, Air 

Filter Units 

UL 883 (Nov 12, 1986; 6th Ed; Rev thru Feb 15, 1989; Errata 

Apr 24, 1989) Fan-Coil Units and Room Fan-Heater 

Units 

UL 900 (Jan 29, 1987; 5th Ed; Rev Mar 28, 1988) Test Performance of 

Air Filter Units 

1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 

A. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be performed. However, it is not 

intended that they show every pipe fitting or appurtenance required for a complete installation. Exact 

locations of equipment and points of termination shall be approved by the Professional. Should it be found 

that any system or equipment cannot be installed as shown on the drawings the Professional shall be consulted 

before installing or making changes to the layout. 

B. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories 

that may be required. This Contractor shall carefully examine the Architectural, Structural, Heating, 

Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, Electrical, and other Project Documents that would affect the 

work to be performed and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and 

accessories to meet such conditions. If any discrepancies occur between the drawings or between the 

drawings and specifications, he shall report such discrepancies to the Professional in writing and obtain 

written instructions as to the manner in which to proceed. No departures from the Project Documents shall be 

made without prior written acceptance of the Professional. 

C. The drawings and specifications are intended to function as a common set of documents. Anything shown on 

the drawings but not in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, 

shall be equally binding as if both noted on the drawings and called for in the specifications. 




D. The drawings must be followed as closely as circumstances will permit. However, this Contractor will be held 

responsible for the proper installation of all materials and equipment required for a complete installation 

within the intent and meaning of the Contract Documents. 

E. This Contractor must thoroughly familiarize himself with the specifications so that he clearly understands his 

responsibility in relationship to the work to be performed under this Contract. This Contractor must perform 

and plan his work without disturbing the use of the building. 

F. No measurement of a drawing by scale shall be used as a working dimension. Working measurements shall be 

taken from figured dimensions and through cooperation with all other Contractors. 


A. The term "Project Manager" refers to the authorized representative of the Housing Authority. 

B. The term "State" means the State of New Jersey. 

C. The term "Contractor" or "this Contractor", refers to the Contractor or any of his subcontractors, subsubcontractors, 

materials persons, company(ies), corporation(s), partnership(s), sole proprietorships and 

others, et al, responsible for work described in this DIVISION and/or on the project drawings. 

D. The term "drawings" refers to the drawings which show the character and scope of the work to be performed 

and which are prepared by the Engineer, referred to in the Contract Documents, and enumerated in the 

Supplemental General Conditions. 

E. "Finished Area" shall be defined as any space with the wall either tiled, plastered, covered or painted except 

certain concrete or concrete block foundation walls below grade. Vertical piping running through finished 

areas must be run in chases. Where there are ceilings in finished areas, all piping and conduit shall be 

concealed above the ceilings unless indicated "at ceiling" in which case piping shall be exposed below 

ceilings. Areas shall be considered finished areas where bottoms of floor or roof slabs serve as finished 

ceilings. 

F. The term "furnish", when used separately, shall mean to "obtain and deliver on the job, for installation by the 

indicated Trade Contractor". 

G. The terms "he, him, his" is a reference to a person or business with no gender intended. 

H. The term "install", when used separately, shall mean to "install in full operating condition equipment supplied 

to this Contractor by other Trade Contractors". 

The term "project documents" refers to the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Contract, 

Technical Specifications, Standard Drawings, Drawings, and any and all other components enumerated in the 

"General Conditions", "Supplemental Conditions” and/or bound herein. 

The term "provide" shall mean to "furnish and install". 

"Unfinished areas" shall be defined as any space without a wall finish (with or without ceilings). 

1. Where in doubt as to the classification of a specific space, the Contractor shall obtain written direction 

from the Professional before roughing-in. 


A. Provide duplicate printed instructions upon completion of the installation. The instructions shall contain 

detailed operating instructions, locations of control valves and diagrams of control wiring and piping so 




arranged that a maintenance staff may easily trace the control in case of operating troubles. Each piping 

system shall be identified and control and isolating valves shall be tagged, as specified. 

B. Submit scheme of piping, valves, wiring, and equipment identification codes for approval and provide valves 

and equipment schedules in glass-frames listing numbers, location and function. 

1.9 SITE INSPECTION 

A. Visit site, inspect and become aware of all conditions which may affect work. Investigate utilities, protection 

requirement for adjacent facilities, storage locations, and access to the construction area. Examine conditions 

under which the work is to be executed. Correct all unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the 

work. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the actual survey before proceeding to 

layout the Work. Contractor shall verify all line sizes at tie-in points. 

B. Prior to construction, verify all measurements in the buildings including establishing of heights and grades of 

all lines and the location and invert elevation at points of connection of piping. No extra compensation will be 

allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and measurements and those indicated on the 

drawings. 

1.10 ACCESS 

A. Verify that the equipment and materials to be installed will pass through available openings. The equipment 

can be brought in sections for easy access. Use planking or cribbing as required to protect adjoining 

construction from damage. 

B. Provide adequate access for purpose of rigging equipment. Protect access openings all times against 

vandalism and accidents during the work. 

C. Locate all equipment, valves, devices, panels and controllers which need service in accessible areas. 

1.11 CONNECTIONS AND SHUTDOWNS TO EXISTING WORK 

A. Whenever connections and shutdowns to existing facilities are required, give seven days notice and 

coordinate with Owner and schedule the work to avoid interruption of services during normal working hours. 

Work and connections requiring interruption of services shall be done during unoccupied periods with all 

premium time required including the cost to keep building open, at contractor's cost and with Owner's 

approval. 

1.12 RELOCATION 

A. All existing piping, wiring, fixtures and other equipment and materials that interfere with the new systems 

shall be removed, relocated, rerouted or abandoned. The work requiring removal, relocations, rerouting of 

another contractor's work that is not indicated, shall be performed by mechanics skilled in particular trade 

involved at no additional cost. 

B. Do not remove, unless indicated otherwise, the abandoned piping and similar materials "buried" within 

structure such as walls and floors on grade; but shut-off properly and plug behind finished surfaces. 

C. Restore surfaces after removal of existing mechanical and/or electrical systems or equipment. The work shall 

be the contractor's responsibility and shall be performed by workmen skilled in such work. 


2.1 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP 




A. General 

1. All details of the installation shall be mechanically and electrically correct, and the mechanical and 

electrical equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration. 

2. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label of approval of Underwriters 

Laboratories, Inc. 

B. Materials and Equipment 

1. All materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be new, and shall conform to the grade, 

quality and standards specified herein. Major items of equipment shall be the latest and standard 

product, as advertised in printed catalogs by reputable manufacturers for the purpose intended and 

shall have replacement parts readily available. 

2. All equipment or apparatus of any one system must be the product of one manufacturer, or equivalent 

products of a number of manufacturers which are suitable for use in a unified or assembled system. All 

equipment shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 

3. Mechanical fastenings used throughout on the equipment or parts subject to wear and replacement 

shall be of a type capable of removal and replacement without physical deformation of the equipment. 

4. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts shall be 

fully enclosed or properly guarded. 

C. Workmanship 

1. All manufactured articles, material, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, 

adjusted, cleaned, and conditioned, in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, unless hereinafter 

specified otherwise. This Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining such instructions from the 

suppliers. 

D. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions for type and 

capacity of each piece of equipment. This Contractor shall obtain these instructions from the manufacturer 

and such instructions shall be considered a part of these specifications. Type, capacity and application of 

equipment shall be suitable and capable of satisfactory operation for the purpose intended in the Heating, 

Ventilating and Air Conditioning System. 

2.2 TRADE NAME REFERENCES 

A. Materials and equipment are described and listed in this specification by trade name, manufacturer's type, or 

catalog number. It is intended that this reference shall establish standards of quality, performance, capacity, 

materials and design for the item specified. 

B. Where more than one manufacturer is listed for an item, those mentioned are considered equivalent provided 

that the quality, style, capacities, materials and performance of the specified item are present. All materials 

shall be subject to the review of the Professional. 

C. All other materials specified hereinafter shall be of the manufacturer's catalog number as specified. If the 

Contractor desires to substitute, Contractor must submit catalog cuts of the substituted materials to the 

Professional) sufficiently in advance of the bid date to allow ample time for consideration. A decision will be 

rendered prior to the bid date and an Addendum will be used to notify all Contractors. 




D. All materials considered for this project, including all equipment and components thereof, shall comply with 

ACT 3 OF 1978 - PROVISION FOR USE OF STEEL AND STEEL PRODUCTS (AS AMENDED TO 

INCLUDE CAST IRON). 

2.3 GUARANTEE 

A. This Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship, materials and equipment against defects, leaks or 

non-operation for 5 years from the date of commissioning. Defective workmanship shall be construed as 

meaning defective materials or unsatisfactory installation and not to mean ordinary wear and tear. 

B. This Contractor shall pay for any repairs or replacements caused by defective workmanship as construed 

herein within the period covered by the Guarantee. 


. GENERAL 

A. Contractor shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, all applicable 

codes, and recognized industry practices. 

B. All equipment, valves, traps, strainers and accessories requiring maintenance shall be installed so as to 

preserve adequate space for such service, including but not limited to space to remove tubes, coils, filters, 

strainer baskets and similar items for service, repair or replacement. 

C. After all equipment is installed, it shall be tested to demonstrate proper operation or performance and 

compliance with the specifications. Equipment not operating correctly shall be field corrected or replaced. 

3.2 FAMILIARITY WITH CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 

A. This Contractor's responsibility, prior to submitting his bid on this Project, is to satisfy himself as to the 

nature and location of the work, the existing conditions, and the quality and quantity of the materials which 

will be required, under this Contract. 

B. Failure to make an on-site inspection prior to submitting a bid, or failure to comply with any or all of the 

requirements herein will not relieve this Contractor from the responsibilities of properly estimating the 

requirements of the work nor from the responsibility for the performance of the provisions of this Contract. 

3.3 PERMITS, TESTS, AND INSPECTION 

A. This Contractor shall be responsible to obtain and pay for all permits, pay all deposits and fees necessary for 

the installation, tests and inspection of all work provided under this specification. These tests shall be 

conducted as required by the regulations of the local and/or state authorities, having jurisdiction. The Owner 

shall pay fees for the new gas service, if required, provided by the Gas Company. 

3.4 LOCATIONS 

A. Each Contractor shall apply for detailed and specific information regarding the location and size of all 

equipment, as the final or required location and size may differ from that indicated on the drawings. Any 

material or equipment improperly placed because of the Contractor's failure to obtain this information shall be 

relocated and reinstalled without additional expense to the Owner. 

3.5 LINES AND GRADES 




A. This Contractor shall lay out his work, establishing heights and grades for all exterior and interior piping and 

duct work included in these specifications in strict accordance with the intent of the drawings, the physical 

conditions of the building and the finished site grades. He shall be responsible for the accuracy of such 

heights and grades and that they meet all physical conditions of the building and the requirements of these 

specifications. 

3.6 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE 

A. This Contractor shall disconnect and remove all Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning equipment, 

materials, fixtures and connections to equipment no longer required. All piping shall be removed and capped 

off either below floors, in walls or above ceilings as may be required. (See also, "CUTTING, PATCHING, 

AND REPAIRING", as hereinafter specified.) 

B. All items noted to be reused or reinstalled shall be carefully removed, cleaned and stored in an approved 

manner and shall be reinstalled at the proper time. 

C. The Owner shall be given the opportunity to retain ownership of all removed materials and equipment. All 

such items shall be carefully handled and protected and shall be stored by this Contractor at the site as 

directed by the Owner. Any such materials and equipment not desired by the Owner shall become the 

property of the Contractor and shall be removed promptly from the project site. Disposal shall be in 

accordance with the regulations of the authorities at the disposal site. 

D. Any salvage value for items being removed shall be reflected in the Contractor's Bid Price. 

3.7 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 

A. Chases and Openings (Existing Building): Unless otherwise noted, this Contractor shall cut, patch and finish 

all chases and openings required for the installation (or demolition) of this contract's work in the existing 

building. All patching shall match the adjacent finishes and existing materials. 

1. Any penetrations made in an existing fire rated partition shall be resealed with an approved material 

and method as required to maintain the integrity of the fire separation. 

2. This Contractor shall furnish, install and set all lintels, sleeves, hangers and anchors required for the 

HVAC work and he will be responsible for their proper and permanent location. 

3. Cutting shall not cause damage to the building or leave unsightly surfaces which cannot be concealed 

by plates, escutcheons or other construction. Where such unsightly conditions are caused by this 

Contractor, he shall be required, at his own expense, to engage the General Contractor to repair the 

damaged area. All holes or openings to be put in existing concrete shall be bored. 

4. Materials to be used for patching and repairing will be subject to review by the Professional. 

5. The following specification sections should be references for materials and procedures: 

a. Division 9 – Finishes 

3.8 PRUDENT WORK-PRACTICE AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL 

A. This Contractor, upon request of the Professional shall expedite the work of a specific area, section or part of 

the project to make provision for, or protect equipment, or to permit the installation of another part of the 

work. 

B. Before any piping, conduit, equipment, devices, controls, supports and ductwork are installed, the Contractor 

shall check with other trades to eliminate any possible interference. 




C. Where two items of equipment, devices, piping, conduits, supporting metal work, hangers, pull boxes, outlets, 

ductwork or controls are shown on any of the drawings of the various trades in the same location, adjustments 

shall be made. These adjustments shall be made through cooperation between the trades involved prior to the 

installation of any work. The modifying changes shall be accomplished within the same space assigned for 

such construction and at no additional cost to the Owner. All necessary offsets, bends, turns, modifications in 

piping, ductwork and conduit devices required to install the work without interference with that of other 

trades or structure, shall be provided and installed without additional cost to the Owner. 

D. Where equipment is indicated on the drawings, it shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to install the 

equipment, its control or operational devices, with sufficient space provided for proper operation, 

maintenance, and access. 

E. All equipment, devices, controls, and motors shall be tightly covered and protected during construction and 

up to the time of operation. The protection shall be arranged and be of such design as to prevent damage from 

infiltration of dust, dirt, debris, moisture, chemicals or water. All pipe, duct openings, including electrical 

conduit shall be capped or plugged during installation with temporary dust-tight caps. This Contractor shall 

be responsible for damage or breakage to his fixtures and equipment and shall make good such damaged 

items at no cost to the Owner. 

F. All surfaces, either finished, in preparation for finishing or finish material application, shall be protected 

against damage from welding, cutting, burning, soldering or similar construction activities. This protection 

shall be accomplished by care in operations, covering and shielding. Special care shall be directed to exposed 

finished masonry, metal or wood surfaces, and painted surfaces. Corrective measures required shall be 

accomplished by the trade which made the original installation when and as directed by the Professional at the 

expense of the Contractor causing the damage, and at no cost to the Owner. The protective coverings and 

coatings shall be maintained until the work is ready for acceptance by the Owner. 

G. All exposed polished metal fittings, parts and devices, shall have a protective coating applied and maintained 

during the course of construction, and shall not be installed until adjoining tile or masonry work has been 

finally acid cleaned. 

H. Install temporary filters in all air handling equipment and temporary screens at all strainers or similar cleaning 

devices in the installation. At the completion of the work and just prior to acceptance of the system by the 

Professional, remove the temporary screens and filters and install new and final screens and filters. The 

temporary screens shall be given to the Agency at the time of replacement. 

I. Provide suitable permanent safety guards for all pulleys, belt drives, centrifugal equipment and rotating parts, 

of the various items of equipment provided under this Contract. Requirements of New Jersey Department of 

Labor & Industry and OSHA shall be met. 

J. The guards and safety devices not noted on the drawings but required by regulations or agencies having 

jurisdiction shall be included as part of the project requirements. 

3.9 INSTALLATION PROVISIONS 

A. Install all equipment, piping and ducts so as to preserve access to all valves and accessories. In general, 

piping and ducts shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated on the plans, but when exposed they shall be 

run so as to allow maximum head room consistent with proper pitch. Piping and ducts shall not be installed in 

front of or interfere with any light, opening, door, window or equipment. Headroom in front of openings, 

doors or windows shall not be less than the top of the opening. 

B. All piping, valves, ductwork, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work to permit a 

clearance of not less than 1" between the finished covering and all adjacent work. 

C. All equipment, valves, traps, strainers and accessories requiring maintenance shall be installed so as to 

preserve adequate space for such service, including, but not limited to, space to remove tubes, coils, filters, 





D. Where required to allow clearance for ducts, electrical conduits, beams, and piping and to avoid interference 

with work of other trades, to increase the headroom under pipes or ducts or to improve appearance of the pipe 

work or ducts this Contractor shall offset the pipes or ducts as directed by the Professional and properly drain 

and drip same where necessary. He shall provide the necessary special pipe fittings or duct fittings to secure 

the necessary offsets and maintain good liquid and gas flow. 

E. Pipes carrying liquids or liquid vapors shall not be installed in transformer vaults or electrical equipment 

rooms. Pipes shall not be installed over, around, in front of, in back of, or below electrical controls, panels, 

switches, terminals, boxes or similar electrical equipment. Drip pans will not be permitted under any 

circumstances around electrical equipment. 

3.10 PROTECTION OF SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT 

A. This Contractor, at his own expense, shall repair, replace and maintain in service any utilities, facilities or 

services (underground, overground, interior or exterior) damaged, broken, or otherwise rendered inoperative 

during the course of construction due to fault or neglect on the part of this Contractor. 

B. This Contractor shall effectually protect, at his own expense, such of his work, materials or equipment as 

liable to injury during the construction period. All openings into any piping, ducts or equipment must be 

securely covered, or otherwise protected, to prevent injury, due to carelessly or maliciously dropped tools or 

materials, grit, dirt, or any foreign matter. This Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage so done 

until his work is fully and finally accepted. 

C. This Contractor shall protect motors, pumps, electrical equipment, and all similar items of equipment from 

dirt, grime, plaster and water during all phases of construction. 

INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES 

This Contractor shall schedule his work to avoid any major interruption of any utility services. Interruption of 

services shall be done during overtime if necessary at no additional cost to the Owner. 

This Contractor shall notify the Professional twenty-one (21) working days prior to any interruption of 

services. All interruption of services shall be submitted in advance to and approved in writing by the 

Professional before disruption of services is executed. 

CONNECTIONS 

The points of connections and termination of the work under this specification are shown on the drawings or 

stated in the specifications, but in case of doubt as to such points of connections or terminations, the 

Contractor shall notify the Professional in writing requesting a review. 

EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN EXPOSED MASONRY 

Where equipment, devices, access panels, radiation enclosure, grilles, registers, and similar items of 

mechanical construction are installed in exposed masonry construction, utilize and submit for review items of 

such size, height, and arrangement as to conform to the corresponding masonry unit. Provide the necessary 

offsets, adjustments and relocations necessary to conform to the instructions of the Professional as to the final 

location of the equipment item in the exposed masonry. 

FIELD MEASUREMENTS 

Before ordering any material or doing any work, this Contractor shall verify all measurements at the building 

and he shall be held responsible for the correctness of same. 




No extra compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and 

measurements and those indicated on the drawings. 

Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Professional for consideration before 

proceeding with the work. 

CHANGES FROM CONTRACT DRAWINGS 

Changes from the contract drawings necessary to make the work of this Contractor conform to the building as 

constructed, or to fit the work of other contractors, or to conform to the rules and/or regulations of authorities 

having jurisdiction, shall be made by this Contractor at his own expense. 

SUBMITTALS 

General: Unless otherwise specified, this Contractor shall submit to the Professional for review the minimum 

number of copies of shop drawings as stated in the DIV-1, Section 01340 certificates, reports, detailed 

fabrication drawings, engineering data or catalog information as required by the following list, and of any 

other items of mechanically operated equipment. Contractor's stamp must be issued on submittal prior to 

sending to the Professional for review. 

Product Data and shop drawings shall be submitted for the following: Also refer to other DIV-15 sections. 

Electrical equipment 

Power factor correction devices 

Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manual 

Valve charts and identification 

Pressure reducing valves 

Relief/safety valves 

Valves and strainers 

Gauges and thermometers 

Expansion joints and guides 

Piping 

Insulation schedule 

Inserts and fasteners 

Fire stop materials 

Combustion/O2/CO2 Tests 

Fuel gauges and meters 


Pipe-insulation 

Wiring Diagrams 

Automatic Temperature Controls 

Control Sequences 

Control Diagrams 

Complete System Diagram (showing all network controllers, mcp, 

sensors, unit panels, etc.) 

Balancing Report 

1. All items or materials not mentioned above, which are substitutes, alternates, or on the accepted 

manufacturer's list shall be submitted in the form of shop drawings for review by the Professional. 

2. When shop drawings are submitted on equipment different from the equipment specified, this 

Contractor shall relate each item of the submitted equipment to its specified equivalent. 

3. Prior to submission to the Professional, this Contractor shall review the submission for completeness 

and conformance to the project documents. Submittal data shall note the applicable specification 

section, page(s), and paragraph number(s). Each submittal shall bear the Contractor's approval stamp 




indicating that the submittal meets the requirements of the project documents. Submittals not 

conforming to the previous will be considered in conflict with the project documents and returned to 

the Contractor rejected without further review. 

4. See also, Heading "TRADE NAME REFERENCES" - specified in paragraph 2.2. 

Samples 

1. At the request of the Owner or the Professional, samples of items that are to be used in substitution of 

specified items shall be submitted. If such a request is made, a sample of both the specified item and 

the proposed substitute item shall be submitted simultaneously. The scheduling of the submission of 

such samples shall be as directed and shall in no way delay the progress of the project. 

D. Neither the Owner nor the Professional will assume any liability whatsoever for any samples submitted. 

TEMPORARY HEATING 

General. The heating system is to be operational at all times during the heating season. 

CLEAN-UP 

This Contractor shall daily remove all waste and debris resulting from his work. This Contractor shall 

immediately remove water present in any area, resulting from leaking fittings, broken pipes, etc., or caused by 

defective materials or improper installation performed under this contract. 

Contractor is responsible for maintaining heat. 

Upon completion of his work and when directed by the Professional, this Contractor shall remove all dirt, 

foreign materials, stains and fingerprints from all equipment, fixtures, panels, plates etc., installed under this 

contract. Internal areas of all equipment must be cleaned of all construction dust etc., prior to pre-final and/or 

final inspection. 

COVERING THE WORK 

No piping shall be covered until it has been inspected, tested and accepted. 

By the contract, if any piping is covered before it has been inspected and tested, and accepted by the Owner's 

Authorized Representative, it shall be uncovered by the Contractor at his own expense when so notified by 

the Professional. 

ROUGH 

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual 

equipment to be connect. SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT 

The manufacturers of the various equipment such as pump, burner, etc. shall completely service their 

equipment and put it into actual operation. This shall be done after all steam, electrical, air, fuel and other 

connections are made complete and at such times as decided by Owner’s inspector. 

The manufacturer or his authorized agent shall be responsible for the lubrication, direction of rotation, speed, 

settings and delivered capacity. He shall also check the current characteristics of connected wiring, 

alignment, strainers, valves, etc., that may affect the general operation of his equipment. 

At the beginning and at the interval of three months of each heating season for the duration of Guarantee 

period specified in section 01010, the contractor shall lubricate and check all of their equipment, and instruct 

the building custodian in its operation and maintenance. Submit a letter signed by the custodian and the 




manufacturer’s instructors, qualifying that such instructions have been completed, to the Construction 

Department. 

INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL 

General 

1. After acceptance of the work by the Professional, this Contractor shall instruct personnel selected by 

the Owner in the operation and maintenance of each of equipment and appliances installed under this 

Contract. 

Scope 

Deliverables 

These instructions shall include, but not be limited to, instruction in the following items: 

a. Location and use of all valves, dampers and sensors. 

Operation and Maintenance Schedules of All Terminal Equipment 

Operation of Automatic Temperature Control 

Start-up, operational and shut-down procedures including seasonal and emergency considerations. 

Warranties: What they cover and how to use them. 

Maintenance: routine, periodic, service, lubrication, overhaul and factory. 

A minimum of six (6) sets of all parts lists and instruction sheets received with any equipment or 

appliance shall be bound in standard 3-ring binders, indexed and turned over to the Professional for 

review and delivery to the Professional. 

2. Approximately 30 days after acceptance of the building, on dates set by the Professional, 

representatives of the temperature control installation, HVAC equipment installation and of the 

Electrical Contractor shall be present at the site. They shall thoroughly review with the Agency staff 

and supervising personnel the operation of all the equipment furnished and/or installed under this 

contract, along with the maintenance of the same. 

3. Minimum training and instruction shall be provided along with printed handouts as follows for items 

listed under "B. Scope 1.": 

a. Item a,b,c,d,e,f,g, and h. 

b. Four (4) hours training sessions for a cumulative total of sixteen (16) hours. 

c. Four (4) hours follow-up approximately 9 months after acceptance of systems by the Owner. 

This Contractor shall keep accurately dimensioned records of changes and deviations from the original 

Contract Drawings, including precise locations of underground or concealed work and the location and 

elevation of all utility lines, including valves, connections and changes in directions, installed under this 

Contract within the property lines and outside the building walls, and for all concealed utility lines within the 

building. The points where utility lines leave the property shall be located from building corners. 

Recordings shall be made by ruled lines on a separate set of prints maintained at the job site for that purpose. 

When detailed drawings are more effective, attach them to the marked set of record drawings. Recording shall 

be made immediately after the work is completed and not less often than weekly. 

The marked-up record set of drawings shall be delivered to the Professional before final acceptance of the 

project. 




AS BUILT DRAWINGS 

This Contractor shall produce AUTO-CAD TM AS-BUILT-DRAWINGS in 3/8 inch per foot scale as per 

Section 01330 with all deviations and dimensions in paragraph 3.21 above. 





SECTION 15010 – HVAC ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING 

REQUIREMENTS 



A. Extent of electrical provisions to be provided as mechanical work is indicated in drawings and is further 

specified in this section. 

B. Types of work, normally recognized as electrical but provided as mechanical, specified or partially 

specified in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 

1. Electrical basic materials and methods for 

2. Raceways 

3. Wires and Cables 

4. Electrical Boxes and Fittings 

5. Disconnect Switches 

6. Control Devices 

7. Supporting Devices 

8. Electrical Identification 

C. Control wiring integral between components within control panels, between control panels, between 

control panel(s) and field-installed electrical components and electro-mechanical equipment; and between 

field-installed controls and field and indicating devices. Control wiring shall include interlock wiring 

between electrically operated equipment and between equipment and field-installed control devices. 

Include supply of control transformers, wherever necessary. 

D. Electrical Contractor will provide power wiring to all new control panels, equipment including but not 

limited to pumps, unit heaters, and pressure booster. This contractor shall provide power and control 

wiring necessary to equipment and/or panel other than indicated, and shall include starters and required 

electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed by the manufacturer. 

E. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components including integral part of 

packaged mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to factory installed 

motors and starters furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. 

F. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment 

are specified on schedule and within the individual equipment specification sections. 

G. All motor control equipment and wiring shall meet the requirements of the NEC, and shall comply with 

the requirements of the PECO Energy furnishing service and with the rules and regulations of all 


H. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY VOLTAGE AT SITE BEFORE ORDERING ANY 

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 


A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators 

B. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code. 

C. NEMA Standard ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies 

HVAC ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 1



D. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 

E. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches 


A. UL Label: Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled. Comply with UL 50, "Electrical 

Cabinets and Boxes", for boxes over 100 cubic inches volume. Provide raceway products and 

components listed and labeled by UL, ETL, or CSA. 

B. NEC requirements: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of 

electrical products and components. Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National 

Electrical Code." 

C. NEMA standards: Comply with NEMA standards as applicable to raceways, electrical products and 

components. Comply with NEMA Standard 250 for enclosures and NEMA ICS 6 for Industrial Controls 

and Systems. 

D. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing and Labeling (NRTL): Junction boxes and cabinets 

shall be listed and labeled by a NRTL. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 

1910.7. 

E. ANSI Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A13.1, with regard to type and size of 

lettering for raceway and cable labels. 

F. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards pertaining to electrical raceway 

systems. Provide wires and cables which are listed and labeled by UL under the following standards. 

1. UL Std. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. 

2. UL Std. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper 

Conductors. 

G. IEEE Compliance: Provide wires and cables which comply with Std. 82-Test procedures for Impulse 

Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors. 


A. Product Data: Submit product data with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as 

required by the individual equipment specification sections. Show junction or pull box types, dimensions, 

and finishes. Submit schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and 

labels. Submit manufacturer's data including current specifications, installation instructions and general 

recommendations, for the following electrical equipment and materials. Submit product data for: 

1. Disconnect switches. 

2. Wires and cables. 

3. Supporting devices. 

4. Raceways. 

5. Electrical identification materials. 

B. Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance manuals for motors and starters. Include field test 

reports. 





2.1 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION 

A. This Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment, labor, coordination and other related appurtenances 

required for the installation of power factor correction devices at all equipment supplied under his contract. 

Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning equipment requiring power factor correction devices shall be 

furnished and installed with the same as hereinafter specified. Power factor correction devices (including 

means and methods) shall be included as part of their respective equipment submittal, materials, wiring, 

diagrams, shop drawings, and catalog cuts for review by the Professional. 

B. Devices shall be furnished and installed to ensure a minimum power factor of 90% over the full operating 

range of the equipment. Equipment requiring power factor correction devices are: 

2.2 ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 

A. RACEWAYS 

1. Provide electrical raceways of types, grades, sizes, weights (wall thicknesses), and number of 

channels for each type of service indicated. Provide complete assembly of raceway including, but 

not necessarily limited to, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, 

end caps, and other components and accessories as needed for complete system. Where types and 

grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring 

requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for electrical raceways. 

2. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid steel conduit shall be full weight, heavy-wall steel pipe with a zinc 

protective coating conforming to the latest edition of Federal Specification WW-C-058l and ANSI 

C80.1. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws. Use bodies with 

threaded hubs for threaded raceways. For conduit Bodies 1 Inch and Smaller, use bodies with 

compression-type EMT connectors. Republic, Allied, Anaconda, Wheatland or Triangle will be 

acceptable. 

3. Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: Fittings and couplings for rigid steel conduit shall be threaded steel 

or malleable iron conforming to the latest edition of Federal Specification W-F-408 and shall be 

cadmium- or zinc-coated. Compression-type threadless fittings and set-screw-type fittings are not 

permitted. Thomas & Betts Company, Pyle-National or Crouse-Hinds form 7 will be acceptable. 

4. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit UL 360; construct 

of single-strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel; galvanize inside and 

outside; coat with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 

5. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G. 

2.3 WIRE, CABLE AND CONNECTORS 

A. Provide electrical wires, cables, and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by 

published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a 

complete installation, and for application indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide copper 

conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 deg C (68 deg F). 

B. Manufacturers for (1) wires and cables can be American Insulated Wire Corp., Brintec Corp., Carol 

Cable Co. Inc., Senator Wire and Cable Co., or Southwire Company; and (2) connectors for wires and 

cable conductors can be AMP, 3M Company, O-Z/Gedney Co., or Square D Company. 

C. Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where required. Provide solid 

conductors for power circuits no. 10 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for sizes no. 8 AWG and 




larger. Provide copper material for all wires and cables. 

D. Cables: Provide the following type(s) of cables in NEC approved locations and applications where 

required. Provide nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM and NMC, UL listed. 

E. Building Wire: Provide factory-fabricated, 600-volt, color-coded copper wires of sizes and types 

indicated for services of 600 volts or less. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection from the 

following UL types: 

1. Type THW: For dry and wet locations 

2. Type THWN: For dry and wet locations 

3. Type THHN: For dry locations only 

F. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum size wire used shall be No. 12 AWG. All wires up to and 

including No. 10 shall be solid, and all wires larger than No. 10 shall be stranded. 

G. Connectors for conductors: Provide UL-listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, 

ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes as determined by Installer to comply with installation 

requirements of NEMA and NEC standards. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater 

than those of the wires upon which used. 

2.4 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 

A. Manufacturers for boxes and fittings per UL 514B shall be of Adalet-PLM., Killark Electric Mfg. Co. or 

equal. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. Use corrosion resistant screws and hardware 

including cadmium and zinc plated items. For damp or wet locations, use stainless steel screws and 

hardware. Use malleable iron or zinc plated steel for conduit hubs, bushings and box connecters. 

B. Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch 

capacities, and sizes, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with 

mounting holes, and with cable and conduit-size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes 

with threaded screw holes, with corrosion-resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and 

device-type box covers, and for equipment-type grounding. 

C. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including box 

supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps 

and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and 

fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's codecompliance 

option. 

D. Rain-tight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal rain-tight outlet wiring boxes, of types, 

shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, 

and cast-metal face places with spring-hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each application, 

including face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant plugs and fasteners. 

E. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screwon 

covers; of types, shapes and sizes to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams 

and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. 

F. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant box knockout closures, conduit 

locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes to suit respective 

installation requirements and applications. 

2.5 CONTROL DEVICES 




A. Provide factory-fabricated control devices and accessories, in types, colors, and electrical ratings for 

applications indicated. 

B. Pushbutton Control Stations: Provide pushbutton control stations where shown to shut off boilers in 

emergencies. The pushbutton control stations shall be mushroom-type momentary contact pushbuttons 

with 1-5/8" diameter red buttons and stainless steel plates. The pushbutton control stations shall be rated 

for 120 volt AC. Provide pushbutton control stations with cast aluminum boxes for surface mounting. 

The pushbutton control stations shall be as manufactured by ASCO, catalog no. 173A20. 

2.6 SUPPORTING DEVICES 

A. Provide supporting devices complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in 

accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein 

specified. Where more than one type of devices meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's 

option. Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating. Products for use 

outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized. 

B. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for 

sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel 

sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, 

and cap screws. 

C. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and 

insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number 

and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleableiron 

casting with hot-dip galvanized finish 

D. Fabricated supporting devices shall be shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports 

assembled from U-channel components. Steel Brackets to be fabricated of angles, channels, and other 

standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. Provide pipe 

sleeves from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 

2.7 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 

A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required 

for each application. They shall be Identification labeling for cables and conductors; operational 

instruction signs; warning and caution signs; and equipment labels and signs. Manufacturers shall be 

Seton Name Plate Co., Standard Signs, Inc., or W.H. Brady Co. or equal. 

B. Cable/Conductor Identification Bands: Provide manufacturer's standard aluminum wrap-around 

cable/conductor markers, of size required for proper application, and numbered to show circuit 

identification, or provide manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive cable/conductor markers of 

wrap-around type; either pre-numbered plastic-coated type to show circuit identification. 

C. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate signs, complying 

with FS L-P-387, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of 

sizes and wording indicated, black and white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched 

for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. 

1. Thickness: 1/16", for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" length; 1/8" for larger units. 

2. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where 

screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. 

3. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical 

identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide 





numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by 

manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical 

systems and equipment. 


A. Locations: Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and installation 

conditions. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs. 

B. Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes required. 

C. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel. 

D. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes, and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes a grounding 

conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box or enclosure. 

E. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS 

A. Install electrical raceways where indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, 

applicable requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation", complying with recognized 

industry practices. 

B. Unless otherwise specified in this section, provide rigid steel conduit for all wiring. 

C. Where practical, install conduit concealed. 

D. Underground conduit runs shall be installed at least 30" below grade. Underground conduit installed 

under pavement (parking lot) shall be backfilled with granular fill to a point 5 feet beyond pavement. 

E. Level and square raceway runs, and install at proper elevations/heights. 

F. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within raceways 

G. Install exposed raceway runs parallel to and at right angles to building lines and install all horizontal runs 

close to ceiling or ceiling beams and above water, steam or other piping, wherever possible. 

H. Install liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and for other electrical equipment for up to 3 

feet length where subject to movement and vibration. 

I. Limit the use of flexible conduit to 4 feet or less for each connection. 

J. Conduit runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet, from outlet to 

cabinets, pull boxes or junction boxes, etc., and shall maintain ground continuity. 

K. Ground raceway system according to NEC. 

L. Cap or plug all conduits left empty. 

M. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and 

construction debris. 




3.3 INSTALLATION OF WIRE AND CABLE 

A. Install electrical cables, wires and connectors as required, in compliance with applicable requirements of 

NEC and NEMA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. 

Coordinate cable installation with other Work. 

B. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. 

C. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary. Compound used must not deteriorate 

conductor or insulation. 

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not 

damage cables or raceway. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable. 

E. Keep conductor splices to minimum. 

F. Install splices and tapes which possess equivalent-or-better mechanical strength and insulation ratings 

than conductors being spliced. 

G. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material. 

H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with 

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not 

indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A. 

I. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal 

points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than no.10 AWG cabled in 

individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal. 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 

A. Install electrical box and fittings where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, 

applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with 

recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. 

B. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. 

C. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. 

D. Install electrical boxes and conduit bodies in those locations to ensure ready accessibility of electrical 

wiring. 

E. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in 

difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surfaces. 

F. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly 

embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. 

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL DEVICES 

A. Install control devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable 

requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry 

practices to fulfill project requirements. 

B. Install all pushbutton control stations at 54 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 




3.6 INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 

A. Install over-current protective devices as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written 

instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with 

requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. 

3.7 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES 

A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure that supporting devices comply with 

requirements. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. 

Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation. Comply with 

requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA for installation of supporting devices. 

B. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support conduit-piping properly from building 

structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on 

trapeze-type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings indicated. 

C. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. 

3.8 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 

A. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work 

with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as required 

by code. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and 

requirements of NEC. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install 

identification after completion of finish work. Comply with governing regulations and requests of 

governing authorities for identification of electrical work. 

B. Cable/Conductor Identification: Apply cable/conductor identification including circuit number on each 

cable and conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or 

communication/signal system are present, except where another form of identification (such as colorcoded 

conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in shop drawings, 

contract documents, and similar previously established identification for project electrical work. 

C. Identification of Connection Boxes: Provide Code-required caution signs which shall be pressuresensitive, 

self-adhesive labels, indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange background. 

Install on outside of box cover. Also label box covers with identity of contained circuits. Use pressuresensitive 

plastic labels at exposed locations and similar labels or plasticized card stock tags at concealed 

boxes. 

D. Installation of equipment/system circuit/device identification: Apply equipment identification labels of 

engraved plastic-laminate on each major unit of electrical equipment in building, including central or 

master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is 

specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line 

of text, with 1/2-inch-high lettering on 1-1/2-inch-high label (2-inch-high where two lines are required), 

white lettering in black field. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents 

and shop drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment. 

1. Pushbutton stations. 

2. Remote-controlled switches. 

3. Transformers. 

4. Contactors. 

5. Control devices.Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for 

breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution 




and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling 

is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit 

description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. 

E. Install signs and labels at locations required and at locations for best convenience of viewing without 

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use 

adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate the substrate. 

F. Application of warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils: Install warning, caution, or 

instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe 

operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Install engraved 

plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed 

for system or equipment operation. 

3.9 SLEEVES AND OTHER PENETRATIONS OF BUILDING SURFACES 

A. All conduit or other penetrations through fire resistant rated walls, partitions or slabs shall have entire 

opening sealed tightly around conduit using approved methods, in accordance with National Electrical Code 

Section 300-21.1 Sealing materials shall be either 3M “Fire Barrier”, or Nelson “Flameseal” systems. 

B. All sleeves in exposed areas shall be covered with escutcheon plates. Brush chrome for finished areas; 

prime-painted steel for unfinished areas. 

3.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING 

A. Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod depth so 4 inches will 

extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide a No. 

1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in 

manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressuresensitive 

tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor 

opening with waterproof, non shrink grout. 

B. Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as inserts, cable racks, pulling 

irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. 

Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper conductor. Train 

conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable 

shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. 

C. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve. For 

additional information, see Section 15194. 

D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building’s 

main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect 

grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a 

dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal 

grounding conductor or sleeve to conductor at each end. 


A. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation 

resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for 

electrical continuity and for short-circuits. 




B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper functioning. Correct 

malfunctioning units, and retest to demonstrate compliance. 

3.12 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR 

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and 

repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions and weld marks. 

B. Galvanized Finish: Repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the tray manufacturer. 

C. Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating. 





SECTION 15060 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment. 


A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry. 

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 


A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined 

weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 

B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined 

weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 

C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. 

D. Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers and supports 

for piping and equipment. 


A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger 

shield insert indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and 

trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and 

fabrication details. 

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators. 


A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: 

Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple 

pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer. 

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice 

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services 

of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of 

hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and 

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 - 1



extent. 





B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 

1. Pipe Hangers: 

a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. 

b. Grinnell Corp. 

c. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. 

2. Channel Support Systems: 

a. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit. 

b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. 

c. National Pipe Hanger Corp. 

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 

a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. 

b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. 

c. PHS Industries, Inc. 

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS 

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to 

"Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types. 

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. 

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct 

contact with copper tubing. 

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 

2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct 

contact with copper tubing. 

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet 

metal shield. 

1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier. 

2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass. 

3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 

4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 

5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air 

temperature. 


A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and 

shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 




B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for 

supported loads and building materials where used. 

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. 

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, 

hydraulic-cement grout. 

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior 

applications. 

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 

3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed 

with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Provide hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to suspend, mount, or hang the duct-work, 

piping, conduits etc. properly from building structure. Provide all miscellaneous steel angles, channels, 

beams, clips, and brackets, as necessary. Install supports for piping with spacings, as specified in sections 

of piping systems. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, 

washers, and other accessories. 

B. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Use concrete inserts, C-clamps, 

malleable beam clamps and steel brackets, as applicable. Install additional attachments at concentrated 

loads, including valves, flanges, guides, and strainers at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete 

inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less 

than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 

C. Field-Fabricated, Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; 

weld steel in accordance with AWS D-1.1. 

D. Use adjustable clevises, single pipe rolls and adjustable roller hangers for horizontal piping and two-bolt 

riser clamps for vertical piping. Use turnbuckles and hanger rod attachments for these supports. Install 

hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be 

transmitted to connected equipment. 

E. Do not use pipe hooks, chains or perforated steel strap for pipe supports. Do not use power-driven 

fasteners for supports for equipment and piping larger than 2". The fasteners shall not be loaded more 

than 0.125 rated capacity or 200 lbs or whichever is less. 

F. Use hangers and supports for piping and breeching, as recommended by the manufacturer and selected by 

the installer. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. 

G. Unless otherwise indicated, all horizontal runs of piping shall be supported by individual hangers. 

H. Hangers for uninsulated copper and brass tubing and piping shall be copper plated light duty clevis 

hangers. Grinnell Figure CT-65 or approved equal with round steel hanger rod. Ring sizes shall be 

selected to fit the pipes as snugly as possible. 




I. Hangers for all other piping shall be clevis hangers, Grinnell Figure 250, or approved equal, constructed 

of bent steel bars with round steel hanger rods. Clevis hangers for cold water piping shall be selected to 

accommodate the outside diameter of the insulation. 

J. All lines of copper tubing shall be individually supported by approved type hangers not more than 6-feet 

apart or as shown on the drawings. Hangers for uncovered lines shall be especially designed for copper 

tubing and shall be exact o.d. of tubing. Hangers for covered tubing shall have broad straps fitting 

outside of covering. 

K. Hangers for all piping shall support the pipe without piercing the insulation. Insulation shields shall be 

used to protect the insulation on cold pipes. Insulation protection saddles shall be welded to insulated hot 

pipes at roller supports. Wherever fiberglass pipe insulation is installed, Kaylo of equal thickness shall be 

installed in lieu thereof wherever hangers and insulation shields are installed. It is the intent that the 

insulation shields shall bear only on an insulation material which is of such density that it will not 

compress, crush or deform. 

L. Horizontal piping shall be supported in accordance with the following schedule: 

Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Rod Size 

1. 1-inch and smaller 6-feet 0-inches 3/8-inch 

2. 1-1/4-inch to 2-inches 9-feet 0-inches 3/8-inch 

3. 2.5-inches to 5-inches 10-feet 0-inches ½ -inch 

4. 6-inches and larger 12-feet 0-inches 5/8-inch 

M. Maximum hanger spacing may not be exceeded, however, actual installed spacing will depend on 

location of structural supports and floor slab construction. Where building construction does not permit 

above spacing, additional steel supports shall be provided by this Contractor. 

N. Horizontal piping shall be laterally supported as directed to provide proper rigidity of the installation. 

O. Hangers for all horizontal piping shall be supported from Redhead anchors drilled into concrete slabs or 

from beam clamps where appropriate. 

P. Where several horizontal runs of similar piping run together, they may be run together on a unistrut pipe 

support with each individual pipe fastened to the unistrut with a unistrut clamp. Support unistrut rack as a 

trapeze hanger with allthread rod. 

3.3 METAL FABRICATION 

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports. 

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop 

welded because of shipping size limitations. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, 

appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance 

of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contours 

welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 




3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve specified 

slope of pipe. 

3.5 TOUCH UP PAINTING 

A. Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint 

and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting for touch-up of field-painted 

surfaces. 

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide, minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 

2. Galvanized surfaces clean welds bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing 

repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS 

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems. 

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping 

system Specification Sections. 

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping 

system Specification Sections, install the following types: 

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated 

stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) 

pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, 

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if 

little or no insulation is required. 

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS, to allow off-center 

closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 

6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated 

stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 

7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, 

NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, 

NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 

9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary 

pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. 

10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension 

of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of 

noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe 

base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe 

base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2- 

1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast- 




iron floor flange. 

17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if 

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from 

single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal 

movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not 

necessary. 

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small 

horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is 

not necessary. 

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if 

vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and 

contraction. 

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system 

Specification Sections, install the following types: 

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to 

NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. 

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system 


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building 

attachments. 

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification 

Sections, install the following types: 

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe 

hangers from concrete ceiling. 

2. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal 

movement where head room is limited. 

G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification 

Sections, install the following types: 

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that 

matches adjoining insulation. 

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing 

insulation. 

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density, 

100-psi minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass 

pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360degree 

sheet metal shield. 

H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system 





1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 

inches. 

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in 

piping systems. 

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 

25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability 

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability 

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, 

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. 

B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support 

together on field-assembled channel systems. 

1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and 

support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes. 

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install 

intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld 

steel according to AWS D-1.1. 

D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within 

maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated 

loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of 

piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing 

bars through openings at top of inserts. 

E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use 

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powderactuated 

tool manufacturer's operating manual. 

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install 

fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other 

accessories. 

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to 

permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, 

expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. 

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from 

movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe 




deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded. 

K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. 

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. 

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with 

clamp sized to match OD of insert. 

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9. 

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. 

Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate 

for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall 

span arc of 180 degrees. 

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate 

for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: 

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. 

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. 

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. 

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. 

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 

7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 

3.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment 

above floor. 

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. 

3.9 METAL FABRICATION 

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports. 

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shopwelded 

because of shipping size limitations. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and 

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance 

of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded 

surfaces match adjacent contours. 




3.10 ADJUSTING 

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated 

slope of pipe. 

3.11 PAINTING 

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after 

erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 

requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair 

paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 





SECTION 15110 – VALVES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves: 

1. Bronze angle valves. 

2. Cast-iron angle valves. 

3. Copper-alloy ball valves. 

4. Ferrous-alloy ball valves. 

5. Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves. 

6. High-pressure butterfly valves. 

7. Bronze check valves. 

8. Gray-iron swing check valves. 

9. Ferrous-alloy wafer check valves. 

10. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves. 

11. Bronze gate valves. 

12. Cast-iron gate valves. 

13. Bronze globe valves. 

14. Cast-iron globe valves. 

15. Cast-iron plug valves. 

16. Resilient-seated, cast-iron, eccentric plug valves. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts. 

2. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 


A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves: 

1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 

3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 

4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 

5. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; 

pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required 

clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, 

installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. 

B. "As-Built" Drawing: Submit after completion of work "As-Built" scaled layout drawings of pipe and fittings, 

including but not necessarily limited to, pipe sizes, location, elevations and slopes of horizontal 

VALVES 15110 - 1



runs, and connections. Submit schematic in isometric diagrams of fuel gas, cold/soft water make-up, 

steam supply, boiler feed water and drain systems. The drawings shall be in reproducibles sepia with 

two(2) blue prints. 

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for piping materials and products. Include 

this data, product data, and "As-Built" drawings in maintenance manuals. 

D. Submit welder test certificates for review. Certificates of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or 

ANSI Code for Pressure Piping organizations shall be acceptable. 


A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 

1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water piping valves unless referenced. 

B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design 

criteria. 

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. 

D. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 

E. Comply with 

1. ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping. 

2. ANSI Standard B31.1.0 - Standard Code for welding procedures and testing of pressure and power 

piping, and The American Welding Society, Welding Handbook. 


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. 

B. Use the following precautions during storage: 

1. Maintain valve end protection. 

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor 

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or 

stems as lifting or rigging points. 

VALVES 15110 - 2







1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers 

specified. 

B. Manufacturers: 

1. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves 

2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. 

3. Grinnell Corporation 

4. Watts 

2.2 VALVES, GENERAL 

A. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures 

and temperatures. 

D. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. 

F. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for 

bronze valves. 

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 

a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe 

valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. 

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 

H. Gate Valves: 

1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 150, body and union bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded 

or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated 

packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Do not use solder end valves for steam piping 

applications. 

2. 2.5-Inch and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to 

ASTM A 126 Class B; with flanged ends, and "Teflon" impregnated packing and two-piece 

backing gland assembly. 

I. Plug Valves: 

1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Rated at 150 psi WOG, bronze body, with straightaway pattern, square head, 

VALVES 15110 - 3



and threaded ends. 

2. 2.5-Inch and Larger: Rated at 175 psi, lubricated plug type, with semisteel body, single gland, 

wrench operated, flanged ends. 

J. Ball Valves: 

1. 1-Inch and Smaller: 400 psi WOG pressure; two-piece construction, with bronze body conforming 

to ASTM B 62, standard (or regular) port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" 

seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends. 

2. 1.25-Inch to 2-Inch: 400 psi WOG pressure; 3-piece construction, bronze body conforming to 

ASTM B 62, conventional port, stainless steel ball and stem, replaceable glass filled "Teflon" for 

stem bearing and packing, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder 

ends. 

K. Globe Valves: 

1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 150, body and screwed bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze, with 

threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass 

packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel 

2. 2.5-Inch and Larger: Class 125 iron body and bolted bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126, Class 

B; with outside screw and yoke, bronze mounted, flanged ends, and "Teflon" impregnated 

packing, and two-piece backing gland assembly. 

L. Swing Check Valves: 

1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 150 cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62; with 

horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends. Provide valves 

capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. 

2. 2.5-Inch and Larger: Class 125, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class 

B; horizontal swing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring; and flanged ends. 

Provide valves capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line. 

M. Butterfly Valves, 2.5-Inch and Larger: Rated at 200 psi; cast iron body conforming to ASTM A 126, 

Class B. Wafer type valves with field replaceable EPDM sleeve, nickel-plated ductile iron disc, stainless 

steel stem, and EPDM O-ring stem seals. Provide lever operators with locks for sizes 2 through 6 inches. 

Drill and tap valves on dead-end service or requiring additional body strength. Fig. 108 of ABZ Valve 

Co. is acceptable. 

N. General: (1) All sectional, shut-off and drain valves shall be ball type unless noted otherwise; by-pass 

valves shall be globe type and check valves shall be swing type. (2) For gas service, for size 2-inch and 

smaller, use 150 psi, non-shock, WOG, bronze straightway cock with flat or square head and threaded 

ends; while for size 2.5-inch and above, use 125 psi, non-shock, WOG, iron body bronze mounted, 

straightway cock with lubricated plug, square head and flanged ends. (3) For other systems, refer to 

following valve figure numbers of Nibco-Scott for the purpose of choosing quality, type and character of 

valves required. (4) Refer to following valve figure numbers of Nibco-Scott for the purpose of choosing 

quality, type and character of valves required. 

Valve type Size 2" and smaller Size 2.5" and larger 

(Screw and copper) (Flanged) 

1. Gate Scott #113 Scott # F-619+ 

2. Globe Scott #235 Scott # F-718+ 

3. Angle Scott #335 Scott # F-818+ 

4. Check Scott #413 Scott # F-918 

VALVES 15110 - 4



5. Ball Scott #S-595-Y* 

* For size up to 2.5-inch. For size 3-inch and above, use screw and copper, Crane # IRE 941. 

+ Provide manual chain operators for valves of size 2.5-inch and above, installed above 6 feet. 

O. Manufacturers: The manufacturer for gate, globe, angle, ball and butterfly type valves shall be Crane, 

ITT-Grinnell, Nibco-Scott or Stockham. 

2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. Strainers: The strainer for pipe size 2 inch and less shall have screwed screen retainer with centered 

blow-down fitted with pipe plug. (1) For pipe size 2.5-inch and more, strainer shall have bolted screen retainer 

with off-center blow-down fitted with pipe plug. (2) Provide Y-type strainers upstream of new 

float and thermostatic steam traps and where indicated. (3) Provide basket-type strainers upstream of new 

fuel oil pumps and at the inlet of return condensate receiver. (4) Deliver strainers to the jobsite with two 

coats of paint. (5) Use stainless steel or brass screen for water system and stainless steel screen for 

steam and fuel oil system. (6) Provide one spare screen for each new strainer. Furnish spare strainer for 

each of oil filter, pump suction strainer and equipment supplied with strainer. 

1. Manufacturers: Strainers shall be of Armstrong Machine Works, Hoffman Specialty ITT (Fluid 

Handling Div.) or Watts Regulator Co. 

2. Y-type pipeline strainer: Full line size strainer with ends and materials matching piping system. 

For pipe size 2-inch and less, use strainer of 250# screwed, ASTM-A126, Class B for cast iron 

body and 150# screwed or soldered, ASTM-B62 for cast bronze body and cap; screwed screen retainer 

with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. For pipe size 2½ -inch and more, use strainer 

of 125# standard flanged, ASTM-A126, Class B for cast iron body and cover and 150# flanged, 

ASTM-B62 for cast bronze body and cover; bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted 

with pipe plug. 

3. Basket type strainer: Manufacturer's standard product. For pipe size 2-inch and less, use strainer of 

250# screwed, ASTM-A126, Class B for cast iron body and 250# screwed or soldered ASTM-B62 

for cast bronze body and cap; screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe 

plug. For pipe size 2½ inch and more, use strainer of 125# flanged ASTM-A126, Class B for cast 

iron body and cover and 150# flanged, ASTM-B62 for cast bronze body and cover; bolted screen 

retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 

4. Strainer-Screen perforations shall be of size as follows. 

5. Ratio of net free area thru screen to inside pipe area shall not be less than 3:1. Screen perforations 

shall be of size as follows: 

Pipe size Thickness Perforations for Strainer type 

Steam Liquids 

1/4"-2" Wire dia. 0.016" 20 Y-type Cast-iron 

mesh stainless steel 

2.5"-3" 28 Ga. SS 0.033" 0.050" Y-type Cast-iron 

4" 24 Ga. SS 0.033" 0.050" Y-type Cast-iron 

1.5"-2" 28 Ga. SS 0.033" 0.050" Basket-type Cast-iron 

2"-3" 28 Ga. SS 0.062" 0.125" Basket-type Cast-iron 

VALVES 15110 - 5




1/4"-3" 26 Ga. Brass 0.027" 0.050" Y-type Cast-bronze 

2"-3" 26 Ga. Brass 0.027" 0.050" Y-type Cast-bronze 

2"-3" 26 Ga. Brass 0.062" 0.125" Basket-type Cast-bronze 

B. Safety Relief Valves: 125 psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; designed, 

manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the 

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working 

parts made of brass and rubber. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and Btu capacity. 

C. Isolating Fittings: Isolating fittings of Epco Sales Inc. or insulated unions of Central Plastic Co. between 

all sections of dissimilar piping materials or piping and equipment where one material is ferrous and other 

is non-ferrous. 

D. Diverting Fittings: wrought copper with solder ends; 125 psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum 

operating temperature. Indicate flow direction on fitting. The manufacturer can be Amtrol, Inc.; Armstrong 

Pumps, Inc.; Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.; or Taco, Inc. 

E. Escutcheons: Galvanized steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw at all pipe sleeves and pipe 

passing through walls to permit free expansion and contraction of piping. Inside diameter shall closely fit 

pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Outside diameter shall completely 

cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. Use chrome-plated, stamped steel, escutcheon, for 

classrooms and other finished areas. Provide pipe escutcheons of Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. or Sanitary-Dash 

Mfg. Co. or Grinnell. 

F. Unions: Malleable-iron, Class 150 for low pressure service and class 250 for high pressure service; hexagonal 

stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends. 

For pipe size 2-inch and less, unions shall be of screwed pattern, bronze seat. For pipe size 2.5-inch and 

more, they shall be of flanged pattern with gaskets and fasteners. Materials and pressure rating shall be 

same as that for piping and fittings. Unions for steel piping shall be 150# malleable iron for screwed connections. 

Unions for copper tubing, shall be 250 psi, all brass, ground joint for soldered or screwed connections. 

Flanged unions of copper tubing shall have soldered connections. 

G. Flanges: For pipe size 2.5" and more, 125 psi, raised face, weld neck or slip-on type flanges shall be 

used. Material shall be same as that for piping and fittings. 

1. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast-iron flanges and raised-face for 

steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in which installed and which conform 

to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or B16.21). Provide materials that will not be 

detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid being carried. The manufacturer 

can be Crane, Durabla, Klingerit, or Garlock. 

H. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven flexible bronze wire reinforcing protective jacket; 

minimum 150 psig working pressure, maximum 250 deg F operating temperature. Connectors shall 

have flanged or threaded end connections to match equipment connected; and shall be capable of 3/4 

inch misalignment. The flexible connectors shall be of Metraflex Co or approved equal. For combination 

of flexible connector with a reducer, patented flexiducer of Minnesota Flexible (Ph. 800-351-9069) may 

be used. 

I. Dielectric Unions: Dielectric unions shall be of type as recommended by the manufacturer to be used 

with appropriate end connections for the pipe materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or 

flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. The die- 

VALVES 15110 - 6



lectric unions shall be of Eclipse, Inc. or Perfection Corp. or Watts Regulator Co. 

J. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: Dielectric waterway fittings of electroplated steel or brass nipple shall 

have an inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining. They shall be of Victaulic Company of America. 

K. Pipe Guides: Guides shall be used wherever necessary to maintain pipes in position. They shall be of 

Metraflex Co or approved equal. 

L. Sleeves and Sleeve-seals: Provide pipe sleeves, for all pipes passing through building construction. For 

water-tight seals, provide anchor flange to pipe sleeve. Sleeves shall be flush with vertical finished surface. 

1. Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For large diameter pipes, 10 gage, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed 

with welded longitudinal joint. Set the anchor flange of diameter 6-inch larger than sleeve, in wall. 

2. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53, Grade A. 

3. Pipe: For exterior or partition walls above grade, use, UL listed seals for fire and smoke rated 

walls, between sleeve and pipe. For foundation and/or exterior walls below grade, provide seals 

for pipe sleeves. They shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber 

links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts 

and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight 

seal and electrical insulation, as manufactured by Thunderline Corp. 

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS 

A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding 

materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded. 

B. Soldering Materials: Use 95-5 Tin-Antimony solder or lead-free solder for copper piping. 

C. Brazing Materials: Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing 

filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined. Brazing filler metal shall be AWS 

A5.8, Classification BAg1 (silver). 

D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast bronze flanges and raised-face 

for steel flanges. Thickness, material, and type suitable for design temperatures and pressures. Select materials 

to suit the service of the piping system in which installed and which conform to ANSI Standard 

B16.20. Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions 

of the fluid being carried. 



A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions 

affecting performance. 

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special 

packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. 

C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible 

by such operations. 

VALVES 15110 - 7



D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. 

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, 

length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for 

service, and that it is free from defects and damage. 

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATIONS 

A. Valve selection: Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 

1. Copper Tube Size, 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot 

water and low-pressure steam service. 

2. Steel Pipes Sizes, 2-Inch and Smaller: threaded or grooved end. 

3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2.5-Inch and Larger: grooved end or flanged. 

B. General arrangement: 

1. Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off duty; and globe for throttling duty. Install valves in 

horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. Install valves in a position to allow 

full stem movement. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type 

valves. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. 

2. For water service, use ball valves equal to Apollo Bronze Ball Valve Series 70-100 in all domestic 

cold water piping 2-inches and smaller. Above 2-inches, butterfly valves shall be used, except 

where globe valves are required for throttling, or where otherwise indicated. 

3. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment removal 

without system shut down. Unions are not required on flanged devices. 

4. Install swing check valves in horizontal position with hinge pin level for proper direction of flow. 

Install wafer check valves in horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 

5. For solder connections, cut tube square and to exact lengths. Clean end of tube of depth of valve 

socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in 

same manner. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of 

tube. Open gate and globe valves to full open position. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing 

check valves having composition discs. Insert tube into valve socket making sure the end rests 

against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the 

flux. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed 

solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating the valve. 

Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush. 

6. For threaded connections, note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve 

internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve. Align threads at 

point of assembly. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except 

where dry seal threading is specified). Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on 

the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 

7. For flanged connections, align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening 

to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable 

lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench. For deadend 

service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff and 

retention. 

VALVES 15110 - 8



8. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, 

inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak 

persists. 

9. Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive 

finish painting or insulation. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES 

A. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. Remake leaking joints using new materials. 

B. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing or regulating valve, solenoid 

valve, and elsewhere as indicated. Install on each strainer cap, a full size blow-off pipe and a plugged 

gate valve (strainers 2 inch and larger). 

C. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each piece of 

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices. 

D. Install flanges in piping 2.5-inch and larger, where indicated, adjacent to each valve, and at the final connection 

to each piece of equipment. 

E. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps and other vibration producing 

equipment. 

F. Install air vents at the highest points in piping, as well as at the upper end of vertical piping connecting to 

expansion tanks, and above existing air separator unit, as indicated. 

G. Install dielectric unions to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in dry piping systems. 

H. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems. 

I. Install thermometers and pressure gauges, as specified, and as required by the equipment supplier. 

J. Install backflow preventer(s) as per requirement of water utility. 

K. Install pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls. Do not install them through structural members. 

Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size them such that the piping and insulation (if any) 

will have free movement, but not less than twice the pipe size. For fire rated, exterior and partition 

walls, use foam sealant Dow 3-6548 silicon RTV or UL-listed, fire and smoke rated sealant or equal. For 

mechanical link type rubber seals, refer to manufacturer's instructions. 

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Welded or brazed joints: Comply with the requirements in ASME Code B31.9 for welded joints and with 

the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual for brazed joints. Fill the pipe and fittings during 

brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale. Heat joints to proper 

and uniform brazing temperature. 

1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when 

heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation. 

2. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of piping 

specialties before brazing. 

B. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fit- 

VALVES 15110 - 9



tings, and valves as follows: 

1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, 

to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 

2. Align threads at point of assembly. 

3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal 

threading is specified). 

4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on 


5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens 

during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used. 

C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make 

initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt 

threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. 

D. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints in accordance with fitting manufacturers written instructions. 

3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS 

A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the 

following: 

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly or plug valves. 

2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves. 

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with 

higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted. 

C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 

1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 

2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast iron. 

3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 

4. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 300, ferrous alloy. 

5. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 200-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with 

EPDM liner. 

6. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 200, horizontal or vertical, bronze. 

7. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 200, bronze. 

8. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray iron. 

9. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 200. 

10. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 250, cast 

iron. 

11. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze. 

12. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125 OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron. 

13. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 

14. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze-mounted cast iron. 

15. Plug Valves, NPS 2 and Larger: Class 250, nonlubricated-type, cast iron. 

16. Resilient-Seated, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating, cast iron. 

D. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections: 

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide valves with 

threaded ends for steam and steam condensate services. 

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends. 

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 

VALVES 15110 - 10



4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends. 

3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION 

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general 

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, 

and equipment removal without system shutdown. 

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. 

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. 

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 

3.7 JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint 

construction. 

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to 

coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; 

and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.8 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final 

adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 


VALVES 15110 - 11



SECTION 15194 – FUEL GAS PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes fuel gas piping, specialties, and accessories within the building. 


A. Gas System Pressures: Low pressure of 0.5 psig but not more than 2.0 psig. 


A. Product Data: 

1. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing systems. Include associated components. 

2. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of 

selected models. 

3. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating, capacity, and settings of selected models. 

B. Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other Work. Show different 

pressure zones and indicate pressure for each zone. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 

C. Field quality-control test reports. 

D. Operation and maintenance data. 

E. Submit welders' qualification certificates, certifying that welders comply meet the quality requirements 

and submit test reports per codes of ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Installation and replacement of gas piping, gas utilization equipment or 

accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer. The 

term qualified is defined as experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a minimum of 5 

previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with precautions required, and has 

complied with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of 

such qualifications to the Project Manager. 

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended 

use. 

C. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code." 

D. FMG Standard: Provide components listed in FMG's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if specified to 

be FMG approved. 

E. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A Certified 

Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed. 

F. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if specified to be 

FUEL GAS PIPING 15194 - 1



UL listed. 

1.5 COORDINATION 

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless 

permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility 

services according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner not less than two weeks in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission. 

B. Coordinate in advance (beginning of project) with PGW provide all loads, forms, letters, drawings, as 

required by PGW to obtain upgrades or new gas service. 

C. The Contractor shall verify the requirements for the gas service with the Gas Utility Company before 

starting work. 

D. Contractor shall size and install gas vents in accordance with all PGW, L&I, UL and FM uirements. 

E. Contractor shall disconnect and connect gas piping as required during the installation of gas meters done 

by PGW. 






specified. 

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS 

A. All high pressure/medium pressure gas piping shall be welded (pressure classes per PGW).Steel Pipe: 

ASTM A 53; Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black. 

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends 

according to ASME B1.20.1. 

2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and 

threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 

3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 

4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel. 

5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to 

ASME B1.20.1. 

6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 

7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 

8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas. 

B. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" 

for joining materials not in this Section. 




2.3 PROTECTIVE COATING 

A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in 

corrosive atmosphere. 

2.4 SPECIALTIES 

A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy. 

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector. 

2.5 VALVES 

A. Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads. 

B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and according 

to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. 

C. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed. 

D. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball type 

with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel disc and 

fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig (13.8-kPa) minimum pressure rating. 

E. Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-psig pressure 

rating. 

F. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated plug valves, 

with 125-psig pressure rating. 

G. General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: MSS SP-70, ASME B16.38, cast-iron body gate valves, 

OS&Y type with solid wedge, suitable for fuel gas service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body, and 

125-psig pressure rating. 

H. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21, with electrical/mechanical operator for actuation by appliance 

automatic shutoff device. 


a. ASCO General Controls. 

b. ASCOLECTRIC, Ltd. 

c. Automatic Switch Co. 

2.6 GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS 

A. Pressure Regulators: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and corrosionresistant 

components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent. 


a. Line Pressure Regulators: 

(1.) Maxitrol Co. 

(2.) National Meter. 

(3.) Schlumberger Industries; Gas Div. 

2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads. 

3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and according to 




ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. 

4. Service Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80. Include 100-psig- minimum inlet pressure rating. 

5. Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 with 2-psig-] [5-psig-) minimum] [10-psig] inlet pressure 

rating. 

6. Appliance Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18. Regulator may include vent limiting device, 

instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 

7. Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen in opening if not 

connected to vent piping. 


3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS 

A. Use flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: NPS 3/4 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 

2. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints. 

3. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system and threaded joints. 

4. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 

5. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints. 

6. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system and threaded joints. 

7. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 

8. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 

9. Larger Than NPS 4: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 


A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop. 

B. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: Gas stop or gas valve. 

C. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve. 

D. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve. 

E. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve. 

F. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve. 


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation 

requirements and piping joint construction. 

B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit 

constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside and 

terminate with screened vent cap. 

1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of 

authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. Do not locate 

valves above ceilings. 

2. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from physical 

damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls. 

3. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective Coating" 

Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of authorities having 




jurisdiction. 

4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash 

chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. 

C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of 

service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where 

condensate would be subject to freezing. 

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use 

minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as 

connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap. 

D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and 

in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view. 

E. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers. 

F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. 

G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. 

H. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of 


I. Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Include 

striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move. 

J. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated valve. 

K. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line pressure regulator. 

L. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections. 

M. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to 

atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect 

screens in large end. 

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. 

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 

2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 

4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 

5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 

C. Install hangers for horizontal corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and 

minimum rod sizes: 

1. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 

2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 

3. Option: Support tubing from structure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 





A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a metal tag 

attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied. 

B. Install a gas cock upstream of each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas pressure regulators are installed 

in series in a single gas line, a manual valve is not required at the second regulator. 

C. Install pressure relief or pressure limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if the valve 

is free; so they can be tested to determine the pressure at which they will operate; and examined for 

leakage when in the closed position. 

3.6 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING 

A. Install above ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from equipment shutoff valves electrically 

continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode in accordance with NFPA 70 - "National Electrical 

Code." Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode. 

B. Conform to NFPA 70 - "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring and 

electrically operated control devices. 

3.7 CONNECTIONS 

A. Install above ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from equipment shutoff valves electrically 

continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode in accordance with NFPA 70 - "National Electrical 

Code." Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode. 

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. Connect piping to appliances 

using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches (1800 mm) of 

each appliance. Install union downstream from valve. 


A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing, and Purging," and 

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest 

system until satisfactory results are obtained. 





SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment inside 

building. 


A. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to fixtures and equipment 

throughout the building. 

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum 

working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Water Distribution Piping: 860 kPa. 


A. Water Samples, Test Results, and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Cleaning" articles. 

B. Product specification and data sheets. 


A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards. 

B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. 

C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections 1 through 9 for 

potable-water piping and components. 


2.1 PIPES AND TUBES 

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping 

Applications" Article. 

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type L, water tube, drawn temper. 

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 1



2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS 

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping 


B. Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast-copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought 

copper. 

C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required 

to match piping. 

D. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket joint, 

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends. Include 

threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1 on threaded ends. 


A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping 


B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining 

materials. 

C. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E; lead free. 

D. Brazing Filler Metal: AWS A5.8, BCuP, copper phosphorus or BAg, silver classification. 

2.4 VALVES 

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves. 

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for special-duty valves. 



A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in 

applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Aboveground, Water Distribution Piping: Use the following: 

1. DN40 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 

2. DN50: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 

3. DN65 to DN90: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 


A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following 

requirements apply: 

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves. 

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball valves. 




3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation. 

3.4 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Install piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain. 



construction. 


A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving plumbing 

fixtures or equipment, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 and smaller. Use 

gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 and larger. 

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each supply to plumbing 

fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 and smaller. 

Use gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 and larger. 

C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal 

piping, and where required to drain water piping. 

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 

2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated. 


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the 

following: 

1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs. 

2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 30 m and 

less. 

3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than 

30 m. 

B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." 

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. 

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods. 

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod diameters: 

1. DN20 and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 10-mm minimum rod diameter; 

maximum vertical spacing, 3 m. 

2. DN25: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1800 mm with 10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum 

vertical spacing, 3 m. 



4. DN40 and DN50: Maximum horizontal spacing, 2400 mm with 10-mm minimum rod diameter; 








A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows: 

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must 

be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 

a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in 

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 

b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe 

tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, 

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 

B. Test water distribution piping as follows: 

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, 

extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, 

complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping until it has 

been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been 

tested and approved. 

3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure equal to pressure of 1.5 times operating pressure, 

up to a maximum of 1035 kpa. without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. 

Isolate test source and allow to stand for 2 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute 

defects that must be repaired. 

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory 

results are obtained. 

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 

3.9 CLEANING 

A. Clean water distribution piping as follows: 

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired 

before using. 

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method 

is not prescribed, procedure as described below: 

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. 

b. Submit water samples to authorities having jurisdiction for biological examination. Repeat 

cleaning procedure if contamination exists. 

B. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 

3.10 COMMISSIONING 

A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of 

water. 

B. Perform the following steps before putting into operation: 

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 

4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during 

installation. 




C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water 

heaters before filling with water. 

D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 





SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, inside building and to locations indicated. 


A. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and vapors from fixtures and 

equipment throughout the building. 




1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 30 kPa. 


A. Test Results and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. 








B. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 

C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type L, water tube, drawn temper. 

D. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 




DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 - 1



B. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301. 

C. Copper, Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23 cast copper or ASME B16.29 wrought copper. 





materials. 


D. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosionresistant 

fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve or gasket with integral, center pipe stop. Include the 

following: 

1. Heavy-Duty, FM-Approved, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel 

housing; and stainless-steel clamps. Include gasket or bushing. 

b. Clamp Width: 100 mm wide with 2 clamps, for piping DN125 to DN250. 





B. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following: 

1. DN40: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following 

hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings: 

a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel. 

2. DN32 and DN40: Hard copper drainage tube; copper, solder-joint drainage fittings; and soldered 

joints. 

3. DN50 to DN100: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; and one of the 

following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings: 


4. DN50 and DN100: Hard copper drainage tube; copper, solder-joint drainage fittings; and 

soldered joints. (Not allowed for urinal waste piping) 

5. DN50 and DN100: Hard copper drainage tube; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed 

couplings. 

6. DN125 and DN150: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; and one of 

the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings: 


7. DN200: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; and one of the 








3.3 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," 

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 

B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and longsweep 

bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in 

direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 

fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and 

crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. 

Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes of piping are connected. Reducing 

size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. 

C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 

2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. 



construction. 

B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 

Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 

1. Compression Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 

2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp. 



following: 



less. 

3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than 

30 m. 

4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer 

than 30 m. 

5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or longer. Support pipe rolls 

on trapeze. 

6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs. 














4. DN80 to DN125: Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 13-mm minimum rod diameter; 


5. DN150: Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 16-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum 




F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod 

diameters: 


maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m. 


vertical spacing, 4.5 m. 

3. DN100 and DN125: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 16-mm minimum rod 

diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m. 



5. DN200 through DN300: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 22-mm minimum rod 




7. Spacing for horizontal pipe in 3-m lengths may be increased to 3 m. Spacing for fittings is limited 

to 1500 mm. 


A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows: 











B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of 

published procedure, as follows: 




2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping 

until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it 

has been tested and approved. 

3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on 

completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of 

overflow, but not less than 30 kPa. Water level must not drop from 15 minutes before inspection 

starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks. 

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with 

water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on 

roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to 




pressure of 250 Pa. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this 

pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period 

of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 

5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory 




A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to 

prevent damage from traffic and construction work. 

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 





SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related components. 

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters. 

2. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves used as supply stops. 


A. Accessible: Plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered, and 

used by physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people. 

B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this 

Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, drains and tailpieces, traps and waste pipes. Pipe 

fittings, tube fittings, and general-duty valves are included where indicated. 


A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 

Specification Sections. 

B. Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected fixture, trim, 

fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, 

dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates. 

C. Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and maintenance 

manuals specified in Division 1. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category from one 

source and by a single manufacturer. 

1. Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single 

manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for this category. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of Architectural and Transportation Barriers 

Compliance Board's (ATBCB) "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-187" 

regarding plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people. 

C. Energy Policy Act Requirements: Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy 

Act," regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures. 

D. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. 

PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 1



E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of 

plumbing fixtures and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' fixtures 

with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 


A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering. 

B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location. 


A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that plumbing 

fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. 


2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS 

A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified. 

1. National Sanitation Foundation Construction: NSF 2. 

4. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 

5. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 

2.2 LAVATORY/SINK FAUCET STANDARDS 

A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for lavatory, sink, and similar-typefixture 

faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 0.16-L/s-maximum flow rate; and 

polished, chrome-plated finish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies 

and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor. 

4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 

5. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 

6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FITTING STANDARDS 

A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for fittings, other than faucets. 

Include polished, chrome-plated finish, except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate fittings with other 

components and connectors. 

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 

2. Automatic Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1028. 

3. Brass and Copper, Supplies and Tubular Brass: ASME A112.18.1M. 

4. Fixed Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1034. 

5. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENT STANDARDS 

A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified for components for plumbing 

fixtures, equipment, and appliances. 

1. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 



4. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 

5. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 




2.5 FITTINGS 

A. Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for 

materials for supplies, supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings. 

B. Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings include the following: 

1. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection. 

2. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression, loose-key type; same size as 

supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. 

3. Supply Risers: DN10 rigid brass tube with DN8 straight, knob-end tailpiece. Use chrome-plated 

tube for exposed applications. 

5. Traps: Cast brass with slip-joint inlet, cleanout pipe nipple to wall, wall flange, escutcheons, and 

size to match equipment. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications. 



A. Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping systems; soil, waste, and vent piping 

systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports 

match those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data 

when roughing-in data are not indicated. 

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. 

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 APPLICATIONS 

A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following: 

1. Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction. 

2. Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and electric water 

coolers. 

B. Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to the following: 

1. Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 

2. Sinks: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 

3. Sinks: Cover hot-water supply, stop and handle, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 

4. Other Fixtures: Cover exposed fittings below fixture. 

DO NOT SUPPLY INSULATION WHERE SOLID COVERS ARE INDICATED 

3.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION 

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to manufacturers' 

written instructions. 

B. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing-in drawings, 

and referenced standards. 

C. Install toilet seats on water closets. 

D. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted on wider side of room. 

Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped people to reach. 




E. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports 

are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated. 

F. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. 

G. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework. 

H. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture. 

I. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where specific stop 

valve is not specified. 

J. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations. 

K. Install faucet, laminar-flow fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets 

are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required. 

L. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets 

are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required. 

M. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect 

wastes, except where otherwise indicated. 

N. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within 

cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 

O. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, 1-part, mildew-resistant, 

silicone sealant according to sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 

Match sealant color to fixture color. 



arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 

1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment 

specified in other Division 15 Sections. 

B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of 

this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture. 

C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect equipment with 

supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to 

match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping. 


A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. 

B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. 

C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. 

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation. Replace 

malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 




3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and 

controls. 

B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot-water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning 

units and controls. 

C. Adjust water pressure at electric water coolers, faucets, and flushometer valves having controls, to 

produce proper flow and stream. 

D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. 

E. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and 

materials. Include the following: 

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and 

spouts. 

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. 


A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. 

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by Owner. 

3.8 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 

A. For plumbing fixtures schedule refer to drawing P-1. 





SECTION 15770 - AIR-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 



A. This Section specifies electrically operated unitary and applied air-source heat pumps. 

B. Definitions: 

1. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER): The ratio of net cooling capacity is Btu/h to total rate of 

electricity input in watts under designated operating conditions. 

2. Coefficient of Performance (COP) - Cooling: The ratio of the rate of heat removed to the rate of 

energy input in consistent units, for a complete refrigerating system or some specific portion of 

that system under designated operating conditions. 

3. Coefficient of Performance (COP) - Heating: The ratio of the rate of heat delivered to the rate of 

energy input is consistent units for a complete heat pump system, including the compressor and, if 

applicable, auxiliary heat under designated operating conditions. 

4. Unitary Heat Pump: One or more factory made assemblies that normally include an indoor 

conditioning coil, compressor(s) and an outdoor refrigerant-to-air coil or refrigerant-to-water heat 

exchanger. These units provide both heating and cooling functions. 

1.2 RELATED WORK 

A. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: For pre-test requirements. 

B. Section 23 23 00, REFRIGERANT PIPING: Requirements for field refrigerant piping. 

C. Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC: Requirements for 

testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC system. 

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 

A. Comply with ASHRAE Standard 15, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 


A. Submit in accordance with specification Section 1300 , Submittals 

B. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data. 

1. Unitary Split-System Heat pumps, Air-to-Air: 

C. Certification: Submit, simultaneously with shop drawings, a proof of certification that this product has 

been certified by ARI. 

D. Performance Rating: Submit catalog selection data showing equipment ratings and compliance with 

required cooling and heating capacities EER and COP values as applicable. 

1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: 


are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. 

AIR-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 15770-1



B. Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.): 

A-A-50502-90 Air-conditioner (UNITARY HEAT PUMP), AIR TO AIR (3000 TO 300,000 

BTUH) 

C. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standards: 

ARI-DCPP Directory of Certified Product Performance - Applied Directory of Certified 

Products 

210/240-06 Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump 

Equipment 

270-95 Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment 

310/380-04 Standard for Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps (CSA-C744- 

04) 

340/360-04 Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment 

D. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 

210-99 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating 

(ANSI) 

410-96 Recommended Safety Practices for Users and Installers of Industrial and 

Commercial Fans 

E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 

S12.51-02 Acoustics - Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Sources Using 

Sound Pressure - Precision Method for Reverberation Rooms (same as ISO 

3741:1999) 

F. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers Inc (ASHRAE): 

15-07 Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems (ANSI) 

62.1-07 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI) 

90.1-04 Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings 

2004 Handbook HVAC Systems and Equipment 

G. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

B117-03 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus 

H. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 

MG 1-06 Motors and Generators (ANSI) 

ICS 1-00 (R2005) Industrial Controls and Systems: General Requirements 

I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

90A-02 Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 

J. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 

1995-05 Heating and Cooling Equipment 


2.1 UNITARY HEAT PUMPS, AIR TO AIR 

A. Units shall comply with Fed Spec A-A-50502//Type I, having factory assembled refrigerant circuit or 

circuits (Packaged Unit), // Type II, (Split System) having remote outdoor section separate from indoor 

Section,// Class 1, "Department of Energy" (DOE) covered products (units with cooling capacity up to 

65000 Btu/hr// Class 2, Non–DOE covered products (units with cooling capacity up to 300,000 Btu/hr //. 




1. Unitary heat pumps shall bear the United States Environmental Protection Agency, Energy Star 

label and shall have a minimum Heating Season Performance Factor (HSPF) of 7 and a minimum 

Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) of 12. 

B. Applicable ARI Standards: Units shall be listed in the corresponding ARI Directory of Certified products 

shown in paragraph, APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: 

1. Air Source Unitary heat pumps with capacity less than 39.6 KW (135,000 Btu/hr), Comply with 

ARI 210/240. 

2. Air Source heat pump with capacity above 39.6 KW (above 135,000 Btu/hr, Comply with ARI 

340/360. 

C. Casing: Unit shall be constructed of zinc coated, //heavy-gage // 14-gage minimum // galvanized steel. 

Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel 

finish. Unit surfaces shall be tested 500 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. 

Cabinet panels shall have lifting handles and shall be water- and air-tight seal. All exposed vertical, top 

covers and base pan shall be insulated with // 13-mm (1/2–inch) // 25-mm (1-inch) // 50-mm (2-inch) // 

matt-faced, fire-resistant, odorless, glass fiber material. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall 

comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007.The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift 

and crane lifting. 

D. Filters: One inch, throwaway filter shall be standard on all units below 26.4 kW (7-1/2 Tons). Filter rack 

can be converted to two inch capability. Two inch filters shall be factory supplied on all units above 26.4 

kW (7-1/2 Tons). 

E. Compressors: Compressors shall be direct-drive, hermetic //reciprocating//scroll//type with centrifugal 

type oil pumps. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled. Internal overload shall be provided with the scroll 

compressors. Crankcase heaters shall be utilized with all compressors. 

F. Refrigerant Circuit: A minimum of two circuits is required. Each refrigerant circuit shall have 

independent fixed orifice or thermostatic expansion devices, service pressure ports, and refrigerant line 

filter driers factory installed as standard. An area shall be provided for replacement suction line driers. 

G. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Internally finned, DN 10 (NPS 3/8) copper tubes mechanically bonded 

to a configured aluminum plate fin shall be standard. The evaporated coil and condenser coil shall be 

leak tested at the factory to 1378 kPa (200 psig) and pressure tested to 2756 kPa (400 psig). All dual 

compressor units shall have intermingled evaporator coils. Sloped condensate drain pans are standard. 

H. Outdoor fans: Direct driven, statically and dynamically balanced, draw-through in the vertical discharge 

position. The fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and shall have built-in thermal overload 

protection. 

I. Indoor Fan: Belt-driven, forward-curved centrifugal with adjustable motor sheaves //adjustable idler-arm 

assembly for quick-adjustment of fan belts and motor sheaves//. Motors shall be thermally protected. 

Oversize motors shall be available for high static application. Motors shall meet the U.S. Energy Policy 

Act of 2005 (EPACT). 

J. Defrost Controls: A time initiated, temperature terminated defrost system shall ship with a setting of 70minute 

cycle, with a choice of 50- or 90-minute cycle. Timed override limits defrost cycle to 10 minutes 

shall be available on units from 35- to 70-kW (10 to 20 tons). Adaptive demand defrost shall be provided 

on units below 26.4 kW (7-1/2 Tons). 

K. Controls: Factory wired with controls and contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. 

Micro-processor controls shall be provided for all 24-volt control functions. The resident control 

algorithms shall make heating, cooling, and ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from 




sensors measuring indoor and outdoor temperatures. Controls shall include an anti-short-cycle timing 

and time delay between compressors. 

1. Economizer: // Down flow // Horizontal flow//;// field // factory // installed; and shall include fully 

modulating 0-100 percent motor and dampers, barometric relief, minimum position setting and 

fixed dry bulb.// Solid state enthalpy and differential enthalpy control shall be field-installed //. 

2. Oversized Motors: // Factory // Field // installed over sized motor shall be available for high-static 

application. 



A. Install heat pumps according to manufacturers printed instructions. 

B. Install electrical and control devices furnished by the manufacturer but not specified to be factory 

mounted. All electrical work shall comply with Division 26 Sections. 

C. Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 23 23 00, REFRIGERANT PIPING. 

3.2 STARTUP AND TESTING 

A. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 

B. Test controls and demonstrate its compliance with project requirements. Replace damaged or 

malfunctioning controls and equipment and retest the equipment to the satisfaction of the Resident 

Engineer. 

C. Furnish test reports to the Senior Resident Engineer in accordance with specification Section 01 00 00, 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 

3.4 INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in 

operation and maintenance of heat pumps. 





SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 




1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 

1. Air Systems: 

a. Split-System Heat Pumps 

2. Hydronic Piping Systems: 

a. Constant-flow systems. 

3. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 

4. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 


A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed 

or adjust a damper. 

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and 

terminals, according to indicated quantities. 

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that 

are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants. 

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air 

velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a 

person's skin than is normally dissipated. 

E. NC: Noise criteria. 

F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. 

G. RC: Room criteria. 

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. 

I. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed 

system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. 

J. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. 

K. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced 

capacities in all or part of a system. 

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15950 - 1



L. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan 

when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. 

M. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 

N. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution 

system. 

O. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment. 

P. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting 

TAB procedures. 


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of evidence that 

TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" 

Article. 

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 

copies of the Contract Documents review report. 

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of 

TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a 

complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. 

D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved 

forms certified by TAB firm. 

E. Warranties specified in this Section. 


A. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and 

procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team 

members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and 

other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: 

a. Submittal distribution requirements. 

b. The Contract Documents examination report. 

c. TAB plan. 

d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements. 

e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. 

f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. 

B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 

2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and 

referenced in this Specification. 

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and 

Balancing.". 




D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing 

and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems. 

E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if 

required by instrument manufacturer. 

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of 

party performing instrument calibration. 


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. 

Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 


A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC 

controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist 

TAB activities. 

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. 

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been 

satisfactorily completed. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for 

Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC 

will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the 

Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. 




A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover 

conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract. 

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control 

devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract 

Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and 

appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. 

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. 




C. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for 

environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about 

HVAC system and equipment controls. 

D. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project 

conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions 

that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce 

performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented 

when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, 

use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's 

"HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed 

conditions. 

E. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, 

adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. 

F. Examine system and equipment test reports. 

G. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as 

test ports, gage cocks, manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are 

accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. 

H. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. 

I. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are 

aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. 

J. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations 

and other holes are sealed. 

K. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. 

L. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. 

M. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 

2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 

3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and 

fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units. 

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves are properly connected. 

5. Temperature sensors are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 

6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 

7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 

8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 

9. Interlocked systems are operating. 

10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. 

N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record 

system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 


A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. 




B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 

4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 

5. Balance and fire dampers are open. 

6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 

7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to 

balancing devices is provided. 

8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING 

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in 

SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section. 

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent 

necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes 

and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish 

according to insulation Specifications for this Project. 

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification 

material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and 

similar controls and devices, to show final settings. 

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS 

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended 

testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. 

B. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, 

through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. 

C. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. 

D. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. 

E. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. 

F. Check for airflow blockages. 

G. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. 

H. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. 

3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at riser to the end of 

system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows. 

B. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general 

preparation procedures specified above: 




1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 

2. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 

3. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS 

A. Measure flow at the fan coil units and set balancing device to achieve the required flow. 

B. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 

1. Record settings and mark balancing devices. 

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS 

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 

2. Motor horsepower rating. 

3. Motor rpm. 

4. Efficiency rating. 

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. 

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS 

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 

2. Water flow rate. 

3. Water pressure drop. 

4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 

5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 

6. Airflow. 

7. Air pressure drop. 

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS 

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperaturecontrol 

system. 

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eighthour 

days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure 

when the building or zone is occupied. 

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS 

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 

3. Check the condition of filters. 

4. Check the condition of coils. 

5. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap. 




6. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 

7. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. 

Report deficiencies. 

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain 

and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. 

1. New filters are installed. 

2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 

3. Drain pans are clean. 

4. Fans are clean. 

5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 

6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. 

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the 

renovation work. 

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and determine 

the new fan, speed, filter, and coil face velocity. 

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and 

fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 

3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make 

equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow rates. If 5 percent or less, 

equipment adjustments are not required. 

4. Air balance each air outlet. 

3.11 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION 

A. Verify that all controllers (existing and new) are calibrated and commissioned. 

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control 

functions. 

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. 

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers). 

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. 

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate 

with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. 

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. 

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. 

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. 

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a 

grounded or non-grounded power supply. 

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. 




3.12 TOLERANCES 

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 

4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent. 

3.13 REPORTING 

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in 

"Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. 

Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance 

measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general 

construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. 

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in 

progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being 

tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems 

serving multiple floors. 

3.14 FINAL REPORT 

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring 

binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. 

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing 

engineer. 

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 

1. Pump curves. 

2. Fan curves. 

3. Manufacturers' test data. 

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 

5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and 

Product Data. 

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, 

as applicable: 

1. Title page. 

2. Name and address of TAB firm. 

3. Project name. 

4. Project location. 

5. Architect's name and address. 

6. Engineer's name and address. 

7. Contractor's name and address. 

8. Report date. 

9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number 

each page in the report. 




11. Summary of contents including the following: 

a. Indicated versus final performance. 

b. Notable characteristics of systems. 

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: 

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. 

b. Conditions of filters. 

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. 

d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. 

e. Settings for supply-air, static pressure controller. 

f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. 

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each 

system with single-line diagram and include the following: 

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 

2. Water flow rates. 

3. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 

4. Terminal units. 

5. Balancing stations. 

6. Position of balancing devices. 

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 

1. Unit Data: Include the following: 

a. Unit identification. 

b. Location. 

c. Make and type. 

d. Model number and unit size. 

e. Manufacturer's serial number. 

f. Unit arrangement and class. 

g. Discharge arrangement. 

h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 

i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). 

j. Number of belts, make, and size. 

k. Number of filters, type, and size. 

2. Motor Data: 

a. Make and frame type and size. 

b. Horsepower and rpm. 

c. Volts, phase, and hertz. 

d. Full-load amperage and service factor. 

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 

f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). 

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 




a. Total airflow rate in cfm. 

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. 

c. Fan rpm. 

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. 

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. 

f. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. 

g. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. 

h. Outside airflow in cfm. 

i. Return airflow in cfm. 

j. Outside-air damper position. 

k. Return-air damper position. 

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: 

1. Coil Data: 

a. System identification. 

b. Location. 

c. Coil type. 

d. Number of rows. 

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. 

f. Make and model number. 

g. Face area in sq. ft. 

h. Tube size in NPS. 

i. Tube and fin materials. 

j. Circuiting arrangement. 


a. Airflow rate in cfm. 

b. Average face velocity in fpm. 

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. 

d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 

h. Water flow rate in gpm. 

i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 

j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. 

k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. 

H. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 

1. Unit Data: 

a. System and air-handling unit identification. 

b. Location and zone. 

c. Test apparatus used. 

d. Area served. 

e. Air-terminal-device make. 

f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. 

g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. 

h. Air-terminal-device size. 

i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft.. 





a. Airflow rate in cfm. 

b. Air velocity in fpm. 

c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. 

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. 

e. Final airflow rate in cfm. 

f. Final velocity in fpm. 

g. Space temperature in deg F. 

I. Instrument Calibration Reports: 

1. Report Data: 

3.15 INSPECTIONS 

A. Initial Inspection: 

a. Instrument type and make. 

b. Serial number. 

c. Application. 

d. Dates of use. 

e. Dates of calibration. 

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements 

to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented 

in the Final Report. 

2. Randomly check the following for each system: 

B. Final Inspection: 

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. 

b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. 

c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to 

the set point. 

d. Measure sound levels at two locations. 

e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. 

f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. 

g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report. 

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and 

balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final 

inspection be made by Owner. 

2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner. 

3. Owner shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked. The 

rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent 

of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 

4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final 

report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements 

checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and 

shall be rejected. 

6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and 

balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report. 

7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract 

the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the 

Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment. 




3.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS 

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced 

conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. 

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter 

conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter 

conditions. 





SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Raceways. 

2. Building wire and connectors. 

3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 

4. Electrical identification. 

5. Electrical demolition. 

6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 

7. Touchup painting. 


A. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment. 

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections of equipment rooms and electrical equipment. 

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 


use. 

B. Comply with NFPA 70. 


A. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the 

Work. 

B. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished 

surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors." 

C. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of 

identification devices with completion of finished surface. 

D. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar 

finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation. 

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 1




2.1 RACEWAYS 

A. EMT: ANSI C80.3, zinc-coated steel, with set-screw or compression fittings. 

B. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. 

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6, zinc-coated steel, with threaded fittings. 

D. LFMC: Zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket. 

E. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used. 

2.2 CONDUCTORS 

A. Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. 

B. Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper. 

C. Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated at 75 deg C minimum. 

D. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable for service 

indicated. 


A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter 

slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs. 

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Comply with Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for slotted 

channel framing. 

1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. 

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports. 

D. Nonmetallic Channel and Angle Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels 

and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (203 mm) o.c., in at least 

one surface. 

1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and angles. 

2. Fittings and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be 

stainless steel. 

E. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with 

retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers. 

F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and 

insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size 

of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron 

casting with hot-dip galvanized finish. 




G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type. 

H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 

I. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel. 

2.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors 

prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. 

B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend 

and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. 

1. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with a clear, weather- 

and chemical-resistant coating. 

2. Color: Black letters on orange background. 

3. Legend: Indicates voltage. 

C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less 

than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick (25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick). 

D. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers 

and letters. 

E. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. 

F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate 

punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. 

in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black 

letters on white background. 

G. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Preprinted, 

aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, 

and size appropriate to the application. 

H. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel 

machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 

2.5 TOUCHUP PAINT 

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. 


3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and 

install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. 

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems 

and components, unless otherwise indicated. 




C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect 

for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. 

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 

3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION 

A. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations: 

1. Exposed: IMC. 

2. Concealed: IMC. 

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 

4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4. 

B. Use the following raceways for indoor installations: 

1. Exposed: EMT. 

2. Concealed: EMT. 

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations, use LFMC. 

4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION 

A. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. 

B. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater 

pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 

C. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering. 

D. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight 

legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and location. 

F. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line 

with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end 

of the pull wire. 

G. Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size (DN53) and smaller, in maximum lengths 

of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull 

or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements, in addition to requirements above. 

H. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a maximum of 

72-inch (1830-mm) flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground 

conductor across flexible connections. 

I. Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface. 

3.4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS 

A. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway . 

B. Brands circuits; Type THHN/THWN Insulated conductors in raceway 




C. Remote – Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in 

raceway for Classes 1,2, and 3, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION 

A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better 

mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 

B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack conductor at each outlet. 

C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical 

connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If 

manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 

3.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION 

A. Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components. 

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. 

C. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

D. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; 

minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load. 

3.7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. 

B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, 

clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods 

and conduits. 

C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers. 

D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in 

the future. 

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps. 

F. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead 

of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle 

branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle 

supports. 

H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by 

raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. 

I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors. 

J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheetmetal 

boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to 




raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 

24 inches (610 mm) from the box. 

K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, 

pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to 

structural elements of adequate strength. 

L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are 

used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of 

all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry 

walls. 

M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. 

Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated: 

1. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 

2. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 

3. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock 

washers may be used in existing concrete. 

4. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel. 

a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 

5. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or 

other items. 

6. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. 

7. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-test 

load. 

3.8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES 

A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of 

equipment. 

B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with 

corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use 

consistent designations throughout Project. 

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. 

D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows: 

1. Bands: Pretensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive marking tape. 

Make each color band 2 inches (51 mm) wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent 

bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 

2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) 

maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (8-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. 

3. Colors: As follows: 

a. Fire Alarm System: Red. 

b. Security System: Blue and yellow. 

c. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. 

E. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each 

cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase 

identification. 




F. Color-code 208/120-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the 

secondary electrical system as follows: 

1. Phase A: Black. 

2. Phase B: Red. 

3. Phase C: Blue. 

G. Color-code 480/277-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the 


1. Phase A: Yellow. 

2. Phase B: Brown. 

3. Phase C: Orange. 

H. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, 

Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of 

items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend 

where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. 

3.9 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve 

fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified 

in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 

3.10 DEMOLITION 

A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the 

course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and 

functionality. 

B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in 

their entirety. 

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 

inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match 

existing finish. 

D. Remove demolished material from Project site. 

E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation. 

3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit 

electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. 

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. 

Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and 

other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved. 


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following: 




1. Raceways. 






3.13 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING 

A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 

Section "Painting." 

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the 

degree of damage at each location. 

2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and 

application of successive coats. 

3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 

4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by 

manufacturer. 


A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove 

burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. 

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets 

are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 





SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified 

in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. 



B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 

C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following: 

1. Test procedures used. 

2. Test results that comply with requirements. 

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with 

requirements. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member 

company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical 

Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. 



use. 

1. Comply with UL 467. 





1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: 

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 1



a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 

b. Boggs, Inc. 

c. Chance/Hubbell. 

d. Copperweld Corp. 

e. Dossert Corp. 

f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. 

g. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. 

h. Galvan Industries, Inc. 

i. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. 

j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. 

k. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. 

l. Ideal Industries, Inc. 

m. ILSCO. 

n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. 

o. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. 

p. Lightning Master Corp. 

q. Lyncole XIT Grounding. 

r. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. 

s. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. 

t. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 

u. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co. 

v. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. 

w. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 

B. Material: Copper 

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. 

D. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with 

isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of 

three bands of green and two bands of yellow. 

E. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 

1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in 

diameter. 

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 

3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper 

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. 

F. Aluminum Bonding Conductors: 

2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS 

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of 

conductors and connected items. 

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors type. 

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written 

instructions. 






A. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. 

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connection to structural steel. 

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, 

unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. 

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. 

C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in 

addition to those required by NEC: 

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 

2. Lighting circuits. 

3. Receptacle circuits. 

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

6. Flexible raceway runs. 

D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected 

to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard 

grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived 

system or service, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, 

isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the 

purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate equipment grounding 

conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding 

terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or 

service, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical 

devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and 

to air duct. 


A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. 

Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or 

damage. 

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers 

and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Bond straps directly to the basic structure 

taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance. 





A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select 

connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be 

galvanically compatible. 

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact 

points closer to order of galvanic series. 

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 

3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical 

clamps. 

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future 

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding 

lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type 

connectors. 

C. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without 

mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. 

Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. 

Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare 

grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to 

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use 

those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 

E. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential 

pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. 

Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has 

been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. 


A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test 

to ensure the grounding continuity. 





SECTION 16072 – ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 

2. Seismic restraints for electrical equipment and systems. 


A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 

B. IBC: International Building Code. 

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 

D. NBC: National Building Code. 

E. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development. 

F. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 

G. SBC: Standard Building Code. 

H. Seismic Restraint: A structural support element such as a metal framing member, a cable, an anchor bolt 

or stud, a fastening device, or an assembly of these items used to transmit seismic forces from an item of 

equipment or system to building structure and to limit movement of item during a seismic event. 

I. UBC: Uniform Building Code. 


A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type 

and size of electrical support and seismic-restraint component used. 

1. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and 

anchorage devices, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Professional engineer 

qualification requirements are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." Include the 

following: 

1. Fabricated Supports: Representations of field-fabricated supports not detailed on Drawings. 

ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 16072 - 1



C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other 

systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. 

D. Welding certificates. 

E. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 

F. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Testing of Seismic Anchorage Devices: Comply with testing requirements in Part 3 and in Division 16 

Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 




selection: 



specified. 

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS 

A. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or 

imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 

B. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-3, factory-fabricated components for field 

assembly. 

1. Available Manufacturers: 

a. Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. 

b. ERICO International Corporation. 

c. Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit. 

d. GS Metals Corp. 

e. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. 

f. National Pipe Hanger Corp. 

g. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

h. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 

i. Wesanco, Inc. 

2. Finishes: 

a. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 

3. 

b. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating 

applied according to MFMA-3. 

c. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-3. 

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading and applicable seismic forces. 




C. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and 

angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 

surface. 


a. Allied Support Systems; Aickinstrut Unit. 

b. Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. 

c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. 

d. Seasafe, Inc. 

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with 

those items. 

3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles. 

4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit structural loading and applicable seismic forces. 

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1. 

E. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types 

and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. 

F. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body 

and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. 

Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual 

conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. 

G. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and 

bars; black and galvanized. 

H. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports 

to building surfaces include the following: 

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, 

steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and 

building materials where used. 

a. Available Manufacturers: 

1) Hilti, Inc. 

2) ITW Construction Products. 

3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Inc. 

2. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached 

structural element. 

3. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 

4. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 

5. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 

2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS 

A. Rated Strength, Features, and Application Requirements for Restraint Components: As defined in reports 

by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 




1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components used shall be 

at least five times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. 

B. Angle and Channel-Type Brace Assemblies: Steel angles or steel slotted-support-system components; 

with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. 

C. Cable Restraints: ASTM A 603, zinc-coated, steel wire rope attached to steel or stainless-steel thimbles, 

brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service. 


a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 

b. Loos & Co., Inc. 

c. Mason Industries, Inc. 

2. Seismic Mountings, Anchors, and Attachments: Devices as specified in Part 2 "Support, 

Anchorage, and Attachment Components" Article, selected to resist seismic forces. 

3. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted 

connections reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod, of design recognized by an agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

4. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated 

rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs used. 

5. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements 

and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type 

and size of attachment devices used. 

2.4 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of 

supported equipment. 

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and 

plates. 



A. Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, 

except if requirements in this Section are stricter. 

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, 

IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. 

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support 

system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified 

design load limits. 

1. Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application. 

2. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction 

action for retention in support channel. 




D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38mm) 

and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings 

and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 

3.2 SUPPORT AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article. 

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be 

supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. 

C. Install seismic-restraint components using methods approved by the evaluation service providing required 

submittals for component. 

D. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components 

so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading 

limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported 

components plus 200 lb (90 kg). 

E. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical 

items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise 

indicated by code: 

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 

2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor 

fasteners on solid masonry units. 

3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 

4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers 

and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do 

not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) 

thick. 

5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts 

Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 Spring-tension 

clamps. 

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, 

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and 

other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint 

strength and anchorage requirements. 

F. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS 

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated 

metal supports. 

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to 

support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. 

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 




3.4 INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS 

A. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient 

media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in floor. 

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient 

media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. 

C. Restraint Cables: Provide slack within maximums recommended by manufacturer. 

D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of 

beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. 

3.5 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION 

A. Make flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they 

cross expansion and seismic-control joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different 

structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to electrical equipment that is anchored to 

a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and 

inspections and prepare test reports. 

B. Testing: Test pullout resistance of seismic anchorage devices. 

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to 


2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained 

component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' 

advance notice. 

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary loadspreading 

members. 

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 

6. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are 

achieved. 

C. Record test results. 





SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Identification for raceway. 

2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 

3. Warning labels and signs. 

4. Instruction signs. 

5. Equipment identification labels. 

6. Miscellaneous identification products. 


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used 

in identification signs and labels. 

C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, 

and graphic features of identification products. 


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. 


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 


A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the 

Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and 

Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent 

designations throughout Project. 

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where 

devices are to be applied. 

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. 

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 1




2.1 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field 

for each raceway and cable size. 

B. Color for Printed Legend: 

1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field. 

2. Refer to section 16050 for system and colons. 

3. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable. 

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemicalresistant 

coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 

D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter 

sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. 

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches 

(50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by 

gripping action. 

F. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; 

compounded for outdoor use. 

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION 

MATERIALS 

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 

1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. 

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend 

machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 

2.3 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS 

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. 

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, 

configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, 

legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal 

size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm). 

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - 

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF 

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 




2.4 INSTRUCTION SIGNS 

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 

sq. in. (129 sq. cm). 

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 

3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS 

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters 

on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). 

B. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, blackink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch 

(25 mm) . 

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS 

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 

2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum. 

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. 

B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 

1. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry: 

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a block filler. 

1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. 

2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 

2. Interior Gypsum Board: 

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a primer. 

1) Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. 


3. Interior Ferrous Metal: 

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a primer. 

1) Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. 


4. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways): 

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One [finish coat(s) over a primer. 

1) Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. 





C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws 

with nuts and flat and lock washers. 



A. Accessible Raceways 600 V or Less, for Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A: Identify with 

orange snap-around label in bands. 

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color-coded, 

self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands : 

1. Fire Alarm System: Red. 

2. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. 

3. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. 

4. Security System: Blue and yellow. 

5. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. 

6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. 

7. Control Wiring: Green and red. 

C. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits 

in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor 

according to source and circuit number. 

D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source and circuit 

number. 

E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, 

sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull 

points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by 

manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation 

and Maintenance Manual. 

F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 

29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warning signs. Identify system voltage with black letters on 

an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

a. Controls with external control power connections. 

2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, 

apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in 

finished spaces. 




G. Instruction Signs: 

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of 

electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend 


H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is 

consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to 

disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, 

terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, 

signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 

1. Labeling Instructions: 

a. Indoor Equipment Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise 

indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- 

(38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. 

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: 


a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 

b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 

c. Transformers. 

d. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. 

e. Disconnect switches. 

f. Enclosed circuit breakers. 

g. Motor starters. 

h. Push-button stations. 

i. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. 

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. 

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without 

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. 

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods 

recommended by manufacturer of identification device. 

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the 

location and substrate. 

F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely 

encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate 

bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in 

straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. 

G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below 

for ungrounded feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 

1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities having 

jurisdiction permit, field applied. 




2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 

a. Phase A: Black. 

b. Phase B: Red. 

c. Phase C: Blue. 

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 

a. Phase A: Brown. 

b. Phase B: Orange. 

c. Phase C: Yellow. 

4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance 

of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply 

last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid 

obscuring factory cable markings. 

H. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 painting Sections. 





SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for 

wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 



B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 

C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by 

Contractor. 




jurisdiction. 


Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to 

supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. 



use. 

C. Comply with NFPA 70. 






products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers 

specified. 

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120- 1



2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 


1. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div. 

2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 

3. General Cable Corporation. 

4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 

5. Southwire Company. 

B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, 

and ratings. 

C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7; solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and 

smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger 

D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN XHHW complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7. 

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES 


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 

2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 

3. Hubbell/Anderson. 

4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 

5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division. 

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class 

for application and service indicated. 


3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS 

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in 

raceway. 

C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in 

raceway. 

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single 

conductors in raceway. 

E. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway Power-limited, fire-protective, signaling circuit 

cable. 

F. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 

G. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway Power-limited cable, concealed in building 

finishes. 





A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not 

deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling 

tensions and sidewall pressure values. 

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not 

damage cables or raceway. 

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow 

surface contours where possible. 

E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 

F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration 

Firestop Systems." 

G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical 

Materials and Methods Electrical Identification" 


A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening 

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better 


C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) 12 inches (300 mm) 

of slack. 


A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing: 

B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for 

compliance with requirements. 

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, 

Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters. 

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 



3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve 






SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 


1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and 

identification products. 

2. Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work" for seismic restraints and bracing of 

raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 

3. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service 

fittings. 



B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. 


D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and 

cabinets. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings, boxes, 

enclosures, and cabinets. 

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and 

ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 






D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures, cabinets, 

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic 

Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following: 

RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 1



1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of 

assembled components or on calculation. 

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts 

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully 

operational after the seismic event." 

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and 

describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their 

installation requirements. 




use. 



A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with 

other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC 

equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 







specified. 

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING 

A. Available Manufacturer[s]: 


2. Alflex Inc. 

3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 

4. Electri-Flex Co. 

5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 

6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 

7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 

8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 

9. Wheatland Tube Co. 

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 

C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5. 




D. IMC: ANSI C80.6. 

E. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. 

F. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. 

G. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 

1. Fittings: Compression type. 

H. FMC: Aluminum. 

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. 

J. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. 

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS 


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 

2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 

4. Hoffman. 

5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 

6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 

7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 

9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division. 

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 

13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary. 

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. 

D. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. 

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

F. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. 

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 

H. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, 

finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch 

and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of 

different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 




2.4 FACTORY FINISHES 

A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to 

factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping. 



A. Outdoors: 

B. Indoors: 

1. Exposed: EMT . 


3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric 

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 

4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 

5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows: 

a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel nonmetallic. 

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 21). 

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 

1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that 

material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. 


A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. 

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. 

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 

D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. 

E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of 

bends are not visible above the finished slab. 

F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs 

of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering 

type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow 

surface contours as much as possible. 




1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 

2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be 

installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. 

I. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. 

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. 

J. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. 

K. Terminations: 

1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and 

install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 

2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so 

end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so 

coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed. 

L. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 

200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. 

M. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size (DN 53) and Smaller: In addition to above 

requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90degree 

bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with 

these requirements. 

N. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed 

sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover 

plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the 

following points: 

1. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. 

O. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. 

Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend 

conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. 

Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections. 

P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and 

semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and 

for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible 

connections. 

Q. Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 

R. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner. 


A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without 

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 



manufacturer. 




3.4 CLEANING 

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes 

and repair damaged finishes. 





SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters. 

2. Single- -pole switches. 

3. Device wall plates. 

4. Pin and sleeve connectors and receptacles. 


A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. 

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. 



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. 

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 

D. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer. 



use. 



A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 

WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1



1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 





1. Wiring Devices: 

2.2 RECEPTACLES 

a. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary. 

b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 

d. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 

e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. 

A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-596G, and 

UL 498. 

B. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral 

NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design 

units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter. 

C. Hazardous (Classified) Location Receptacles: Comply with NEMA FB 11. 

2.3 CORD AND PLUG SETS 

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment 

being connected. 

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with greeninsulated 

grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. 

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for 

connection. 

2.4 SWITCHES 

A. Single - Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20. 

B. Snap Switches: General-Duty grade, quiet type. 

2.5 WALL PLATES 

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 

2. Material for Finished Spaces: satin-finished stainless steel 0.04-inch- (1-mm) thick. 

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel . 




2.6 FINISHES 

A. Color: 

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory or as selected by Architect unless 

otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. 

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red . 



A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines. 

B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to manufacturer's 


C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' written 

instructions. 

D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and 

with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall 

plates. 

E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting. 

F. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 

3.2 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Electrical Identification." 

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or 

engraved machine printing with white -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers 

or tags inside outlet boxes. 


A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 

B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening 



A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper 

polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements. 

2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's 





B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 





SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 

2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces. 

3. Emergency lighting units. 

4. Exit signs. 

5. Accessories, including fluorescent fixture dimmers, occupancy sensors, and Lighting fixture 

retrofitting. 

B. See Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 

C. See Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time 

switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture designation. 

Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 

1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated parameters. 

2. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. 

3. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts. 

4. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Furnish data required in 

"Submittals" Article in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 

5. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound 

transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section 

"Diffusers, Registers and Grilles." 

6. Lamps. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods 

of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. 

C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the 

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items 

involved: 

1. Suspended ceiling components. 

2. Structural members to which lighting-fixture suspension systems will be attached. 

3. Other items in finished ceiling, including the following: 

a. Air outlets and inlets. 

b. Speakers. 

c. Sprinklers. 

d. Access panels. 

4. Perimeter moldings. 

INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511-1



E. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by 

product manufacturer. 


G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, 

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 include the following: 

1. Catalog data for each fixture. Include the diffuser, ballast, and lamps installed in that fixture. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 

100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 




A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as indicated on contract 

drawings or approved equal. 

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Refer to the Light fixture schedule provided as part of the contract documents. 

B. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. 

C. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A. 

D. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and 

NEMA LE 5A as applicable. 

E. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. 

F. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

G. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and 

sagging. 

H. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating 

conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, 

lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in 

operating position. 

I. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. 

J. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 




1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and 

other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different thickness is 

indicated. 

b. UV stabilized. 

c. Pattern 12 lenses where a diffused light source is desired. 

d. Pattern 15 lenses to minimize imaging on video monitors. 

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 

K. Air-Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat extraction and for 

attaching an air-diffuser-boot assembly specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and 

Grilles." 

1. Air Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air-diffuser-boot assemblies. 

2. Heat Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity. 

3. Combination Heat Removal and Air Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp cavity at both 

ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air supply units. 

4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return-air volume. 

5. Static Fixture: Air supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches active units. 

2.3 BALLASTS 

A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; rapid start type, unless 

otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for 

full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. 

1. Sound Rating: A. 

2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 

3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 

4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 

5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.35 minimum, 1.5 maximum. 

6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 

7. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 

B. Electromagnetic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, highpower 

factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 

1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. 

C. Ballasts for Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: 

Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types. 

D. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type. 

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp 

type indicated. 

E. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type. 

1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the 

associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. 




a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

b. Low-Level Operation: 50 percent of rated lamp lumens or as indicated. 

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp 


F. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI 

C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output 

unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 






8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 


10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on 

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 

11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum. 

G. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type. 





H. Internal-Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory 

mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 

1. Emergency Connection: Operate fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens 

each or as specified on drawings. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched 

circuit to fixture ballast. 

2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 

3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering 

ceiling space. 

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and 

demonstrates unit operability. 

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; 

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 

5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. 

I. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the 

following features, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single-lamp ballasts. 

3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 

4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 




5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize 

audible fixture noise. 

J. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 





5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 

6. Power Factor: .90 or higher. 

7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on 

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 

8. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. 

K. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter. Igniter-starter shall 

have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C. 

1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed 

within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150 W. 

a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac. 

b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS. 

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F (Minus 40 deg C). 

3. Open-circuit operation shall not reduce average lamp life. 

2.4 EXIT SIGNS 

A. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, 

comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 

2. Letters shall be green, not less than 6 inches high, strokes not less than 0.75 inches wide. 

Luminance contrast shall be greater than 0.8. 

2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS 

A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 

2.6 LAMPS 

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 

2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 

3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 

percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage 

approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from 

battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and 


5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright 

glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 

A. Low-Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; 

shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. 




B. T8 Rapid-Start low-mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Rated 32 W maximum, nominal length 48 inches (1220 

mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated 

life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. T8 Rapid-Start low-mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches 

(610 mm), 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average 

rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500K average rated life of 10,000 

hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 5 W, 250 initial lumens (minimum). 




5. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 900 initial lumens (minimum). 



E. High-Pressure-Sodium Lamps: NEMA C78.42, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 21 

(minimum), color temperature 1900K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours. 

F. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 65 (minimum), 

and color temperature 4000K. 

G. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000K. 

H. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000K. 

2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS 

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for channel- and angle-iron 

supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. 

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish 

same as fixture. 

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single 

fixture. Finish same as fixture. 

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, 12 gage (2.68 mm). 

E. Wires For Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 

gage (2.68 mm). 

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. 

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded 

attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. 

H. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended by fixture 

manufacturer. 

2.8 FINISHES 

A. Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated. 




1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 

2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant. 



A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. 

B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support. 

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more 

than 6 inches (150 mm) from fixture corners. 

2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with 

clips that are UL listed for the application. 

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in 

acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal 

channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. 

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire 

or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3. 

C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows: 

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for 

each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 

4. Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable. 

D. Air-Handling Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment. 

E. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. 





A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. 

B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. 

C. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify normal 

transfer to battery power source and retransfer to normal. 

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting 

results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. 

E. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of corrosion. 



CONTRACTS DIVISION 


AMENDED LOBBY ALTERATIONS 

NJ2-17 

OTTO KRETCHMER ELDERLY 

31 and 35 VAN VECHTEN STREET 

NEWARK, NJ 07114 

BID DOCUMENT 

PART IV 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

Prepared By: 




December 15, 2010 



Chairperson 

MODIA BUTLER 



RASHARD CASEY 


NANCY PEREZ 

LENIN CRUZ

OTTO KRETCHMER ELDERLY NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORITY 

AMENDED LOBBY ALTERATIONS, 31 AND 35 VAN VECHTEN NJ2-17 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

01010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK 

01040 PROJECT COORDINATION 

01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

01270 UNIT PRICES 

01100 GENERAL CONDITIONS 

01300 SUBMITTALS 

01400 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

01546 SAFETY AND HEALTH 

01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 

01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 

03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 

07210 BUILDING INSULATION 

07531 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 

07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 

07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 

07920 JOINT SEALANTS 

08460 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 

09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 

09310 CERAMIC TILE 

09512 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 

09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 

09912 PAINTING 

14240 ELEVATOR CONTROLS 

15000 BASIC METHODS AND MATERIALS 

15110 VALVES 

15194 FUEL GAS PIPING 

15411 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 

15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 

15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 

15770 AIR-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 

16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 

16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 

16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 

16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 

16140 WIRING DEVICES 

16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING 




DRAWINGS 

T-0 TITLE SHEET, DRAWING LIST, SITE PLAN & LOCATION MAP 

T-1 GENERAL NOTES, LEGEND, ABBREVIATION LIST & ADA REQUIREMENTS 

A-1 EXISTING / DEMO FLOOR PLAN, CANOPY DEMO PLAN & NOTES 

A-2 PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN, CANOPY ROOF PLAN, ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE, MATERIAL 

SPECS & NOTES 

A-3 REFLECTED CEILING PLANS & CEILING SCHEDULE 

A-4 EXTERIOR ELEVATION, CANOPY DETAILS, DOOR AND PARTITION TYPES, SECTIONS AND 

SCHEDULES 

E-1 EXISTING / DEMOLITION ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN, ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND NOTES 

E-2 PROPOSED ELECTRICAL POWER PLANS, ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND NOTES 

E-3 PROPOSED ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLANS, LIGHTING SCHEDULE, LEGEND AND NOTES 

P/H-1 EXISTING / PROPOSED PLUMBING AND HVAC PLANS, DETAILS, SCHEDULES AND NOTES 




SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF THE WORK 



A. Drawings and conditions of the construction contract, including but not limited to General Conditions, 

and the Special Conditions listed below, apply to work of this section. 

1. Section 01010, Summary of the Work. 

2. Section 01040, Project Coordination. 

3. Section 01045, Cutting and Patching. 

4. Section 01300, Submittals. 

5. Section 01500, Temporary Facilities. 

6. Section 01546, Safety and Health. 

7. Section 01700, Project Closeout. 

1.2 PROJECT/WORK IDENTIFICATION 

A. Project Name and Location: 


NJ2-17 – Otto Krethmer Elderly 

Amended Lobby and Management Offices Alterations 

31 and 35 Van Vechten Street 

Newark, New Jersey 07114 

B. Architect: The term "Architect" refers to the professional services contractor listed below. The 

Architect's status relative to this construction will be fully delineated in writing by the Architect prior to 

the pre-award or pre-construction conference. The Architect may furnish personnel for site supervision if 

required by his contract. 



Paramus, New Jersey 07652 

C. Owner: The Owner is the Newark Housing Authority, 500 Broad Street, Newark, New Jersey 07102. 

The Owner’s Designated Representative is: Massimo Taurisano. 

D. Coordination with on-site management staff: Coordinate with on-site management office issues of site 

and building access, material delivery and working hours. 

E. Abbreviated Written Summary: Briefly, and without force and effect upon contract documents, work of 

contract can be summarized as follows: 

1. Generally, the work includes demolitions, new partitions and doors, installation of new ceilings, 

new finishes and fixtures, casework, plumbing fixtures, and electrical systems. 

2. Alterations are approximately 580 sf including but not limited to the following: 

a Renovations at building laundry room. 

b New canopy roofing and exterior finishes and fixtures at the front entry. 

c. New power-operated sliding doors at front entry. 

F. The work will be constructed under a general construction contract. 




1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES 

A. General: The Contractor shall limit his/her use of the premises to the work indicated on drawings as 

“Designated Limit of Construction”, so as to allow for Owner occupancy and use. 

1. Use of the Site: Confine operations at the site to the areas permitted under the Contract. Portions 

of the site beyond areas on which work is indicated are not to be disturbed. Conform to site rules 

and regulations affecting the work while engaged in project construction. See "Project 

Coordination" section. 

2. Contractor Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a safe and weathertight 

condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 

Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction 

period. See "Project Coordination" section. 

a. For use of existing toilets, see "Temporary Facilities" section. 

3. Use of Existing Elevators: See "Temporary Facilities" section. 

1.4 OWNER OCCUPANCY 

A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the existing building during the entire period of 

construction. Cooperate fully with the Owner representative during construction operations to minimize 

conflicts and to facilitate Owner usage. Perform the work so as not to interfere with the Owner 

operations. 

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to place and install equipment as necessary in 

completed areas of the building and to occupy such completed areas prior to substantial completion, 

provided that such occupancy does not substantially interfere with completion of the work. Such placing 

of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the work or any part of the work. 

1.5 WORKING HOURS 

A. Refer to Part 1, Section 7.2.8 for Work Hours. 

B. Contractor shall meet all necessary requirements for all tests. 

1.6 INSPECTION BY REGULATORY AUTHORITIES 

A. This project is subject to inspection by the following regulatory authorities: 

1. City of Newark 

2. State of New Jersey 

B. Notify Architect Representative when inspections take place. Decision as to action to be taken as a result 

of inspections by regulatory authorities will be made by the Architect. 

1.7 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS 

A. Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for performance of certain construction 

operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this 

Contract. This Contract will include the following: 

1. Laundry: Laundry equipment will be procured under a separate contract.. 

B. It shall be part of this contract to install wall-hung items provided as part of the furniture contract. 

1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS 

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16division 

format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 




B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the 

intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These 

conventions are as follows: 

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is 

abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not 

stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and 

plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract 

Documents indicates. 

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. 

Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. 

Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to 

describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so 

noted. 

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are 

implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 

1.9 MISCELLANEOUS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS 

A. Items shown or scheduled to be salvaged shall be removed and turned over to the Owner. Items will 

remain the property of the Owner. Store where directed by the Owner’s Representative. 

B. New Work: Unless otherwise noted on drawings or specified, new work in extension of existing 

conditions shall correspond in all respects with that to which it connects, or to similar existing conditions, 

in materials, workmanship, and finish. 

C. Alterations to Existing Work: 

1. Existing work shall be cut, drilled altered, removed, or temporarily removed and replaced as 

necessary for performance of work under the contract. Work that is replaced shall match similar 

existing work. Structural members shall not be cut or altered, except where noted on drawings, 

without authorization of the Architect Representative. Work remaining in place, which is damaged 

or defaced during this contract, shall be restored to the condition existing at time of award of 

contract. 

2. Discolored or unfinished surfaces exposed by removal of existing work and indicated to be the 

final exposed surfaces shall be refinished or the material shall be replaced as necessary to make 

contiguous work uniform and harmonious. Work out of alignment where exposed by removal of 

existing work shall be called to the Architect’s Representative attention. Necessary corrective 

work directed by the Architect Representative will be subject to adjustment of the contract in 

accordance with "Differing Site Conditions" clause of the General Conditions. 


PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 





SECTION 01040 - PROJECT COORDINATION 



A. This section specifies general administrative procedures and performance required, including but not 

necessarily limited to, the following: 

1. Coordination and meetings. 

2. Administrative/supervisory personnel. 

3. Limitations for use of site. 

4. Special reports. 

5. Trades people and workmanship standards. 

6. Inspections, tests and reports. 

7. General installation provisions. 

8. Cleaning and protection. 

9. Environmental Protection. 

10. Suspension of work. 

1.2 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 

A. General: Prepare and distribute to each entity performing work at project site, a written memorandum 

of instructions on required coordination activities, including required notices, reports and attendance at 

meetings. Prepare similar memorandum for separate contractors where interfacing of work is required. 

B. Coordination drawings: Refer to clause "Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings, and Schedules," of 

"General Conditions," for general requirements. 

1. Work by Separate Entities: Where work by separate entities requires off-site fabrication of 

products and materials which must be accurately interfaced and closely intermeshed to produce 

required results, prepare coordination drawings to indicate how work shown by separate shop 

drawings will be interfaced, intermeshed, and sequenced for installation. Comply with submittal 

requirements of "Submittals" section. 

2. Approval: Before any sleeves or inserts are set or any mechanical or electrical equipment or 

foundations or other work is installed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval by 

the Architect composite coordination drawings for all equipment rooms, spaces and other areas 

in which work of two or more trades or subcontractors is to be installed and in which the 

probability of interference exists, as determined by either the Contractor or the Architect. 

Drawings shall show the work of all trades covered, shall be drawn to a scale not smaller than 

1:30, and shall show clearly in both plan and elevation that all work can be installed without 

interference. 

3. Work installed without prior approval: Any work installed prior to approval of coordination 

drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. Subsequent relocations required to avoid interferences 

shall be made without additional expense to the Owner. In case interference develops, the 

Architect will decide which work shall be relocated, regardless of which was installed first. 

C. Coordination of Trades: Coordinate work of different trades so that interference between mechanical, 

electrical, architectural, and structural work, including existing services, will be avoided and within 

limits indicated the maximum practical space for operation, repair, removal, and testing of equipment is 

provided. Keep pipes, ducts, conduit, and the like as close as possible to ceiling slab, walls, and 

columns to take up a minimum amount of space. Locate pipes, ducts, and equipment so that they do not 

interfere with the intended use of eyebolts and other lifting devices. 




D. Monthly Coordination Meeting: In addition to specific pre-installation meetings and coordination 

meetings for each major element of work, and regular project meetings for other purposes (as indicated 

elsewhere in contract documents), hold monthly general project coordination meetings at regularly 

scheduled times which are convenient for everyone involved. Request representation (at each meeting) 

by every entity currently involved in coordination or planning for work of the entire project. Conduct 

meetings in a manner which will resolve coordination problems. Record results of meetings and 

distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from 

each meeting. 

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE/SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL 

A. General: In addition to a General Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory personnel 

required for performance of the work, provide specific coordinating personnel as specified herein. 

B. Environmental Control Officer: The Contractor shall designate an "Environmental Control Officer" 

whose duties shall include the responsibility for enforcing the environmental protection provisions of 

these specifications including safety and health; the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health 

Act; and other applicable Federal, state and local standards. As outlined in the applicable sections of 

this specification, submit for approval by the Architect the proposed traffic flow plan, security plan, 

program for temporary structures, housecleaning plan, erosion control plan, demolition program, and 

safety and health plan. After approval by the Architect, the implementation and enforcement of these 

programs shall become the responsibility of the Environmental Control Officer. Any changes in the 

programs must be requested by the Contractor through the Environmental Control Officer for written 

concurrence by the Architect. 

C. Project Coordinator: Provide a full-time Project Coordinator, who is experienced in administration and 

supervision of building construction including mechanical and electrical work, and who is hereby 

authorized to act as the general coordinator of interfaces between units of work. For purpose of this 

provision, "interface" is defined to include the scheduling and sequencing of work, sharing of access to 

work spaces, installations, protection of each other's work, cutting and patching, tolerances, cleaning, 

selections for compatibility, preparation of coordination drawings, inspections, tests, and temporary 

facilities and services. 

D. Submittal of Staff Names, Duties: Within 15 days of contract award date, submit a listing of 

Contractor's principal staff assignments and consultants, naming persons and listing their addresses and 

telephone numbers. 

1.4 LIMITATIONS FOR USE OF SITE 

A. General: In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements shown on drawings, and indicated 

by other contract documents, administer allocation of available space equitably among entities needing 

access and space, so as to produce best overall efficiency in performance of total work of project. 

Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and 

equipment on site. 

B. Use of Equipment by Owner: See clause of same title in the General Conditions. 

C. Vacating of Premises: The Owner will vacate the space to be renovated during performance of work 

under the contract. 

D. Occupancy of Premises: All other areas of the premises other than spaces to be renovated under the 

Contract will be occupied by the Owner during performance of the Work. 

E Parking Facilities: Coordinate with Site Manager the availability of parking on site during construction. 

The Contractor and his employees shall make their own arrangements for vehicle parking. 




F. Materials on the Site: Unless otherwise noted or specified, materials and equipment that are removed 

and not reused under this contract become the property of the Contractor. 

G. Storage or Sale of Material on Site: Storage or sale of excess salvageable material on the site is not 

permitted. Contractor shall remove from site. 

1.5 SPECIAL REPORTS 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, submit special reports to the Architect within one day of 

occurrence requiring special report, with copy to others affected by occurrence. 

B. Reporting Accidents: Refer to Section, "Safety and Health," 01546. 

C. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of unusual and significant nature occurs at site (examples: 

visit by news media; extraordinary weather phenomenon), prepare and submit a special report listing 

chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or 

effects, and similar pertinent information. When such events are known or predictable in advance, 

advise the Architect in advance at earliest possible date. 

1.6 TRADESPERSONS AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS 

A. General: Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that persons performing work at site are skilled 

and knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship needed to produce required quality-levels for 

workmanship in completed work. Remove and replace work which does not comply with workmanship 

standards as specified and as recognized in the construction industry for applications indicated. Remove 

and replace other work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its replacement. 

B. Availability of Tradespersons: At each progress or coordination meeting, review availability of 

tradespersons and projected needs to accomplish work as scheduled. Require each entity employing 

personnel to report on events which might affect progress of work. Where possible, consider 

alternatives and take actions to avoid disputes and delays. 

1.7 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND REPORTS 

A. General: Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in determination of probable 

compliances of work with requirements, but do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for those 

compliances, or for general fulfillment of requirements of contract documents. Specified inspections 

and tests are not intended to limit Contractor's quality control program. Afford reasonable access to 

agencies performing tests and inspections. 

1. Owner Tests: Where tests or inspections are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will 

engage independent testing agency to perform required services. 

B. Qualification of Testing Agencies: Except as otherwise indicated and except where manufacturer's 

testing facilities are indicated as acceptable, engage independent testing laboratories specializing in 

required services and acceptable to the Architect. 

C. Reports: Refer to Section, "Submittals" 01300. 

1.8 SCHEDULING OF WORK, SUSPENSION OF WORK 

A. Utility Shutdown: Work which requires the shutdown of any utility serving the building shall be 

performed only after scheduling said shutdown at least 72 hours in advance with the Owner’s 

Representative and the Architect. 




B. Building Facilities: Coordinate and schedule all work with the Owner’s Representative to prevent any 

interruption of activities. Schedule any exceptionally loud work (eg. jackhammering) with Owner’s 

Representative before proceeding. 

C. Suspension of Work: In the event that work is directed to be suspended or interrupted by request of the 

Owner’s Representative, and such delays cause a delay in the completion of the contract as a whole, an 

equitable adjustment in contract time will be made. Obtain written verification of such delays from the 

Architect. 



3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS 

A. Pre-Installation Conferences: Where pre-installation conferences are specified in technical sections; 

well in advance of installation meet at project site with installers and representatives of manufacturers 

and fabricators who are involved in or affected by unit of work, and in its coordination or integration 

with other work which has preceded or will follow. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 

At each meeting review progress of other work and preparations for particular work under 

consideration, including requirements of contract documents, options, related change orders, purchases, 

deliveries, shop drawings, product data; quality control samples, possible conflicts, compatibility 

problems, time schedules, weather limitations, temporary facilities, space and access limitations, 

structural limitations, governing regulations, safety, inspection and testing requirements, required 

performance results, recording requirements, and protection. Record significant discussions of each 

conference, and record agreements and disagreements, along with final plan of action. Distribute record 

of meeting promptly to everyone concerned. 

1. Do not proceed with the work if associated pre- installation conference cannot be concluded 

successfully. Instigate actions to resolve impediments to performance of the work, and 

reconvene conference at earliest date feasible. 

B. Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to 

receive work, and conditions under which work will be performed, and to report (in writing to 

Contractor) unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions 

have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with 

manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to extent these are more 

explicit or more stringent than requirements indicated in contract documents. 

D. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation, and reject damaged and 

defective items. 

E. Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecasted weather, and status of 

project completion which will ensure best possible results for each unit of work, in coordination with 

entire work. Isolate each unit of work from noncompatible work, as required to prevent deterioration. 

F. Coordinate enclosure (closing-in) of work with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize 

necessity of uncovering work for that purpose. 




G. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of work at 

industry-recognized standard mounting heights for applications indicated. Refer questionable mounting 

height choices to the Architect for final decision. 


A. General: During handling and installation of work at project site clean and protect work in progress and 

adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly 

installed work where reasonably required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of 

substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently 

as necessarily through remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to 

ensure operability without damaging effects. 

B. Limiting Exposures of Work: To extent possible through reasonable control and protection methods, 

supervise performance of work in a manner and by means which will ensure that none of the work, 

whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise 

deleterious exposures during construction period. Such exposures include (where applicable, but not by 

way of limitation) static loading, dynamic loading, internal pressures, external pressures, high or low 

temperatures, thermal shock, high or low humidity, air contamination or pollution, water, ice, solvents, 

chemicals, light, radiation, puncture, abrasion, heavy traffic, soiling, bacteria, insect infestation, 

combustion, electrical current, high speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear, misuse, 

incompatible interface, destructive testing, misalignment, excessive weathering, unprotected storage, 

improper shipping/ handling, theft and vandalism. 

3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 

A. Solid, Liquid, and Gaseous Contaminants: Contractor shall be responsible for the proper disposal of all 

solid, liquid, and gaseous contaminants in accordance with all local codes and regulations, together with 

the following requirements: 

1. Discharge gaseous contaminants so that they will be sufficiently diluted with fresh air to reduce 

the toxicity to an acceptable level. 

2. Liquid contaminants may, subject to local utility standards, be diluted with water to a level of 

quality acceptable in the local sewer system, or shall be contained in approved vessels for 

disposal at approved sites. 

B. Disposal of Refuse: Remove refuse resulting from construction operations from the site. 

C. Covered Chutes: All chutes for refuse, and the like, shall be covered, or of such a design to fully 

confine the material to prevent the dissemination of dust. 

D. Trucking: 

1. Load all trucks leaving the site with loose materials or debris in a manner that will prevent 

dropping of materials on streets. Fasten suitable tarpaulins over the load before they enter 

surrounding paved streets. 

2. The Contractor and all subcontractors on or delivering to the site shall conform to all local 

regulations regarding load limits. 

E. Construction Site Maintenance: 

1. Store all supplies and equipment on project site so as to preclude mechanical and climatic 

damage. Maintain site in a neat and orderly manner. 

F. Noise Control: 

1. Comply with all applicable state and local laws, ordinances, and regulations relative to noise 

control. 








SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 


1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS 

A. Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the 

installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore 

surfaces to their original condition. 

1. Cutting and patching is performed for coordination of the work, to uncover work for access or 

inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed or for other similar 

purposes. 

2. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products, or during the initial 

fabrication, erection or installation processes is not considered to be "cutting and patching" under 

this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also not 

considered to be "cutting and patching". 

3. "Selective Demolition" is recognized as a related-but-separate category of work, which may or 

may not require cutting and patching as defined in this section; refer to section "Selective 

Demolition-01732". 

B. Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and 

limitations applicable to individual units of work. 

1. See section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems-07841” for patching fire-rated construction. 

2. Unless otherwise specified requirements of this section apply to mechanical and electrical work. 

Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 sections for additional requirements and limitations on 

cutting and patching of mechanical and electrical work. 


A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner that would result 

in a reduction of load-carrying capacity or of load-deflection ratio. Prior to such work, obtain approval 

of project's structural engineer. 

B. Before cutting and patching the following categories of work, obtain the Architect's approval to proceed. 

1. Concrete structure including but not limited to, columns, beams, lintels, floor/ceiling slabs, and 

stairs. 

2. Miscellaneous structural metals, including lintels, equipment supports, and similar categories of 

work. 

3. Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment. 

4. Control, communication, conveying, and electrical wiring systems. 

C. When cutting openings in floor or altering concrete structural elements/systems, take care in not cutting 

the following structural items: 

1. Steel beams encased in concrete fireproofing. 

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building's exterior or in its occupied 

spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, result in lessening the building's aesthetic 

qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut 

and patch work. Remove and replace work judged by the Architect to be cut and patched in a visually 

unsatisfactory manner. 





A. Procedural Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where prior approval of cutting and patching is 

required, submit proposed procedures for this work well in advance of the time work will be performed 

and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the submittal: 

1. Describe nature of the work and how it is to be performed, indicating why cutting and patching 

cannot be avoided. Describe anticipated results of the work in terms of changes to existing work, 

including structural, operational and visual changes as well as other significant elements. 

2. List products to be used and firms, including their qualifications, that will perform work. 

3. Give dates when work is expected to be performed. 

4. Refer to section “Project Coordination-01040” for utility shutdowns required by this work. 

5. When cutting and patching of structural work involves the addition of reinforcement, submit 

details and engineering calculations to show how that reinforcement is integrated with original 

structure to satisfy requirements. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the Architect, use materials for cutting and 

patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be 

used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to 

visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal-or-better performance 



3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Before cutting, examine the surfaces to be cut and patched and the conditions under which the work is to 

be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action 


1. Before the start of cutting work, meet at the work site with all parties involved in cutting and 

patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and 

conflict between the various trades. Coordinate layout of the work and resolve potential conflicts 



A. Temporary Support: To prevent failure provide temporary support of work to be cut. 

B. Protection: Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from 

adverse weather conditions of that part of the project that may be exposed during cutting and patching 

operations. 

1. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 

C. Take precaution not to cut existing pipe, conduit or duct serving the building but scheduled to be 

relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 




3.3 PERFORMANCE 

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching work. Except as otherwise indicated 

or as approved by the Architect, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and 

complete work without delay. 

B. Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining 

work. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with original 

installer's recommendations. 

1. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or 

grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting 

machine such as a carborundum saw or core drill to insure a neat hole. 

2. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid 

marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed 

surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 

3. Comply with requirements of other applicable sections where cutting and patching requires 

excavating and backfilling. 

4. By-pass utility services such as pipe and conduit, before cutting, where such utility services are 

shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut-off conduit and pipe in walls or 

partitions to be removed. After by-pass and cutting, cap, valve or plug and seal tight remaining 

portion of pipe and conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter. 

C. Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified 

tolerances for the work. 

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 

2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration into 

retained adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 

3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another finished area, patch 

and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color 

and appearance. If necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance, remove existing floor 

and wall coverings and replace with new materials. 

a. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire 

unbroken surface containing patch, after patched area has received prime and base coat. 

4. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform 

appearance. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where work is performed or used as access to work. Remove 

completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and 

similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its 

original condition. 





SECTION 01100 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 


1.1 INTRODUCTION 

A. The Contractor is referred to the "INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS", "FORM OF PROPOSAL", 

"GENERAL CONDITIONS", "CONTRACT DRAWINGS and TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS", and 

all Amendments and Addenda thereto, if any, all of which are hereby made a part of this work. 

B. The Contractor Proposes to furnish all labor, material, equipment and services as required to 

satisfactorily complete the Lobby and Office Alterations at Otto Kretchmer Elderly; 31 Van Vechten 

Street and 35 Van Vechten Street for Newark Housing Authority, NJ, in accordance with the drawings, 

and specifications as prepared by Heritage Architecture, LLC. Prospective bidders may gain access to the 

work area, for inspection purposes, by contacting the respective development superintendents at the 

following sites: Prospective bidders may gain access to the work area, for inspection purposes, by 

contacting the respective development superintendents. 

C. The work covered by these specifications shall include furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials 

necessary for the completion of all operations in this bid package, all in strict accordance with applicable 

Local, State, and Federal code regulations, specifications, and drawings. 

D. Each bidder is required to visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint them with the condition 

as they exist so that he may understand the facilities, difficulties and restrictions and restrictions 

attendant to the execution of the work under the contract. The bidder shall notify the Asset Development 

and Preservation Department of their intention and purpose before making any site visit. Bidders shall 

thoroughly examine and be familiar with the requirements of the detailed specifications. 

E. All work should meet the following Minimum Property Standards. 

• Local written rehabilitation standards, and Local, state and Federal code requirements. 

• International Building Code (IBC), New Jersey Edition 

• Minimum Property Standards* at 24 CFR 200.925 or 200.926 (FHA) 

• Handicapped accessibility requirements, ADA, ADAAG) 

F. Prior to staging and construction, the contactor shall submit a detailed work schedule and sequence of 

procedures to the NHA for approval. The work schedule shall include the phasing of the project, site 

access, storage of materials and equipment, and an analysis of progress through completion. 

G. The work shall commence at the time stipulated in the Notice To Proceed to the contractor and shall be 

completed within one year or as stated. The time started shall include submission and if applicable 

approval of shop drawings. 

H. NHA intends to engage contractors to assist the NHA in conducting the Scope of Services described 

below and Bid Document Part III, Sec I on a Lump Contract award. 

I. The successful contractor, and/or his subcontractors will be experienced with the type of work included 

and will have the capacity to perform the full spectrum of work at multiple locations within the stipulated 

contract time. 

J. - L. (see SECTION 1 of Part III B – Bid Book 3) 

1.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS 

• Include all supplementary and miscellaneous items not shown or specified, but implied or required 

in order to complete the work. 




• Workmanship shall be of good quality and subject to the approval of the authority. 

• It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to formulate a schedule of work indicating all sequence of 

work. The NHA Contract Administrator shall be contacted in order to schedule the sequence of work 

in accordance with the needs of the Authority 

• Contractor shall protect and be responsible for the work areas including all temporary protection as 

required to control moisture penetration into the building during all stages of the construction. 

• Existing construction that is to remain and that has been damaged as a result of the Contract work by 

the Contractor shall be Restored or replaced to the former conditions and to the satisfaction of the 

NHA. 

• Start duly authorized work and continue on a full time work program until completed. 

• Maintain Dust control and keep work area clean at all times. Legally dispose of all unwanted 

materials and debris from the working areas and from exterior areas at the end of each working day. 

• Upon completion of the work, or when directed by the NHA, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean 

all surfaces of all spaces, including all exterior areas, which have become soiled as a result of the 

contract work. 

• The Contractor shall provide and maintain all time such as (but not limited to) sidewalk sheds, tapes, 

cones etc. at the work locations to protect the public from dust and construction debris. 

• The Contractor shall arrange his/her own storage space and store materials at his own risk for the 

duration of the contract work. 

• The Contractor shall keep all spaces assigned to him clean and free from rags, waste or debris. He 

shall protect the floors with suitable coverings and shall not use any on-site utilities for disposal of 

any waste, paints, oil or other materials, used in connection with this project. 

• The Building Manager may allow the Contractor to use elevators or atairs; otherwise, the Contractor 

is responsible for hoisting his material and debris. In case the Contractor is allowed to use the 

elevators and stairs, the Contractor shall properly protect the elevator cab walls while transporting 

materials and clean up at the end of each working day. Under no circumstances shall any items be 

thrown, dropped, or otherwise lowered to the ground outside the building. 

• The Contractor is responsible for any damage or losses to the building and building contents caused 

by his/her actions. 

1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE 

• Contract Time for completion shall be set at 90 Working Days to from the Notice to Proceed. 

• Work (submittals) shall commence within 2 weeks of the date of the Notice to Proceed. 

• All field verification and initial shop drawing submissions must be complete and delivered to 

Architect within 4 weeks from date of the Notice to Proceed. 

• Removal and installation must commence within 6 weeks of the Notice to Proceed date. 

• Substantial Completion must be achieved within 21weeks from the Notice to Proceed. 

• Punch list items must be addressed within 3 weeks of Substantial Completion. Final completion 

must therefore be achieved within 24 weeks from the Notice to Proceed. 





• The Newark Housing Authority reserves the right to issue $500.00 per day Liquidated Damages for 

uncompleted work, failure to perform in accordance with the NHA approved project schedule, or 

failure to complete work within the stated Contract Time. 


• A preconstruction meeting will be held at a time and place designated by the NHA, for the purpose 

of identifying responsibilities of the Owner’s and the Architect’s personnel and explanation of 

administrative procedure. 

The Contractor shall also use this meeting for the following minimum agenda: 

• Construction schedule 

• Use of areas of the site 

• Delivery and storage 

• Safety. 

• Security 

• Cleaning up 

• Subcontractor procedures relating to: 

• Submittals 

• Change orders 

• Applications for payment 

• Record documents 

Attendees shall include: 

• The Owner’s Representative(s) 

• The Architect and any Consultants 

• The Contractor and its Superintendent 

• Major Subcontractors 

1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. Refer to Section 01300 – “Submittals” for requirements regarding submission of Schedules, Show 

Drawings, Samples, Coord. Drawings, Product Data, Test and Inspection Reports, Warranties, and the 

like. 

1.7 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Bidders are hereby informed of the following special aspects of the construction: 

1. A schedule required to minimize impacts on the traveling public, residents and surrounding 

community. 

2. Nighttime work is not allowed. 

3. Involvement with vital public and private utilities. 

4. Maintenance and Protection of facilities. 

5. Demolition in and around buildings. 

In view of the special aspects noted above, each bidder shall be required to meet the following 

qualification criteria, as a minimum, and submit proof thereby with the bid to establish such 

qualification: 

Prior construction experience of similar project with a minimum construction cost of $200,000 each 

substantially completed within the last five (5) years. 

Has a minimum of one full time superintendent employed by the construction firm, who have supervised 

similar reconstruction projects of $200,000 or greater, and one who is available full time for this project. 




The NHA reserves the right to reject the bid of the apparent low bidder should the Contractor fail to meet 

the above-mentioned requirements. 

The work shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, plant, equipment, insurance and incidentals, 

required to satisfactorily complete the project within the prescribed schedule in accordance with the plans 

and specifications, and directions of the Architect. 

It is suggested that the Contractor inspect the site before bidding to assess and familiarize himself with 

the existing conditions and to judge for himself the extent and nature of the work to be done under this 

contract and the equipment and methods he can employ. 

If you have any questions concerning this Project’s Scope and Technical matters, please fax your 

inquiries to the attention of Mr. A. Kevin Medlin at Fax: 973-273-6549 (Phone 973-273-6526). 



OTTO KRETCHMER ELDERLY HOUSING NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORITY 

AMENDED LOBBY ALTERATIONS NJ2-16 

SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. 

B. See Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 


A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement 

for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if 

estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 

1.3 PROCEDURES 

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, 

overhead, and profit. 

B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires 

establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those 

Sections. 

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of 

established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor 

acceptable to Contractor. 

D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections 

referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 


3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES 


type 5. 


type 8. 

Unit Price No. 3 Provide cost per unit to provide 2’-6”x4’-0” double-hung aluminum replacement 

window. 

Unit Price No. 4 Provide cost per square foot to provide EPDM membrane roofing. 


OTTO KRETCHMER ELDERLY HOUSING NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORITY 

AMENDED LOBBY ALTERATIONS NJ2-16 

Unit Price No. 5 Provide cost per square foot to provide ceramic wall tile, Type CT-4. 

Unit Price No. 6 Provide cost per square foot to provide exterior ceramic wall tile, Type CT-3. 

Unit Price No. 7 Provide cost per square foot to provide complete gfrc wall paneling system VP-1. 

Unit Price No. 8 Provide cost per square foot to provide interior painting. 


ACT-5. 

Unit Price No. 10 Provide cost per linear foot to provide water supply piping, 3/4” diameter. 

Unit Price No. 11 Provide cost per linear foot to provide gas piping, 3/8” diameter. 

Unit Price No. 12 Provide cost per linear foot to provide complete 4” sanitary piping system. 



Unit Price No. 15 Provide cost to provide dome type closed circuit security camera. 





SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. The types of submittal requirements specified in this section include shop drawings, product data, 

samples, certificates of conformance or compliance, certified test or inspection reports, and 

miscellaneous work-related submittals. Individual submittal requirements are specified in applicable 

sections for each unit of work. 

B. Requirements for record documents, progress and final photographs, and operation and maintenance 

manuals are covered in the "Project Closeout" section. 


A. Work-related submittals of this section are categorized for convenience as follows: 

1. Shop drawings include specially-prepared technical data for this project, including drawings, 

diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, 

instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard printed form for general 

application to a range of similar projects. 

2. Product data include standard printed information on materials, products and systems; not 

specially-prepared for this project, other than the designation of selections from among available 

choices printed therein. 

3. Samples include both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of materials, products and 

units of work; both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of work; either for limited 

visual inspection or (where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis. Mock-ups are a 

special form of samples, which are too large or otherwise inconvenient for handling in specified 

manner for transmittal of sample submittals. 

4. Certificates of conformance or compliance are documents attesting that a product complies with 

a specified standard. 

5. Certified test (or inspection) reports are documents attesting that a product meets a specified 

level of performance or quality when a prototype specimen is tested or inspected in accordance 

with a specified procedure, and consist of a certified statement by the product supplier or 

Contractor accompanied by a complete report of the inspection or test. 

6. Miscellaneous submittals related directly to the work (non-administrative) include warranties, 

maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, project photographs, survey data and reports, 

physical work records, copies of industry standards, record drawings, field measurement data, 

operating and maintenance materials, overrun stock, and similar information, devices and 

materials applicable to the work and not processed as shop drawings, product data samples, 

certificates of conformance or compliance, or certified test reports. 

1.3 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: 

1. All submittals shall be made to the Architect. 

2. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing all shop drawings for compliance with specifications 

and making all necessary corrections prior to submitting to the Architect, including, but not 

limited to the following: 

a. Record relevant information and requests for data on the transmittal form. 

b. Record deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, and bring to the attention 

of the Architect, if any , including minor variations and limitations. 




3. Only the Architect can approve or disapprove submittals. Deviations and variations from the 

contract requirements contained in the submittal can be approved only by the Architect. 

4. Failure on the part of the Contractor to indicate approval on submittals prior to submission to 

Architect will result in their being returned to the Contractor without being acted upon. 

5. No delays in construction occasioned by the Contractor's failure to submit material for approval 

in accordance with the approved schedule will be excused. 

B. Substitutions: All substations shall be submitted in a timely manner to allow for evaluation and 

compliance with specifications , so as to avoid delay in delivery of materials which would cause a delay 

in the construction schedule . Approval will not be granted to any substitution due to the inability of the 

Contractor to meet the construction schedule. No clam for extension of the construction schedule shall 

be granted due to submission of inadequate or unequal materials . 

C. Scheduling: Develop “Critical Path Method” schedule for submissions requiring approval. 

D. Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance 

of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence different 

categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed 

for coordination of the Architect's review with another. 

E. Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, 

Contractor, subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other 

submittals. 

F. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking and provide space for the Architect's action 

marking. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals which are 

received from sources other than through Contractor's office will be returned without action. 

1.4 SPECIFIC-CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual work sections, comply with requirements specified 

herein for each indicated category of submittal. Provide and process intermediate submittals, where 

required between initial and final, similar to initial submittals. 

B. Shop Drawings: Refer to clause "Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings" of the General 

Conditions. Provide newly-prepared information, on reproducible sheets, with graphic information at 

accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated), with name of preparer indicated (firm name). Show 

dimensions and note which are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in the work 

shown. Indicate compliance with standards, and special coordination requirements. Do not allow shop 

drawing copies without stamp indicating approval by the Architect to be used in connection with the 

work. 

1. Standard Submittal: six (6) prints, plus two (2) additional prints where required for maintenance 

manuals; two (2) will be retained and remainder will be returned, one of which is to be markedup 

and maintained by Contractor as "Record Document". 

2. Equipment and Systems: Shop drawings for equipment and systems shall show ratings (where 

applicable), and how components are assembled, function together, and how they will be 

installed. Shop drawings, product data, certificate of conformance or compliance, certified test 

or inspection reports, and other submittals for equipment, systems, and their component parts 

shall be coordinated and submitted as a unit. Multiple submissions are not acceptable except 

where prior approval is obtained from the Architect, in which case a list of data to be submitted 

later shall be included with the first submission. 

3. Coordination Drawings: Prior to installation of sleeves and inserts for equipment, and/or the 

performance of work in spaces in which two or more trades are involved and in which the 

probability of interference exists as determined by either the Contractor or the Architect, submit 

composite coordination drawings for the work. Show the work of all involved trades in a scale 




not less than 1:20 (metric) or larger if required by the Architect. Any work installed prior to 

approval of coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk, and subsequent relocations 

required to avoid interference shall be made at no cost to the Government. In case interference 

develops, the Architect will decide which work shall be relocated, regardless of which was 

installed first. 

C. Product Data: Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system; and mark each 

copy to show which choices and options are applicable to project. Include manufacturer's standard 

printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with standards, application of labels and 

seals, notation of field measurements which have been checked, and special coordination requirements. 

Maintain one set of product data (for each submittal) at project site, available for reference. 

1. Submittals: Contractor shall not submit product data, or allow its use on the project, until he has 

confirmed compliance with requirements of contract documents. Submittal is for information 

and record, unless otherwise indicated. Initial submittal is final submittal unless returned by the 

Architect, marked with an action which indicates an observed noncompliance. Submit copies, 

plus two (2) additional copies (which will be returned) where required for maintenance manuals. 

a. Provide a preliminary single-copy submittal where required (or desired by Contractor) for 

selection of options by the Architect. 

b. Installer's Copy: Do not proceed with installation of materials, products or systems until 

final copy of applicable product data is in possession of Installer. 

D. Samples: (Refer to clause "Samples" of General Conditions.) Provide units identical with final 

condition of proposed materials or products for the work. Include "range" samples (not less than 3 

units) where unavoidable variations must be expected, and describe or identify variations between units 

of each set. Provide full set of optional samples where the Architect's selection is required. Prepare 

samples to match the Government-furnished sample where so indicated. Include information with each 

sample to show generic description, source or product name and manufacturer, limitations, and 

compliance with standards. 

1. Submittal: At Contractor's option, provide preliminary submittal of a single set of samples for 

review and action. Otherwise, initial submittal is final submittal unless returned with action 

which requires resubmittal. Submit 3 sets of samples in final submittal; one set will be returned. 

2. Quality Control Set: Maintain returned final set of samples at project site, in suitable condition 

and available for quality control comparisons. 

E. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Follow same procedure as for product data. Where 

feasible, and/or where required by other sections of specification indicate compliance with the specified 

standard by means of a label on the container, or on an inconspicuous place on the product. 

F. Certified Test and Inspection Reports: Process each as either "shop drawing" or "product data", 

depending upon whether report is uniquely prepared for project or a standard publication of 

workmanship control testing at point of production; process accordingly. 

1. Report shall include a description of the prototype specimen tested or inspected which is 

sufficiently descriptive to ensure positive identification of the product by an inspector when 

delivered and/or installed. 

2. The report shall be accompanied by a notarized statement from the supplier of the product 

certifying that the prototype is identical in all respects to the product proposed for the project. 

3. Where feasible and/or where required by other sections of the specification, indicate compliance 

with the specified performance or quality by means of a label on the container or on an 

inconspicuous place on the product. The label shall refer to the test or inspection report and 

include the date of the report. 

G. Warranties (Guarantees): In addition to copies desired for Contractor's use, furnish six (6) executed 

copies, except furnish additional (conformed) copies where required for maintenance manuals. 




H. Standards/Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where copy submittal is indicated, and except where 

specified integrally with "Product Data" submittal, submit two (2) copies to the Architect. Where 

workmanship at project site and elsewhere is governed by standard, furnish additional copies to 

fabricators, installers and others involved in performance of the work. Installation of the item will not 

be allowed to proceed until the information is received. Failure to furnish the information can be cause 

for rejection of the material. 

I. Closeout Submittals: Refer to individual work sections and to "closeout" section for specific 

requirements on submittal of closeout information, materials, tools and similar items. 

1. Record Document Copies: Furnish six (6) sets. 

2. Maintenance/Operating Manuals: Furnish six (6) copies. 

3. Materials and Tools: Refer to individual work sections for required quantities of spare parts, 

extra and overrun stock, maintenance tools and devices, keys, and similar physical units to be 

submitted. 

J. General Distribution: Provide additional distribution of submittals (not included in foregoing copy 

submittal requirements) to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, and others as necessary for 

proper performance of the work. 

1.5 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS 

A. Architect's Action: Where action and return is required or requested, the Architect and the Architect 

will review each submittal, mark with Action, and where possible return within 2 weeks of receipt. 

Where submittal must be held for coordination, Contractor will be so advised. 

1. Final Unrestricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with contract documents, 

when submittal is returned marked "Approved." 

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with notations and 

corrections on submittal and with contract documents, when submittal is returned marked 

"Approved as Noted." 

3. Returned for Resubmittal: Do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with 

notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action marking. Do not allow 

submittals marked "Disapproved, Resubmit" (or unmarked submittals where a marking is 

required) to be used in connection with performance of the work. 

4. Other Action: Where submittal is returned for other reasons, with the Architect's explanation 

included, it will be marked "Action Not Required." 


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 





SECTION 01400 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 



A. Coordination and project conditions. 

B. Preconstruction meeting. 

C. Site mobilization meeting. 

D. Progress meetings. 

E. Pre-installation meetings. 

F. Special procedures. 

1.2 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient 

and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for 

accommodating items installed later. 

B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building 

utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, 

connecting to, and placing in service, operating equipment. 

C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated 

diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as 

practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility 

for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. 

D. In finished areas [except as otherwise indicated], conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within construction. 

Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. 

E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial 

Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. 

F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work 

not in accordance with Contract Documents to minimize disruption of Owner’s activities. 


A. Owner will schedule meeting after Notice of Award. 

B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer and Contractor. 

C. Agenda: 

1 Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 

2 Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 

3 Distribution of Contract Documents. 

4 Submission of [list of Subcontractors,] list of products, schedule of values, and 

progress schedule. 

5 Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract and Architect/Engineer. 

6 Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, 

applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 

7 Scheduling. 


Architect/Engineer, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. 




1.4 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING 

A. Owner will schedule meeting at Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. 

B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, Special Consultants, Contractor, Contractor's 

Superintendent and major Subcontractors. 

C. Agenda: 

1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 

2. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. 

3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 

4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 

5. Security and housekeeping procedures. 

6. Schedules. 

7. Application for payment procedures. 

8. Procedures for testing. 

9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 

10. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 

11. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 



1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS 

A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly bi-monthly 

intervals. 

B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. 

C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, 

Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. 

D. Agenda: 

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 

2. Review of Work progress. 

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 

4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 

5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 

6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 

7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 

8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 

9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 

10. Coordination of projected progress. 

11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 

12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 

13. Other business relating to Work. 



1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS 

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene pre-installation meetings at Project site prior 

to commencing work of specific section. 




B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section. 

C. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum four days in advance of meeting date. 

D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 

1 Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 

2 Review coordination with related work. 



PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 


3.1 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 

A. Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing with new and salvaged products for patching 

and extending work. 

B. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform alteration work. 

C. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and 

restore at completion. 

D. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, including rotted wood, corroded metals, and 

deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work. 

E. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. 

F. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to permit installation of new work and finishes. 

G. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature 

and humidity. 

H. Remove, cut, and patch Work in manner to minimize damage and to permit restoring products and 

finishes to original or specified condition. Refer to Section 01045 – “Cutting and Patching” for 

additional requirements. 

I. Refinish existing visible surfaces to remain in renovated areas, to specified or renewed condition for each 

material, with neat transition to adjacent finishes. 

J. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, provide smooth and even transition. Patch Work to match 

existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. 

K. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with new Work is not possible, terminate 

existing surface along straight line at natural line of division and submit recommendation to 

Architect/Engineer for review. 

L. Where change of plane of ¼ inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing smooth 

transition; to Architect/Engineer for review and request instructions from Architect/Engineer. 




M. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other 

imperfections. 

N. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections. 





SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. General: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as 

extensions of provisions in other contract documents. These requirements have been included for 

special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of 

temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication that 

such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with 

requirements of contract documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to, but are not limited to, 

utility services, construction facilities, security/protection provisions, and support facilities. 


A. General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for proper 

performance of the work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when no 

longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need. 

B. Conditions of Use: Install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a manner and at 

locations which will be safe, non-hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons and property, and free of 

deleterious effects. 



3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES: 

A. Water and Power: Premises are supplied with water and electrical services which may be used in this 

work, subject to regulations of the government agency in control. Owner shall pay for use charges for 

water and power. 

3.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES: 

A. The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but are not limited to, heat, ventilation, 

lighting, and ladders. Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly 

and adequately. 

B. Heating: Refer to "Heat" clause of "General Conditions." Obtain approval of proposed temporary 

heating system from the Architect prior to placing in service. Oil burners, salamanders, or open braziers 

are not permitted. Comply with applicable Federal, State, and local safety regulations. 

1. Building and the areas surrounding the work areas will be heated by the existing heating system. 

In the event existing heating is not sufficient to heat the work areas then provide temporary heat 

by means of auxiliary equipment. 

2. Contractor may utilize the existing heating system and the new equipment, as required. Fuel will 

be provided by the Owner. However, prior to final inspection, place the entire system in 

condition satisfactory to the Architect. 




3.3 SECURITY PROVISIONS: 

A. General: Provide security to achieve protection from theft, vandalism, personal injury and property 

damage. Refer to Section 01546, "Safety and Health." Provisions shall include, but not be limited to the 

following: 

1. Work Area and Lockup: At earliest possible date, secure work area against unauthorized 

entrance at times when personnel are not working. 

2. Provide dustproof enclosures as required for protection where dirty work is performed. 

3.4 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES: 

A. General: The types of temporary support facilities required include, but are not limited to, field offices, 

storage, sanitary facilities, drinking water, private telephones, cleanup facilities, waste disposal service, 

all as may be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of 

personnel at the site. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar 

use of permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized by the Architect and, if not 

otherwise indicated, immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate temporary support 

facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities. 

B. Field Office and Storage Space: The contractor is limited to work area for field office and all storage 

space. No other space will be available, unless designated by the Owner’s Representative. 

C. Sanitary Facilities: Contractor’s personnel shall not use toilet rooms on the premises subject to 

regulation and control of the Architect. 

D. Fire Extinguishers: Provide fire extinguishers in number, type and capacity as required by governing 

agencies. 

E. Waste Disposal and Cleanup: Perform cleanup of work areas and dispose of all waste material on a 

daily basis. Dumpsters shall not be permitted on site except during demolition work. Use of the 

building’s dumpsters is not permitted. Refer to Section 01732 “Selective Demolition” for waste 

disposal requirements. 





SECTION 01546 - SAFETY AND HEALTH 


1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS 


are referred to in the text by basic designation only. 

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 

1. OSHA General Industry Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910), Publication V2206; OSHA 

Construction Industry Standards (29 CFR 1926). One source of these regulations is OSHA 

Publication 2207, which includes a combination of both Parts 1910 and 1926 as they relate to 

construction safety and health. It is for sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. 

Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. 

2. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR, Part 61). 

3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Final Rule (40 CFR Part 761) dated July 17, 1985. 

4. Lead Construction Standard 29 CFR 1926.62 

C. Federal Standard (Fed. Std): 

1. 313A Material Safety Data Sheets, Preparation and the Submission of. 

1.2 WORK COVERED BY THIS SECTION 

A. This section is applicable to all work covered by this contract. 

1.3 DEFINITION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 

A. Refer to hazardous and toxic materials/substances included in Subparts H and Z of 29 CFR 1910; and to 

others as additionally defined in Fed. Std. 313. Those most commonly encountered include asbestos, 

lead-based paints, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB'S), explosives, and radioactive material, but may 

include others. The most likely products to contain asbestos are sprayed-on fireproofing, insulation, 

boiler lagging, pipe covering and likely products to contain PCB's are transformers, capacitors, voltage 

regulators, and oil switches. 


A. Safety Meeting: Representatives of the Contractor shall meet with the Architect and Owner’s 

Representative prior to the start of work under this contract for the purpose of reviewing the Contractor's 

safety and health programs and discussing implementation of all safety and health provisions pertinent 

to the work to be performed under the contract. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss, in detail, 

the measures he/she intends to take in order to control any unsafe or unhealthy conditions associated 

with the work to be performed under the contract. If directed by the Owner’s Representative, this 

meeting may be held in conjunction with other meetings which are scheduled to take place prior to start 

of work under this contract. The level of detail for the safety meeting is dependent upon the nature of 

the work and the potential inherent hazards. The Contractor's principal on-site representative(s), the 

general superintendent and his/her safety representative(s) shall attend this meeting. 

B. Compliance With Regulations: All work, including contact with and handling of hazardous materials, 

the disturbance or dismantling of structures containing hazardous materials and/or the disposal of 

hazardous materials shall comply with the applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1926/1910 and 40 CFR 

761. Work involving the disturbance, dismantling of asbestos or asbestos containing materials; the 

demolition of structures containing asbestos; and/or the disposal and removal of asbestos, shall also 




comply with the requirements of 40 CFR, Part 61, Subparts A and M. AlI work shall comply with 

applicable state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between 

applicable regulations, the most stringent shall apply. 

C. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance 

with all applicable regulations pertaining to the health and safety of personnel during the execution of 

work, and shall hold the Government harmless for any action on his/her part or that of his/her employees 

or subcontractors, which results in illness, injury or death. 


A. Accident Reporting: A copy of each accident report, which the Contractor or subcontractors submit to 

their insurance carriers, shall be forwarded to the Owner’s Representative as soon as possible, but in no 

event later than seven (7) calendar days after the day the accident occurred. 

B. Permits: If hazardous materials are disposed of off site, submit copies of permits from applicable, 

Federal, state, or municipal authorities and necessary certificates that the material has been disposed of 

as per regulations. 

C. Compliance Program: The OSHA Lead in Construction Standard requires the contractor to establish 

and implement a written compliance program prior to the commencement of a job. All employees 

covered under this standard must implement engineering and work practice controls to reduce and 

maintain employee exposures to lead at or below the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL). This program 

must include: 

1. Description of activities that produce lead exposures. 

2. Description of the specific means that will be employed to reduce exposure, and where 

engineering controls are used, the plans and studies used to determine the methods selected. 

3. A detailed schedule for implementing the compliance program. 

4. A report of the technology considered in meeting the PEL. 

5. Air monitoring data that documents the source of the lead exposure. 

6. Specific work practice procedures which will be employed on the project. 

7. A schedule of administrative controls if these are to be utilized. 

8. A description of all arrangements made on multi-contractor work sites to inform affected 

subcontractors about the lead project. 

D. Exposure Assessment: The OSHA Lead in Construction Standard requires contractors to implement 

protective measures before exposure assessment has been completed if they are conducting any one of a 

number of “lead related tasks”. These tasks are divided into three different classes. The contractor must 

assume that the worker is exposed to airborne concentrations at least to a certain level of lead 

(depending on the class) until exposure assessment shows otherwise. When the contractor has objective 

data demonstrating that the process, operation or activity does not result in employee exposure to lead at 

or above the action level, the contractor may rely upon such data for the initial exposure assessment. 

Submit a copy of a completed exposure assessment for all operations that disturb lead-containing paint 

at the job site. This exposure assessment will be utilized by the renovation contractor if additional 

painted surfaces must be disturbed to carry out the work. 

E. Other Submittals: If agreed to in writing at the safety meeting, other submittals shall be required. One 

such submittal which may be included is a plan of action for handling hazardous materials, which shall 

contain the following: 

1. Number, type, and experience of employees to be used for the work. 

2. Description of how applicable safety and health regulations and standards are to be met. 

3. Type of protective equipment and work procedures to be used. 

4. Emergency procedures for accidental spills or exposures. 

5. Procedures for disposing of or storing the toxic/hazardous materials. 

6. Identification of possible hazards, problems, and proposed control mechanisms. 




7. Protection of public or others not related to the operation. 

8. Interfacing and control of subcontractors, if any. 

9. Identifications of any required analyses, test demonstrations, and validation requirements. 

10. Method of certification for compliance. 


2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Special facilities, devices, equipment, clothing, and similar items used by the Contractor in the 

execution of work shall comply with the applicable regulations. 


3.1 STOP WORK ORDERS 

A. When the Contractor or his/her subcontractors are notified by the Owner’s Representative of any 

noncompliance with the provisions of the contract and the action(s) to be taken, the Contractor shall 

immediately, if so directed, or within 48 hours after receipt of a notice of violation correct the unsafe or 

unhealthy condition. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly, all or any part of the work being 

performed may be stopped by the Owner’s Representative with a "Stop Work Order." When, in the 

opinion of the Owner’s Representative satisfactory corrective action has been taken to correct the unsafe 

and unhealthy condition, a start order will be given immediately. The Contractor shall not be allowed 

any extension of time or compensation for damages by reason of or in connection with such work 

stoppage. 


A. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to the public, building occupants, 

or damage to property of others. For the purposes of this contract, the public or building occupants shall 

include all persons not employed by the Contractor or a subcontractor working under his/her direction. 

B. Storing, positioning or use of equipment, tools, materials, scraps, and trash in a manner likely to present 

a hazard to the public or building occupants by its accidental shifting, ignition, or other hazardous 

qualities is prohibited. 

C. Obstructions: No corridor, aisle, stairway, door, or exit shall be obstructed or used in such a manner as 

to encroach upon routes of ingress or egress utilized by the public or building occupant, or to present 

unsafe or unhealthy condition to the public or building occupant. 

D. Work shall not be performed in any area occupied by the public or building occupants unless 

specifically permitted by the contract or the Owner’s Representative and unless adequate steps are taken 

for the protection of the public or Federal employees. 

E. Wherever practicable, the work area shall be fenced, barricaded, or otherwise blocked off from the 

public or building occupants to prevent unauthorized entry into the work area. 

F. Alternate Precautions: When the nature of the work prevents isolation of the work area and the public 

or building occupants may be in or pass through, under or over the work area, alternate precautions such 

as the posting of signs, the use of signal persons, the erection of barricades or similar protection around 

particularly hazardous operations shall be used as appropriate. 




G. Public Thoroughfare: When work is to be performed over a public thoroughfare such as a sidewalk, 

lobby, or corridor, the thoroughfare shall be closed, if possible, or other precautions taken such as the 

installation of screens or barricades. When the exposure to heavy falling objects exists, as during the 

erection of building walls or during demolition, special protection of the type detailed in 29 CFR 

1910/1926 shall be provided. 

H. Barricades shall be removed upon completion of the project, in accordance with local ordinance and to 

the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. 

3.3 LIFE-SAFETY PROVISIONS: 

A. General: Provide Life- Safety measures to protect the job site from potential hazard. Naming of specific 

measures listed below does not alleviate the Contractor from complying with other regulations of 

authorities having jurisdiction, in addition to the following: 

1. Install temporary smoke detectors that are connected to the building fire alarm system at locations 

designated by Architect. 

2. Install signs at the project site at locations shown by the Architect that identifies where the existing 

fire alarm pull stations are located. This fire alarm pull station will be tested on a monthly basis by 

Owner. 

3. Install fire extinguishers at work site placed at locations designated by the Architect. 

4. Remove all construction debris from the work site at the end of each day. 

5. Flammable liquids shall not be stored at the work site. 

6. All new and existing floor and ceiling penetrations shall be sealed with a fire stopping system 

having a 2-hour fire rating. 

7. All corridors in construction site that lead to entrance doors will be kept unblocked with materials 

and will remain open to egress traffic. 

8. Obtain a fire permit before any cutting workwith torches is performed. The contractor shall provide 

a fire watch whenever such work is performed. The fire watch shall be maintained for 30 minutes 

after cutting work is completed. 

9. The Contractor shall review Interim Life Safety Measures with all construction personal on a 

weekly basis. 





SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. General: This section includes general requirements near end of Contract Time, in preparation for final 

acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy and similar actions evidencing 

completion of the work. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of 

Division 2 through 16. Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion", and therefore 

may be either a single time period for entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the 

work which have been noted as substantially complete at different dates. 

1.2 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. General: Prior to requesting inspection for certification of substantial completion (for either entire work 

or portions thereof), complete the following and list known exceptions in request: 

1. In progress payment request, coincident with or first following date claimed, show either 100% 

completion for portion of work claimed as "substantially complete", or list incomplete items, 

value of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete. Include supporting documentation for 

completion as indicated in these contract documents. 

2. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instructions to the Owner’s operating/maintenance 

personnel. Discontinue (or change over) and remove from project site temporary facilities and 

services, along with construction tools and facilities, mock- ups not approved to remain in place 

as part of completed work, and similar elements. 

B. Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's request, the Architect will either proceed with 

inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection, the Architect 

will note substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed and repeat 

inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of 

completed inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance. 

1.3 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE 

A. General: Prior to requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as 

required by General Provisions and Conditions, complete the following and list known exceptions (if 

any) in request: 

1. Submit final payment request with AIA Forms G704 – “Certificate of Substantial Completion”, 

G706 – “Contractor’s Affadavit of Payment of Debts and Claims”, G706A – Contractor’s 

Affadavit of Release of Liens”, and G707 – “Consent of Surety to Final Payment” and 

supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. 

2. Submit copy of final punch-list of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each 

item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final 

certifications and similar documents. 

4. Submit record as built drawings, final project photographs, property survey, and similar final 

record information. 

5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Owner. 

6. Make final change-over of locks and transmit keys to the Owner’s Representative and advise 

Owner personnel of change-over in security provisions. 

7. Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting of marred surfaces. 

8. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. 




B. Reinspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been completed, 

including punch-list items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed 

because of acceptable circumstances, the Architect will reinspect the work. Upon completion of 

reinspection, the Architect will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of 

work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure 

will be repeated. 

1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS 

A. General: As work progresses, prepare and maintain record documents as specified herein. Each record 

shall be certified by the Contractor and the Construction Engineer. Do not use record documents for 

construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location accessible 

to the Architect for reference during normal working hours. Upon completion, turn record documents 

over to the Architect. 

B. Record Drawings: Maintain a white-print set (blue-line or black-line) of contract drawings (including 

amendment and change order drawings) and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with markup 

of actual installations which vary from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is 

most capable of showing "field" condition fully and accurately; however, where shop drawings are used 

for mark-up, record a cross-reference at corresponding location on working drawings. Mark with red 

erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate 

categories of work. Mark-up new information which is recognized to be of importance, but was for 

some reason not shown on either contract drawings or shop drawings. Give particular attention to 

concealed work, which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Note related change 

order numbers where applicable. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with 

durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on cover of each set. 

C. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of specifications, including amendments, change orders and 

similar modifications issued in printed form during construction, and mark-up variations in actual work 

in comparison with text of specifications and modifications as issued. Give particular attention to 

substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on work where it is concealed or cannot 

otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related record drawing 

information and product data, where applicable. 

D. Record Shop Drawing, Product Data, Certifications and Laboratory Test Reports: Maintain one copy of 

each approved shop drawing and product data submittal, product certification, and laboratory test report 

and mark-up significant variations in actual work in comparison with submitted information. Include 

both variations in product as delivered to site, and variations from manufacturer's instructions and 

recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the 

work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related 

change orders and mark-up of record drawings and specifications. 

E. Record Sample Submittal: Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, the Architect will 

meet with Contractor at site, and will determine which (if any) of submitted samples maintained by 

Contractor during progress of the work are to be retained by the Owner. Comply with the Architect's 

instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery. 

F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections of these specifications for requirements of 

miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the work. 

Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in 

good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Turn over to 

the Architect prior to final acceptance. 




1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. General: Provide operation and maintenance manuals for each mechanical and electrical system (except 

as otherwise specified), for each piece of equipment, and for other systems and components specified in 

the technical sections of the specification. Organize manuals into suitable volumes of manageable size, 

as approved by the Architect. Manuals shall have table of contents, and be assembled to conform to 

table of contents with tab sheets covering each subject. The instructions shall be legible and easy to 

read. Manuals shall be hard bound and sheets consistent in size; where oversize drawings are necessary 

they shall be folded in. The words "Operation and Maintenance Manual," the name and location of the 

building, and contract number shall appear on the cover. 

B. Contents: Manuals shall include, but not be limited to, the following data: 

1. Detailed description of each system and each of its components, including layout showing 

piping, valves, controls and other components, and including diagrams and illustrations where 

applicable. 

2. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each 

component. 

3. Control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shut-down. 

4. Procedure for starting. 

5. Procedure for operating. 

6. Shut-down instructions. 

7. Installation instructions. 

8. Maintenance and overhaul instructions. 

9. Lubricating schedule, including type, grade, temperature range and frequency. 

10. Emergency instructions and safety precautions. 

11. Corrected shop drawings. 

12. Approved product data. 

13. Copies of approved certifications and laboratory test reports (where applicable). 

14. Copies of warranties. 

15. Test procedures. 

16. Performance curves and rating data. 

17. Parts list, including source of supply, recommended spare parts, and service organization 

convenient to building site. 

18. Name, address, and telephone number of each subcontractor who installed equipment and 

systems, and local representative for each type of equipment and each system. 

19. Other pertinent data applicable to the operation and maintenance of particular systems or 

equipment and/or other data specified in technical sections of the specification. 

C. Submittal: Provide Architect with three (3) copies of manual prior to the time that system or equipment 

tests are performed, and five (5) additional copies 90 days before start of operation by the Owner or any 

instruction period specified. 



3.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL 

A. Where instructions to maintenance personnel are specified in other sections furnish, without additional 

expense to the Owner, the services of competent instructors, who will give full instruction in the care, 

adjustment, and operation of the systems and equipment to designated maintenance personnel. 




B. Each instructor shall be familiar with all parts of the system on which he is to give instruction and shall 

be trained in operating theory as well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Employ factory 

trained instructors wherever practical and available. 

C. Unless otherwise required or approved, give instruction during the regular work week after the 

equipment has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. Where significant 

changes or modifications in equipment are made under the terms of the guarantee, provide additional 

instruction as may be necessary to acquaint the operating personnel of the changes or modifications. 

When more than four man-days (32 hours) of instruction are specified, approximately half of the time 

shall be classroom instruction and the other half with the equipment or system. 

D. Utilize the maintenance manual for the system or equipment as a text for instruction. Instruction shall 

include a review of the maintenance manual. 

E. Upon completion, obtain written acknowledgment from the Architect that the required instruction was 

completed. 

3.2 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Post operating instructions approved by the Architect for each system and each principal piece of 

equipment for the use of operation and maintenance personnel. Include wiring and control diagrams 

showing the complete layout of the entire system including equipment, piping, and valves, and control 

sequence, framed under glass or approved laminated plastic and posted where directed by the Architect. 

Printed or engraved operating instructions for each principal piece of equipment including start-up, 

proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, shut-down, safety precautions, procedure in the event of 

equipment failure, and any other necessary items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of 

the unit shall be attached to or posted adjacent to the piece of equipment. Operating instructions 

exposed to the weather shall be made of weather-resisting materials or shall be suitably enclosed to be 

weather protected. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured 

to prevent easy removal or peeling. 

3.3 FINAL CLEANING 

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operation. The following is required in addition to 

special cleaning specified in technical sections. 

1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. 

2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition, 

removing substances which are noticeable as vision obscuring materials. Replace broken glass 

and damaged transparent materials. 

3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes, to a dirt-free condition, free of dust, 

stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid 

disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original 

reflective condition. 

4. Wipe surfaces of equipment clean. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. 

5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, 

trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces. 

6. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces. 

7. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting from 

water exposure. 

8. Clean built-in cabinets and casework to a condition of sanitation ready and acceptable for 

intended service use. 

9. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. 




B. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by the Architect, remove temporary 

protection devices and facilities which were installed during course of the work to protect previously 

completed work during remainder of construction period. 





SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes demolition and removal of the following: 

1. Selected portions of a building or structure. 

2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. 

B. See Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. 

C. See Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 


A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to 

be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. 

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall 

them where indicated. 

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise 

indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 

A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to 

remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed 

from Project site. 


A. Proposed Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, 

proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures 

are later determined to be inadequate. Include measures for the following: 

1. Dust control. 

2. Noise control. 

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and 

removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of 

elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. 

C. Predemolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site 

improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit 

before Work begins. 

D. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to 

accept hazardous wastes. 





A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in 

material and extent to that indicated for this Project. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning 

selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. 


A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct 

selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 48 hours' notice to 

Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 

B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 

1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written 

permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far 

as practical. 

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 

2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; 

immediately notify Architect and Owner’s Representative. 

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. 

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage 

during selective demolition operations. 

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during 

selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. 

1. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to patch the exposed Work listed below that is 

damaged during selective demolition. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, 

engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm. 


2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS 

A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that 

visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 

2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. 






A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. 

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective 

demolition required. 

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and 

salvaged. 

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or 

design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a 

written report to Architect. 

E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any 

element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent 

structures during selective demolition operations. 

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES 

A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective 

demolition operations. 

B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by 

Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing 

utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. 

C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to 

be selectively demolished. 

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 

2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary utilities 

before proceeding with selective demolition that bypass area of selective demolition and that 

maintain continuity of service to other parts of building. 

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal 

remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 

D. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and 

sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing 

have been completed and verified in writing. 


A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to 

ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used 

facilities. 

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities 

without permission from the Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes 

around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 

2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, 

where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 




B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to 

people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 

C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and 

construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and 

similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 

D. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and 

dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 

E. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve 

stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent 

unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 

3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS 

A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust 

and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. 

1. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. 

Vacuum carpeted areas. 

B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and 

areas. 

1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey 

debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 

C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective 

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations 

began. 

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and 

as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations. 

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting 

methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. 

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing 

finished surfaces. 

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, 

such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting 

flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flamecutting 

operations. 

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose 

excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 

B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, 

stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition 

operations. 

C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 

1. Clean salvaged items. 

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 





D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to 

match new equipment. 

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 


4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials 

and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make 

item functional for use indicated. 

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during 

selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage 

location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective 

demolition operations are complete. 

3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS 

A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. 

B. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 

C. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new 

materials. 

1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an 

approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written 

recommendations. 

D. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in 

a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 

E. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, 

patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish 

color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, 

if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 

F. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of 

uniform appearance. 

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate 

on-site. 

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 





SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes: 

1. Cast-in-place concrete for patching floor slab. 

2. Cement based underlayment for interior slab leveling. 


A. Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated. 

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix indicated. 

C. Material certificates, test reports. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products 

complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 

B. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless modified 

by the requirements of the Contract Documents. 

1. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and 

protection of in-place concrete. 

2. Formwork and form accessories. 

3. Steel reinforcement and supports. 

4. Concrete mixtures. 

5. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Formwork: Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACI 301. 

B. Steel Reinforcement 

1. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat 

sheets. 

C. Concrete Materials: 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I 

2. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) 

nominal size. 

3. Water: Complying with ASTM C 94. 

D. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 

E. Curing Materials: 

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1



1. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. 

2. Water: Potable. 

F. CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 


into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Ardex, Inc.: K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete. 

b. W.R. Bonsal Company; Self-Leveling Underlayment. 

c. Mapei Corporation, Ultra/Plan MB. 

2. Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in 

uniform thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent 

floor elevations. 

a. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as 

defined by ASTM C 219. 

b. Compressive Strength: Not less than 3,500 psi (24 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to 

ASTM C 109/C 109M. 

3. Accessory Materials: 

2.2 CONCRETE MIXES 

a. Primers and Aggregates: Recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate, thickness, 

and conditions indicated. 

b. Additives and Reinforcements: Recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate, 

thickness, and conditions indicated. 

A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. 

B. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, for normal-weight concrete determined by 

either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 

2. Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). 

2.3 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with ASTM C 94. 

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery 

time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce 

mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. 

Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. 

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but 

not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 



A. Formwork: Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. 




B. Steel Reinforcement: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and 

supporting reinforcement. 

C. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and 

Materials." 

3.2 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. 

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or placement. 

3.3 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES 

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete 

surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. 

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to 

form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the 

surface. 

1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. 

C. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete 

platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by 

brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 

3.4 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING 

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 

Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection, and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hotweather 

protection during curing. 

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions 

occur before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after 

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. 

D. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days as follows: 

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist with absorptive cover, water saturated and 

kept continuously wet. 

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for 

curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches 

(300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears 

during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 

3.5 APPLICATION OF CEMENT BASED UNDERLAYMENT 

A. Prepare and clean substrates. Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for underlayment application. 

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through 

underlayment. 

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. 




3. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, 

form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment 

bond. 

4. Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove rust, foreign matter, and other contaminants that might 

impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer's written instructions. Apply corrosionresistant 

coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment 

manufacturer. 

5. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, 

sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. 

B. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Coordinate application of components, including primer, to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate 

and intercoat adhesion. 

D. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through 

underlayment. 

E. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface. 

2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that 

emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. 

G. Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended by underlayment 

manufacturer. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample 

materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests will be performed 

according to ACI 301. 

1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 

cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 

cu. m) or fraction thereof. 

2. Testing Frequency: At least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction 

thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. 





SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes interior woodwork for the following applications: 

1. Plastic-laminate countertop. 

B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips, unless 

concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Finishing materials and processes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include location of each item, plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment 

devices, and other components. 

C. Samples 

1. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 

2. Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and surface 

finish. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork. 

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality 

Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 

1. Provide AWI certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork complies with 

requirements of grades specified. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is 

complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels 

planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. 



A. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for woodwork is described in Part 2 is based on products 

indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product 

by one of the following: 

1. Plastic Laminate: 

a. Formica Corporation. 

b. International Paper; Decorative Products Div. 

c. Laminart. 

d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 




2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Wood Products: 

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 

3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 

4. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. 

B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3: P-LAM-1 

1. Basis of Design Product: Wilsonart International; See Material Schedule on Drawings for color, 

texture, etc. 

C. Thermofused Melamine (TFM) Decorative Panels: WD-3 

1. Nema LD3 Laminate over low-emitting ¼” particle board. 

2. Basis of Design Product: Flake Board. See Material Schedule on Drawings for color, texture, etc. 

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical 

formulations to comply with AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood), Exterior Type or Interior 

Type A. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect 

finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment. 

B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed 

together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index 

of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 

C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from softwood fibers, 

synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flamespread 

index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fire-retardant treated, kilndried 

to less than 15 percent moisture content. 

1. Concealed in-wall blocking is specified in section “Gypsum Board Assemblies – 09260”. 


A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where 

necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 

1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom complying with the referenced quality standard. 

2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and 

burrs. 

3. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 

4. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 

5. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except 

for members with ends exposed in finished work. 

6. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field 

assembly. 




2.6 SHOP FINISHING 

A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until 

after installation. 

B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of 

woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling. 

C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and 

sheen, with sheen measured on 60-deg ree gloss meter per ASTM D 523: 

1. Grade: Custom. 

2. AWI Finish System: TR-4, conversion varnish. 

3. Staining: Match sample. 

4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from closed-grain 

wood before staining and finishing. 

5. Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 

6. Sheen: Semigloss, 55-75. 



A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and examine and 

complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before installation. 

B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in 

this Section for type of woodwork involved. 

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 

mm). Shim as required with concealed shims. 

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at 

cuts. 

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with 

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine 

finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and 

matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 

F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces 

(from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Fill gaps, if any, between top of 

base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into 

underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 

Section "Joint Sealants." 





SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Cavity wall insulation. 

2. Concealed building insulation. 

3. Vapor retarders. 



B. Product test reports. 

C. Research/evaluation reports. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response 

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning 

characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable 

testing and inspecting agency. 


2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards and, 

for preformed units, in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard 

thicknesses, widths, and lengths. 

B. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1, with maximum flamespread 

and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced 

core on thicknesses up to 4 inches (101 mm). 

C. Mineral-fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool: 

1. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread 

and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion 


2. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; Category 1, faced with 

foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face. 

2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating 

of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). 

BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1



E. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for 

sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 

2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS 

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to 

substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. 

2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS 

A. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates 

indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 



A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to 

products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be 

insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that 

interfere with placement. 

B. Install cavity wall and masonry cell insulations as follows: 

1. Install foam plastic insulation with small pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 

mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation 

between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. 

Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. 

a. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties 

designed for this purpose and specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies." 

2. Install cellular glass insulation by applying insulation with closely fitting joints using serrated 

trowel method per cellular glass insulations written directions and as follows: 

a. Coat edges of insulation units with full bed of adhesive to seal joints between insulation and 

between insulation and adjoining construction. 

b. Coat exterior face (cold face) of installed cellular glass block insulation course with asphalt 

coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for this purpose. 

C. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, 

complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to 

substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of 

units. 

1. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or 

sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in 

completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant. 

2. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise 

indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. 

a. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to 

surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. 

3. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following 

requirements: 




a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more 

than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit 

between ends. 

b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between 

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm) support unfaced 

blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal 

studs. 

5. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on Drawings according to 

curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions. 

6. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames, 

spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely 

in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between 

insulation and glass. 

7. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent insulation from 

bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system. 

8. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. 

Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of 

approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 

D. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor 

transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor 

retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber 

insulation. 

1. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten 

vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap 

joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 

2. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to 

vapor-retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vaporretarder 

tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 

3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended 

by vapor-retarder manufacturer. 

4. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor 

retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor 

retarder. 

5. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. 

Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 





SECTION 07531 - EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes: fully adhered EPDM membrane roofing system. 




C. Samples: For each product included in membrane roofing system. 

D. Research/evaluation reports. 

E. Maintenance data. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system 

manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as roofing 

membrane. 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response 

characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, 

or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A ; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions 

permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty 

requirements. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship 

within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE 

A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type II, fiberglass reinforced uniform, flexible sheet made 

from EPDM, and as follows: 






specified. 

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated, Sure-White 

b. Firestone, Inc., Eco-White 

c. StaFast Building Products 

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 

3. Exposed Face Color: White. 


A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and 

compatible with membrane roofing. 

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, as recommended by manufacturer, partially cured or 

cured, according to application. 

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. 

D. Seaming Material: Hot Air weld seaming. 

E. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, metal termination bars, metal 

battens, pourable sealers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 


3.1 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system 

manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. 

B. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions 

required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. 

C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate 

required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of 


D. Adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. 

3.2 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane 

roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially 

dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. 

C. Flash penetrations with cured or uncured sheet flashing. 

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure 

a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. 

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 





A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform 

roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing 

installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections 

indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. 





SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for fastening, joining, 

supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim. 

C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim. 


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 

Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 




selection: 



specified. 

2.2 SHEET METALS 

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for 

forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 

1. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat. 

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other 

miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 

B. Fasteners: Screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design 

loads. 

1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factoryapplied 

coating. 

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer 

head. 

3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. 




C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with 

release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. 

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use 

classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. Use sealant 

compatable with epdm roofing. 

E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound. 

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's 

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of 

item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before 

shop fabrication. 

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to 

line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 

1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal 

with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 

C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to 

comply with SMACNA recommendations. 

D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, 

form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with 

elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. 

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and 

trim, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from 

compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured. 

2.5 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Roof Edge Flashing Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10foot- 

(3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide joint cover plates. 

B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 


C. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 




A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with 

provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,, protective coatings, separators, sealants, 

and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 

1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 




B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against 

galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as 

recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 

C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 

D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with 

minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. 

E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify 

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 

1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend 

tabs over fasteners. 

F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement 

joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or 

intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be 

sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 

mm) deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. 

G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 

1. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners. 

H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. 

3.2 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and 

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units 

true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently 

watertight. 

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG 

Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. 

1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 16-inch 

(400-mm) centers. 

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert 

counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Secure in a waterproof manner. 

Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 

inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant. 





SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for the following types of fire-resistance-rated 

assemblies: 

1. Floors / ceilings. 

2. Walls and partitions. 

3. Smoke barriers. 


A. F-Ratings: Provide firestop systems with F-ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of 

constructions penetrated as determined per ASTM E 814. 

B. T-Ratings: Provide firestop systems with T-ratings required, as well as F-ratings, determined per 

ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items with potential to contact adjacent materials in 

occupiable floor areas including, but not limited, to the following: 

1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 

2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 

3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. 

4. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch- (100-mm-) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) 

in overall cross-sectional area. 

C. For firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after 

curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant 

firestop systems. 

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and exposed to 

possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved 

either by installing floor plates or by other means. 

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide firestop systems not requiring removal of 

insulation. 

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread indices of 

less than 25 and smoke-developed indices of less than 450, when tested per ASTM E 84. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include details of installation and design designation of testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each 

condition indicated. 

C. Product certificates and test reports. 





A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide rated systems identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 and 

with products bearing the classification marking of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to 


B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate firestop 

systems. 




Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 

2. DAP Inc. 

3. Isolatek International. 

4. Specified Technologies Inc. 

5. Tremco. 

2.2 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 

A. Compatibility: Provide firestop systems that are compatible with the substrates forming openings, and 

with the items, if any, penetrating firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as 


B. Accessories: Provide accessories required to install fill materials that comply with requirements of tested 

assemblies, are approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency that performed testing, and are 

specified by manufacturer of tested assemblies. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. 

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent 

leakage of fill materials in liquid state. 

c. Fire-rated form board. 

d. Fillers for sealants. 

2. Temporary forming materials. 

3. Substrate primers. 

4. Collars. 

5. Steel sleeves. 



A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article 

and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products 

and applications indicated. 

B. Clean openings immediately before installing firestop systems. 

1. Remove foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of firestop systems. 





3. Produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestop systems. 

Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 

C. Priming: Prime substrates when recommended in writing by firestop system manufacturer using that 

manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not spill 

primers or allow them to migrate onto adjoining surfaces. 

D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of firestopping with adjoining 

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods 

required to remove firestopping smears. Remove tape immediately after installation without disturbing 

firestopping seal. 

E. Accessories: Install accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in 

the position necessary to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings 

indicated. 

1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories that are 

not permanent components of firestop systems. 

F. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques. 

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items 

as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating 

items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, 

uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 

G. Identification: Identify firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. 

Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system 

installation where labels will be visible. Include the following information on labels: 

1. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify Building 

Management of Any Damage." 

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 

3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

4. Date of installation. 

5. Firestop system manufacturer's name. 

6. Installer's name. 

H. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as installation progresses by methods and with cleaning 

materials that are approved in writing by manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which 

openings occur. 

3.2 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE 

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to the alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in 

UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. 

B. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, C-BJ, F-A, W-J, W-L. 

C. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, C-BJ, C-BK, F-A, F-B, F-C, W-J, W-K, W-L. 

D. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing: Comply with the following: 





E. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables: Comply with the following: 


F. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, C-BJ, F-A, F-B, F-C, W-J, W-K, W-L. 

G. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes: Comply with the following: 


H. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, F-A, W-L. 

I. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrations: Comply with the following: 

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ, F-C, W-J, W-L. 

J. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrations: Comply with the following: 






SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications: 

1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 

2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals 

without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant 

continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 

B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2inch- 

(13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the 

appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 

C. Preconstruction field test reports. 

D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. 

E. Product certificates and test reports. 


A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to 

Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for the types of 

Project joints. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace 

elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this 

Section within specified warranty period. 


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant 

manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with 

performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 









2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one 

another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant 

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquidapplied 

chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for 

type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to 

porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not 

stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 

C. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: 


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799. 

b. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000. 

c. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC. 

d. Tremco; Tremsil 600. 


3. Class: 25. 



D. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: 


a. Pecora Corporation; 898. 

b. Tremco; Tremsil 600 White. 


3. Class: 25. 



2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. 

B. Available Products: 

1. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 

2. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 

3. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 




2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low-modulus 

silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing silicone sealant for 

bonding extrusions to substrates. 


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. 

b. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span. 

c. Tremco; Spectrem Ez Seal. 

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING 

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint 

substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant 

manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) and of 

size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant 

performance: 

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for 

preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint 

where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to 

joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant 

backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates 

and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to 

joint substrates. 

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent 

to joints. 



A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint 

sealant. 

a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical 

abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of 

developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after 

cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 


a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm 

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. 




B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based 

on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with jointsealant 

manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow 

spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces 

that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required 

to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 


A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants 

as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to 

produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum 


1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace 

them with dry materials. 

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs 

of joints. 

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are 

installed: 

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum 


E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, 

tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration 

indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor 

sealants or adjacent surfaces. 

3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with 

cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints 

occur. 

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE 

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical and horizontal nontraffic construction joints in cast-in-place 

concrete. 


B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical and horizontal nontraffic joints between plant-precast 

architectural concrete units. 





C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 


D. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical joints between different materials listed above. 


E. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior 

walls. 


F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. 


G. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and 

counters. 

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant 

H. Joint-Sealant Application: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls 

and columns. 


I. Joint-Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors 

windows and elevator entrances. 

1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 





SECTION 08460 - AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 



A. Automatic sliding doors with operator and motion/presence sensor control device. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Section 16000 - Electrical. 


A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL 60062, Phone: 847-272-8800, Fax: 847- 

272-8129. 

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 11 W. 42 nd Street, 13 th Floor, New York, NY 10036, Phone: 

212-642-4900, Fax: 212-398-0023. 

C. Builders’ Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA), 355 Lexington Ave., New York, NY 10017, 212- 

661- 4261, Fax: 212-370-9047. 

D. ICBO Evaluation Services, 5360 Workman Mill Road, Whittier, CA 90601, 562-699-0543, Fax: 562-695- 

4694. 

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Doors Powered to Open Position: 

1. Doors powered by DC electric motor and mechanical gear assembly transmitted to active leaves by 

fiberglass-reinforced tooth drive belt for silent operation. Doors using roller chain, cable, or hydraulic 

devices shall not be accepted. 

2. Power door to open position by signals received by microprocessor from the actuation controls. 

3. The last portion of the opening cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that 

electronically reduces voltage to motor until door is fully open. Door systems that use microswitches 

shall not be accepted. 

4. To permit safe passage if an obstruction is detected between opening doors and surrounding walls or 

interior fittings, the doors shall immediately stop and after a delay go to the full closed position. Door 

systems that only monitor the door travel while closing shall not be acceptable. 

B. Doors Powered to Closed Position: 

1. The active leafs will only be powered to closed position when all actuating devices are cleared and 

after remaining in the open position for a preset time delay (per ANSI standards). 

2. The last portion of the closing cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that 

electronically reduces voltage to the motor until door is fully closed. 

3. To permit safe passage between closing doors, the doors immediately reverse to open position if an 

obstruction is detected, then resume their interrupted movement at low speed to check whether the 

obstruction has disappeared or not. Door systems that only monitor the door travel while opening shall 

not be acceptable. 

C. Emergency Breakaway: 

1. Full Breakout System: Interior sliding active leaves and sidelites swing out from any position in 

sliding mode. 




2. Breakaway Pressure: Field adjustable to building code requirements and in accordance with 

ANSI/BHMA 156.10 maximum of 50 pounds. 

D. Watchdog Monitoring: 

1. Microprocessor Software: Constantly monitor drive train system operations. 

2. Watchdog Control Circuit: Assume command of system and shut down automatic function by holding 

doors open, should door speed, motor function, or drive train operations deviate from design criteria 

ranges. 

3. Secondary Supervisory Circuit: Monitor main Watchdog control circuit every 255 door cycles, ready 

to perform as a backup. 

E Energy Saving Device: 

1. Position Switch: interior, jamb mounted. 

2. Door Opening Settings: Off, exit only, 2-way traffic, partial opening, and hold fully open. 

3. Partial Opening Mode: Switch reduces total door opening to reduce conditioned air loss. 

4. Heavy Weather Pile: Between doors and sidelites and between emergency breakaway hardware and 

door stiles. 


A. General: Provide doors that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified performance 

requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding standard systems. 

B. Compliance: 

1. ANSI/BHMA 156.10. 

2. ANSI/UL 325 listed. 

C. Automatic door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian traffic. 

D. Automatic door equipment accommodates up to following weights for active leaf doors: 

1. Single Slide Doors: 150 pounds (104 kg) per active leaf. 

E. Operating Temperature Range: -35 degrees F to 131 degrees F (-30 degrees C to 55 degrees C). 

F. Motion and Presence Detection System: Uses planar K-band microwave technology to detect motion and 

focused active infrared technology to detect presence, in a single housing. 


A. Comply with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. 

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials, components, 

fabrication, finishes, and installation. 

C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details, indicating 

dimensions, materials, and fabrication of doors, frames, sidelites, operator, motion/presence sensor control 

device, anchors, hardware, finish, options, and accessories. 

D. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of aluminum finishes. 

E. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from UL, CUL, and ICBO indicating doors comply with specified 

performance requirements. 

F. Manufacturer's Project References: Submit list of successfully completed projects including project name and 

location, name of architect, and type and quantity of doors manufactured. 




G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit manufacturer's field reports from AAADM certified technician of 

inspection and approval of doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10 after completion of installation. 

H. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 

1. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. 

2. Include spare parts list. 

I. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty shall be one year from date of installation. 


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 

1. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified, with a minimum of 

10 years successful experience. 

2. Door, frame, operator, and sensor components from same manufacturer. 

B. Installer's Qualifications: 

1. Minimum of 2 years successful experience in installation of similar doors. 

2. Local certified distributor. 

3. Approved by manufacturer. 


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site protected from damage. 

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. 

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Manufacturer shall provide factory-owned central-dispatch system for maintenance service. 

B. The manufacturer shall maintain a company owned dispatch system that shall be available 24 hours per day, 

365 days per year to insure proper service capability. 

C. A manufacturer's employee, not an answering service, shall obtain malfunction information and dispatch 

appropriate service agency to project location. 

D. Toll free phone number shall be prominently displayed on header of each operator. 

E. Outside contractors or answering services are not acceptable. 


2.1 MANUFACTURER 

A. Basis of Design: Besam Entrance Solutions, 1900 Airport Road, Monroe, North Carolina 28110. Toll Free 

(866) BESAM-US. Phone (704)290-5520. Fax (704)290-5555. Web Site www.besam-usa.com. E-Mail 

marketing@besam-usa.com. 




2.2 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 

A. Model: Unislide Telescopic automatic sliding doors. 

Aluminum doors and frames with sidelite and active door leaves. 

1. Overhead-concealed, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled, sliding door operator. 

2. Operator housing, floor rollers, and door carriers. 

B. Dimensions: 

1. As indicated on the drawings. 

2.3 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 

A. Doors and Frames: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. 

1. Hydraulic dampers provide 90 degree stop and cushion door upon opening and closing during 

emergency breakout conditions. 

B. Glass: 

1. Glazing Material: ANSI Z97.1. 

2. Active Leaves: 5/8-inch (16-mm) glass insulating units 

3. Sidelites: 5/8-inch (16-mm) glass insulating units 

4. Field-glazed or preglazed. 

C. Door Carriers: 

1. Roller Wheels: 2 steel roller wheels, 1-3/4-inch (44-mm) diameter, per active door leaf for operation 

over replaceable Delrin track. Single journal with sealed oil-impregnated bearings. 

2. 2 self-aligning anti-risers per leaf. 

D. Vertical Jambs: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) by 6 inches (152 mm) for overhead concealed. 

E. Header: 

1. Size: 10-1/16 inches (255 mm) wide by 6-7/8 inches (175 mm) high. 

2. Hinge Point: Allows access for adjustments. 

3. Design: Closed header. 

F. Stiles: Narrow – 2-1/8” 

G. Pivots: Top and bottom concealed pivots, extruded aluminum. 

H. Hardware: Breakaway. 

I. Exterior Glazing Stop Extrusion: Nonremovable, security-type glazing bead to prevent unauthorized entry. 

2.4 SLIDING DOOR OPERATOR 

A. Operator: Unislide Telescopic 

1. Overhead-concealed, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled. 

2. Motor: High-efficiency, energy-efficient, DC motor. 

3. Mechanical drive assembly. 

4. Microprocessor System: Sets opening and closing speeds based on factory-adjusted configuration 

settings. 

5. Mechanical Limit Switches: Not acceptable. 




6. Adjustable Hold Open Time Delay: 0 to 60 seconds. 

7. Software: Incorporates self-diagnosing system. 

2.5 MOTION AND PRESENCE SENSOR CONTROL DEVICE 

A. Model: The Besam UltraView 

1. Uses K-band (24.125GHz) microwave technology to detect motion and focused active infrared 

technology to detect presence, in a single recessed housing within each side of the header. The 

microwave portion shall be used for motion detection for the purpose of door activation, and the 

focused active infrared shall be used for the purpose of presence detection in and around the door 

threshold area. The presence technology shall overlap the motion pattern. 

2. The active infrared is comprised of 96 spots of detection made out of four rows of 24 spots of 

detection each (two rows on each side of the door). The focused presence technology never shuts off 

not even during the closing cycle of the door. 

3. The infrared curtains shall have a self-adaptation time of 30 seconds minimum that will enable the 

sensor to learn permanently changed environments. 

4. The microwave portion of the UltraView will be capable of bi directional, uni directional or both 

sensing capabilities. 

5. The UltraView is a self-monitoring sensor that communicates with the Unislide through a monitoring 

connection. The self-monitoring connection allows the door to go into a failsafe mode in the event of a 

sensor or monitoring failure. 

6. Operating temperature range of –30 o F to 131 o F. 

B. Adjustments: 

1. Adjustments by remote control or manually by push button. 

2. LED indications to aid in the positioning of the infrared curtain. Proper LED indication shall signify 

compliance to applicable ANSI standard. 

2.6 ELECTRICAL 

A. High-Efficiency DC Motor: Maximum of 3 A current draw. Allow for 5 operators to run on one 20 A line. 

B. Power: Self-detecting line voltage capable control. 120 V through 240V, 50/60 Hz, 3 A incoming power with 

solid-earth ground connection for each door system. 5 door systems on one 20 A circuit. 

C. Wiring: Separate channel raceway free from moving parts. 

D. Brown out/high voltage capability: System has capability to operate at full performance well beyond brown out 

and high line voltage conditions (85V – 265V) sensing changes and adjusting automatically. 

E. Convenience Battery: Shall be concealed in header and capable of full operation with blackout conditions, 

including sensor capabilities for typically 100 cycles. 

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. Anodized: Clear, AA-C22A31. 



A. Examine and measure areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect 




installation or subsequent utilization of doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions 

are corrected. 


A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance. 

B. Ensure proper support has been provided at operator header. 

C. Ensure floor is level and smooth. 


A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10. 

B. Install doors and beam plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack. 

C. Anchor frames securely in place. 

D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved by Architect. 

E. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position. 

F. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect. 

G. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect. 


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 

1. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of doors. 

2. Before placing doors in operation, AAADM certified technician shall inspect and approve doors for 

compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10. Certified technician shall be approved by manufacturer. 

3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust doors for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10. 

3.6 CLEANING 

A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glass or finish. 


A. Protect installed doors and finish to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors and finish will be without 

damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. 





SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 

2. Tile backing panels. 

3. Non-load-bearing steel framing. 



B. Samples: For each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide 

materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an 

independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials 

and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified 

according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 






into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 

2.2 STEEL FRAMING 

A. Steel Framing, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 

1. Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements. 

a. Protective Coating: 

1) Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc 

coating. 


1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 


2. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges. 

3. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum 

board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness 

indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 

a. Available Products: 




1) Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 

2) Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track 

4. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 20 gauge. 

5. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 18 gauge bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm- 

) wide flange, and in depth indicated. 

a. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 14 gauge thick, galvanized steel. 

6. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 20 gauge. 

7. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 18 gauge bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) 

wide flange, and in depth indicated. 

a. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel 

thickness of 20 gauge. 

8. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and 

other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 

2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS 

A. Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each 

area and correspond with support system indicated. 

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 

1. Regular Type: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. 

2. Type X: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. 

C. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regulartype 

gypsum board, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply on ceiling surfaces. 

D. Proprietary Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to produce greater 

resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels, with core type and 

in thickness indicated, and with long edges tapered. 


a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Wallboard. 

b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels. 

E. Tile Backing Panels: 

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M, with core type and in thickness 

indicated. 

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 

2. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 

2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 

3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 




C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with 

other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim 

accessories, and fasteners, use setting-type taping compound. 

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 

1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable 

topping compounds. 


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and 


B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 

0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel 

manufacturer. 


3.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. 


1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and 

wall. 

2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, 

except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over 

frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to 

provide support for gypsum board. 

3. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable 

written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb 

anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to 

jamb studs. 

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof 

structure above. 

4. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise 

indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 

3.2 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION 

A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 

1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications. 

2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c. 




3. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent 

possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 

4. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically, unless otherwise indicated or required by fireresistance-rated 

assembly, and minimize end joints. 

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. 

5. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 

6. Laminating to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and 

temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 

3.3 FINISHING 

A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with 

same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Finishing Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, 

penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces 

for decoration. 

1. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. 

2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for 

tape. 

C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for 

locations indicated: 

1. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim 

flanges where panels are substrate for tile and in concealed areas. 

2. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, 

fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view. 





SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior Porcelain wall tile, glazed 

2. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations 

of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints. 

C. Samples: 

1. Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. 

2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. 

3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. 




1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount installed, for 

each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 






2.2 TILE PRODUCTS 


1. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp. 

2. Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc. 


4. United States Ceramic Tile Company. 

B. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, 

"Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 

C. Glazed Porcelain Tile CT-3: Flat tile as follows: 


2. Facial Dimensions: 13 by 20 inches, 6 by 20 inches. 

3. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 






coating. 

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Daltile; Concrete Connection; See Material Schedule on Drawings for 

color, glass, etc. 

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Thresholds: Fabricate to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, 

limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. 

1. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C 1353 or 

ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 

a. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 

2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS 


1. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. 

2. Boiardi Products Corporation. 

3. Bostik. 

4. DAP, Inc. 

5. LATICRETE International Inc. 


B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 


C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4 

1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry additive to which only water must be added. 

2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. 


D. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3. 

E. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3. 

F. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I. 

G. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated. 

H. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated. 

I. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated. 

1. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. 

2. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. 


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based 

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials. 

B. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color 

or appearance of grout. 






A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or 

silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. 

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tilesetting 

material manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 

D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before 

installing. 

E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout 

from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary 

protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for 

Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated 

in ceramic tile installation schedules. 

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA 

installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering 

without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and 

corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible 

surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical 

outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on 

floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in 

each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless 


F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. 

G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting 

materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint 

Sealants." 

H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6. 

I. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written 

instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. 




1. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine 

that it is watertight. 

J. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for 

providing 95 percent mortar coverage. 

1. Tile floors in laundries. 

2. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. 

3. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. 

K. Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1. 

L. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 

1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 

M. Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's 

written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer 

that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 

3.3 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Exterior and interior wall installation over masonry or concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA W202. 







SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings. 



B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show 







C. Samples: For each acoustical tile, for each concealed suspension system member, for each exposed 

molding and trim, and for each color and texture required. 



A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-accredited 

laboratory. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of 

assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings are indicated by design designations 

from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting 

agency. 

a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A 

materials, when tested per ASTM E 84. 

C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: 

1. ASTM E 580. 

2. CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--Seismic 

Zones 0-2." 

3. UBC Standard 25-2. 




1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed, but not fewer 

than 8 tiles. 




2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal 

to 2.0 percent of quantity installed, but not fewer than 8 linear feet per type. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each ceiling type is based on the product named. Subject to 



2.2 GENERAL 

A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. 

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. 

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct 

Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Anchors in Concrete: Expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes 

or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a 

load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per 

ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting 

agency. 

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc 

coating, soft temper. 

1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, 

"Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69mm-) 

diameter wire. 

E. Seismic struts and seismic clips. 

F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard 

moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated; 

formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system 

runners. 

2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES 





B. Panel Characteristics ACT-5: Type III, Form 2, acoustical panels per ASTM E 1264, with acrylic latex 

finish, complying with pattern and other requirements indicated below: 

1. Color/Light Reflectance Coefficient: White/LR 0.83 / 0.81 

2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.60 / 0.50 

3. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: CSTC 20. 

4. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong 2909; Random Fissure Lay-In Tile (15/16” grid) with vinyl 

face. 




C. Metal Panels: ACT-4 

1. Basis of Design Product: Armstrong Metalworks Vector. 

2. Surface Taxture: Microperforated. 

3. Finish: White. 

4. Size: 24” x 24”. 

5. Edge Detail: Square. 

6 . Panel Configuration: Flat. 

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM 





B. Suspension System Characteristics: 

1. Aluminum, 15/16” wide carrying flanges, 1-1/2” depth, painted white. 

2. Aluminum, 9/16” wide carrying flanges, 1-1/2” depth, painted white 



A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, 

per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite 

edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders. 

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation 

or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fireresistance-rated 

ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, 

countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within 

ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent 

devices. 

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete 

slabs. 

D. Install edge moldings and trim at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal 

edges of acoustical units. Screw attach moldings to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not 

more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling 

suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and 

connect securely. 

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove 

and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 

F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place 

splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of 

material. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and 

around penetrations through tile. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers 

between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. 





SECTION 09652 - SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes sheet vinyl floor coverings without backings. 



B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) 

sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required. 

1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches (230 mm) 

long, of each color required. 

C. Qualification Data: For Installer. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in 

heat-welding techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified by floor 

covering manufacturer for heat-welding techniques required. 



or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 






C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. 

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. 

E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 





thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering 

installed. 






A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each product type is based on the product named. Subject to 



2.2 SHEET VINYL PRODUCTS 






B. Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering SV-1: 

1. Composition: Unlayered, Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 0.080 inch (2.0 

mm) thick. 

2. Wear-Layer Thickness: Grade 1. 

3. Overall Thickness: 0.080 in (2.0 mm) 

4. Wearing Surface: Smooth. 

5. Sheet Width: 6 feet (1.8 m). 

6. Seaming Method: Heat welded. 

7. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics 

a. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong World Industries; Medintech; See Material Schedule on 

Drawings for color, texture, etc. 


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended 

hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications 

indicated. 

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering and 

substrate conditions indicated. 

C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer. 

1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range to blend with floor covering. 

D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: 

1. Cove Support Strip: wood or plastic with 1-inch (25-mm) radius, provided or approved by floor 

covering manufacturer. 

2. Cap Strip: vinyl, provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer. 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor 

coverings. 




B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 

2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with 

installation only after substrates pass testing. 

3. Moisture Testing: 

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only 

after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. 

(1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. 

b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after 

substrates pass testing. 

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and 

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not 

use solvents. 

D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. 

E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours 

in advance of installation. 

1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be 

installed. 

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 




A. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. 

B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings as follows: 

1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches 

(152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 

3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 

4. Avoid cross seams. 

C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and builtin 

furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. 

D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 

E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating 

on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. 

F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a 

completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of 

adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 

G. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse 

sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with 

adjoining floor covering surfaces. 

H. Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 6 inches (152 mm) up vertical surfaces. Support floor 

coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. 




I. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 

2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 

3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. 

a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 

J. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations 







SECTION 09912 - PAINTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and 

surfaces. 



B. Samples: For each type of finish-coat material indicated. 


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient 

temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign 


B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are 


C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are 


D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at 

temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 


A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities 

described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing 

contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 

1. Quantity: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and 

color applied. 





B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names 

are used in other Part 2 articles: 

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 

2. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 

3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 

PAINTING 09912 - 1



2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with 

one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated 

by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified 

that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material 

containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 

C. Colors: See Material Schedule on Drawings for colors, textures, etc. 

2.3 PREPARATORY COATS 

A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat manufacturer and 

recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 

B. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in 


1. Ferrous-Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust-inhibitive metal primer. 


3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, use 

paint specified for finish coat. 

C. Interior Primer: Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in 


1. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive metal primer. 


3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, use 

paint specified for finish coat. 

2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS 

A. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex 

Paint. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series. 

2.5 INTERIOR FINISH COATS 

A. Low-VOC Interior Latex Acrylic Paint: 

1. Benjamin Moore; ECO-SPEC Interior Paint. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; PURE PERFORMANCE Interior Paint. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; GREENSURE Harmony Line Interior Paint. 

B. Interior Flat Latex-Emulsion Size: 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series. 

C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276. 

PAINTING 09912 - 2



2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31W200 Series. 

D. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel No. M28. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-8534 SpeedHide Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss Enamels. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21W201. 

2.6 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES 

A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: 

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; none required. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler. 

B. Interior Waterborne Clear Gloss Varnish: Acrylic-based polyurethane. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes High Gloss No. 428. 

2. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-45 Rez Full-Gloss Acrylic Clear Polyurethane. 

3. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Gloss, A68 Series. 

C. Paste Wax: As recommended by manufacturer. 



A. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for inspection and acceptance of surfaces to be painted. 

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of 

the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish 

materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 

C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar 

items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size 

or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers 

skilled in the trades involved. 

D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written 

instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 

2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. 

Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, 

use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and 

sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. 

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other 

recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and 

imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, 

undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. 

c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. 

PAINTING 09912 - 3



d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall 

construction occurs on back side. 

e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or 

sealer immediately on delivery. 

4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; 

remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical 

cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. 

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is 

free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated 

from coil stock by mechanical methods. 

E. Material Preparation: 

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign 


2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during 

application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain 

material before using. 

F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, 

covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as 

required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 

1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. 

Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or 

furniture with prime coat only. 

2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers 

or grilles. 

3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 

4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 

5. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 

G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 

H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise 

prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 

1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 

2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats 

until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 

I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according 

to manufacturer's written instructions. 

J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended 

spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. 

K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed 

in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. 

L. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with 

pores filled. 

M. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to 

material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat 

primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to 

ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 

PAINTING 09912 - 4



N. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque 

surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush 

marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 

O. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. 

Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or 

other surface imperfections. 


A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from 

Project site. 

B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct 

damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. 

C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, 

remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 

Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 

3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): 


a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. 


B. Ferrous Metal: 

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. 

a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer (not required on shop-primed items). 


C. Zinc-Coated Metal: 

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. 

a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. 


D. Aluminum: 


a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes. 


3.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): 


a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer. 





PAINTING 09912 - 5




C. Gypsum Board: 


a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. 


D. Plaster: 


a. Primer: Interior plaster primer. 


E. Wood and Hardboard: 


a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel finishes. 


F. Ferrous Metal: 


a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. 


G. Zinc-Coated Metal: 


a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. 


H. All-Service Jacket over Insulation: 

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. 

a. Finish Coats: Interior flat latex-emulsion size. 


PAINTING 09912 - 6



SECTION 14240 – ELEVATOR CONTROLS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevator control replacement. 


A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar 

information for each elevator required. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating locations of 

equipment and signals. 


D. Maintenance manuals. 

E. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having 

jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. 


A. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with Section 4.10 in the 

U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act 

(ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." 



A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering hydraulic 

elevators that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Dover Elevator Systems. 

2. Fujitec America, Inc. 

3. Montgomery KONE Inc. 

4. Otis Elevator Co. 

5. Schindler Elevator Corp. 

6. Schumacher Elevator Co. 

7. Thyssen Elevator Group North America. 

2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator control systems as required for a complete system. 

B. Finish Materials: 

1. Satin Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No 4, directional satin finish. 

ELEVATOR CONTROLS 14240 - 1



2.3 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT 

A. General: Satin stainless-steel signal equipment with hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated 

and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements of acrylic or other permanent, 

nonyellowing translucent plastic. 

B. Car Control Stations: Manufacturer's standard car control stations mounted in return panel adjacent to car 

door, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Emergency Communication System: Complying with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility 

Guidelines (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and 

identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without 

using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when 

monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, 

instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. 

D. Fire Department Communication System: Telephone jack for fire department communication system, 

compatible with in-car equipment. 

E. Car Position Indicator: Locate above car door or above car control station and include audible signal to 

indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. 

1. Include travel direction arrows if not included in car control station. 

F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Locate at each landing for each elevator or group of elevators as indicated. 

G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows. 

1. With each lantern, include audible signals. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 

H. Hall Position Indicators: Locate above each hoistway entrance at ground floor. 

I. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Matching hall push-button stations with text and graphics 

according to ASME A17.1, Appendix H. 



A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary 

or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and 

by governing regulations and agencies. 


ELEVATOR CONTROLS 14240 - 2



SECTION 15000 – BASIC METHODS AND MATERIALS 



A. The specification section "General Conditions", "Supplemental Conditions” and “Division I” sections form a 

part of this section and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. The work in this Division of the specifications covers all items specified or illustrated on the project drawings 

under the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) or mechanical contract work, and every part 

herein is binding upon this Contractor. 

B. Those responsible for work covered by other sections of the specifications will be indicated by trade, such as, 

"Others", "Electrical Contractor". All items not so indicated shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. Gaspiping, 

oil piping, rough-ins, cutting and patching, concrete work, Structural Work, Control System work, 

Painting, General Construction including but not limited to ceiling, walls, Carpentry, etc. is to be done by this 

contractor or his sub-contractors. 

C. The work shown is intended to include a complete and proper work boiler system for the existing building and 

new controls for boilers, associated equipment, combustion louver dampers, fuel oil system, unit heaters; all as 

shown on plans and as specified herein. All labor, equipment, materials, and accessories for a complete and 

proper installation as hereinafter specified, or as shown on drawings, or as may be required for a proper system 

shall be furnished under this Contract. The drawings indicate diagrammatically the extent general character, 

and location of the work included. Work indicated but having minor details omitted shall be provided without 

extra cost and shall be accomplished within the stipulated time. 


A. Materials and Equipment: All materials and equipment installed by this contractor shall be new, and the best 

of their kind, and shall conform to the grade, quality and standards specified herein. No substitution or 

deviation from the materials and equipment specified herein will be allowed except by written permission of 

the Engineer. All materials and equipment offered under these specifications shall be limited to products 

regularly produced and recommended by the manufacturer for the service intended. This materials and 

equipment shall have capacities and ratings sufficient to amply meet the project requirements. The capacities 

and ratings shall not be in excess of those published by the manufacturer, but must be in accordance with 

engineering data made available by to the public by the manufacturer and in effect at the time of bid opening. 

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products, materials, size and 

capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) 

years. 

C. This Contractor must comply with all laws, ordinances, or regulations of all Authorities having jurisdiction, 

borough, city, county, state or public utility. 

D. Nothing contained in these specifications or shown on the drawings shall be construed to be in conflict with 

any state or local codes, ordinances or regulations governing the installation of the class of work specified 

herein. 

E. The Minimum Standard of Work under this Contract shall be as required by The State of New Jersey 

Department of Labor and Industry, Boiler Division and the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and 

Air Conditioning Engineers, and the Department of General Services. 

All laws, ordinances, rules, codes and regulations, including those of the Department of Environmental 




Resources, Department of Public Welfare, Department of Education Corrections, Department of Labor and 

Industry, the National Fire Protection Association, ASME, OSHA, SMACNA, ASHRAE, NEC, BOCA, ICC 

and all public bodies (Federal, State and/or local) are hereby incorporated and made a part of these 


All materials must be installed by skilled mechanics in accordance with best practices of the industry. 

THIS CONTRACTOR MUST CONFER AND COORDINATE HIS WORK WITH THAT OF ALL THE 

OTHER CONTRACTORS SO THAT THE WORK OF ALL THE TRADES WILL BE PERFORMED IN AN 

ORDERLY MANNER AND WITH THE LEAST POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE. IN CASE 

INTERFERENCE WITH THE WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTORS SHOULD OCCUR, THE DECISION 

OF THE PROFESSIONAL AS TO CHANGES TO BE MADE IN THE WORK SHALL BE FINAL. 

SPECIFICATION REFERENCE 1. Steam Boilers & Associated Equipment 

2.1. Supports 

3.2. Painting 

4.3. Piping, Valves and Specialties 

5. Fuel Gas Piping 

6.4. ATC Controls 

7.5. Sequence of Operation 

8.6. Identification 

9. Boiler Feed Water Unit 

10. Breeching 

11. Unit Heaters 

12. Insulation 

13. Water Heaters 

14. Backflow Preventer Assembly 

CODE AND GUIDELINE REFERENCES 

A. Contractor shall visit site and verify existing conditions prior to starting work or fabrication. Perform work in 

accordance with latest adopted codes, regulations and ordinances by authorities having jurisdiction. Latest 

editions of any referred standards shall govern. Observe all safety regulations. This contractor is responsible 

for coordinating installation of all equipment indicated and specified, including coordination of the installation 

requirements for any equipment of alternate manufacture. 

B. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, tests and inspections required by state, local and Federal agencies 

having jurisdiction. The contractor is also responsible for all construction health and safety. Owner will pay 

charges and fees for gas service installation work provided by the Gas Company. 

C. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are 

referred to in the text by basic designation only. 

1. AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (ARI) 

a. ARI 350 Sound Rating of Non-Ducted Indoor Air-Conditioning 

Equipment 

b. ARI 410 (1987) Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating 

Coils 

c. ARI 440 (1989) Room Fan-Coil Air-Conditioners 

d. ARI 445 (1987) Room Air-Induction Units 

e. ARI 880 (1989) Standard for Air Terminals 

f. ARI Guideline D (1987) Application and Installation Central Station Air- 

Handling Units 

AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION (AMCA) 

AMCA 210 (1985) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating 

AMCA 300 (1985; Rev 1987) Reverberant Room Methods for Sound 

Testing of Fans 

AMCA 500 (1989) Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and 




Shutters 

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 

ANSI S1.32 (1980; R 1986) Precision Methods for the Determination 

of Sound Power Levels of Discrete-Frequency and 

Narrow-Band Noise Sources in Reverberation Rooms 

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 

a. ASTM A 47 (1984; R 1989) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings 

b. ASTM A 53 (1989a) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated 

Welded and Seamless 

c. ASTM A 123 (1989a) Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and 

Steel Products 

d. ASTM A 167 (1989a) Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel 

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip 

e. ASTM A 181 (1987) Forgings, Carbon Steel, for General-Purpose 

Piping 

f. ASTM A 183 (1983) Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts 

g. ASTM A 193 (1989) Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials 

for High-Temperature Service 

h. ASTM A 234 (1989a) Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and 

Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures 

i. ASTM A 525 (1987) Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the 

Hot-Dip Process 

j. ASTM A 536 (1984) Ductile Iron Castings 

k. ASTM A 733 (1989) Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and 

Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples 

l. ASTM B 62 (1986) Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings 

m. ASTM B 75 (1986) Seamless Copper Tube 

n. ASTM B 88 (1989) Seamless Copper Water Tube 

o. ASTM C 107 (1989) Panel Spalling Testing High-Duty Fireclay Brick 

p. ASTM B 117 (1990) Salt Spray (Fog) Testing 

q. ASTM B 650 (1985) Electrodeposited Engineering Chromium 

Coatings of Ferrous Substrates 

r. ASTM C 1071 (1986) Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fiber, 

Duct Lining Material) 

s. ASTM D 1654 (1979a; R 1984) Evaluation of Painted or Coated 

Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments 

t. ASTM D 3359 (1987) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test 

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 

ENGINEERS(ASHRAE) 

ASHRAE 15 (1992) Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration 

ASHRAE 52 (1976) Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation 

for Removing Particulate Matter 

ASHRAE 62 (1989) Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality 

ASHRAE 68 (1986) Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound 




Power Measurement Procedures for Fans 

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME) 

ASME-16 1989; Addenda 1989, 1990) Boiler and Pressure Vessel 

Code; Section VIII, Pressure Vessels Division 1 - Basic 

Coverage 

ASME-17 (1989; Addenda 1989, 1990) Boiler and Pressure Vessel 

Code; Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications 

ASME B1.20.1 (1983) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch) 

ASME B16.3 (1985) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300 

ASME B16.5 (1988; Errata) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 

ASME B16.9 (1986) Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings 

ASME B16.11 (1980) Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded 

ASME B16.18 (1984) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 

ASME B16.21 (1978) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges 

j. ASME B16.22 (1989) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint 

Pressure Fittings 

ASME B16.26 (1988) Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes 

ASME B16.39 (1986) Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions (Class 150, 

250, and 300) 

ASME B31.1 (1989) Power Piping 

ASME B40.1 (1985) Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic 

Element 

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) 

AWWA (1987) Grooved and Shouldered Joints 

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) 

AWS D1. (1990) Structural Welding Code – Steel 

ANTI-FRICTION BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AFBMA) 

AFBMA 9 (1990) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings 

AFBMA 11 (1990) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings 

COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID) 

CID A-A-1419 (Rev A) Filter Element, Air-Conditioning, (Viscous-Impingement 

and Dry Types Replaceable) 

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS 

INDUSTRY (MSS) 

MSS SP-25 (1978; R 1988) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, 

Flanges and Unions 

MSS SP-58 (1988) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and 

Manufacture 

MSS SP-69 (1983) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application 

MSS SP-70 (1990) Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 

MSS SP-71 (1990) Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded 

Ends 

MSS SP-80 (1987) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves 

MSS SP-85 (1985) Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves - Flanged and 

Threaded Ends 

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) 

NEMA MG1 (1987; Rev 1) Motors and Generators 




NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 

NFPA 70 (1990) National Electrical Code 

NFPA 90A (1989) Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating 

Systems 

NATIONAL AIR DUCT CLEANERS ASSOCIATION (NADCA) 

NADCA Attachment #2 - Whole specification and requirements on HVAC system cleaning. 

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION 

(SMACNA) 

SMACNA-05 (1986; 3rd Ed) Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper 

Installation Guide for HVAC Systems 

b. SMACNA-06 (1985; 1st Ed) HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 

Metal and Flexible 

SMACNA-10 (1985; 1st Ed) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual 

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) 

UL-01 (1991) Building Materials Directory 

UL-03 (1990; Supple) Electrical Construction 

Materials Directory 

UL-05 (1991) Fire Resistance Directory 

UL 94 (Jan 24, 1980; 3rd Ed; Rev thru Mar 19, 1990) 

Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials 

for Parts in Devices and Appliances 

UL 181 (Apr 6, 1990; 7th Ed; Rev Nov 20, 1990) 

Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors 

UL 214 (Apr 30, 1976; 4th Ed; Errata) Tests for 

Flame-Propagation of Fabrics and Films 

UL 555 (Jan 30, 1990; 4th Ed; Rev Jan 31, 1990) Fire 

Dampers 

UL 586 (Oct 18, 1990; 7th Ed) High-Efficiency, Particulate, 

Air Filter Units 

UL 883 (Nov 12, 1986; 6th Ed; Rev thru Feb 15, 1989; Errata 

Apr 24, 1989) Fan-Coil Units and Room Fan-Heater 

Units 

UL 900 (Jan 29, 1987; 5th Ed; Rev Mar 28, 1988) Test 

Performance of Air Filter Units 

1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 

A. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be performed. However, it is not 

intended that they show every pipe fitting or appurtenance required for a complete installation. Exact locations 

of equipment and points of termination shall be approved by the Professional. Should it be found that any 

system or equipment cannot be installed as shown on the drawings the Professional shall be consulted before 

installing or making changes to the layout. 

B. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories that 

may be required. This Contractor shall carefully examine the Architectural, Structural, Heating, Ventilating 

and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, Electrical, and other Project Documents that would affect the work to be 

performed and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and accessories to 

meet such conditions. If any discrepancies occur between the drawings or between the drawings and 

specifications, he shall report such discrepancies to the Professional in writing and obtain written instructions 

as to the manner in which to proceed. No departures from the Project Documents shall be made without prior 

written acceptance of the Professional. 

C. The drawings and specifications are intended to function as a common set of documents. Anything shown on 

the drawings but not in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, 

shall be equally binding as if both noted on the drawings and called for in the specifications. 




D. The drawings must be followed as closely as circumstances will permit. However, this Contractor will be held 

responsible for the proper installation of all materials and equipment required for a complete installation within 

the intent and meaning of the Contract Documents. 

E. This Contractor must thoroughly familiarize himself with the specifications so that he clearly understands his 

responsibility in relationship to the work to be performed under this Contract. This Contractor must perform 

and plan his work without disturbing the use of the building. 

F. No measurement of a drawing by scale shall be used as a working dimension. Working measurements shall be 

taken from figured dimensions and through cooperation with all other Contractors. 


A. The term "Project Manager" refers to the authorized representative of the Housing Authority. 

B. The term "State" means the State of New Jersey. 

C. The term "Contractor" or "this Contractor", refers to the Contractor or any of his subcontractors, subsubcontractors, 

materials persons, company(ies), corporation(s), partnership(s), sole proprietorships and 

others, et al, responsible for work described in this DIVISION and/or on the project drawings. 

D. The term "drawings" refers to the drawings which show the character and scope of the work to be performed 

and which are prepared by the Engineer, referred to in the Contract Documents, and enumerated in the 

Supplemental General Conditions. 

E. "Finished Area" shall be defined as any space with the wall either tiled, plastered, covered or painted except 

certain concrete or concrete block foundation walls below grade. Vertical piping running through finished 

areas must be run in chases. Where there are ceilings in finished areas, all piping and conduit shall be 

concealed above the ceilings unless indicated "at ceiling" in which case piping shall be exposed below ceilings. 

Areas shall be considered finished areas where bottoms of floor or roof slabs serve as finished ceilings. 

F. The term "furnish", when used separately, shall mean to "obtain and deliver on the job, for installation by the 

indicated Trade Contractor". 

G. The terms "he, him, his" is a reference to a person or business with no gender intended. 

H. The term "install", when used separately, shall mean to "install in full operating condition equipment supplied 

to this Contractor by other Trade Contractors". 

I. The term "Professional" refers to Princeton Engineering Services, PC, Consulting Engineers. 

J. The term "project documents" refers to the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Contract, 

Technical Specifications, Standard Drawings, Drawings, and any and all other components enumerated in the 

"General Conditions", "Supplemental Conditions” and/or bound herein. 

K. The term "provide" shall mean to "furnish and install". 

L. "Unfinished areas" shall be defined as any space without a wall finish (with or without ceilings). 

Where in doubt as to the classification of a specific space, the Contractor shall obtain written direction 

from the Professional before roughing-in. 


A. Provide duplicate printed instructions upon completion of the installation. The instructions shall contain 

detailed operating instructions, locations of control valves and diagrams of control wiring and piping so 

arranged that a maintenance staff may easily trace the control in case of operating troubles. Each piping system 

shall be identified and control and isolating valves shall be tagged, as specified. 




B. Submit scheme of piping, valves, wiring, and equipment identification codes for approval and provide valves 

and equipment schedules in glass-frames listing numbers, location and function. 

1.9 SITE INSPECTION 

A. Visit site, inspect and become aware of all conditions which may affect work. Investigate utilities, protection 

requirement for adjacent facilities, storage locations, and access to the construction area. Examine conditions 

under which the work is to be executed. Correct all unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the work. 

Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the actual survey before proceeding to layout 

the Work. Contractor shall verify all line sizes at tie-in points. 

B. Prior to construction, verify all measurements in the buildings including establishing of heights and grades of 

all lines and the location and invert elevation at points of connection of piping. No extra compensation will be 

allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and measurements and those indicated on the 

drawings. 

1.10 ACCESS 

A. Verify that the equipment and materials to be installed will pass through available openings. The equipment 

can be brought in sections for easy access. Use planking or cribbing as required to protect adjoining 

construction from damage. 

B. Provide adequate access for purpose of rigging equipment. Protect access openings all times against vandalism 

and accidents during the work. 

C. Locate all equipment, valves, devices, panels and controllers which need service in accessible areas. 

1.11 CONNECTIONS AND SHUTDOWNS TO EXISTING WORK 

A. Whenever connections and shutdowns to existing facilities are required, give seven days notice and coordinate 

with Owner and schedule the work to avoid interruption of services during normal working hours. Work and 

connections requiring interruption of services shall be done during unoccupied periods with all premium time 

required including the cost to keep building open, at contractor's cost and with Owner's approval. 

1.12 RELOCATION 

A. All existing piping, wiring, fixtures and other equipment and materials that interfere with the new systems shall 

be removed, relocated, rerouted or abandoned. The work requiring removal, relocations, rerouting of another 

contractor's work that is not indicated, shall be performed by mechanics skilled in particular trade involved at 

no additional cost. 

B. Do not remove, unless indicated otherwise, the abandoned piping and similar materials "buried" within 

structure such as walls and floors on grade; but shut-off properly and plug behind finished surfaces. 

C. Restore surfaces after removal of existing mechanical and/or electrical systems or equipment. The work shall 

be the contractor's responsibility and shall be performed by workmen skilled in such work. 


2.1 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP 

A. General 

1. All details of the installation shall be mechanically and electrically correct, and the mechanical and 

electrical equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration. 

2. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label of approval of Underwriters 

Laboratories, Inc. 




B. Materials and Equipment 

1. All materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be new, and shall conform to the grade, 

quality and standards specified herein. Major items of equipment shall be the latest and standard 

product, as advertised in printed catalogs by reputable manufacturers for the purpose intended and 

shall have replacement parts readily available. 

2. All equipment or apparatus of any one system must be the product of one manufacturer, or equivalent 

products of a number of manufacturers which are suitable for use in a unified or assembled system. All 

equipment shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 

3. Mechanical fastenings used throughout on the equipment or parts subject to wear and replacement 

shall be of a type capable of removal and replacement without physical deformation of the equipment. 

4. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts shall be 

fully enclosed or properly guarded. 

C. Workmanship 

1. All manufactured articles, material, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, 

adjusted, cleaned, and conditioned, in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, unless hereinafter 

specified otherwise. This Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining such instructions from the 

suppliers. 

D. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions for type and 

capacity of each piece of equipment. This Contractor shall obtain these instructions from the manufacturer 

and such instructions shall be considered a part of these specifications. Type, capacity and application of 

equipment shall be suitable and capable of satisfactory operation for the purpose intended in the Heating, 

Ventilating and Air Conditioning System. 

2.2 TRADE NAME REFERENCES 

A. Materials and equipment are described and listed in this specification by trade name, manufacturer's type, or 

catalog number. It is intended that this reference shall establish standards of quality, performance, capacity, 

materials and design for the item specified. 

B. Where more than one manufacturer is listed for an item, those mentioned are considered equivalent provided 

that the quality, style, capacities, materials and performance of the specified item are present. All materials 

shall be subject to the review of the Professional. 

C. All other materials specified hereinafter shall be of the manufacturer's catalog number as specified. If the 

Contractor desires to substitute, Contractor must submit catalog cuts of the substituted materials to the 

Professional) sufficiently in advance of the bid date to allow ample time for consideration. A decision will be 

rendered prior to the bid date and an Addendum will be used to notify all Contractors. 

D. All materials considered for this project, including all equipment and components thereof, shall comply with 

ACT 3 OF 1978 - PROVISION FOR USE OF STEEL AND STEEL PRODUCTS (AS AMENDED TO 

INCLUDE CAST IRON). 

2.3 GUARANTEE 

A. This Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship, materials and equipment against defects, leaks or 

non-operation for 5 years from the date of commissioning. Defective workmanship shall be construed as 

meaning defective materials or unsatisfactory installation and not to mean ordinary wear and tear. 

B. This Contractor shall pay for any repairs or replacements caused by defective workmanship as construed 

herein within the period covered by the Guarantee. 





3.1 GENERAL 

A. Contractor shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, all applicable 

codes, and recognized industry practices. 

B. All equipment, valves, traps, strainers and accessories requiring maintenance shall be installed so as to 

preserve adequate space for such service, including but not limited to space to remove tubes, coils, filters, 


C. After all equipment is installed, it shall be tested to demonstrate proper operation or performance and 

compliance with the specifications. Equipment not operating correctly shall be field corrected or replaced. 

3.2 FAMILIARITY WITH CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 

A. This Contractor's responsibility, prior to submitting his bid on this Project, is to satisfy himself as to the 

nature and location of the work, the existing conditions, and the quality and quantity of the materials which 

will be required, under this Contract. 

B. Failure to make an on-site inspection prior to submitting a bid, or failure to comply with any or all of the 

requirements herein will not relieve this Contractor from the responsibilities of properly estimating the 

requirements of the work nor from the responsibility for the performance of the provisions of this Contract. 

3.3 PERMITS, TESTS, AND INSPECTION 

A. This Contractor shall be responsible to obtain and pay for all permits, pay all deposits and fees necessary for 

the installation, tests and inspection of all work provided under this specification. These tests shall be 

conducted as required by the regulations of the local and/or state authorities, having jurisdiction. The Owner 

shall pay fees for the new gas service, if required, provided by the Gas Company. 

3.4 LOCATIONS 

A. Each Contractor shall apply for detailed and specific information regarding the location and size of all 

equipment, as the final or required location and size may differ from that indicated on the drawings. Any 

material or equipment improperly placed because of the Contractor's failure to obtain this information shall be 

relocated and reinstalled without additional expense to the Owner. 

3.5 LINES AND GRADES 

A. This Contractor shall lay out his work, establishing heights and grades for all exterior and interior piping and 

duct work included in these specifications in strict accordance with the intent of the drawings, the physical 

conditions of the building and the finished site grades. He shall be responsible for the accuracy of such 

heights and grades and that they meet all physical conditions of the building and the requirements of these 


3.6 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE 

A. This Contractor shall disconnect and remove all Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning equipment, 

materials, fixtures and connections to equipment no longer required. All piping shall be removed and capped 

off either below floors, in walls or above ceilings as may be required. (See also, "CUTTING, PATCHING, 

AND REPAIRING", as hereinafter specified.) 

B. All items noted to be reused or reinstalled shall be carefully removed, cleaned and stored in an approved 

manner and shall be reinstalled at the proper time. 

C. The Owner shall be given the opportunity to retain ownership of all removed materials and equipment. All 




such items shall be carefully handled and protected and shall be stored by this Contractor at the site as 

directed by the Owner. Any such materials and equipment not desired by the Owner shall become the 

property of the Contractor and shall be removed promptly from the project site. Disposal shall be in 

accordance with the regulations of the authorities at the disposal site. 

D. Any salvage value for items being removed shall be reflected in the Contractor's Bid Price. 

3.7 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 

A. Chases and Openings (Existing Building): Unless otherwise noted, this Contractor shall cut, patch and finish 

all chases and openings required for the installation (or demolition) of this contract's work in the existing 

building. All patching shall match the adjacent finishes and existing materials. 

1. Any penetrations made in an existing fire rated partition shall be resealed with an approved material 

and method as required to maintain the integrity of the fire separation. 

2. This Contractor shall furnish, install and set all lintels, sleeves, hangers and anchors required for the 

HVAC work and he will be responsible for their proper and permanent location. 

3. Cutting shall not cause damage to the building or leave unsightly surfaces which cannot be concealed 

by plates, escutcheons or other construction. Where such unsightly conditions are caused by this 

Contractor, he shall be required, at his own expense, to engage the General Contractor to repair the 

damaged area. All holes or openings to be put in existing concrete shall be bored. 

4. Materials to be used for patching and repairing will be subject to review by the Professional. 

5. The following specification sections should be references for materials and procedures: 

a. Division 9 – Finishes 

3.8 PRUDENT WORK-PRACTICE AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL 

A. This Contractor, upon request of the Professional shall expedite the work of a specific area, section or part of 

the project to make provision for, or protect equipment, or to permit the installation of another part of the 

work. 

B. Before any piping, conduit, equipment, devices, controls, supports and ductwork are installed, the Contractor 

shall check with other trades to eliminate any possible interference. 

C. Where two items of equipment, devices, piping, conduits, supporting metal work, hangers, pull boxes, outlets, 

ductwork or controls are shown on any of the drawings of the various trades in the same location, adjustments 

shall be made. These adjustments shall be made through cooperation between the trades involved prior to the 

installation of any work. The modifying changes shall be accomplished within the same space assigned for 

such construction and at no additional cost to the Owner. All necessary offsets, bends, turns, modifications in 

piping, ductwork and conduit devices required to install the work without interference with that of other 

trades or structure, shall be provided and installed without additional cost to the Owner. 

D. Where equipment is indicated on the drawings, it shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to install the 

equipment, its control or operational devices, with sufficient space provided for proper operation, 

maintenance, and access. 

E. All equipment, devices, controls, and motors shall be tightly covered and protected during construction and 

up to the time of operation. The protection shall be arranged and be of such design as to prevent damage from 

infiltration of dust, dirt, debris, moisture, chemicals or water. All pipe, duct openings, including electrical 

conduit shall be capped or plugged during installation with temporary dust-tight caps. This Contractor shall 

be responsible for damage or breakage to his fixtures and equipment and shall make good such damaged 

items at no cost to the Owner. 

F. All surfaces, either finished, in preparation for finishing or finish material application, shall be protected 

against damage from welding, cutting, burning, soldering or similar construction activities. This protection 

shall be accomplished by care in operations, covering and shielding. Special care shall be directed to exposed 

finished masonry, metal or wood surfaces, and painted surfaces. Corrective measures required shall be 

accomplished by the trade which made the original installation when and as directed by the Professional at the 




expense of the Contractor causing the damage, and at no cost to the Owner. The protective coverings and 

coatings shall be maintained until the work is ready for acceptance by the Owner. 

G. All exposed polished metal fittings, parts and devices, shall have a protective coating applied and maintained 

during the course of construction, and shall not be installed until adjoining tile or masonry work has been 

finally acid cleaned. 

H. Install temporary filters in all air handling equipment and temporary screens at all strainers or similar cleaning 

devices in the installation. At the completion of the work and just prior to acceptance of the system by the 

Professional, remove the temporary screens and filters and install new and final screens and filters. The 

temporary screens shall be given to the Agency at the time of replacement. 

I. Provide suitable permanent safety guards for all pulleys, belt drives, centrifugal equipment and rotating parts, 

of the various items of equipment provided under this Contract. Requirements of New Jersey Department of 

Labor & Industry and OSHA shall be met. 

J. The guards and safety devices not noted on the drawings but required by regulations or agencies having 

jurisdiction shall be included as part of the project requirements. 

3.9 INSTALLATION PROVISIONS 

A. Install all equipment, piping and ducts so as to preserve access to all valves and accessories. In general, 

piping and ducts shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated on the plans, but when exposed they shall be 

run so as to allow maximum head room consistent with proper pitch. Piping and ducts shall not be installed in 

front of or interfere with any light, opening, door, window or equipment. Headroom in front of openings, 

doors or windows shall not be less than the top of the opening. 

B. All piping, valves, ductwork, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work to permit a 

clearance of not less than 1" between the finished covering and all adjacent work. 

C. All equipment, valves, traps, strainers and accessories requiring maintenance shall be installed so as to 

preserve adequate space for such service, including, but not limited to, space to remove tubes, coils, filters, 


D. Where required to allow clearance for ducts, electrical conduits, beams, and piping and to avoid interference 

with work of other trades, to increase the headroom under pipes or ducts or to improve appearance of the pipe 

work or ducts this Contractor shall offset the pipes or ducts as directed by the Professional and properly drain 

and drip same where necessary. He shall provide the necessary special pipe fittings or duct fittings to secure 

the necessary offsets and maintain good liquid and gas flow. 

E. Pipes carrying liquids or liquid vapors shall not be installed in transformer vaults or electrical equipment 

rooms. Pipes shall not be installed over, around, in front of, in back of, or below electrical controls, panels, 

switches, terminals, boxes or similar electrical equipment. Drip pans will not be permitted under any 

circumstances around electrical equipment. 

3.10 PROTECTION OF SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT 

A. This Contractor, at his own expense, shall repair, replace and maintain in service any utilities, facilities or 

services (underground, overground, interior or exterior) damaged, broken, or otherwise rendered inoperative 

during the course of construction due to fault or neglect on the part of this Contractor. 

B. This Contractor shall effectually protect, at his own expense, such of his work, materials or equipment as 

liable to injury during the construction period. All openings into any piping, ducts or equipment must be 

securely covered, or otherwise protected, to prevent injury, due to carelessly or maliciously dropped tools or 

materials, grit, dirt, or any foreign matter. This Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage so done 

until his work is fully and finally accepted. 




C. This Contractor shall protect motors, pumps, electrical equipment, and all similar items of equipment from 

dirt, grime, plaster and water during all phases of construction. 

3.11 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES 

A. This Contractor shall schedule his work to avoid any major interruption of any utility services. Interruption of 

services shall be done during overtime if necessary at no additional cost to the Owner. 

B. This Contractor shall notify the Professional twenty-one (21) working days prior to any interruption of 

services. All interruption of services shall be submitted in advance to and approved in writing by the 

Professional before disruption of services is executed. 


A. The points of connections and termination of the work under this specification are shown on the drawings or 

stated in the specifications, but in case of doubt as to such points of connections or terminations, the 

Contractor shall notify the Professional in writing requesting a review. 

3.13 EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN EXPOSED MASONRY 

A. Where equipment, devices, access panels, radiation enclosure, grilles, registers, and similar items of 

mechanical construction are installed in exposed masonry construction, utilize and submit for review items of 

such size, height, and arrangement as to conform to the corresponding masonry unit. Provide the necessary 

offsets, adjustments and relocations necessary to conform with the instructions of the Professional as to the 

final location of the equipment item in the exposed masonry. 

3.14 FIELD MEASUREMENTS 

A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, this Contractor shall verify all measurements at the building 

and he shall be held responsible for the correctness of same. 

B. No extra compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and 

measurements and those indicated on the drawings. 

C. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Professional for consideration before 

proceeding with the work. 

3.15 CHANGES FROM CONTRACT DRAWINGS 

A. Changes from the contract drawings necessary to make the work of this Contractor conform to the building as 

constructed, or to fit the work of other contractors, or to conform to the rules and/or regulations of authorities 

having jurisdiction, shall be made by this Contractor at his own expense. 


A. General: Unless otherwise specified, this Contractor shall submit to the Professional for review the minimum 

number of copies of shop drawings as stated in the DIV-1, Section 01340 certificates, reports, detailed 

fabrication drawings, engineering data or catalog information as required by the following list, and of any 

other items of mechanically operated equipment. Contractor's stamp must be issued on submittal prior to 

sending to the Professional for review. 

B. Product Data and shop drawings shall be submitted for the following: Also refer to other DIV-15 sections. 

Electrical equipment 

Power factor correction devices 

Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manual 

Valve charts and identification 





Relief/safety valves 

Valves and strainers 

Gauges and thermometers 

Expansion joints and guides 

Piping 

Insulation schedule 

Inserts and fasteners 

Fire stop materials 

Firing controls and instruments 

Combustion/O2/CO2 Tests 

Fuel gauges and meters 

Condensate return unit 


Pipe-insulation 

Louvers 

Wiring Diagrams 

Automatic Temperature Controls 

Control Sequences 

Control Diagrams 

Complete System Diagram (showing all network controllers, mcp, 

sensors, unit panels, etc.) 

Balancing Report 

1. All items or materials not mentioned above, which are substitutes, alternates, or on the accepted 

manufacturer's list shall be submitted in the form of shop drawings for review by the Professional. 

2. When shop drawings are submitted on equipment different from the equipment specified, this 

Contractor shall relate each item of the submitted equipment to its specified equivalent. 

3. Prior to submission to the Professional, this Contractor shall review the submission for completeness 

and conformance to the project documents. Submittal data shall note the applicable specification 

section, page(s), and paragraph number(s). Each submittal shall bear the Contractor's approval stamp 

indicating that the submittal meets the requirements of the project documents. Submittals not 

conforming to the previous will be considered in conflict with the project documents and returned to 

the Contractor rejected without further review. 

4. See also, Heading "TRADE NAME REFERENCES" - specified in paragraph 2.2. 

C. Samples 

1. At the request of the Owner or the Professional, samples of items that are to be used in substitution of 

specified items shall be submitted. If such a request is made, a sample of both the specified item and 

the proposed substitute item shall be submitted simultaneously. The scheduling of the submission of 

such samples shall be as directed and shall in no way delay the progress of the project. 

D. Neither the Owner nor the Professional will assume any liability whatsoever for any samples submitted. 

3.17 TEMPORARY HEATING 

A. If the heating system piping and new boilers in the heating system are advanced to provide additional heat 

prior to the phase completion date, this Contractor shall make final connections for heat. The installation of 

all permanent heating system equipment, shall be expedited for this purpose. In case of a delay in 

commissioning of the new boilers (permanent), the contractor shall be responsible for the provision of 

temporary building heat from a temporary boiler. The contractor shall arrange for temporary power feed and 

fuel for the temporary boilers when permanent fuel source is not available. 

B. General. The heating system is to be operational at all times during the heating season. 




3.18 CLEAN-UP 

A. This Contractor shall daily remove all waste and debris resulting from his work. This Contractor shall 

immediately remove water present in any area, resulting from leaking fittings, broken pipes, etc., or caused by 

defective materials or improper installation performed under this contract. 

B. Contractor is responsible for maintaining heat. 

C. Upon completion of his work and when directed by the Professional, this Contractor shall remove all dirt, 

foreign materials, stains and fingerprints from all equipment, fixtures, panels, plates etc., installed under this 

contract. Internal areas of all equipment must be cleaned of all construction dust etc., prior to pre-final and/or 

final inspection. 

3.19 COVERING THE WORK 

A. No piping shall be covered until it has been inspected, tested and accepted. 

B. By the contract, if any piping is covered before it has been inspected and tested, and accepted by the Owner's 

Authorized Representative, it shall be uncovered by the Contractor at his own expense when so notified by 

the Professional. 

3.20 ROUGH IN 

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual 

equipment to be connect. 

3.21 SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT 

A. The manufacturers of the various equipment such as pump, burner, etc. shall completely service their 

equipment and put it into actual operation. This shall be done after all steam, electrical, air, fuel and other 

connections are made complete and at such times as decided by Owner’s inspector. 

B. The manufacturer or his authorized agent shall be responsible for the lubrication, direction of rotation, speed, 

settings and delivered capacity. He shall also check the current characteristics of connected wiring, 

alignment, strainers, valves, etc., that may affect the general operation of his equipment. 

C. At the beginning and at the interval of three months of each heating season for the duration of Guarantee 

period specified in section 01010, the contractor shall lubricate and check all of their equipment, and instruct 

the building custodian in its operation and maintenance. Submit a letter signed by the custodian and the 

manufacturer’s instructors, qualifying that such instructions have been completed, to the Construction 

Department. 

INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL General 

1. After acceptance of the work by the Professional, this Contractor shall instruct personnel selected by 

the Owner in the operation and maintenance of each of equipment and appliances installed under this 

Contract. 

Scope 

These instructions shall include, but not be limited to, instruction in the following items: 

a. Location and use of all valves, dampers and sensors. 

Operation and Maintenance Schedules of All Terminal Equipment 

Operation of Automatic Temperature Control 

Start-up, operational and shut-down procedures including seasonal and emergency 

considerations. 

Warranties: What they cover and how to use them. 

Maintenance: routine, periodic, service, lubrication, overhaul and factory. 




Deliverables 

A minimum of six (6) sets of all parts lists and instruction sheets received with any equipment or 

appliance shall be bound in standard 3-ring binders, indexed and turned over to the Professional for 

review and delivery to the Professional. 

Approximately 30 days after acceptance of the building, on dates set by the Professional, 

representatives of the temperature control installation, HVAC equipment installation and of the 

Electrical Contractor shall be present at the site. They shall thoroughly review with the Agency staff 

and supervising personnel the operation of all the equipment furnished and/or installed under this 

contract, along with the maintenance of the same. 

Minimum training and instruction shall be provided along with printed handouts as follows for items 

listed under "B. Scope 1.": 

Item a,b,c,d,e,f,g, and h. 

Four (4) hours training sessions for a cumulative total of sixteen (16) hours. 

Four (4) hours follow-up approximately 9 months after acceptance of systems by the Owner. 

D. Refer to section 01700 on contractor’s requirements on instructing procedures. 

3.23 CONSTRUCTION RECORD DRAWINGS 

This Contractor shall keep accurately dimensioned records of changes and deviations from the original 

Contract Drawings, including precise locations of underground or concealed work and the location and 

elevation of all utility lines, including valves, connections and changes in directions, installed under this 

Contract within the property lines and outside the building walls, and for all concealed utility lines within the 

building. The points where utility lines leave the property shall be located from building corners. 

Recordings shall be made by ruled lines on a separate set of prints maintained at the job site for that purpose. 

When detailed drawings are more effective, attach them to the marked set of record drawings. Recording shall 

be made immediately after the work is completed and not less often than weekly. 

The marked-up record set of drawings shall be delivered to the Professional before final acceptance of the 

project. 

AS BUILT DRAWINGS 

This Contractor shall produce AUTO-CADTM AS-BUILT-DRAWINGS in 3/8 inch per foot scale as per 

Section 01330 with all deviations and dimensions in paragraph 3.21 above. 





SECTION 15110 – VALVES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves: 

1. Copper-alloy ball valves. 

2. Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves. 

3. Bronze gate valves. 


1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts. 

2. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 


A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves: 

1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 

3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 

4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 

5. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; 

pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required 

clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, 

and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories. 

B. "As-Built" Drawing: Submit after completion of work "As-Built" scaled layout drawings of pipe and 

fittings, including but not necessarily limited to, pipe sizes, location, elevations and slopes of horizontal 

runs, and connections. Submit schematic in isometric diagrams of fuel gas, cold/soft water make-up, 

steam supply, boiler feed water and drain systems. The drawings shall be in reproducibles sepia with 

two(2) blue prints. 

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for piping materials and products. 

Include this data, product data, and "As-Built" drawings in maintenance manuals. 

D. Submit welder test certificates for review. Certificates of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or 

ANSI Code for Pressure Piping organizations shall be acceptable. 


A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 

1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water piping valves unless referenced. 

B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design 

criteria. 

VALVES 15110 - 1



C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. 

D. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure 

Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 

E. Comply with 

1. ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping. 

2. ANSI Standard B31.1.0 - Standard Code for welding procedures and testing of pressure 

and power piping, and The American Welding Society, Welding Handbook. 


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. 

B. Use the following precautions during storage: 

1. Maintain valve end protection. 

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor 

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or 

stems as lifting or rigging points. 






specified. 

B. Manufacturers: 

1. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves 

2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. 

3. Grinnell Corporation 

4. Watts 

2.2 VALVES, GENERAL 

A. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures 

and temperatures. 

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. 

E. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for 

VALVES 15110 - 2



bronze valves. 

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 

a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe 

valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. 

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 

F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 

G. Gate Valves: 

1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 150, body and union bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded 

or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated 

packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Do not use solder end valves for steam piping 

applications. 

2. 2.5-Inch and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to 

ASTM A 126 Class B; with flanged ends, and "Teflon" impregnated packing and two-piece 

backing gland assembly. 

H. Ball Valves: 

1. 1-Inch and Smaller: 400 psi WOG pressure; two-piece construction, with bronze body conforming 

to ASTM B 62, standard (or regular) port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" 

seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends. 

2. 1.25-Inch to 2-Inch: 400 psi WOG pressure; 3-piece construction, bronze body conforming to 

ASTM B 62, conventional port, stainless steel ball and stem, replaceable glass filled "Teflon" for 

stem bearing and packing, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder 

ends. 

I. Globe Valves: 

1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 150, body and screwed bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze, with 

threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass 

packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel 

J. Swing Check Valves: 

1. 2-Inch and Smaller: Class 150 cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62; with 

horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends. Provide valves 

capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. 

2. 2.5-Inch and Larger: Class 125, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class 

B; horizontal swing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring; and flanged ends. 

Provide valves capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line. 

K. General: (1) All sectional, shut-off and drain valves shall be ball type unless noted otherwise; by-pass 

valves shall be globe type and check valves shall be swing type. (2) For gas service, for size 2-inch and 

smaller, use 150 psi, non-shock, WOG, bronze straightway cock with flat or square head and threaded 

ends; while for size 2.5-inch and above, use 125 psi, non-shock, WOG, iron body bronze mounted, 

straightway cock with lubricated plug, square head and flanged ends. (3) For other systems, refer to 

following valve figure numbers of Nibco-Scott for the purpose of choosing quality, type and character of 

valves required. (4) Refer to following valve figure numbers of Nibco-Scott for the purpose of choosing 

quality, type and character of valves required. 

Valve type Size 2" and smaller Size 2.5" and larger 

(Screw and copper) (Flanged) 

1. Gate Scott #113 Scott # F-619+ 

2. Globe Scott #235 Scott # F-718+ 

3. Angle Scott #335 Scott # F-818+ 

4. Check Scott #413 Scott # F-918 

VALVES 15110 - 3



5. Ball Scott #S-595-Y* 

* For size up to 2.5-inch. For size 3-inch and above, use screw and copper, Crane # IRE 941. 

+ Provide manual chain operators for valves of size 2.5-inch and above, installed above 6 feet. 

L. Manufacturers: The manufacturer for gate, globe, angle, ball and butterfly type valves shall be Crane, 

ITT-Grinnell, Nibco-Scott or Stockham. 

2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. Strainers: The strainer for pipe size 2 inch and less shall have screwed screen retainer with centered 

blow-down fitted with pipe plug. (1) For pipe size 2.5-inch and more, strainer shall have bolted screen 

retainer with off-center blow-down fitted with pipe plug. (2) Provide Y-type strainers upstream of new 

float and thermostatic steam traps and where indicated. (3) Provide basket-type strainers upstream of new 

fuel oil pumps and at the inlet of return condensate receiver. (4) Deliver strainers to the jobsite with two 

coats of paint. (5) Use stainless steel or brass screen for water system and stainless steel screen for 

steam and fuel oil system. (6) Provide one spare screen for each new strainer. Furnish spare strainer for 

each of oil filter, pump suction strainer and equipment supplied with strainer. 

1. Manufacturers: Strainers shall be of Armstrong Machine Works, Hoffman Specialty ITT (Fluid 

Handling Div.) or Watts Regulator Co. 

2. Y-type pipeline strainer: Full line size strainer with ends and materials matching piping system. 

For pipe size 2-inch and less, use strainer of 250# screwed, ASTM-A126, Class B for cast iron 

body and 150# screwed or soldered, ASTM-B62 for cast bronze body and cap; screwed screen retainer 

with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. For pipe size 2½ -inch and more, use strainer 

of 125# standard flanged, ASTM-A126, Class B for cast iron body and cover and 150# flanged, 

ASTM-B62 for cast bronze body and cover; bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted 

with pipe plug. 

3. Basket type strainer: Manufacturer's standard product. For pipe size 2-inch and less, use strainer of 

250# screwed, ASTM-A126, Class B for cast iron body and 250# screwed or soldered ASTM-B62 

for cast bronze body and cap; screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe 

plug. For pipe size 2½ inch and more, use strainer of 125# flanged ASTM-A126, Class B for cast 

iron body and cover and 150# flanged, ASTM-B62 for cast bronze body and cover; bolted screen 

retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 

4. Strainer-Screen perforations shall be of size as follows. 

5. Ratio of net free area thru screen to inside pipe area shall not be less than 3:1. Screen perforations 

shall be of size as follows: 

Pipe size Thickness Perforations for Strainer type 

Steam Liquids 

1/4"-2" Wire dia. 0.016" 20 Y-type Cast-iron 

mesh stainless steel 

2.5"-3" 28 Ga. SS 0.033" 0.050" Y-type Cast-iron 

4" 24 Ga. SS 0.033" 0.050" Y-type Cast-iron 

1.5"-2" 28 Ga. SS 0.033" 0.050" Basket-type Cast-iron 



1/4"-3" 26 Ga. Brass 0.027" 0.050" Y-type Cast-bronze 

2"-3" 26 Ga. Brass 0.027" 0.050" Y-type Cast-bronze 

2"-3" 26 Ga. Brass 0.062" 0.125" Basket-type Cast-bronze 

B. Safety Relief Valves: 125 psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; 

designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the 

VALVES 15110 - 4



ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working 

parts made of brass and rubber. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and Btu capacity. 

C. Isolating Fittings: Isolating fittings of Epco Sales Inc. or insulated unions of Central Plastic Co. between 

all sections of dissimilar piping materials or piping and equipment where one material is ferrous and 

other is non-ferrous. 

D. Diverting Fittings: wrought copper with solder ends; 125 psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum 

operating temperature. Indicate flow direction on fitting. The manufacturer can be Amtrol, Inc.; 

Armstrong Pumps, Inc.; Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.; or Taco, Inc. 

E. Escutcheons: Galvanized steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw at all pipe sleeves and pipe 

passing through walls to permit free expansion and contraction of piping. Inside diameter shall closely fit 

pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Outside diameter shall 

completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. Use chrome-plated, stamped steel, escutcheon, 

for classrooms and other finished areas. Provide pipe escutcheons of Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. or 

Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. or Grinnell. 

F. Unions: Malleable-iron, Class 150 for low pressure service and class 250 for high pressure service; 

hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded 

ends. For pipe size 2-inch and less, unions shall be of screwed pattern, bronze seat. For pipe size 2.5-inch 

and more, they shall be of flanged pattern with gaskets and fasteners. Materials and pressure rating shall 

be same as that for piping and fittings. Unions for steel piping shall be 150# malleable iron for screwed 

connections. Unions for copper tubing, shall be 250 psi, all brass, ground joint for soldered or screwed 

connections. Flanged unions of copper tubing shall have soldered connections. 

G. Flanges: For pipe size 2.5" and more, 125 psi, raised face, weld neck or slip-on type flanges shall be 

used. Material shall be same as that for piping and fittings. 

1. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast-iron flanges and raisedface 

for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in which installed 

and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or B16.21). Provide materials 

that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid being 

carried. The manufacturer can be Crane, Durabla, Klingerit, or Garlock. 

H. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven flexible bronze wire reinforcing protective 

jacket; minimum 150 psig working pressure, maximum 250 deg F operating temperature. Connectors 

shall have flanged or threaded end connections to match equipment connected; and shall be capable of 

3/4 inch misalignment. The flexible connectors shall be of Metraflex Co or approved equal. For 

combination of flexible connector with a reducer, patented flexiducer of Minnesota Flexible (Ph. 800- 

351-9069) may be used. 

I. Dielectric Unions: Dielectric unions shall be of type as recommended by the manufacturer to be used 

with appropriate end connections for the pipe materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or 

flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. The 

dielectric unions shall be of Eclipse, Inc. or Perfection Corp. or Watts Regulator Co. 

J. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: Dielectric waterway fittings of electroplated steel or brass nipple shall 

have an inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining. They shall be of Victaulic Company of America. 

K. Pipe Guides: Guides shall be used wherever necessary to maintain pipes in position. They shall be of 

Metraflex Co or approved equal. 

L. Sleeves and Sleeve-seals: Provide pipe sleeves, for all pipes passing through building construction. For 

water-tight seals, provide anchor flange to pipe sleeve. Sleeves shall be flush with vertical finished 

VALVES 15110 - 5



surface. 

1. Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For large diameter pipes, 10 gage, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed 

with welded longitudinal joint. Set the anchor flange of diameter 6-inch larger than sleeve, in wall. 

2. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53, Grade A. 

3. Pipe: For exterior or partition walls above grade, use, UL listed seals for fire and smoke rated 

walls, between sleeve and pipe. For foundation and/or exterior walls below grade, provide seals 

for pipe sleeves. They shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber 

links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts 

and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight 

seal and electrical insulation, as manufactured by Thunderline Corp. 


A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding 

materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded. 

B. Soldering Materials: Use 95-5 Tin-Antimony solder or lead-free solder for copper piping. 

C. Brazing Materials: Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for 

brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined. Brazing filler metal shall be 

AWS A5.8, Classification BAg1 (silver). 

D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast bronze flanges and raised-face 

for steel flanges. Thickness, material, and type suitable for design temperatures and pressures. Select 

materials to suit the service of the piping system in which installed and which conform to ANSI Standard 

B16.20. Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions 

of the fluid being carried. 



A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions 

affecting performance. 

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special 

packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. 

C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible 

by such operations. 

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. 

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, 

length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for 

service, and that it is free from defects and damage. 

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 


A. Valve selection: Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 

VALVES 15110 - 6



1. Copper Tube Size, 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot 

water and low-pressure steam service. 

2. Steel Pipes Sizes, 2-Inch and Smaller: threaded or grooved end. 

3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2.5-Inch and Larger: grooved end or flanged. 

B. General arrangement: 

1. Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off duty; and globe for throttling duty. Install valves in 

horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. Install valves in a position to allow 

full stem movement. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type 

valves. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. 

2. For water service, use ball valves equal to Apollo Bronze Ball Valve Series 70-100 in all domestic 

cold water piping 2-inches and smaller. Above 2-inches, butterfly valves shall be used, except 

where globe valves are required for throttling, or where otherwise indicated. 

3. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment removal 

without system shut down. Unions are not required on flanged devices. 

4. Install swing check valves in horizontal position with hinge pin level for proper direction of flow. 

Install wafer check valves in horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 

5. For solder connections, cut tube square and to exact lengths. Clean end of tube of depth of valve 

socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in 

same manner. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of 

tube. Open gate and globe valves to full open position. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing 

check valves having composition discs. Insert tube into valve socket making sure the end rests 

against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the 

flux. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed 

solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating the valve. 

Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush. 

6. For threaded connections, note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve 

internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve. Align threads at 

point of assembly. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except 

where dry seal threading is specified). Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on 


7. For flanged connections, align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening 

to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable 

lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench. For deadend 

service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff and 

retention. 

8. After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, 

inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak 

persists. 

9. Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive 

finish painting or insulation. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES 

A. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. Remake leaking joints using new 

materials. 

B. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing or regulating valve, solenoid 

valve, and elsewhere as indicated. Install on each strainer cap, a full size blow-off pipe and a plugged 

gate valve (strainers 2 inch and larger). 

C. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each piece of 


D. Install flanges in piping 2.5-inch and larger, where indicated, adjacent to each valve, and at the final 

VALVES 15110 - 7



connection to each piece of equipment. 

E. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps and other vibration producing 

equipment. 

F. Install air vents at the highest points in piping, as well as at the upper end of vertical piping connecting to 

expansion tanks, and above existing air separator unit, as indicated. 

G. Install dielectric unions to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in dry piping systems. 

H. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems. 

I. Install thermometers and pressure gauges, as specified, and as required by the equipment supplier. 

J. Install backflow preventer(s) as per requirement of water utility. 

K. Install pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls. Do not install them through structural members. 

Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size them such that the piping and insulation (if any) 

will have free movement, but not less than twice the pipe size. For fire rated, exterior and partition 

walls, use foam sealant Dow 3-6548 silicon RTV or UL-listed, fire and smoke rated sealant or equal. For 

mechanical link type rubber seals, refer to manufacturer's instructions. 

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Welded or brazed joints: Comply with the requirements in ASME Code B31.9 for welded joints and with 

the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual for brazed joints. Fill the pipe and fittings during 

brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale. Heat joints to proper 

and uniform brazing temperature. 

1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when 

heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation. 

2. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of piping 

specialties before brazing. 

B. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, 

fittings, and valves as follows: 

1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, 

to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 

2. Align threads at point of assembly. 

3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal 

threading is specified). 

4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on 


5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens 

during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used. 

C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make 

initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt 

threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. 

D. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints in accordance with fitting manufacturers written instructions. 


A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the 

following: 

VALVES 15110 - 8



1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly or plug valves. 

2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves. 

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with 

higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted. 

C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 

1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 

2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast iron. 

3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 

4. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 300, ferrous alloy. 

5. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 200-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with 

EPDM liner. 

6. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 200, horizontal or vertical, bronze. 

7. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 200, bronze. 

8. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray iron. 

9. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 200. 

10. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 250, cast 

iron. 

11. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze. 

12. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125 OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron. 

13. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 

14. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze-mounted cast iron. 

15. Plug Valves, NPS 2 and Larger: Class 250, nonlubricated-type, cast iron. 

16. Resilient-Seated, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating, cast iron. 

D. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections: 

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide valves with 

threaded ends for steam and steam condensate services. 

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends. 

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends. 



arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, 

and equipment removal without system shutdown. 

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. 

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. 

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 



VALVES 15110 - 9



construction. 

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to 

coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; 

and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.8 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before 

final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 


VALVES 15110 - 10



SECTION 15194 – FUEL GAS PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes fuel gas piping, specialties, and accessories within the building. 


A. Gas System Pressures: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 20 psig but not more 

than 50 psig, and low pressure of 0.5 psig but not more than 2.0 psig. 


A. Product Data: 

1. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing systems. Include associated components. 

2. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of 

selected models. 

3. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating, capacity, and settings of selected models. 

B. Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other Work. Show 

different pressure zones and indicate pressure for each zone. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 

C. Field quality-control test reports. 

D. Operation and maintenance data. 

E. Submit welders' qualification certificates, certifying that welders comply meet the quality 

requirements and submit test reports per codes of ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Installation and replacement of gas piping, gas utilization equipment or 

accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer. 

The term qualified is defined as experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a 

minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with precautions 

required, and has complied with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon 

request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Project Manager. 


Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for 

intended use. 

C. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code." 

D. FMG Standard: Provide components listed in FMG's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if 

specified to be FMG approved. 

E. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A Certified 

Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed. 

F. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if specified 

to be UL listed. 





A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless 

permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility 

services according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner not less than two weeks in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission. 

B. Coordinate in advance (beginning of project) with PGW provide all loads, forms, letters, 

drawings, as required by PGW to obtain upgrades or new gas service. 

C. The Contractor shall verify the requirements for the gas service with the Gas Utility Company 

before starting work. 

D. Contractor shall size and install gas vents in accordance with all PGW, L&I, UL and FM 

uirements. 

E. Contractor shall disconnect and connect gas piping as required during the installation of gas 

meters done by PGW. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements 

apply for product selection: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the 

manufacturers specified. 

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS 

A. All high pressure/medium pressure gas piping shall be welded (pressure classes per PGW).Steel 

Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black. 

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded 

ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 

2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and 

threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 

3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 

4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel. 

5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to 

ASME B1.20.1. 

6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 

7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 

8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas. 

B. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and 

Methods" for joining materials not in this Section. 

2.3 PROTECTIVE COATING 

A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in 

corrosive atmosphere. 




2.4 SPECIALTIES 

A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy. 

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector. 

2.5 VALVES 

A. Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads. 

B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and 

according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. 

C. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed. 

D. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, 

ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel disc 

and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig (13.8-kPa) minimum pressure rating. 

E. Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-psig 

pressure rating. 

F. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated plug 

valves, with 125-psig pressure rating. 

G. General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: MSS SP-70, ASME B16.38, cast-iron body gate 

valves, OS&Y type with solid wedge, suitable for fuel gas service, with "WOG" indicated on 

valve body, and 125-psig pressure rating. 

H. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21, with electrical/mechanical operator for actuation by 

appliance automatic shutoff device. 



b. ASCOLECTRIC, Ltd. 

c. Automatic Switch Co. 

I. Electrically Operated Gas Valves: UL 429, bronze, aluminum, or cast-iron body solenoid valve; 

120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil. Include NEMA ISC 6, Type 4, coil 

enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position shall normally be closed. 



b. Automatic Switch Co. 

c. Eclipse Combustion Inc. 

d. Size and install gas vents in accordance with all PGW, L&I, and IRI requirements. 

2.6 GAS DETECTION SYSTEM 

A. Provide a gas detection and alarm system, a micro-processor based, multi-channel, Gas Sentinel 

Area monitor of Bacharach, Inc. or approved equal, complete with all components necessary for 

continuous monitoring of combustibles. The system shall have a wall mounted control unit and 

three remote, explosion-proof, detector heads, each located near boilers and in meter room, at 

locations as recommended by the manufacturer. The control unit shall be suitable for Class I, Div. 

2 installation without purge and shall contain visual indication, detector circuitry failure, warning 

and alarm signals. Provide all power supply and control wiring. On detection of presence of gas in 

any one area, the system shall close the burner gas-valves and boilers and provide remote sound 





alarm in Custodian's room. Power supply to the unit shall be 120 V/single phase/60 Hz. 

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 2 value wrenches for each type of gas value installed, requiring 

same. 

2.8 GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS 

A. Pressure Regulators: Single stage and suitable for fuel gas service. Include steel jacket and 

corrosion-resistant components, elevation compensator, and atmospheric vent. 


a. Line Pressure Regulators: 

(1.) Maxitrol Co. 

(2.) National Meter. 

(3.) Schlumberger Industries; Gas Div. 

2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads. 

3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and 

according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. 

4. Service Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80. Include 100-psig- minimum inlet pressure 

rating. 

5. Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80 with 2-psig-] [5-psig-) minimum] [10-psig] 

inlet 

pressure rating. 

6. Appliance Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18. Regulator may include vent limiting device, 



instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 

7. Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed, corrosion-resistant screen in opening if 

not connected to vent piping. 

A. Use flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings in applications below, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: NPS 3/4 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded 

joints. 

2. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints. 

3. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system and threaded joints. 

4. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: 

Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 


Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints. 


Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system and threaded joints. 

7. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 4: 

Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 

8. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 4: 

Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 

9. Larger Than NPS 4: 

Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 


A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop. 

B. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: 

Gas stop or gas valve. 

C. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve. 

D. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve. 




E. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve. 

F. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve. 


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping 

installation requirements and piping joint construction. 

B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit 

constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside 

and terminate with screened vent cap. 

1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to 

approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as plenums. 

Do not locate valves above ceilings. 

2. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from 

physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls. 

3. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective 

Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of 


4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or 

trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator 

shafts. 

C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets 

of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install 

where condensate would be subject to freezing. 

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. 

Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same 

size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of 

plug or cap. 

D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or 

floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view. 

E. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers. 

F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side 

down. 

G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. 

H. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece 

of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices. 

I. Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained and cannot move. 

J. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated 

valve. 

K. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line pressure regulator. 

L. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections. 




M. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to 

atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant 

insect screens in large end. 

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. 

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod 

sizes: 

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 

2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 

4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 

5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 

C. Install hangers for horizontal corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum 

spacing and minimum rod sizes: 

1. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 

2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 

3. Option: Support tubing from structure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 


A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a metal tag 

attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied. 

B. Install a gas cock upstream of each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas pressure regulators are 

installed in series in a single gas line, a manual valve is not required at the second regulator. 

C. Install pressure relief or pressure limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if 

the valve is free; so they can be tested to determine the pressure at which they will operate; and 

examined for leakage when in the closed position. 

3.6 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING 

A. Install above ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from equipment shutoff valves 

electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode in accordance with NFPA 70 - 

"National Electrical Code." Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode. 

B. Conform to NFPA 70 - "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring and 

electrically operated control devices. 


A. Install above ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from equipment shutoff valves 

electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode in accordance with NFPA 70 - 

"National Electrical Code." Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode. 

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. Connect piping to 

appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 

inches (1800 mm) of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve. 


A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part 4 "Inspection, Testing, and 





Purging," and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Repair leaks and defects with new 

materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. 




SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment inside 

building. 


A. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to fixtures and equipment 

throughout the building. 




1. Water Distribution Piping: 860 kPa. 


A. Water Samples, Test Results, and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" and "Cleaning" articles. 

B. Product specification and data sheets. 




C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections 1 through 9 for 

potable-water piping and components. 





B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type L, water tube, drawn temper. 







B. Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast-copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought 

copper. 

C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required 

to match piping. 

D. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket joint, 

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends. Include 

threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1 on threaded ends. 





materials. 


D. Brazing Filler Metal: AWS A5.8, BCuP, copper phosphorus or BAg, silver classification. 

2.4 VALVES 

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves. 

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for special-duty valves. 





B. Aboveground, Water Distribution Piping: Use the following: 

1. DN40 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 

2. DN50: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 

3. DN65 to DN90: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 


A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following 

requirements apply: 

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves. 

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball valves. 






3.4 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Install piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain. 



construction. 


A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving plumbing 

fixtures or equipment, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 and smaller. Use 

gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 and larger. 

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each supply to plumbing 

fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 and smaller. 

Use gate or butterfly valves for piping DN65 and larger. 

C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal 

piping, and where required to drain water piping. 

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 

2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated. 



following: 



less. 

3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than 30 m. 





1. DN20 and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 10-mm minimum rod diameter; 














A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows: 











B. Test water distribution piping as follows: 




2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping until it has 

been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been 

tested and approved. 

3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure equal to pressure of 1.5 times operating pressure, 

up to a maximum of 1035 kpa. without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. 

Isolate test source and allow to stand for 2 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects 

that must be repaired. 

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory 



3.9 CLEANING 

A. Clean water distribution piping as follows: 

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired 

before using. 

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method 

is not prescribed, procedure as described below: 

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. 

b. Submit water samples to authorities having jurisdiction for biological examination. Repeat 

cleaning procedure if contamination exists. 

B. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 

3.10 COMMISSIONING 

A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of 

water. 

B. Perform the following steps before putting into operation: 

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 

4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during 

installation. 




C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water 

heaters before filling with water. 

D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 





SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, inside building and to locations indicated. 


A. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and vapors from fixtures and 

equipment throughout the building. 




1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 30 kPa. 


A. Test Results and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. 








B. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 

C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type L, water tube, drawn temper. 

D. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 







B. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301. 

C. Copper, Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23 cast copper or ASME B16.29 wrought copper. 





materials. 


D. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant 

fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve or gasket with integral, center pipe stop. Include the following: 

1. Heavy-Duty, FM-Approved, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel 

housing; and stainless-steel clamps. Include gasket or bushing. 

a. Clamp Width: 100 mm wide with 2 clamps, for piping DN125 to DN250. 





B. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following: 





joints. 

3. DN50 to DN100: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; and one of the 




joints. (Not allowed for urinal waste piping) 

5. DN50 and DN100: Hard copper drainage tube; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed 

couplings. 

6. DN125 and DN150: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; and one of 

the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings: 










3.3 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, 

"Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 

B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and longsweep 

bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in 

direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 

fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and 

crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Use 

proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes of piping are connected. Reducing size 

of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. 

C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 

2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. 



construction. 

B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 

Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 

1. Compression Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 

2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp. 



following: 



less. 

3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than 30 m. 

4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer 

than 30 m. 

5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or longer. Support pipe rolls 

on trapeze. 

6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs. 














4. DN80 to DN125: Maximum horizontal spacing, 3 m with 13-mm minimum rod diameter; 






F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod diameters: 









5. DN200 through DN300: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with 22-mm minimum rod 




7. Spacing for horizontal pipe in 3-m lengths may be increased to 3 m. Spacing for fittings is limited 

to 1500 mm. 


A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows: 











B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of 

published procedure, as follows: 




2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping 

until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it 

has been tested and approved. 

3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on 

completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of 

overflow, but not less than 30 kPa. Water level must not drop from 15 minutes before inspection 

starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks. 

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with 

water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on 

roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to 

pressure of 250 Pa. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this 

pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period 

of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 




5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory 




A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to 

prevent damage from traffic and construction work. 

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 





SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related components. 

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters. 

2. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves used as supply stops. 


A. Accessible: Plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered, and 

used by physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people. 

B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this 

Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, drains and tailpieces, traps and waste pipes. Pipe 

fittings, tube fittings, and general-duty valves are included where indicated. 


A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 

Specification Sections. 

B. Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected fixture, trim, 

fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, 

dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates. 

C. Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and maintenance 

manuals specified in Division 1. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category from one 

source and by a single manufacturer. 

1. Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single 

manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for this category. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of Architectural and Transportation Barriers 

Compliance Board's (ATBCB) "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-187" 

regarding plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people. 

C. Energy Policy Act Requirements: Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy 

Act," regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures. 

D. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. 




E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of 

plumbing fixtures and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' fixtures 

with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 


A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering. 

B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location. 


A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that plumbing fixtures 

can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. 


2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS 

A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified. 

1. National Sanitation Foundation Construction: NSF 2. 

2. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 

3. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 

2.2 LAVATORY/SINK FAUCET STANDARDS 

A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for lavatory, sink, and similar-typefixture 

faucet fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 0.16-L/s-maximum flow rate; and polished, 

chrome-plated finish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture 

holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor. 


2. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 


2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FITTING STANDARDS 

A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements specified for fittings, other than faucets. 

Include polished, chrome-plated finish, except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate fittings with other 

components and connectors. 

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 

2. Automatic Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1028. 

3. Brass and Copper, Supplies and Tubular Brass: ASME A112.18.1M. 

4. Fixed Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1034. 

5. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENT STANDARDS 

A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified for components for plumbing 

fixtures, equipment, and appliances. 

1. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 



4. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 




5. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 

2.5 FITTINGS 

A. Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for 

materials for supplies, supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings. 

B. Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings include the following: 

1. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection. 

2. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression, loose-key type; same size as 

supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. 

3. Supply Risers: DN10 rigid brass tube with DN8 straight, knob-end tailpiece. Use chrome-plated 

tube for exposed applications. 

4. Traps: Cast brass with slip-joint inlet, cleanout pipe nipple to wall, wall flange, escutcheons, and 

size to match equipment. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications. 



A. Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply piping systems; soil, waste, and vent piping 

systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports match 

those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data when 

roughing-in data are not indicated. 

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. 

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 APPLICATIONS 

A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following: 

1. Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction. 

2. Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and electric water 

coolers. 

B. Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to the following: 

1. Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 

2. Sinks: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 

3. Sinks: Cover hot-water supply, stop and handle, drain, trap, and waste to wall. 

4. Other Fixtures: Cover exposed fittings below fixture. 

DO NOT SUPPLY INSULATION WHERE SOLID COVERS ARE INDICATED 

3.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION 

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to manufacturers' 


B. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing-in drawings, 

and referenced standards. 

C. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports 

are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated. 




D. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. 

E. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework. 

F. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture. 

G. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where specific stop 

valve is not specified. 

H. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations. 

I. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets are 

not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required. 

J. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect wastes, 

except where otherwise indicated. 

K. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within 

cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 

L. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, 1-part, mildew-resistant, 

silicone sealant according to sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Match 

sealant color to fixture color. 



arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 

1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment 

specified in other Division 15 Sections. 

B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of 

this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture. 

C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect equipment with 

supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to 

match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping. 


A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. 

B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. 

C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. 

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation. Replace 

malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and 

controls. 




B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot-water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning 

units and controls. 

C. Adjust water pressure at electric water coolers, faucets, and flushometer valves having controls, to 

produce proper flow and stream. 

D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. 

E. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and 

materials. Include the following: 

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. 


A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. 

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by Owner. 

3.8 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 

A. For plumbing fixtures schedule refer to drawing P-1. 



OTTO KRETCHMER ELDERLY NEWARK HOUSING AUTHORIT 


SECTION 15770 - AIR-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 



A. This Section specifies electrically operated unitary and applied air-source heat pumps. 

B. Definitions: 

1. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER): The ratio of net cooling capacity is Btu/h to total rate of electricity 

input in watts under designated operating conditions. 

2. Coefficient of Performance (COP) - Cooling: The ratio of the rate of heat removed to the rate of 

energy input in consistent units, for a complete refrigerating system or some specific portion of that 

system under designated operating conditions. 

3. Coefficient of Performance (COP) - Heating: The ratio of the rate of heat delivered to the rate of 

energy input is consistent units for a complete heat pump system, including the compressor and, if 

applicable, auxiliary heat under designated operating conditions. 

4. Unitary Heat Pump: One or more factory made assemblies that normally include an indoor 

conditioning coil, compressor(s) and an outdoor refrigerant-to-air coil or refrigerant-to-water heat 

exchanger. These units provide both heating and cooling functions. 

1.2 RELATED WORK 

A. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: For pre-test requirements. 

B. Section 23 23 00, REFRIGERANT PIPING: Requirements for field refrigerant piping. 

C. Section 23 05 93, TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC: Requirements for testing, 

adjusting and balancing of HVAC system. 

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 

A. Comply with ASHRAE Standard 15, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 


A. Submit in accordance with specification Section 1300 , Submittals 

B. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data. 

1. Unitary Split-System Heat pumps, Air-to-Air: 

C. Certification: Submit, simultaneously with shop drawings, a proof of certification that this product has 

been certified by ARI. 

D. Performance Rating: Submit catalog selection data showing equipment ratings and compliance with 

required cooling and heating capacities EER and COP values as applicable. 

1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: 


are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. 

B. Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.): 

AIR-SOURCE HEAT PUMPS 15770-1



A-A-50502-90 ...............................Air-conditioner (UNITARY HEAT PUMP), AIR TO AIR (3000 TO 

300,000 BTUH) 

C. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standards: 

ARI-DCPP .....................................Directory of Certified Product Performance - Applied Directory of 

Certified Products 

210/240-06 ....................................Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat 

Pump Equipment 

270-95 ............................................Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment 

310/380-04 ....................................Standard for Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps 

(CSA-C744-04) 

340/360-04 ....................................Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump 

Equipment 

D. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 

210-99 ............................................Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance 

Rating (ANSI) 

410-96 ............................................Recommended Safety Practices for Users and Installers of Industrial 

and Commercial Fans 

E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 

S12.51-02 ......................................Acoustics - Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Sources 

Using Sound Pressure - Precision Method for Reverberation Rooms 

(same as ISO 3741:1999) 

F. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers Inc (ASHRAE): 

15-07 ..............................................Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems (ANSI) 

62.1-07 ...........................................Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI) 

90.1-04 ...........................................Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings 

2004 Handbook .............................HVAC Systems and Equipment 

G. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

B117-03 .........................................Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus 

H. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 

MG 1-06 ........................................Motors and Generators (ANSI) 

ICS 1-00 (R2005) ..........................Industrial Controls and Systems: General Requirements 

I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

90A-02 ...........................................Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating 

Systems 

J. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): 

1995-05 ..........................................Heating and Cooling Equipment 


2.1 UNITARY HEAT PUMPS, AIR TO AIR 

A. Units shall comply with Fed Spec A-A-50502//Type I, having factory assembled refrigerant circuit or 

circuits (Packaged Unit), // Type II, (Split System) having remote outdoor section separate from indoor 

Section,// Class 1, "Department of Energy" (DOE) covered products (units with cooling capacity up to 

65000 Btu/hr// Class 2, Non–DOE covered products (units with cooling capacity up to 300,000 Btu/hr //. 




1. Unitary heat pumps shall bear the United States Environmental Protection Agency, Energy Star 

label and shall have a minimum Heating Season Performance Factor (HSPF) of 7 and a minimum 

Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) of 12. 

B. Applicable ARI Standards: Units shall be listed in the corresponding ARI Directory of Certified products 

shown in paragraph, APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: 

1. Air Source Unitary heat pumps with capacity less than 39.6 KW (135,000 Btu/hr), Comply with 

ARI 210/240. 

2. Air Source heat pump with capacity above 39.6 KW (above 135,000 Btu/hr, Comply with ARI 

340/360. 

C. Casing: Unit shall be constructed of zinc coated, //heavy-gage // 14-gage minimum // galvanized steel. 

Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel 

finish. Unit surfaces shall be tested 500 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. Cabinet 

panels shall have lifting handles and shall be water- and air-tight seal. All exposed vertical, top covers and 

base pan shall be insulated with // 13-mm (1/2–inch) // 25-mm (1-inch) // 50-mm (2-inch) // matt-faced, 

fire-resistant, odorless, glass fiber material. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with 

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007.The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane 

lifting. 

D. Filters: One inch, throwaway filter shall be standard on all units below 26.4 kW (7-1/2 Tons). Filter rack 

can be converted to two inch capability. Two inch filters shall be factory supplied on all units above 26.4 

kW (7-1/2 Tons). 

E. Compressors: Compressors shall be direct-drive, hermetic //reciprocating//scroll//type with centrifugal type 

oil pumps. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled. Internal overload shall be provided with the scroll 

compressors. Crankcase heaters shall be utilized with all compressors. 

F. Refrigerant Circuit: A minimum of two circuits is required. Each refrigerant circuit shall have independent 

fixed orifice or thermostatic expansion devices, service pressure ports, and refrigerant line filter driers 

factory installed as standard. An area shall be provided for replacement suction line driers. 

G. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Internally finned, DN 10 (NPS 3/8) copper tubes mechanically bonded 

to a configured aluminum plate fin shall be standard. The evaporated coil and condenser coil shall be leak 

tested at the factory to 1378 kPa (200 psig) and pressure tested to 2756 kPa (400 psig). All dual 

compressor units shall have intermingled evaporator coils. Sloped condensate drain pans are standard. 

H. Outdoor fans: Direct driven, statically and dynamically balanced, draw-through in the vertical discharge 

position. The fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and shall have built-in thermal overload 

protection. 

I. Indoor Fan: Belt-driven, forward-curved centrifugal with adjustable motor sheaves //adjustable idler-arm 

assembly for quick-adjustment of fan belts and motor sheaves//. Motors shall be thermally protected. 

Oversize motors shall be available for high static application. Motors shall meet the U.S. Energy Policy 

Act of 2005 (EPACT). 

J. Defrost Controls: A time initiated, temperature terminated defrost system shall ship with a setting of 70minute 

cycle, with a choice of 50- or 90-minute cycle. Timed override limits defrost cycle to 10 minutes 

shall be available on units from 35- to 70-kW (10 to 20 tons). Adaptive demand defrost shall be provided 

on units below 26.4 kW (7-1/2 Tons). 

K. Controls: Factory wired with controls and contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. 

Micro-processor controls shall be provided for all 24-volt control functions. The resident control 

algorithms shall make heating, cooling, and ventilating decisions in response to electronic signals from 




sensors measuring indoor and outdoor temperatures. Controls shall include an anti-short-cycle timing and 

time delay between compressors. 

1. Economizer: // Down flow // Horizontal flow//;// field // factory // installed; and shall include fully 

modulating 0-100 percent motor and dampers, barometric relief, minimum position setting and 

fixed dry bulb.// Solid state enthalpy and differential enthalpy control shall be field-installed //. 

2. Oversized Motors: // Factory // Field // installed over sized motor shall be available for high-static 

application. 



A. Install heat pumps according to manufacturers printed instructions. 

B. Install electrical and control devices furnished by the manufacturer but not specified to be factory 

mounted. All electrical work shall comply with Division 26 Sections. 

C. Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 23 23 00, REFRIGERANT PIPING. 

3.2 STARTUP AND TESTING 

A. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 

B. Test controls and demonstrate its compliance with project requirements. Replace damaged or 

malfunctioning controls and equipment and retest the equipment to the satisfaction of the Resident 

Engineer. 

C. Furnish test reports to the Senior Resident Engineer in accordance with specification Section 01 00 00, 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 

3.3 INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Provide services of manufacturer’s technical representative for four hours to instruct VA personnel in 

operation and maintenance of heat pumps. 





SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Raceways. 

2. Building wire and connectors. 







A. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment. 

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections of equipment rooms and electrical equipment. 

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. 




use. 



A. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the 

Work. 

B. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished 

surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors." 

C. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of 

identification devices with completion of finished surface. 

D. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar 

finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation. 





2.1 RACEWAYS 

A. EMT: ANSI C80.3, zinc-coated steel, with set-screw or compression fittings. 

B. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. 

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6, zinc-coated steel, with threaded fittings. 

D. LFMC: Zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket. 

E. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used. 

2.2 CONDUCTORS 

A. Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. 

B. Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper. 

C. Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated at 75 deg C minimum. 

D. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable for service 

indicated. 


A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter 

slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs. 

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Comply with Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for slotted 

channel framing. 

1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. 

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports. 

D. Nonmetallic Channel and Angle Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels 

and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (203 mm) o.c., in at least 

one surface. 

1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and angles. 

2. Fittings and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be 

stainless steel. 

E. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with 

retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers. 

F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and 

insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size 

of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron 

casting with hot-dip galvanized finish. 

G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type. 




H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 

I. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel. 

2.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors 

prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. 

B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend 

and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. 

1. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with a clear, weather- 

and chemical-resistant coating. 

2. Color: Black letters on orange background. 

3. Legend: Indicates voltage. 

C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less 

than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick (25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick) . 

D. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers 

and letters. 

E. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. 

F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate 

punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. 

in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black 

letters on white background. 

G. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Preprinted, 

aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, 

and size appropriate to the application. 

H. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel 

machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 

2.5 TOUCHUP PAINT 

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. 

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. 


3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and 

install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. 

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems 

and components, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect 

for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. 




D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 


A. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations: 

1. Exposed: IMC. 

2. Concealed: IMC. 

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 

4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4. 

B. Use the following raceways for indoor installations: 

1. Exposed: EMT. 


3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations, use LFMC. 

4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION 

A. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. 

B. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater 

pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 

C. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering. 

D. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight 

legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and location. 

F. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line 

with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end 

of the pull wire. 

G. Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size (DN53) and smaller, in maximum lengths 

of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull 

or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements, in addition to requirements above. 

H. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a maximum of 

72-inch (1830-mm) flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground 

conductor across flexible connections. 

I. Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface. 

3.4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS 

A. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway . 

B. Brands circuits; Type THHN/THWN Insulated conductors in raceway 

C. Remote – Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in 

raceway for Classes 1,2, and 3, unless otherwise indicated. 




3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION 

A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better 


B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack conductor at each outlet. 

C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical 

connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If 

manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 

3.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION 

A. Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components. 

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. 

C. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

D. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; 

minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load. 

3.7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. 

B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, 

clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods 

and conduits. 

C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers. 

D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in 

the future. 

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps. 

F. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead 

of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle 

branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle 

supports. 

H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by 

raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. 

I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors. 

J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheetmetal 

boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to 

raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 

24 inches (610 mm) from the box. 




K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, 

pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to 

structural elements of adequate strength. 

L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are 

used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of 

all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry 

walls. 

M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. 

Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated: 

1. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 

2. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 

3. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock 

washers may be used in existing concrete. 

4. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel. 

a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 

5. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or 

other items. 

6. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. 

7. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-test 

load. 

3.8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES 

A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of 

equipment. 

B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with 

corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use 

consistent designations throughout Project. 

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. 

D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows: 

1. Bands: Pretensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive marking tape. 

Make each color band 2 inches (51 mm) wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent 

bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 

2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) 

maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (8-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. 

3. Colors: As follows: 

a. Fire Alarm System: Red. 

b. Security System: Blue and yellow. 

c. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. 

E. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each 

cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase 

identification. 

F. Color-code 208/120-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the 


1. Phase A: Black. 

2. Phase B: Red. 




3. Phase C: Blue. 

G. Color-code 480/277-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the 


1. Phase A: Yellow. 

2. Phase B: Brown. 

3. Phase C: Orange. 

H. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, 

Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of 

items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend 


3.9 FIRESTOPPING 

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve 

fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified 

in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 

3.10 DEMOLITION 

A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the 

course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and 

functionality. 

B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in 

their entirety. 

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 

inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match 

existing finish. 

D. Remove demolished material from Project site. 

E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation. 

3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit 

electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. 

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. 

Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and 

other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved. 


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following: 

1. Raceways. 









3.13 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING 

A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 

Section "Painting." 

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the 

degree of damage at each location. 

2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and 

application of successive coats. 



manufacturer. 


A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove 

burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. 

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets 

are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 





SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified 

in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. 



B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 

C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following: 



3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with 

requirements. 




jurisdiction. 


Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. 



use. 

1. Comply with UL 467. 





1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: 

a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 

b. Boggs, Inc. 

c. Chance/Hubbell. 

d. Copperweld Corp. 

e. Dossert Corp. 

f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. 




g. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. 

h. Galvan Industries, Inc. 

i. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. 

j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. 

k. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. 

l. Ideal Industries, Inc. 

m. ILSCO. 

n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. 

o. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. 

p. Lightning Master Corp. 

q. Lyncole XIT Grounding. 

r. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. 

s. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. 

t. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 

u. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co. 

v. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. 

w. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 

B. Material: Copper 

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. 

D. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with 

isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of 

three bands of green and two bands of yellow. 

E. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 

1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in 

diameter. 

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 

3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper 

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. 

F. Aluminum Bonding Conductors: 

2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS 

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of 

conductors and connected items. 

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors type. 

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written 

instructions. 



A. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. 




B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connection to structural steel. 

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. 

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, 

unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. 

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. 

C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in 

addition to those required by NEC: 

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 

2. Lighting circuits. 

3. Receptacle circuits. 

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 

6. Flexible raceway runs. 

D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected 

to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard 

grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived 

system or service, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, 

isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the 

purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate equipment grounding 

conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding 

terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or 

service, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical 

devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and 

to air duct. 


A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. 

Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or 

damage. 

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers 

and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Bond straps directly to the basic structure 

taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance. 


A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select 

connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be 

galvanically compatible. 

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact 

points closer to order of galvanic series. 

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 




3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical 

clamps. 

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future 

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding 

lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type 

connectors. 

C. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without 

mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. 

Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. 

Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare 

grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to 

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use 

those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 

E. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential 

pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. 

Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has 

been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. 


A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test 

to ensure the grounding continuity. 





SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for 

wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 



B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 

C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by 

Contractor. 




jurisdiction. 


Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to 

supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. 



use. 








specified. 

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 


1. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div. 

2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 




3. General Cable Corporation. 

4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 

5. Southwire Company. 

B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, 

and ratings. 

C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7; solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and 

smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger 

D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN XHHW complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7. 

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES 



2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 

3. Hubbell/Anderson. 

4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 

5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division. 

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class 

for application and service indicated. 


3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS 

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in 

raceway. 

C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in 

raceway. 

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single 

conductors in raceway. 

E. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway Power-limited, fire-protective, signaling circuit 

cable. 

F. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 

G. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway Power-limited cable, concealed in building 

finishes. 


A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not 

deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling 

tensions and sidewall pressure values. 




C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not 

damage cables or raceway. 

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow 

surface contours where possible. 

E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 

F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration 

Firestop Systems." 

G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical 

Materials and Methods Electrical Identification" 




B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better 


C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) 12 inches (300 mm) 

of slack. 


A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing: 

B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for 


2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, 

Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters. 

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 



3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve 






SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 


1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and 

identification products. 

2. Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work" for seismic restraints and bracing of 

raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 

3. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service 

fittings. 



B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. 


D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and 

cabinets. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings, boxes, 

enclosures, and cabinets. 

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and 

ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 






D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures, cabinets, 

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic 

Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following: 




1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of 

assembled components or on calculation. 

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts 

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully 

operational after the seismic event." 

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and 

describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their 

installation requirements. 




use. 



A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with 

other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC 

equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 







specified. 

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING 



2. Alflex Inc. 

3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 

4. Electri-Flex Co. 

5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 

6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 

7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 

8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 

9. Wheatland Tube Co. 

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 




C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5. 

D. IMC: ANSI C80.6. 

E. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. 

F. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. 

G. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 

1. Fittings: Compression type. 

H. FMC: Aluminum. 

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. 

J. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. 

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS 


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 

2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 

4. Hoffman. 

5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 

6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 

7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 

9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division. 

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 

13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary. 

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. 

D. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. 

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 

F. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. 

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 

H. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, 

finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch 

and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of 

different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 




2.4 FACTORY FINISHES 

A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to 

factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping. 



A. Outdoors: 

B. Indoors: 

1. Exposed: EMT . 


3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric 

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 

4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 

5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows: 

a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel nonmetallic. 

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 21) . 

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 

1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that 

material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. 


A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. 

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. 

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 

D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. 

E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of 

bends are not visible above the finished slab. 

F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs 

of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering 

type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow 

surface contours as much as possible. 




1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 

2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be 

installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. 

I. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. 

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. 

J. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. 

K. Terminations: 

1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and 

install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 

2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so 

end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so 

coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed. 

L. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 

200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. 

M. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size (DN 53) and Smaller: In addition to above 

requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90degree 

bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with 

these requirements. 

N. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed 

sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover 

plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the 

following points: 

1. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. 

O. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. 

Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend 

conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. 

Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections. 

P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and 

semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and 

for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible 

connections. 

Q. Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 

R. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner. 


A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without 

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 



manufacturer. 




3.4 CLEANING 

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes 

and repair damaged finishes. 





SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters. 

2. Single- -pole switches. 

3. Device wall plates. 

4. Pin and sleeve connectors and receptacles. 


A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. 

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. 



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. 

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 

D. Field quality-control test reports. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer. 



use. 



A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 








1. Wiring Devices: 

a. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary. 

b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. 

c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 

d. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 

e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. 

2.2 RECEPTACLES 

A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-596G, and 

UL 498. 

B. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral 

NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design 

units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter. 

C. Hazardous (Classified) Location Receptacles: Comply with NEMA FB 11. 

2.3 CORD AND PLUG SETS 

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment 

being connected. 

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with greeninsulated 

grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. 

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for 

connection. 

2.4 SWITCHES 

A. Single - Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20. 

B. Snap Switches: General-Duty grade, quiet type. 

2.5 WALL PLATES 

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 

2. Material for Finished Spaces: satin-finished stainless steel 0.04-inch- (1-mm) thick. 

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel . 

2.6 FINISHES 

A. Color: 

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory or as selected by Architect unless 

otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. 

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red . 






A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines. 

B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to manufacturer's 


C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' written 

instructions. 

D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and 

with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall 

plates. 

E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting. 

F. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 

3.2 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Electrical Identification." 

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or 

engraved machine printing with white -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers 

or tags inside outlet boxes. 


A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 

B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening 



A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 

1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper 

polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements. 

2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's 


B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 





SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 

2. Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces. 

3. Emergency lighting units. 

4. Exit signs. 

5. Accessories, including fluorescent fixture dimmers, occupancy sensors, and Lighting fixture 

retrofitting. 

B. See Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. 

C. See Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time 

switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include 

data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 

1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated parameters. 

2. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. 

3. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts. 

4. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Furnish data required in "Submittals" 

Article in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 

5. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound 

transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section 

"Diffusers, Registers and Grilles." 

6. Lamps. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods 

of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. 

C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following 

items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 

1. Suspended ceiling components. 

2. Structural members to which lighting-fixture suspension systems will be attached. 

3. Other items in finished ceiling, including the following: 

a. Air outlets and inlets. 

b. Speakers. 

c. Sprinklers. 

d. Access panels. 

4. Perimeter moldings. 

E. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by 

product manufacturer. 





G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, 

and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 include the following: 

1. Catalog data for each fixture. Include the diffuser, ballast, and lamps installed in that fixture. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, 

by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 




A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as indicated on contract 

drawings or approved equal. 

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Refer to the Light fixture schedule provided as part of the contract documents. 

B. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. 

C. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A. 

D. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and 

NEMA LE 5A as applicable. 

E. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. 

F. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 

G. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and 

sagging. 

H. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating 

conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, 

lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in 

operating position. 

I. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. 

J. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other 

changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different thickness is 

indicated. 

b. UV stabilized. 

c. Pattern 12 lenses where a diffused light source is desired. 

d. Pattern 15 lenses to minimize imaging on video monitors. 




2.3 BALLASTS 

A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; rapid start type, unless 

otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full 

light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. 






6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 


B. Ballasts for Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: 

Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types. 

C. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type. 





D. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type. 

1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the 

associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. 

a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. 

b. Low-Level Operation: 50 percent of rated lamp lumens or as indicated. 

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type 

indicated. 

E. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI 

C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output 

unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 


2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 






8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 


10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic 

and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 

11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum. 

F. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type. 





G. Internal-Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory 

mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 




1. Emergency Connection: Operate fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each 

or as specified on drawings. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit 

to fixture ballast. 

2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 

3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering 

ceiling space. 

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and 


b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright 

glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 

5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. 

2.4 EXIT SIGNS 

A. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, 

comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 

2. Letters shall be green, not less than 6 inches high, strokes not less than 0.75 inches wide. Luminance 

contrast shall be greater than 0.8. 

2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS 

A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 

2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 

3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent 

of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches 

deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and 

battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and 


5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow 

indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 

2.6 LAMPS 

A. Low-Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; 

shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. 

B. T8 Rapid-Start low-mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Rated 32 W maximum, nominal length 48 inches (1220 


life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. T8 Rapid-Start low-mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 


life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500K average rated life of 10,000 

hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated. 











E. High-Pressure-Sodium Lamps: NEMA C78.42, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 21 

(minimum), color temperature 1900K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours. 

F. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 65 (minimum), 

and color temperature 4000K. 

G. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000K. 

H. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000K. 

2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS 

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for channel- and angle-iron 

supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. 

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish 

same as fixture. 

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single 

fixture. Finish same as fixture. 

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, 12 gage (2.68 mm). 

E. Wires For Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 

gage (2.68 mm). 

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. 

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded 

attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. 

H. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended by fixture 

manufacturer. 

2.8 FINISHES 

A. Fixtures: Manufacturers' standard, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 

2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant. 

2.9 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE RETROFIT MATERIALS 

A. Comply with UL 1570 or 1598 listing requirements. 

1. Reflector Kit: UL 1570 or 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or recessed 

lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces. No electrical parts are to be changed. 

2. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1570 or 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, 

lamps, and sockets as scheduled. 



A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. 




B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support. 

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 

6 inches (150 mm) from fixture corners. 

2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips 

that are UL listed for the application. 

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in 

acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal 

channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. 

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire 

or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3. 

C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows: 

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for 

each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 

4. Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable. 

D. Air-Handling Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment. 

E. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. 





A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. 

B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. 

C. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify normal 

transfer to battery power source and retransfer to normal. 

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting 

results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. 

E. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of corrosion.

PART 3 SECTION 5 ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF ADDENDUM(S)

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?